Siemens Power Engineering Guide

Power Engineering GuideTransmission and Distribution

4th Edition

Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission and Distribution · 4th Edition

Your local representative:

Distributed by:Siemens AktiengesellschaftPower Transmission and Distribution GroupInternational Business Development,Dept. EV IBD

P.O. Box 3220D-91050 ErlangenPhone: ++49-9131-73 45 40Fax: ++49-9131-73 45 42

Power Transmission and Distributiongroup online:http://www.ev.siemens.de

Power Engineering GuideTransmission and Distribution

Sales locations worldwide (EV):http://www.ev.siemens.de/en/pages/salesloc.htm


Siemens Power Transmission andDistribution Group offers intelligent so-lutions for the transmission and distri-bution of power from generating plantsto customers. The Group is a productsupplier, systems integrator and serviceprovider, and specializesin the following systems and services: High-voltage systems Medium-voltage systems Metering Secondary systems Power systems control and

energy management Power transformers Distribution transformers System planning Decentralized power supply systems.Siemens’ service includes the settingup of complete turnkey installations,offers advice, planning, operation andtraining and provides expertise andcommitment as the complexity of thistask requires.Backed by the experience of worldwideprojects, Siemens can always offer itscustomers the optimum cost-effectiveconcept individually tailored to theirneeds.We are there – wherever and when-ever you need us – to help you buildplants better, cheaper and faster.

Dr. Hans-Jürgen SchloßVice President

Siemens AktiengesellschaftPower Transmission and Distribution

Siemens AG is one of the world’sleading international electrical andelectronics companies.With 416 000 employees in more than190 countries worldwide, the companyis divided into various Groups.One of them is Power Transmission andDistribution.

The Power Transmission andDistribution Group of Siemens with24 700 employees around the worldplans, develops, designs, manufacturesand markets products, systems andcomplete turn-key electrical infrastruc-ture installations.The group owns a growing numberof engineering and manufacturingfacilities in more than 100 countriesthroughout the world. All plants are,or are in the process of being certifiedto ISO 9000/9001 practices. This is ofsignificant benefit for our customers.Our local manufacturing capabilitymakes us strong in global sourcing,since we manufacture products to IECas well as ANSI/NEMA standards inplants at various locations around theworld.Siemens Power Transmission andDistribution Group (EV) is capable ofproviding everything you would expectfrom an electrical engineering companywith a global reach.The Power Transmission and Distribu-tion Group is prepared and competent,to perform all tasks and activities in-volving transmission and distributionof electrical energy.

This Power Engineering Guide is de-vised as an aid to electrical engineerswho are engaged in the planning andspecifying of electrical power genera-tion, transmission, distribution, control,and utilization systems. Care has beentaken to include the most importantapplication, performance, physical andshipping data of the equipment listed inthe guide which is needed to performpreliminary layout and engineeringtasks for industrial and utility-typeinstallations.The equipment listed in this guide isdesigned, rated, manufactured andtested in accordance with the Interna-tional Electrotechnical Commission(IEC) recommendations.However, a number of standardizedequipment items in this guide are de-signed to take other national standardsinto account besides the above codes,and can be rated and tested to ANSI/NEMA, BS, CSA, etc. On top of that, wemanufacture a comprehensive range oftransmission and distribution equipmentspecifically to ANSI/NEMA codes andregulations.Two thirds of our product range isless than five years old. For our cus-tomers this means energy efficiency,environmental compatibility, reliabilityand reduced life cycle cost.For details, please see the individualproduct listings or inquire.Whenever you need additional infor-mation to select suitable products fromthis guide, or when questions abouttheir application arise, simply call yourlocal Siemens office.

Sales locations worldwide:http://www.ev.siemens.de/en/pages/salesloc.htm

Foreword


Quality and Environmental Policy

Quality and Environmental –Our first priority

Transmission and distribution equipmentfrom Siemens means worldwide activitiesin engineering, design, development, man-ufacturing and service.The Power Transmission and DistributionGroup of Siemens AG, with all of its divi-sions and relevant locations, has beenawarded and maintains certification toDIN EN ISO 9001 and DIN EN ISO 14001.

Certified quality

Siemens Quality Management and Environ-mental Management System gives ourcustomers confidence in the quality ofSiemens products and services.Certified to be in compliance withDIN EN ISO 9001 and DIN EN ISO 1400,it is the registered proof of our reliabilty.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Contents

Power Transmission Systems

High Voltage

Medium Voltage

Low Voltage

Transformers

Protection and Substation Control

Power Systems Control and Energy Management

Metering

Services

System Planning

Conversion Factors and TablesContacts and Internet AddressesConditions of Sales and Delivery

General IntroductionEnergy Needs Intelligent Solutions


Energy management systems are also im-portant, to ensure safe and reliable opera-tion of the transmission network.

Distribution

In order to feed local medium-voltage dis-tribution systems of urban, industrial or ru-ral distribution areas, HV/MV main substa-tions are connected to the subtransmissionsystems. Main substations have to be lo-cated next to the MV load center for rea-sons of economy. Thus, the subtransmis-sion systems of voltage levels up to 145 kVhave to penetrate even further into thepopulated load centers.The far-reaching power distribution systemin the load center areas is tailored exclusive-ly to the needs of users with large numbersof appliances, lamps, motor drives, heating,chemical processes, etc. Most of theseare connected to the low-voltage level.The structure of the low-voltage distribu-tion system is determined by load and re-liability requirements of the consumers, aswell as by nature and dimensions of thearea to be served. Different consumer char-acteristics in public, industrial and commer-cial supply will need different LV networkconfigurations and adequate switchgearand transformer layout. Especially for indus-trial supply systems with their high numberof motors and high costs for supply inter-ruptions, LV switchgear design is of greatimportance for flexible and reliable opera-tion.Independent from individual supply charac-teristics in order to avoid uneconomicalhigh losses, however, the substations withthe MV/LV transformers should be locatedas close as possible to the LV load centers.The compact load center substations shouldbe installed right in the industrial produc-tion area near to the LV consumers.The superposed medium-voltage systemhas to be configured to the needs of thesesubstations and the available sources (mainsubstation, generation) and leads again todifferent solutions for urban or rural publicsupply, industry and large building centers.In addition distribution management sys-tems can be tailored to the needs, fromsmall to large systems and for specific re-quirements.

Fig. 2: Distribution: Principle configuration of distribution systems

Consumers

MV/LVtransformer

level

Low-voltage supply system

Large buildings withdistributed transformersvertical LV risers andinternal installation per floor

Industrial supply withdistributed transformerswith subdistribution boardand motor control center

Public supplywith pillars andhouse connectionsinternal installation

Local medium-voltage distribution system

Ring type

Connection oflarge consumer

Industrial supplyand large buildings

Public supply

Spot systemFeeder cable

Medium voltage substations

MV/LV substationlooped in MV cableby load-break switch-gear in differentcombinations forindividual substationdesign, transformersup to 1000 kVA

LV fuses

Circuit-breaker

Load-breakswitch

Consumer-connection substation loopedin or connected to feeder cable with circuit-breaker and load-break switches for connec-tion of spot system in different layout

Main substation with transformers up to 63 MVA

HV switchgear MV switchgear

General Introduction



Fig. 3: System Automation:Principle configuration of protection, control and communication systems

Power system switchgear

SCADA functions Distributionmanagementfunctions

Network analysis

Power andschedulingapplications

Graficalinformationsystems

Training simulator

System coordination level

Control room equipment

Bay protection– Overcurrent– Distance– Differential etc.

Bay switchinginterlocking

Control

Bay coordination levelOtherbays

BB and BF (busbarand breaker failure)protection

Substation control Data processing

Switchgearinterlocking

Data and signalinput/output

Automation

Otherbays

Substation coordination level

Power system substation

Power network telecommunication systemsOthersub-stations

Othersub-stations

Power line carriercommunication

Fiber-opticcommunication

Metering

Despite the individual layout of networks,common philosophy should be an utmostsimple and clear network design to obtain flexible system operation clear protection coordination short fault clearing time and efficient system automation.The wide range of power requirements forindividual consumers from a few kW tosome MW, together with the high numberof similar network elements, are the maincharacteristics of the distribution systemand the reason for the comparatively highspecific costs. Therefore, utmost standard-ization of equipment and use of mainte-nance-free components are of decisive im-portance for economical system layout.Siemens components and systems caterto these requirements based on worldwideexperience in transmission and distributionnetworks.

Protection, operation, controland metering

Safe, reliable and economical energy supplyis also a matter of fast, efficient and reliablesystem protection, data transmission andprocessing for system operation. The com-ponents required for protection and opera-tion benefit from the rapid development ofinformation and communication technology.Modern digital relays provide extensivepossibilities for selective relay setting andprotection coordination for fast fault clear-ing and minimized interruption times. Re-mote Terminal Units (RTUs) or SubstationAutomation Systems (SAS) provide the datafor the centralized monitoring and controlof the power plants and substations by theenergy management system.Siemens energy management systemsensure a high supply quality, minimize gen-eration and transmission costs and opti-mally manage the energy transactions.Modularity and open architecture offer theflexibility needed to cope with changed ornew requirements originating e.g. from de-regulation or changes in the supply areasize. The broad range of applications in-cludes generation control and scheduling,management of transmission and distribu-tion networks, as well as energy trading.Metering devices and systems are impor-tant tools for efficiency and economy tosurvive in the deregulated market. For ex-ample, Demand Side Management (DSM)allows an electricity supply utility from acontrol center to remotely control certainconsumers on the supply network for loadcontrol purposes. Energy meters are usedfor measuring the consumption of electricity,gas, heat and water for purposes of billingin the fields of households, commerce,industry and grid metering.


Overall solutions – System planning

Of crucial importance for the quality ofpower transmission and distribution is theintegration of diverse components to formoverall solutions.Especially in countries where the increasein power consumption is well above theaverage besides the installation of gener-ating capacity, construction and extensionof transmission and distribution systemsmust be developed simultaneously andtogether with equipment for protection,supervision, control and metering. Also, forthe existing systems, changing load struc-tures, changing requirements due to energymarket deregulation and liberalization and/or environmental regulations, together withthe need for replacement of aged equip-ment will require new installations.Integral power network solutions are farmore than just a combination of productsand components. Peculiarities in urban de-velopment, protection of the countrysideand of the environment, and the suitabilityfor expansion and harmonious integrationin existing networks are just a few of thefactors which future-oriented power sys-tem planning must take into account.

Outlook

The electrical energy supply (generation,transmission and distribution) is like a pyra-mid based on the number of componentsand their widespread use. This pyramidrests on a foundation formed by local expan-sion of the distribution networks and pow-er demand in the overall system, which isdetermined solely by the consumers andtheir use of light, power and heat. Thesebasic applications arise in many variationsand different intensities throughout the en-tire private, commercial and industrial sec-tor (Fig. 4).Reliability, safety and quality (i.e. voltageand frequency stability) of the energy sup-ply are therefore absolute essentials andmust be assured by the distribution net-works and transmission systems.

Consumers

Light Power Heat

Monitoring, Control, Automation

Applications

GenerationTransmissionDistribution

Fig. 4: Industrial applications



is a crucial factor in the economic and so-cial development of a particular country. Inthe industrialized countries the concept ofthe “decentralized power supply” is alsogaining ground, largely because of environ-mental concern. This has had its conse-quences for the generation of electricity:wind power is experiencing a renaissance,more development work is being carriedout into photovoltaic devices and combinedheat and power cogeneration plants aregrowing in popularity in many areas forboth ecological and economic reasons.These developments are resulting in someentirely new energy network structures.

Additional tasks...

The scope and purpose of tomorrow’s dis-tribution systems will no longer be to sim-ply “supply electricity”. In future they willbe required to “harvest” power and redis-tribute it more economically and take intoaccount, among other considerations, envi-ronmental needs. In the past it was no easytask to supply precisely the right amount ofelectricity according to demand because, asis well-known, electricity cannot be readilystored and the loads were continually chang-ing. Demand scheduling was very muchbased on statistical forecasting – not an ex-act science and one that cannot by its verynature take into account realtime variations.Demand scheduling problems can becomeparticularly acute when power stations oflimited generating capacity are on line.

Energy Needs Intelligent Solutions

The changing state of the world’s ener-gy markets and the need to conserve re-sources is promoting more intelligentsolutions to the distribution of man’ssilent servant, electricity. Change is gen-erally wrought by necessity, often drivenby a variety of factors, not least social,political, economic, environmental andtechnological considerations. Currentlythe world’s energy supply industries –principally gas and electricity – are inthe process of undergoing radical andcrucial change that is driven by a mix-ture of all these considerations. The col-lective name given to the factors affect-ing the electricity supply industryworldwide is deregulation.

This is the changing operating scenario theelectricity supply industry as a whole facesas it moves inexorably into the 21st century.How can it rise to the challenge of liberal-ized markets and the opportunities presentedby deregulation? One of the answers is thebetter use of information technology and“intelligent” control to affect the necessarychanges born of deregulation. However, toachieve this utilities need to be very sureof the technical and commercial compe-tence of their systems suppliers. Failurecould prove to be very costly not just in fi-nancial terms, but also for a utility’s reputa-tion with its consumers in what is becom-ing increasingly a buyer’s market. Formingand maintaining close partnerships withlong-established systems suppliers such asSiemens is the best way of ensuring suc-cess with deregulation into the millennium.Siemens can look back on over 100 yearsof working in close co-operation with powerutilities throughout the world. This accumu-lated experience allows the company’sPower Transmission and Distribution Groupto address not just technical issues, butalso better appreciate many of the opera-tional and commercial aspects of electricitydistribution. Experience gained over the pastdecade with the many-and-varied aspects ofderegulation puts the Group in an almostunique position to advise utilities as to thebest solutions for taking full advantage ofthe opportunities offered by deregulation.

Innovation the issue of change

Although today’s technology obviouslyplays a very important role in the company’scurrent business, innovation has alwaysbeen at the vanguard of its activities;indeed it is the common thread that hasrun through the company since its incep-tion 150 years ago. In future power dis-tribution technology, computer software,power electronics and superconductivitywill play increasingly prominent roles in in-novative solutions. Scope for new technol-

ogies is to be found in decentralized energysupply concepts and in meeting the needsof urban conurbations. Siemens is no longerjust a manufacturer of systems and equip-ment, it is now much more. Overall con-cepts are becoming ever more important.

All change!

Power distribution technology has notchanged significantly over the past fortyyears… indeed, the “rules of the game”have remained the same for a much longerperiod of time.

A new challenge

Recently decentralized power supply sys-tems have cornered a growing share of themarket for a number of reasons. In devel-oping and industrializing countries, it hasbecome clear that the energy policies andsystems solutions adopted by nations withwell-established energy infrastructures arenot always appropriate. Frequently it ismore prudent to start with small decentral-ized power networks and to expand later ina progressive way as demand and eco-nomics permit. Much benefit can also begained if generation makes use of naturalor indigenous resources such as the sun,water, wind or biomass. Countries thatstruggle with population growth and migra-tion to the towns and cities clearly need topay close attention to protecting their bal-ance of payments. In such cases, the expan-sion of power supplies into the countryside

Fig. 5: Superconducting current limiter: lightning fast response


Nowadays these and similar problems arenot insoluble because of decentralizedpower supplies and the use of “intelligent”control. The Power Transmission and Dis-tribution Group has developed concepts forthe economic resolution of peak energy de-mand. One is to use energy stores. Batteriesare an obvious choice, for these can beequipped with power electronics to en-hance energy quality as well as storingelectricity.

Intelligent energy management…

One of the options for matching the amountof electricity available to the amount beingdemanded is, even today, the rarely usedtechnique of load control. Energy savingcan mean much more than just consumingas few kilowatt-hours as possible. It canalso mean achieving the flexibility of demandthat can make a valuable contribution to acountry’s economy. Naturally, in places suchas hospitals, textile factories and electronicchip fabrication plants it is extremely impor-tant for the power supply not to fail – noteven for a second. In other areas of elec-tricity consumption, however, there is muchmore room for manoeuvre. Controlled in-terruptions of a few minutes, and even afew hours, can often be tolerated withoutcausing very much difficulty to those in-volved. There are other applications wherethe time constant or resilience is high, e.g.cold stores and air-conditioning plants, whereenergy can be stored for periods of up toseveral hours. Through the application of“intelligent” control and with suitable finan-cial encouragement (usually in the form offlexible tariff rates) there is no doubt thatvery much more could be made of loadcontrol.

Improving energy quality…

Power electronics systems, for exampleSIPCON, can help improve energy quality –an increasingly important factor in deregu-lated energy markets. Energy has now be-come a product. It has its price and a de-fined quality. Consumers want a definitequality of energy, but they also producereaction effects on the system that aredetrimental to quality (e.g. harmonics orreactive power).Energy quality first has to be measured anddocumented, for example with the SIMEAS®

family of quality recorders. These measure-ments are important for price setting, andcan serve as the basis for remedial action,such as with active or passive filters. Powerelectronics development has opened upmany new possibilities here, although con-siderable progress may still be made inthis area – a breakthrough in silicon carbidetechnology, for example.

Alternatives…

It should be appreciated, however, that de-centralized power supplies are not a pana-cea. For those places where energy densityrequirements are high, large power stationsare still the answer, and especially whenthey can supply district heating. Theoreti-cally, it should still be possible to employconventional technology to transport verylarge amounts of electricity to the megaci-ties of the 21st Century. Even if the use ofoverhead power lines was not an option,due to say there being insufficient space or

resistance from people living nearby, itwould be possible to use gas-insulated lines(GIL), an economical alternative investigatedby Siemens.The development aim of reducing costs hasmeanwhile been attained here, and cost-effective applications involving distances ofserveral kilometres are therefore possible.The system costs for the gas-insulated trans-mission lines (GIL) developed by Siemensexceed those of overhead lines only byabout a factor of 10.

Fig. 6: Silicon carbide

Fig. 7: GIL



Cooling station (liquid nitrogen)GIL

Energy store

Switching station

Power plants

Energy management via satellite

Long-distance DC transmission

Converter stationSolar energy

Wind energy

Distribution station

Biomass power plant Irrigation system

Fuel cells

Pumping station

Fig. 8: The mega-cities of the 21st century and the open countryside will need different solutions – very high values of connection density in the former and decentralisedconfigurations in the latter

This has been achieved by laying the tubu-lar conductor using methods similar to thoseemployed with pipelines. Savings werealso made by simplifying and standardizingthe individual components and by using agas mixture consisting of sulfur hexafluo-ride (SF6) and nitrogen (N2).The advantages of this new technologyare low resistive and capacitive losses. Theelectric field outside of the enclosure is zero,and the magnetic field is negligibly small.No cooling and no phase angle compensa-tion are required. GILs are not a fire hazardand are simple to repair.

Energy trade

The new “rules of the game” that are beingintroduced in power supply business eve-rywhere are demanding more capabilityfrom utility IT systems, especially in areassuch as energy trading. Siemens has beenin the fortunate position of being able toaccumulate early practical experience inthis field in markets where deregulation isbeing introduced very quickly – such as theUnited Kingdom, Scandinavia and the USA– and so is now able to offer sophisticatedsystems and expertise with which utilitiescan get to grips with the demands of thenew commercial environment.In the past it was always security of supplythat took the highest priority for a utility.Now, however, although it remains an im-portant subject, more and more sharehold-

ers are demanding a more reasonable re-turn on their investment. Deregulation gen-erally means privatization; profit orientationis therefore clearly going to take over fromconcern with cost. In addition this meansthat competition will inevitably producesome concessions in the price of electrici-ty, which will increase the pressure on en-ergy suppliers. Many power supply compa-nies are striving to introduce additionalenergy services, thereby making the pureprice of energy not the only yardstick theircustomers apply when deciding how tomake their purchases.

Siemens – the energy systems house

Siemens is offering solutions to the prob-lems that are governed by the new “rulesof the game”. The company possesses con-siderable expertise, mainly because it is aglobal player, but also because it covers thetotal spectrum of products necessary for theefficient transmission and distribution ofelectricity. As with other Groups within thecompany, Power Transmission and Distribu-tion no longer regards itself as simply a pur-veyor of hardware. In future Siemens willbe more of a provider of services and totalsolutions. This will mean embracing manynew disciplines and skills, not least finan-cial control and complete project manage-ment. One of the reasons is that in future“BOT” (Build, Operate & Transfer) compa-

nies and independent operating utilities willno longer confine their activities to just en-ergy production; they will be expected tobecome increasingly involved in energy dis-tribution too.

Potential for the future

The ongoing development of high-temper-ature superconductors will doubtless ena-ble much to be achieved. Major operationalinnovations will, nonetheless, come fromthe more pervasive use of communicationsand data systems – two areas of technolo-gy where innovations can be seen every18 months. Consequently, it will be fromthese areas that the enabling impetus forsignificant advances in power engineeringwill come.


Contents PageIntroduction ...................................... 2/2

Air-InsulatedOutdoor Substations ....................... 2/4

Circuit-BreakersGeneral ............................................. 2/10Circuit-Breakers72 kV up to 245 kV .......................... 2/12Circuit-Breakers245 kV up to 800 kV ........................ 2/14Live-Tank Circuit-Breakers .......... 2/16Dead-Tank Circuit-Breakers ........ 2/20

Surge Arresters .............................. 2/24

Gas-Insulated Switchgearfor SubstationsIntroduction ..................................... 2/28Main Product Range ..................... 2/29Special Arrangements .................. 2/33Specification Guide ....................... 2/34Scope of Supply ............................. 2/37

Gas-insulatedTransmission Lines (GIL) .............. 2/38

Overhead Power Lines ................. 2/40

High-Voltage DirectCurrent Transmission .................... 2/49

Power Compensation inTransmission Systems .................. 2/52

2

High VoltageHigh Voltage

2/2 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission and Distribution · 4th Edition

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

High-Voltage Switchgear for Substations

Introduction

High-voltage substations form an importantlink in the power transmission chain be-tween generation source and consumer.Two basic designs are possible:

Air-insulated outdoor switchgearof open design (AIS)

AIS are favorably priced high-voltage sub-stations for rated voltages up to 800 kVwhich are popular wherever space restric-tions and environmental circumstances donot have to be considered. The individualelectrical and mechanical components ofan AIS installation are assembled on site.Air-insulated outdoor substations of opendesign are not completely safe to touchand are directly exposed to the effects ofweather and the environment (Fig. 1).

Gas-insulated indoor or outdoorswitchgear (GIS)

GIS compact dimensions and design makeit possible to install substations up to550 kV right in the middle of load centersof urban or industrial areas. Each circuit-breaker bay is factory assembled andincludes the full complement of isolatorswitches, grounding switches (regularor make-proof), instrument transformers,control and protection equipment, inter-locking and monitoring facilities commonlyused for this type of installation. Theearthed metal enclosures of GIS assurenot only insensitivity to contamination butalso safety from electric shock (Fig. 2).

Gas-insulated transmission lines (GIL)

A special application of gas-insulatedequipment are gas-insulated transmissionlines (GIL). They are used where high-volt-age overhead lines are not suitable for anyreason. GIL have a high power transmis-sion capability, even when laid under-ground, low resistive and capacitive lossesand low electromagnetic fields.

Fig. 1: Outdoor switchgear

Fig. 2: GIS substations in metropolitan areas

Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission and Distribution · 4th Edition 2/3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

High-Voltage Switchgear for Substations

Turnkey Installations

High-voltage switchgear is normally com-bined with transformers and other equip-ment to complete transformer substationsin order to Step-up from generator voltage level

to high-voltage system (MV/HV) Transform voltage levels within the

high-voltage grid system(HV/HV) Step-down to medium-voltage level

of distribution system (HV/MV)

The High Voltage Division plans and con-structs individual high-voltage switchgearinstallations or complete transformer sub-stations, comprising high-voltage switch-gear, medium-voltage switchgear, majorcomponents such as transformers, andall ancillary equipment such as auxiliaries,control systems, protective equipment,etc., on a turnkey basis or even as generalcontractor.The spectrum of installations suppliedranges from basic substations with singlebusbar to regional transformer substationswith multiple busbars or 1 1/2 circuit-break-er arrangement for rated voltages up to800 kV, rated currents up to 8000 A andshort-circuit currents up to 100 kA, all overthe world.The services offered range from systemplanning to commissioning and after-salesservice, including training of customer per-sonnel.The process of handling such an installa-tion starts with preparation of a quotation,and proceeds through clarification of theorder, design, manufacture, supply andcost-accounting until the project is finallybilled. Processing such an order hinges onmethodical data processing that in turncontributes to systematic project handling.All these high-voltage installations havein common their high-standard of engi-neering, which covers power systems,steel structures, civil engineering, fire pre-cautions, environmental protection andcontrol systems (Fig. 3).Every aspect of technology and each workstage is handled by experienced engineers.With the aid of high-performance computerprograms, e.g. the finite element meth-od (FEM), installations can be reliably de-signed even for extreme stresses, suchas those encountered in earthquake zones.All planning documentation is produced onmodern CAD systems; data exchange withother CAD systems is possible via stand-ardized interfaces.By virtue of their active involvement innational and international associations andstandardization bodies, our engineers are

always fully informed of the state of theart, even before a new standard or specifi-cation is published.

Quality/Environmental Management

Our own high-performance, internationallyaccredited test laboratories and a certifiedQM system testify to the quality of ourproducts and services.Milestones: 1983: Introduction of a quality system

on the basis of Canadian standardCSA Z 299 Level 1

1989: Certification of the SWH qualitysystem in accordance withDIN EN ISO 9001 by the GermanAssociation for Certification ofQuality Systems (DQS)

1992: Repetition audit and extensionof the quality system to the completeEV H Division

1992: Accreditation of the test labora-tories in accordance with DIN EN 45001by the German Accreditation Body forTechnology (DATech)

1994: Certification of the environmental-systems in accordance withDIN EN ISO 14001 by the DQS

1995: Mutual QEM Certificate

Ancillaryequipment

Design

CivilEngineering

Buildings,roads,foundations

StructuralSteelwork

Gantries andsubstructures

Major com-ponents,

e.g. trans-former

SubstationControl

Control andmonitoring,measurement,protection, etc.

AC/DC

auxililiaries

Surge

diverters

Earthing

syste

m

Pow

er c

able

sC

ontr

ol a

ndsi

gnal

cab

les

Carrier-frequ.

equipment

Ventilation

Lightning

Environmentalprotection

Fireprotection

Fig. 3: Engineering of high-voltage switchgear

Know how, experience and worldwidepresence

A worldwide network of liaison and salesoffices, along with the specialist depart-ments in Germany, support and advise ourcustomers in all matters of switchgeartechnology.Siemens has for many years been a lead-ing supplier of high-voltage equipment,regardless of whether AIS, GIS or GIL hasbeen concerned. For example, outdoorsubstations of longitudinal in-line designare still known in many countries underthe Siemens registered tradename “Kiel-linie”. Back in 1968, Siemens supplied theworld’s first GIS substation using SF6 asinsulating and quenching medium. Gas-in-sulated transmission lines have featuredin the range of products since 1976.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Design of Air-Insulated Outdoor Substations

Standards

Air-insulated outdoor substations of opendesign must not be touched. Therefore,air-insulated switchgear (AIS) is always setup in the form of a fenced-in electrical op-erating area, to which only authorized per-sons have access.Relevant IEC 60060 specifications apply tooutdoor switchgear equipment. Insulationcoordination, including minimum phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground clearances,is effected in accordance with IEC 60071.Outdoor switchgear is directly exposed tothe effects of the environment such as theweather. Therefore it has to be designedbased on not only electrical but also envi-ronmental specifications.Currently there is no international standardcovering the setup of air-insulated outdoorsubstations of open design. Siemens de-signs AIS in accordance with DIN/VDEstandards, in line with national standardsor customer specifications.The German standard DIN VDE 0101 (erec-tion of power installations with rated volt-ages above 1 kV) demonstrates typicallythe protective measures and stresses thathave to be taken into consideration for air-insulated switchgear.

Protective measures

Protective measures against direct contact,i. e. protection in the form of covering,obstruction or clearance and appropriatelypositioned protective devices and mini-mum heights.Protective measures against indirect touch-ing by means of relevant grounding meas-ures in accordance with DIN VDE 0141.Protective measures during work onequipment, i.e. during installation mustbe planned such that the specificationsof DIN EN 50110 (VDE 0105) (e.g. 5 safetyrules) are complied with Protective measures during operation,

e.g. use of switchgear interlock equip-ment

Protective measures against voltagesurges and lightning strike

Protective measures against fire, waterand, if applicable, noise insulation.

Stresses

Electrical stresses, e.g. rated current,short-circuit current, adequate creepagedistances and clearances

Mechanical stresses (normal stressing),e.g. weight, static and dynamic loads,ice, wind

Mechanical stresses (exceptionalstresses), e.g. weight and constantloads in simultaneous combination withmaximum switching forces or short-circuit forces, etc.

Special stresses, e.g. caused by instal-lation altitudes of more than 1000 mabove sea level, or earthquakes

Variables affecting switchgearinstallation

Switchgear design is significantly influ-enced by: Minimum clearances (depending on

rated voltages) between various activeparts and between active parts andearth

Arrangement of conductors Rated and short-circuit currents Clarity for operating staff Availability during maintenance work,

redundancy Availability of land and topography Type and arrangement of the busbar

disconnectorsThe design of a substation determines itsaccessibility, availability and clarity. Thedesign must therefore be coordinated inclose cooperation with the customer. Thefollowing basic principles apply:Accessibility and availability increase withthe number of busbars. At the same time,however, clarity decreases. Installationsinvolving single busbars require minimuminvestment, but they offer only limited flex-ibility for operation management and main-tenance. Designs involving 1 1/2 and 2 cir-cuit-breaker arrangements assure a highredundancy, but they also entail the high-est costs. Systems with auxiliary or bypassbusbars have proved to be economical.The circuit-breaker of the coupling feederfor the auxiliary bus allows uninterruptedreplacement of each feeder circuit-breaker.For busbars and feeder lines, mostly wireconductors and aluminum are used. Multi-ple conductors are required where currentsare high. Owing to the additional short-circuit forces between the subconductors(pinch effect), however, multiple conduc-tors cause higher mechanical stressing atthe tension points. When wire conductors,particularly multiple conductors, are usedhigher short-circuit currents cause a risenot only in the aforementioned pinch ef-fect but in further force maxima in theevent of swinging and dropping of the con-ductor bundle (cable pull). This in turn re-sults in higher mechanical stresses on theswitchgear components. These effects canbe calculated in an FEM (Finite ElementMethod) simulation (Fig. 4).

ker


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

When rated and short-circuit currents arehigh, aluminum tubes are increasingly usedto replace wire conductors for busbarsand feeder lines. They can handle ratedcurrents up to 8000 A and short-circuitcurrents up to 80 kA without difficulty.Not only the availability of land, but alsothe lie of the land, the accessibility and lo-cation of incoming and outgoing overheadlines together with the number of trans-formers and voltage levels considerablyinfluence the switchgear design as well.A one or two-line arrangement, and possi-bly a U arrangement, may be the propersolution. Each outdoor switchgear installa-tion, especially for step-up substations inconnection with power stations and largetransformer substations in the extra-high-voltage transmission system, is thereforeunique, depending on the local conditions.HV/MV transformer substations of the dis-tribution system, with repeatedly usedequipment and a scheme of one incomingand one outgoing line as well as two trans-formers together with medium-voltageswitchgear and auxiliary equipment, aremore subject to a standardized designfrom the individual power supply compa-nies.


Fig. 4: FEM calculation of deflection of wire conductors in the event of short circuit

Horizontaldisplacement in m

Vertical displacement in m

–1.4 –1.0 –0.6 –0.2 0.2 0.6 1.0 1.4

–1.4

–1.2

–1.0

–0.8

–0.6

–1.6

–1.8

–2.0

–2.20

Preferred designs

The multitude of conceivable designs in-clude certain preferred versions, which aredependent on the type and arrangement ofthe busbar disconnectors:

H arrangement

The H arrangement (Fig. 5) is preferrablyused in applications for feeding industrialconsumers. Two overhead lines are con-nected with two transformers and inter-linked by a single-bus coupler. Thus eachfeeder of the switchgear can be main-tained without disturbance of the otherfeeders. This arrangement assures a highavailability.

Special layouts for single busbars up to145 kV with withdrawable circuit-break-er and modular switchbay arrangement

Further to the H arrangement that is builtin many variants, there are also designswith withdrawable circuit-breakers andmodular switchbays for this voltage range.For detailed information see the followingpages:

Fig. 5: Module plan view

= T1

M

M

M

M

MM

– F1

– Q0

– T1

– T1

– T5

– Q1

– Q0

– Q8

– T1

– T5

– Q1

– Q0

– Q8

– Q1 – Q1

= T1

– F1

– Q0

– T1

– Q10 – Q11


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

-F1

2530

7600

1050

170017006300

700030006400

25307000

-Q11-Q12

25003100

2145014450

=T1

4500

-Q0 -T1625 6257000

-Q11-Q12 -Q9

3100-Q0

-T1/-T5

25002500

2247


Withdrawable circuit-breaker

GeneralFor 123/145 kV substations with singlebusbar system a suitable alternative is thewithdrawable circuit-breaker. In this kind ofswitchgear busbar- and outgoing discon-nector become inapplicable (switchgear

Fig. 6a: H arrangement with withdrawable circuit-breaker, plan view and sections

Fig. 6b: H arrangement with withdrawable circuit-breaker, ISO view Fig. 7: Technical data

without disconnectors). The isolating dis-tance is reached with the moving of thecircuit-breaker along the rails, similar to thewell-known withdrawable-unit design tech-nique of medium-voltage switchgear. Indisconnected position busbar, circuit-break-er and outgoing circuit are separated fromeach other by a good visible isolating dis-

tance. An electromechanical motive unitensures the uninterrupted constant movingmotion to both end positions. The circuit-breaker can only be operated if one of theend positions has been reached. Move-ment with switched-on circuit-breaker isimpossible. Incorrect movement, whichwould be equivalent to operating a discon-nector under load, is interlocked. In theevent of possible malfunction of the posi-tion switch, or of interruptions to travelbetween disconnected position and operat-ing position, the operation of the circuit-breaker is stopped.The space required for the switchgear isreduced considerably. Due to the arrange-ment of the instrument transformers onthe common steel frame a reduction in therequired space up to about 45% in compar-ison to the conventional switchgear sec-tion is achieved.DescriptionA common steel frame forms the base forall components necessary for reliable oper-ation. The withdrawable circuit-breakercontains: Circuit-breaker type 3AP1F Electromechanical motive unit Measuring transformer for protection

and measuring purposes Local control cubicleAll systems are preassembled as far aspossible. Therefore the withdrawable CBcan be installed quite easily and efficientlyon site.The advantages at a glance Complete system and therefore lower

costs for coordination and adaptation. A reduction in required space by about

45% compared with conventionalswitchbays

Clear wiring and cabling arrangement Clear circuit state Use as an indoor switchbay is also pos-

sible.

Technical data

123 kV (145 kV)

1250 A (2000 A)

31.5 kA, 1s,(40 kA, 3s)

230/400 V AC

220 V DC

Nominal voltage [kV]

Nominal current [A]

Nominal short [kA]time current

Auxiliary supply/motive unit [V]

Control voltage [V]


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

8000

30002000 2000

3000 4500 4500 3000 4000

7500 11500

-Q8 -Q0-Q1 -T1-T5

-Q10/-Q11 -Q0-Q1-T1 =T1-F1

7500

8000

19000

11500

8000

3000

9500

9500

19000 AA

The advantages at a glance Complete system and therefore lower

costs for coordination and adaptation. Thanks to the integrated control cubicle,

upgrading of the control room isscarecely necessary.

A modular switchbay can be insertedvery quickly in case of total breakdownor for temporary use during reconstruc-tion.

A reduction in required space by about50% compared with conventionalswitchbays is achieved by virtue of thecompact and tested design of the mod-ule (Fig. 8).

The application as an indoor switchbay ispossible.


Fig. 9: Technical data

Modular switchbay

GeneralAs an alternative to conventional substa-tions an air-insulated modular switchbaycan often be used for common layouts.In this case the functions of several HVdevices are combined with each other.This makes it possible to offer a standard-ized module.Appropriate conventional air-insulatedswitchbays consist of separately mountedHV devices (for example circuit-breaker,disconnector, earthing switches, transform-ers), which are connected to each other byconductors/tubes. Every device needs itsown foundations, steel structures, earthingconnections, primary and secondary termi-nals (secondary cable routes etc.).

DescriptionA common steel frame forms the base forall components necessary for a reliable op-eration. The modul contains: Circuit-breaker type 3AP1F Motor-operated disconnecting device Current transformer for protection and

measuring purposes Local control cubicleAll systems are preassembled as far aspossible. Therefore the module can be in-stalled quite easily and efficiently on site.

Technical data

123 kV (145 kV)

1250 A (2000 A)

31.5 kA, 1s,(40 kA, 3s)

230/400 V AC

220 V DC

Nominal voltage

Nominal current

Nominal shortcurrent

Auxiliary supply

Control voltage

Fig. 8: Plan view and side view of H arrangement with modular switchbays


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Top view

Section A-A

20500

R1 S1 T1 R2S2T2

8400 1940048300

9000A

A

6500

4500

End bay

Normalbay 9000

8000

2500Dimensions in mm


Fig. 12: Busbar area with pantograph disconnector of diagonal design, rated voltage 420 kV

Fig.11: Central tower design

In-line longitudinal layout, with rotarydisconnectors, preferable up to 170 kV

The busbar disconnectors are lined up onebehind the other and parallel to the longitu-dinal axis of the busbar. It is preferable tohave either wire-type or tubular busbarslocated at the top of the feeder conductors.Where tubular busbars are used, gantriesare required for the outgoing overheadlines only. The system design requires onlytwo conductor levels and is therefore clear.If, in the case of duplicate busbars, thesecond busbar is arranged in U form rela-tive to the first busbar, it is possible to ar-range feeders going out on both sides ofthe busbar without a third conductor level(Fig. 10).

Fig. 10: Substation with rotary disconnector, in-line design

18000

9000


12500

16000

7000 17000 17000

Section

10000

10400

Top view

180005000

13300

Dimensions in mmBus system Bypass bus

8000 28000 48000 10000

400040005000

Central tower layout with rotarydisconnectors, normally only for 245 kV

The busbar disconnectors are arrangedside by side and parallel to the longitudinalaxis of the feeder. Wire-type busbars locat-ed at the top are commonly used; tubularbusbars are also conceivable. This arrange-ment enables the conductors to be easliyjumpered over the circuit-breakers and thebay width to be made smaller than that ofin-line designs. With three conductor levelsthe system is relatively clear, but the costof the gantries is high (Fig. 11).

Diagonal layout with pantographdisconnectors, preferable up to 245 kV

The pantograph disconnectors are placeddiagonally to the axis of the busbars andfeeder. This results in a very clear, space-saving arrangement. Wire and tubular con-ductors are customary. The busbars canbe located above or below the feeder con-ductors (Fig. 12).


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig.13 : 1 1/2 Circuit-breaker design

1 1/2 circuit-breaker layout,preferable up to 245 kV

The 1 1/2 circuit-breaker arrangement as-sures high supply reliability; however, ex-penditure for equipment is high as well.The busbar disconnectors are of the panto-graph, rotary and vertical-break type. Verti-cal-break disconnectors are preferred forthe feeders. The busbars located at the topcan be of wire or tubular type. Of advan-tage are the equipment connections, whichare very short and enable (even in the caseof multiple conductors) high short-circuitcurrents to be mastered. Two arrange-ments are customary: External busbar, feeders in line with

three conductor levels Internal busbar, feeders in H arrange-

ment with two conductor levels (Fig. 13).

Planning principles

For air-insulated outdoor substations ofopen design, the following planning princi-ples must be taken into account: High reliability

– Reliable mastering of normal andexceptional stresses

– Protection against surges and light-ning strikes

– Protection against surges directlyon the equipment concerned (e.g.transformer, HV cable)

Good clarity and accessibility– Clear conductor routing with few

conductor levels– Free accessibility to all areas (no

equipment located at inaccessibledepth)

– Adequate protective clearances forinstallation, maintenance and transpor-tation work

– Adequately dimensioned transportroutes

Positive incorporation into surroundings– As few overhead conductors as

possible– Tubular instead of wire-type busbars– Unobtrusive steel structures– Minimal noise and disturbance level

EMC grounding systemfor modern control and protection

Fire precautions and environmentalprotection– Adherence to fire protection speci-

fications and use of flame-retardantand nonflammable materials

– Use of environmentally compatibletechnology and products

For further information please contact:

Fax: ++ 49-9131- 73 18 58e-mail: [email protected]

29000


18000

17500

480008500


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Circuit-Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV

General

Circuit-breakers are the main module ofboth AIS and GIS switchgear. They have tomeet high requirements in terms of: Reliable opening and closing Consistent quenching performance with

rated and short-circuit currents evenafter many switching operations

High-performance, reliable maintenance-free operating mechanisms.

Technology reflecting the latest state ofthe art and years of operating experienceare put to use in constant further develop-ment and optimization of Siemens circuit-breakers. This makes Siemens circuit-breakers able to meet all the demandsplaced on high-voltage switchgear.The comprehensive quality system,ISO 9001 certified, covers development,manufacture, sales, installation and after-sales service. Test laboratories are accred-ited to EN 45001 and PEHLA/STL.

Main construction elements

Each circuit-breaker bay for gas-insulatedswitchgear includes the full complementof isolator switches, grounding switches(regular or proven), instrument transform-ers, control and protection equipment, in-terlocking and monitoring facilities com-monly used for this type of installation(See chapter GIS, page 2/30 and following).Circuit-breakers for air-insulated switch-gear are individual components and areassembled together with all individualelectrical and mechanical components ofan AIS installation on site.All Siemens circuit-breaker types, whetherair or gas-insulated, are made up of thesame range of components, i.e.: Interrupter unit Operating mechanism Sealing system Operating rod Control elements.

Fig. 14: Circuit-breaker parts

Circuit-breaker for air-insulated switchgear

Controlelements

Circuit-breaker in SF6-insulated switchgear

Interrupterunit

Operatingmechanism


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Interrupter unit –two arc-quenching principles

The Siemens product range includes high-voltage circuit-breakers with self-compres-sion interrupter chambers and twin-nozzleinterrupter chambers – for optimumswitching performance under every operat-ing condition for every voltage level.

Self-compression breakers

3AP high-voltage circuit-breakers for thelower voltage range ensure optimum useof the thermal energy of the arc in thecontact tube. This is achieved by the self-compression switching unit.Siemens patented this arc-quenching prin-ciple in 1973. Since then, we have contin-ued to develop the technology of the self-compression interrupter chamber. One ofthe technical innovations is that the arc en-ergy is being increasingly used to quenchthe arc. In short-circuit breaking operationsthe actuating energy required is reduced tothat needed for mechanical contact move-ment. That means the operating energy istruly minimized. The result is that the self-compression interrupter chamber allowsthe use of a compact stored-energy springmechanism with unrestrictedly high de-pendability.

Twin-nozzle breakers

On the 3AQ and 3AT switching devices, acontact system with graphite twin-nozzlesensures consistent arc-quenching behaviorand constant electric strength, irrespectiveof pre-stressing, i.e. the number of breaksand the switched current. The graphitetwin-nozzles are resistant to burning andthus have a very long service life. As aconsequence, the interrupter unit of thetwin-nozzle breaker is particularlypowerful.Moreover, this type of interrupter chamberoffers other essential advantages. General-ly, twin-nozzle interrupter chambers oper-ate with low overpressures during arc-quenching. Minimal actuating energy isadequate in this operating system as well.The resulting arc plasma has a compara-tively low conductivity, and the switchingcapacity is additionally favourably influ-enced as a result.

The twin-nozzle system has also provenitself in special applications. Its specificproperties support switching without re-striking of small inductive and capacitivecurrents. By virtue of its high arc resist-ance, the twin-nozzle system is particularlysuitable for breaking certain types of shortcircuit (e.g. short circuits close to genera-tor terminals) on account of its high arc re-sistance.

Operating mechanism –two principles for allspecific requirements

The operating mechanism is a central mod-ule of the high-voltage circuit-breakers.Two different mechanism types are availa-ble for Siemens circuit-breakers: Stored-energy spring actuated

mechanism, Electrohydraulic mechanism,depending on the area of application andvoltage level, thus every time ensuring thebest system of actuation. The advantagesare trouble-free, economical and reliablecircuit-breaker operation for all specific re-quirements.

Specific use of the stored-energyspring mechanism

The actuation concept of the 3AP high-volt-age circuit-breaker is based on the stored-energy spring principle. The use of such anoperating mechanism in the lower voltagerange became appropriate as a result ofdevelopment of a self-compression inter-rupter chamber that requires only minimalactuation energy.

Advantages of the stored-energy springmechanism at a glance:

The stored-energy spring mechanism of-fers the highest degree of operationalsafety. It is of simple and sturdy design– with few moving parts. Due to theself-compression principle of the inter-rupter chamber, only low actuating forc-es are required.

Stored-energy spring mechanisms arereadily available and have a long servicelife: Minimal stressing of the latch mech-anisms and rolling-contact bearings inthe operating mechanism ensure reliableand wear-free transmission of forces.

Stored-energy spring mechanisms aremaintenance-free: the spring charginggear is fitted with wear-free spur gears,enabling load-free decoupling.

Specific use of the electrohydraulicmechanism

The actuating energy required for the 3AQand 3AT high-voltage circuit-breakers athigher voltage levels is provided by provenelectrohydraulic mechanisms. The inter-rupter chambers of these switching devic-es are based on the graphite twin-nozzlesystem.

Advantages of the electrohydraulicmechanism at a glance:

Electrohydraulic mechanisms provide thehigh actuating energy that makes it pos-sible to have reliable control even oververy high switching capacities and to bein full command of very high loads in theshortest switching time.

The switch positions are held safelyeven in the event of an auxiliary powerfailure.

A number of autoreclosing operationsare possible without the need forrecharging.

Energy reserves can be reliably con-trolled at any time.

Electrohydraulic mechanisms are mainte-nance-free, economical and have a longservice life.

They satisfy the most stringent require-ments regarding environmental safety.This has been proven by electrohydraulicmechanisms in Siemens high-voltagecircuit-breakers over many years of serv-ice.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 15: The interrupter unit

The interrupter unit

Self-compression system

The current path

The current path is formed by the terminalplates (1) and (8), the contact support (2),the base (7) and the moving contact cylin-der (6). In closed state the operating cur-rent flows through the main contact (4).An arcing contact (5) acts parallel to this.

Major features:

Self-compression interrupter chamber Use of the thermal energy of the arc Minimized energy consumption High reliability for a long time

Siemens circuit-breakers for the lowervoltage levels 72 kV up to 245 kV, whetherfor air-insulated or gas-insulated switch-gear, are equipped with self-compressionswitching units and spring-stored energyoperating mechanisms.

Breaking operating currents

During the opening process, the main con-tact (4) opens first and the current commu-tates on the still closed arcing contact. Ifthis contact is subsequently opened, anarc is drawn between the contacts (5). Atthe same time, the contact cylinder (6)moves into the base (7) and compressesthe quenching gas there. The gas thenflows in the reverse direction through thecontact cylinder (6) towards the arcing con-tact (5) and quenches the arc there.

Breaking fault currents

In the event of high short-circuit currents,the quenching gas on the arcing contact isheated substantially by the energy of thearc. This leads to a rise in pressure in thecontact cylinder. In this case the energy forcreation of the required quenching pres-sure does not have to be produced by theoperating mechanism.Subsequently, the fixed arcing contact re-leases the outflow through the nozzle (3).The gas flows out of the contact cylinderback into the nozzle and quenches the arc.

Closed position Open position

Terminal plateContact supportNozzleMain contactArc contactContactcylinderBaseTerminal plate

123456

78

8

7

6

543

21

OpeningMain contact open

OpeningArcing contact open


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


The operating mechanism

Spring-stored energy type

Siemens circuit-breakers for voltages up to245 kV are equipped with spring-stored en-ergy operating mechanisms. These drivesare based on the same principle that hasbeen proving its worth in Siemens low andmedium-voltage circuit-breakers for dec-ades. The design is simple and robust withfew moving parts and a vibration-isolatedlatch system of highest reliability. All com-ponents of the operating mechanism, thecontrol and monitoring equipment and allterminal blocks are arranged compact andyet clear in one cabinet.Depending on the design of the operat-ing mechanism, the energy required forswitching is provided by individual com-pression springs (i.e. one per pole) or bysprings that function jointly on a triple-polebasis.The principle of the operating mechanismwith charging gear and latching is identicalon all types. The differences betweenmechanism types are in the number, sizeand arrangement of the opening and clos-ing springs.

Major features at a glance

Uncomplicated, robust constructionwith few moving parts

Maintenance-free Vibration-isolated latches Load-free uncoupling of charging

mechanism Ease of access 10,000 operating cycles

Fig. 16

1234567

89

10111213141516

1718

Corner gearsCoupling linkageOperating rodClosing releaseCam plateCharging shaftClosing springconnecting rodClosing springHand-wound mechanismCharging mechanismRoller levelClosing damperOperating shaftOpening damperOpening releaseOpening springconnecting rodMechanism housingOpening spring

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

818

17

1615

14

1312

11

10

9

Fig. 17: Combined operating mechanismand monitoring cabinet


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Major features

Erosion-resistant graphite nozzles Consistently high dielectric strength Consistent quenching capability across

the entire performance range High number of short-circuit breaking

operations High levels of availability Long maintenance intervals.The interrupter unit

Twin-nozzle system

Current path assembly

The conducting path is made up of theterminal plates (1 and 7), the fixed tubes(2) and the spring-loaded contact fingersarranged in a ring in the moving contacttube (3).

Fig. 18: The interrupter unit

Siemens circuit-breakers for the highervoltage levels 245 kV up to 800 kV, wheth-er for air-insulated or gas-insulated switch-gear, are equipped with twin-nozzle inter-rupter chambers and electrohydraulicoperating mechanisms.

Arc-quenching assembly

The fixed tubes (2) are connected bythe contact tube (3) when the breaker isclosed. The contact tube (3) is rigidly cou-pled to the blast cylinder (4), the two to-gether with a fixed annular piston (5) inbetween forming the moving part of thebreak chamber. The moving part is drivenby an operating rod (8) to the effect thatthe SF6 pressure between the piston (5)and the blast cylinder (4) increases.When the contacts separate, the movingcontact tube (3), which acts as a shutoffvalve, releases the SF6. An arc is drawnbetween one nozzle (6) and the contacttube (3). It is driven in a matter of millisec-onds between the nozzles (6) by the gasjet and its own electrodynamic forces andis safely extinguished.The blast cylinder (4) encloses the arc-quenching arrangement like a pressurechamber. The compressed SF6 flows ra-dially into the break by the shortest routeand is discharged axially through the noz-zles (6). After arc extinction, the contacttube (3) moves into the open position.In the final position, handling of test volt-ages in accordance with IEC 60000 andANSI is fully assured, even after a numberof short-circuit switching operations.

1

2

36

4

5

2

8

7

Arc

Breaker inclosed position

Precompression Gas flow duringarc quenching

Breaker inopen position

Upper terminalplateFixed tubesMoving contacttubeBlast cylinderBlast pistonArc-quenchingnozzlesLower terminalplateOperating rod

1

23

456

7

8


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

The operating mechanism

Electrohydraulic type

All hydraulically operated Siemens circuit-breakers have a uniform operating mecha-nism concept. Identical operating mecha-nisms (modules) are used for single or tri-ple-pole switching of outdoor circuit-breakers.The electrohydraulic operating mecha-nisms have proved their worth all over theworld. The power reserves are ample, theswitching speed is high and the storagecapacity substantial. The working capacityis indicated by the permanent self-monitor-ing system.The force required to move the piston andpiston rod is provided by differential oilpressure inside a sealed system. A hydrau-lic storage cylinder filled with compressednitrogen provides the necessary energy.Electromagnetic valves control the oil flowbetween the high and low-pressure side inthe form of a closed circuit.

Main features:

Plenty of operating energy Long switching sequences Reliable check of energy reserves

at any time Switching positions are reliably

maintained, even when the auxiliarysupply fails

Excessive strong foundations Low-noise switching No oil leakage and consequently

environmentally compatible Maintenance-free.

Description of function

Closing:The hydraulic valve is opened by elec-tromagnetic means. Pressure from thehydraulic storage cylinder is thereby ap-plied to the piston with two differentsurface areas. The breaker is closed viacouplers and operating rods moved bythe force which acts on the larger sur-face of the piston. The operating mech-anism is designed to ensure that, in theevent of a pressure loss, the breakerremains in the particular position.

Fig. 21: Schematic diagram of a Q-range operating mechanism

Tripping:The hydraulic valve is changed overelectromagnetically, thus relieving thelarger piston surface of pressure andcausing the piston to move onto theOFF position. The breaker is ready forinstant operation because the smallerpiston surface is under constant pres-sure. Two electrically separate trippingcircuits are available for changing thevalve over for tripping.


Fig. 19: Operating unit of the Q range AIS circuitbreakers

Fig. 20: Operating cylinder with valve block andmagnetic releases

M

P P

M

Oil tank

Hydraulic storagecylinder

Operating cylinder

Releases

Operating piston

Pilot control

On Off

N2

Main valve

Auxiliaryswitch

Monitoring unitand hydraulic

pump with motor PP


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Live-Tank Circuit-Breakers for 72 kV up to 800 kV

Fig. 23: 800 kV circuit-breaker 3AT5

Fig. 24: 245 kV circuit-breaker 3AQ2

Fig. 22: 145 kV circuit-breaker 3AP1FG with triple-polespring stored-energy operating mechanism

Circuit-breakersfor air-insulated switchgearStandard live-tank breakers

The construction

All live-tank circuit-breakers are of thesame general design, as shown in the illus-trations. They consist of the following maincomponents:1) Interrupter unit2) Closing resistor (if applicable)3) Operating mechanism4) Insulator column (AIS)5) Operating rod6) Breaker base7) Control unitThe uncomplicated design of the breakersand the use of many similar components,such as interrupter units, operating rodsand control cabinets, ensure high reliabilitybecause the experience of many breakersin service has been applied in improvementof the design. The twin nozzle interrupterunit for example has proven its reliability inmore than 60,000 units all over the world.The control unit includes all necessarydevices for circuit-breaker control and mon-itoring, such as: Pressure/SF6 density monitors Gauges for SF6 and hydraulic pressure

(if applicable) Relays for alarms and lockout Antipumping devices Operation counters (upon request) Local breaker control (upon request) Anticondensation heaters.

Transport, installation and commissioningare performed with expertise and effi-ciency.The tested circuit-breaker is shipped inthe form of a small number of compactunits. If desired, Siemens can provideappropriately qualified personnel for instal-lation and commissioning.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 26: Type 3AP1FG

Fig. 25: Type 3AT4/5

Fig. 27: Type 3AQ2

1 Interrupter unit2 Closing resistor3 Valve unit4 Electrohydraulic

operatingmechanism

5 Insulator columns6 Breaker base7 Control unit

1

5

3

4

7

6

2

1 Interrupter unit2 Post insulator3 Circuit-breaker base4 Operating mechanism

and control cubicle5 Pillar

5

4

3

2

1

Interrupter unitArc-quenching nozzlesMoving contactFilterBlast pistonBlast cylinderBell-crank mechanismInsulator columnOperating rodHydraulic operating mechanismON/OFF indicatorOil tankControl unit

12

9

8

10114

13

653721

123456789

10111213


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Type 3AP1/3AQ1 3AP2/3AQ2

Spring-stored energy mechanism/Electrohydraulic mechanism

O - 0.3 s - CO - 3 min - CO or CO - 15 s - CO

Technical data

60…25060…250

120…240, 50/60 Hz

25 years

Rated voltage [kV]Number of interrupter units per poleRated power-frequency withstand [kV]voltage 1 min.Rated lightning impulse withstand [kV]voltage 1.2 / 50 µsRated switching impulse [kV]withstand voltageRated current up to [A]Rated short-time current (3 s) up to [kA]Rated peak withstand current up to [kA]Rated short-circuit-breaking [kA]current up toRated short-circuit making [kA]current up toRated duty cycleBreak time [cycles]Frequency [Hz]Operating mechanism typeControl voltage [V, DC]Motor voltage [V, DC]

[V, DC]Design data of the basic version:Clearance Phase/earth [mm]in air across the contact gap [mm]Minimum creepage Phase/earth [mm]distance across the contact gap [mm]DimensionsHeight [mm]Width [mm]Depth [mm]Distance between pole centers [mm]Weight of circuit-breaker [kg]Inspection after

72.5 123 145 170 245/300

1 1 1 1 1

140 230 275 325 460

325 550 650 750 1050

– – – – –/850

4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

40 40 40 40/50 50

108 108 108 135 135

40 40 40 40/50 50

108 108 108 135 135

3 3 3 3 3

50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

700 1250 1250 1500 22001200 1200 1200 1400 1900/2200

2248 3625 3625 4250 6150/76263625 3625 3625 4250 6125/7500

2750 3300 3300 4030 5220/55203200 3900 3900 4200 6600/7000 660 660 660 660 8001350 1700 1700 1850 2800/3000

1350 1500 1500 1600 3000

362 420

2 2

520 610

1175 1425

950 1050

4000 4000

63 63

170 170

63 63

170 170

3 3

50/60 50/60

2750 3400 2700 3200

7875 10375 9050 10500

4150 48008800 94003500 41003800 4100

4700 5000


Fig. 28a


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 28b * with closing resistor

3AT2/3AT3*

Electrohydraulic mechanism

O - 0.3 s - CO - 3 min - CO or CO - 15 s - CO

245 300 362 420 550

2 2 2 2 2

460 460 520 610 800

1050 1050 1175 1425 1550

– 850 950 1050 1175

4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

80 63 63 63 63

216 170 170 170 170

80 63 63 63 63

216 170 170 170 170

2 2 2 2 2

50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

2200 2200 2700 3300 38002000 2400 2700 3200 3800

6050 6050 7165 9075 137506070 8568 9360 11390 13750

4490 4490 6000 6000 67007340 8010 9300 10100 136904060 4025 4280 4280 51353000 3400 3900 4300 5100

5980 6430 9090 8600 12500

362 420 550 800

4 4 4 4

520 610 800 1150

1175 1425 1550 2100

950 1050 1175 1425

4000 4000 4000 4000

80 80 63 63

200 200 160 160

80 80 63 63

200 200 160 160

2 2 2 2

50/60 50/60 50/60 50/60

2700 3300 3800 50004000 4000 4800 6400

7165 9075 10190 1386012140 12140 17136 22780

4990 6000 6550 840010600 11400 16600 222006830 6830 7505 90604350 4750 7200 10000

14400 14700 19200 23400

48…25048…250 or

208/120…500/289 50/60 Hz

25 years

3AT4/3AT5*


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 29b: SPS-2 circuit-breaker 170 kV

Circuit-breakersin dead-tank design

For certain substation designs, dead-tankcircuit-breakers might be required insteadof the standard live-tank breakers. Forthese purposes Siemens can offer thedead-tank circuit breaker types.

Main features at a glance

Reliable opening and closing

Proven contact and arc-quenchingsystem

Consistent quenching performancewith rated and short-circuit currentseven after many switching operations

Similar uncomplicated design for allvoltages

High-performance, reliable operatingmechanisms

Easy-to-actuate spring operatingmechanisms

Hydraulic operating mechanisms withon-line monitoring

Economy

Perfect finish Simplified, quick installation process Long maintenance intervals High number of operating cycles Long service life

Individual service

Close proximity to the customer Order specific documentation Solutions tailored to specific problems After-sales service available promptly

worldwide

The right qualifications

Expertise in all power supply matters 30 years of experience with SF6-insulat-

ed circuit breakers A quality system certified to ISO 9001,

covering development, manufacture,sales, installation and after-sales service

Test laboratories accredited to EN 45001and PEHLA/STL

Dead-Tank Circuit-Breakers for 72 kV up to 245 kV

Fig. 29a: SPS-2 circuit-breaker 72.5 kV


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Type SPS-2/3AP1-DT

38 48.3 72.5 121 145 169 242

80 105 160 260 310 365 425

200 250 350 550 650 750 900/1050

– – – – – – –/850

4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000

40 40 40 63 63 63 63

Rated voltage [kV]

Rated power-frequency [kV]withstand voltage

Rated lighting impulse [kV]withstand voltage

Rated switching impulse [kV]withstand voltage

Rated nominal current up to [A]

Rated breaking current up to [kA]

Operating mechanism type

Technical data

Spring-stored-energy mechanism

Dead-Tank Circuit-Breakers for 72 kV up to 245 kV

Subtransmission breakerType SPS-2 and 3AP1-DT

Type SPS-2 power circuit-breakers(Fig. 29a/b) are designed as general, defi-nite-purpose breakers for use at maximumrated voltages of 72.5 and 245 kV.

The construction

The type SPS-2 breaker consists of threeidentical pole units mounted on a commonsupport frame. The opening and closingforce of the FA2/4 spring operating mecha-nism is transferred to the moving contactsof the interrupter through a system of con-necting rods and a rotating seal at the sideof each phase.The tanks and the porcelain bushingsare charged with SF6 gas at a nominalpressure of 6.0 bar. The SF6 serves as bothinsulation and arc-quenching medium.A control cabinet mounted at one endof the breaker houses the spring operatingmechanism and breaker control compo-nents.Interrupters are located in the aluminumhousings of each pole unit. The interrupt-ers use the latest Siemens puffer arc-quenching system.The spring operating mechanism is thesame design as used with the Siemens3AP breakers. This design has been in ser-vice for years, and has a well documentedreliability record.Customers can specify up to four (in somecases, up to six) bushing-type currenttransformers (CT) per phase. These CTs,mounted externally on the aluminum hous-ings, can be removed without disturbingthe bushings.

Operating mechanism

The type FA2/4 mechanically and electrical-ly trip-free spring mechanism is used ontype SPS-2 breakers. The type FA2/4 clos-ing and opening springs hold a charge forstoring ”open-close-open“ operationsA weatherproof control cabinet has a largedoor, sealed with rubber gaskets, for easyaccess during inspection and maintenance.Condensation is prevented by units offer-ing continuous inside/outside temperaturedifferential and by ventilation.

Fig. 30

Included in the control cabinet are neces-sary auxiliary switches, cutoff switch, latchcheck switch, alarm switch and operationcounter. The control relays and three con-trol knife switches (one each for the con-trol, heater and motor) are mounted on acontrol panel. Terminal blocks on the sideand rear of the housing are available forcontrol and transformer wiring.For non US markets the control cabinet isalso available similar to the 3AP cabinet(3AP1-DT).


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Type 3AT 2/3-DT

550

860

1800

1300

4000

50/63

Electrohydraulic mechanism

Rated voltage [kV]


Rated lighting impulse [kV]withstand voltage

Rated switching impulse [kV]withstand voltage

Rated nominal current up to [A]

Rated breaking current up to [kA]

Operating mechanism type

Technical data

Dead-Tank Circuit-Breakers for 550 kV

Circuit-breakerType 3AT2/3-DT

Composite insulators

The 3AT2/3-DT is available with bushingsmade from composite insulators –this has many practical advantages.The SIMOTEC® composite insulators man-ufactured by Siemens consist of a basicbody made of epoxy resin reinforced glassfibre tubes. The external tube surface iscoated with vulcanized silicon. As is thecase with porcelain insulators, the externalshape of the insulator has a multishedprofile. Field grading is implemented bymeans of a specially shaped screeningelectrode in the lower part of the compos-ite insulator.The bushings and the metal tank of thecircuit-breaker surround a common gasvolume. The composite insulator used onthe bushing of the 3AT2/3-DT is a one-piece insulating unit. Compared with con-ventional housings, composite insulatorsoffer a wide range of advantages in termsof economy, efficiency and safety.

Interrupter unit

The 3AT2/3-DT pole consists of two break-ing units in series impressive in the sheersimplicity of their design. The proven Siemenscontact system with double graphite noz-zles assures faultless operation, consist-ently high arc-quenching capacity and along operating life, even at high switchingfrequencies. Thanks to constant further de-velopment, optimization and consistentquality assurance, Siemens arc-quencingsystems meet all the requirements placedon modern high-voltage technology.

Hydraulic drive

The operating energy required for the3AT2/3-DT interrupters is provided by thehydraulic drive, which is manufactured in-house by Siemens. The functional principleof the hydraulic drive constitutes a techni-cally clear solution which offers certainfundamental advantages.Hydraulic drives provide high amounts ofenergy economically and reliably. In thisway, even the most demanding switchingrequirements can be mastered in shortopening times.Siemens hydraulic drives are maintenance-free and have a particulary long operatinglife. They meet the strictest criteria forenviromental acceptability. In this respect,too, Siemens hydraulic drives have proventhemselves throughout years of operation.

Fig. 31


Fax: ++ 49-3 03 86-2 58 67


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Dead-Tank Circuit-Breakers for 550 kV

Fig. 32: The 3AT2/3-DT circuit-breaker with SIMOTEC composite insulator bushings


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MO arresters are used in medium, highand extra-high-voltage power systems.Here, the very low protection level and thehigh energy absorption capability providedduring switching surges are especially im-portant. For high voltage levels, the simpleconstruction of MO arresters is always anadvantage.Another very important advantage of MOarresters is their high degree of reliabilitywhen used in areas with a problematicclimate, for example in coastal and desertareas, or regions affected by heavy indus-trial air pollution. Furthermore, some spe-cial applications have become possibleonly with the introduction of MO arresters.One instance is the protection of capacitorbanks in series reactive-power compen-sation equipment which requires extremlyhigh energy absorption capabilities.

Arresters with polymer housings

Fig. 34 shows two Siemens MO arresterswith different types of housing. In additionto what has been usual up to now – theporcelain housing – Siemens offers alsothe latest generation of high-voltage surgearresters with polymer housing.

Surge Arresters

Introduction

The main task of an arrester is to protectequipment from the effects of overvolt-ages. During normal operation, it shouldhave no negative effect on the powersystem. Moreover, the arrester must beable to withstand typical surges withoutincurring any damage. Nonlinear resistorswith the following properties fulfill theserequirements: Low resistance during surges so that

overvoltages are limited High resistance during normal operation,

so as to avoid negative effects on thepower system and

Sufficient energy absorption capabilityfor stable operation

With this kind of nonlinear resistor, thereis only a small flow of current when contin-uous operating voltage is being applied.When there are surges, however, excessenergy can be quickly removed from thepower system by a high discharge current.

Fig. 33: Current/voltage characteristics of a non-linear MO arrester

Fig. 34: Measurement of residual voltage onporcelain-housed (foreground) and polymer-housed(background) arresters

Nonlinear resistors

Nonlinear resistors, comprising metaloxide (MO), have proved especially suita-ble for this.The nonlinearity of MO resistors is consid-erably high. For this reason, MO arresters,as the arresters with MO resistors areknown today, do not need series gaps.Siemens has many years of experiencewith arresters – with the previous gappedSiC-arresters and the new gapless MO ar-resters – in low-voltage systems, distribu-tion systems and transmission systems.They are usually used for protecting trans-formers, generators, motors, capacitors,traction vehicles, cables and substations.There are special applications such as theprotection of Equipment in areas subject to

earthquakes or heavy pollution Surge-sensitive motors and dry-type

transformers Generators in power stations with

arresters which posses a high degreeof short-circuit current strength

Gas-insulated high-voltage metal-enclosed switchgear (GIS)

Thyristors in HVDC transmissioninstallations

Static compensators Airport lighting systems Electric smelting furnaces in the glass

and metals industries High-voltage cable sheaths Test laboratory apparatus.

Current through arrester Ia [A]

150 °C

20 °C115 °C

2

1

010-4

Rated voltage ÛR

Continuous operatingvoltage ÛC

10-3 10-2 10-1 102 103 1041 10

Arrester voltage referredto continuous operatingvoltage Û/ÛC


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Seal

Pressure relief diaphragm

Compressing spring

Metal oxide resistors

Composite polymer housingFRP tube/silicon sheds

Flange with gas diverter nozzle

Surge Arresters

Fig. 35: Cross-section of a polymer-housed arrester

Fig. 36: Gas-insulated metal-enclosed arrester(GIS arrester)

Fig. 35 shows the sectional view of suchan arrester. The housing consists of a fiber-glass-reinforced plastic tube with insulatingsheds made of silicon rubber. The advan-tages of this design which has the samepressure relief device as an arrester withporcelain housing are absolutely safe andreliable pressure relief characteristics, highmechanical strength even after pressurerelief and excellent pollution-resistant prop-erties. The very good mechanical featuresmean that Siemens arresters with polymerhousing (type 3EQ/R) can serve as postinsulators as well. The pollution-resistantproperties are the result of the water-repel-lent effect (hydrophobicity) of the siliconrubber, which even transfers its effects topollution.

The polymer-housed high-voltage arrest-er design chosen by Siemens and the high-quality materials used by Siemens providea whole series of advantages includinglong life and suitability for outdoor use,high mechanical stability and ease of dis-posal.Another important design shown in Fig. 36are the gas-insulated metal-enclosed surgearresters (GIS arresters) which have beenmade by Siemens for more then 25 years.There are two reasons why, when GIS ar-resters are used with gas-insulated switch-gear, they usually offer a higher protectivesafety margin than when outdoor-type ar-resters are used (see also IEC 60099-5,1996-02, Section 4.3.2.2.): Firstly, they canbe installed closer to the item to be pro-tected so that traveling wave effects can

be limited more effectively. Secondly, com-pared with the outdoor type, inductance ofthe installation is lower (both that of theconnecting conductors and that of the ar-rester itself). This means that the protec-tion offered by GIS arresters is much betterthan by any other method, especially in thecase of surges with a very steep rate ofrise or high frequency, to which gas-insu-lated switchgear is exceptionally sensitive.Please find an overview of the completerange of Siemens arresters in Figs. 37 and 38,pages 26 and 27.

Access cover withpressure reliefdevice and filter

Spring contact

Enclosure

Grading hood

Metal-oxide resistors

Supporting rods

SF6-SF6 bushing(SF6-Oil bushing on request)


Fax: ++49-3 03 86-26721e-mail: [email protected]


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Low-Voltage and Medium-Voltage Arrestersand Limiters (230/400 V to 52 kV)

Fig. 37: Low and medium-voltage arresters

Type Low-voltage arresters Medium-voltage arrestersand limiters

3EA2 3EF13EF23EF33EF43EF5

3EC3 3EE2 3EH2 3EG5 3EK5 3EK7 3EQ1-B

Low-voltageover-headline sys-tems

Motors,dry-typetransformers,airfield light-ing systems,sheath voltagelimiters,protectionof convertersfor drives

DC sys-tems (loco-motives,overheadcontactlines)

Gene-rators,motors,meltingfurnaces,6-arresterconnec-tions,powerplants

Distri-butionsystemsmetal-enclosedgas-in-sulatedswitch-gearwithplug-inconnec-tion

Distri-butionsystemsandmedium-voltageswitch-gear



AC and DClocomotives,overheadcontact lines

1 10 3 30 45 30 60 30 25

12 4 36 52 36 72.5 36 30

1 15 4 45 52 45 75 45 37 (AC) 4 (DC)

5 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

– 3EF1/2 0.83EF3 93EF4 12.53EF5 8

10 10 1.3 3 5 3 10

1 x 38020 x 250

3EF4 15003EF5 1200

1200 1200 200 300 500 300 1200

Line dis-connec-tion

40 40 300 16 20 20 20 40

Polymer Polymer Porcelain Porcelain Metal Porcelain Porcelain Polymer Polymer

Applications

Nom. syst. [kV]voltage (max.)

Highest [kV]voltage forequipment (max.)

Maximum [kV]ratedvoltage

Nominal [kA]dischargecurrent

Maximum [kJ/kV]energyabsorbingcapability(at thermalstability)

Maximum [A]longdurationcurrentimpulse,2 ms

Maximum [kA]short-circuitrating

Housingmaterial


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

High-Voltage Arresters(72.5 to 800 kV)

Fig. 38: High-voltage arresters

Type Metal-oxide surge arresters3EP1 3EP4 3EP2 3EP3 3EQ1 3EQ4 3EQ3

3ER33EP2-K 3EP2-K3 3EP3-K

Medium-andhigh-voltagesystems,outdoorinstal-lations


High-voltagesystems,outdoorinstal-lations

High-voltagesystems,outdoorinstal-lations,HVDC,SC & SVCappli-cations


High-voltagesystems,outdoorinstal-lations

High-voltagesystems,outdoorinstal-lations,HVDC,SC & SVCappli-cations

High-voltagesystems,metal-enclosedgas-insulatedswitch-gear



60 150 500 765 275 500 765 150 150 500

72.5 170 550 800 300 550 800 170 170 550

84 147 468 612 240 468 612 180 180 444

10 10 10/20 10/20 10 10/20 20 10/20 10/20 20

2 3 5 5 3 5 5 4 4 5

5 8 12.5 20 8 12.5 20 10 10 12.5

500 850 1500 3900 850 1500 3900 1200 1200 1500

40 65 65 100 50 65 80 – – –

2.12) 4.52) 12.52) 342)

63) 213) 723) – – –

Porcelain Porcelain Porcelain Porcelain Polymer1) Polymer1) Polymer1) Metal Metal Metal

Applications

Nom. syst. [kV]voltage(max.)

Highest [kV]voltage forequip. (max.)

Maximum [kV]ratedvoltage

Nominal [kA]dischargecurrent

Maximumlinedischargeclass

Maximum [kJ/kV]energyabsorbingcapability(at thermalstability)

Maximum [A]longdurationcurrentimpulse,2 ms

Maximum [kA]short-circuitrating

Minimum [kNm]2)

breakingmoment

Maximum [MPSL]permissibleserviceload

Housingmaterial1) Silicon rubber sheds 2) Acc. to DIN 48113 3) Acc. to IEC TC 37 WG5 03.99; > 50% of this value are maintained after pressure relief


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Gas-Insulated Switchgear for Substations

Introduction

Common characteristic features ofswitchgear installation

Because of its small size and outstandingcompatibility with the environment, SF6 -insulated switchgear (GIS) is gaining con-stantly on other types. Siemens has beena leader in this sector from the very start.The concept of SF6 - insulated metal-en-closed high-voltage switchgear has proveditself in more than 70,000 bay operatingyears in over 6,000 installations in all partsof the world. It offers the following out-standing advantages.

Minimal space requirements

The availability and price of land play animportant part in selecting the type ofswitchgear to be used. Siting problemsarise in Large towns Industrial conurbations Mountainous regions with narrow

valleys Underground power stationsIn cases such as these, SF6-insulatedswitchgear is replacing conventionalswitchgear because of its very small spacerequirements.

Full protectionagainst contact with live parts

The all-round metal enclosure affordsmaximum safety for personnel underall operating and fault conditions.

Protection against pollution

Its metal enclosure fully protects theswitchgear interior against environmentaleffects such as salt deposits in coastalregions, industrial vapors and precipitates,as well as sandstorms. The compactswitchgear can be installed in buildingsof uncomplicated design in order to mini-mize the cost of cleaning and inspectionand to make necessary repairs independ-ent of weather conditions.

Free choice of installation site

The small site area required for SF6-insu-lated switchgear saves expensive gradingand foundation work, e.g. in permafrostzones. Other advantages are the shorterection times and the fact that switchgearinstalled indoors can be serviced regard-less of the climate or the weather.

Protection of the environment

The necessity to protect the environmentoften makes it difficult to erect outdoorswitchgear of conventional design, where-as buildings containing compact SF6-insu-lated switchgear can almost always bedesigned so that they blend well with thesurroundings.SF6-insulated metal-enclosed switchgearis, due to the modular system, very flexibleand can meet all requirements of configu-ration given by network design and operat-ing conditions.

Each circuit-breaker bay includes the fullcomplement of disconnecting and ground-ing switches (regular or make-proof),instrument transformers, control and pro-tection equipment, interlocking and moni-toring facilities commonly used for thistype of installation (Fig. 39).Beside the conventional circuit-breakerbay, other arrangements can be suppliedsuch as single-bus, ring cable with load-breakswitches and circuit-breakers, single-busarrangement with bypass-bus, coupler andbay for triplicate bus. Combined circuit-breaker and load-break switch feeder, ringcable with load-break switches, etc. arefurthermore available for the 145 kV level.

Fig. 39: Typical circuit arrangements of SF6-switchgear


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Main product range of GISfor substations

SF6 switchgear up to 550 kV(the total product range covers GIS from66 up to 800 kV rated voltage): Fig. 40.The development of the switchgear isalways based on an overall production con-cept, which assures the achievement ofthe high technical standards requiredof the HV switchgear whilst providing themaximum customer benefit.

This objective is attained only by incorpo-rating all processes in the quality manage-ment system, which has been introducedand certified according to DIN EN ISO9001 (EN 29001).Siemens GIS switchgear meets allthe performance, quality and reliabilitydemands such as:

Compact space-saving design

means uncomplicated foundations, a widerange of options in the utilization of space,less space taken up by the switchgear.

Fig. 40: Main product range

Minimal-weight construction

through the use of aluminum alloy and theexploitation of innovations in developmentsuch as computer-aided design tools.

Safe encapsulation

means an outstanding level of safetybased on new manufacturing methodsand optimized shape of enclosures.

Environmental compatibility

means no restrictions on choice of locationthrough minimal space requirement, ex-tremely low noise emission and effectivegas sealing system (leakage < 1% per yearper gas compartment).

Economical transport

means simplified and fast transport andreduced costs because of maximum possi-ble size of shipping units.

Minimal operating costs

means the switchgear is practically mainte-nance-free, e.g. contacts of circuit-breakersand disconnectors designed for extremelylong endurance, motor-operated mecha-nisms self-lubricating for life, corrosion-freeenclosure. This ensures that the first in-spection will not be necessary until after25 years of operation.

Reliability

means our overall product concept whichincludes, but is not limited to, the use offinite elements method (FEM), three-dimensional design programs, stereolitho-graphy, and electrical field developmentprograms assuring the high standard ofquality.

Smooth and efficientinstallation and commissioning

transport units are fully assembled andtested at the factory and filled with SF6 gasat reduced pressure. Plug connection of allswitches, all of which are motorized, fur-ther improves the speediness of site instal-lation and substantially reduces field wiringerrors.

Routine tests

All measurements are automatically docu-mented and stored in the EDP informationsystem, which enables quick access tomeasured data even if years have passed.


Fax: ++49-9131-7-34498e-mail: [email protected]

500

4480

5170

All dimensions in mm

Switchgear type 8DN8 8DN9 8DQ1

Details on page 2/30 2/31 2/32

Rated voltage [kV] up to 145 up to 245 up to 550

Rated power- [kV] up to 275 up to 460 up to 740frequencywithstand voltage

Rated lightning [kV] up to 650 up to 1050 up to 1800impulse withstandvoltage

Rated switching [kV] – up to 850 up to 1250impulse withstandvoltage

Rated (normal) current [A] up to 3150 up to 3150 up to 6300busbar

Rated (normal) current [A] up to 2500 up to 3150 up to 4000feeder

Rated breaking [kA] up to 40 up to 50 up to 63current

Rated short-time [kA] up to 40 up to 50 up to 63withstand current

Rated peak [kA] up to 108 up to 135 up to 170withstand current

Inspection [Years] > 25 > 25 > 25

Bay width [mm] 800 1200/1500 3600

4740

3470

3500

2850


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 41: Switchgear bay 8DN8 up to 145 kV

Fig. 42: 8DN8 switchgear for rated voltage 145 kV Fig. 43

SF6-insulated switchgearup to 145 kV, type 8DN8

Three-phase enclosures are used for type8DN8 switchgear in order to achieve ex-tremely low component dimensions. Thelow bay weight ensures minimal floorload-ing and eliminates the need for complexfoundations. Its compact dimensions andlow weight enable it to be installed almostanywhere. This means that capital costs canbe reduced by using smaller buildings, orby making use of existing ones, for instancewhen medium voltage switchgearis replaced by 145 kV GIS.The bay ist based on a circuit-breakermounted on a supporting frame (Fig. 41).A special multifunctional cross-couplingmodule combines the functions of the dis-connector and earthing switch in a three-position switching device. It can be used as an active busbar with integrated discon-

nector and work-in-progress earthingswitch (Fig. 41/Pos. 3 and 4),

outgoing feeder module with integrateddisconnector and work-in-progress earth-ing switch (Fig. 41/Pos. 5),

busbar sectionalizer with busbar earthing.For cable termination, a cable terminationmodule can be equipped with either con-ventional sealing ends or the latest plug-inconnectors (Fig. 41/Pos. 9). Flexible single-pole modules are used to connect overheadlines and transformers by using a splittingmodule which links the 3-phase encapsulatedswitchgear to the single pole connections.Thanks to the compact design, up to threecompletely assembled and works-testedbays can be shipped as one transport unit.Fast erection and commissioning on siteensure the highest possible quality.The feeder control and protection can belocated in a bay-integrated local controlcubicle, mounted in the front of each bay(Fig. 42). It goes without saying that wesupply our gas-insulated switchgear with alltypes of currently available bay control sys-tems – ranging from contactor circuit con-trols to digital processor bus-capable baycontrol systems, for example the modernSICAM HV system based on serial buscommunication. This system offers Online diagnosis and trend analysis ena-

bling early warning, fault recognition andcondition monitoring.

Individual parameterization, ensuring thebest possible incorporation of customizedcontrol facilities.

Use of modern current and voltage sensors.This results in a longer service life and loweroperating costs, in turn attaining a consider-able reduction in life cycle costs.

3 4

175

68

9

Gas-tight bushingGas-permeable bushing

1 Interrupter unit of thecircuit-breaker

2 Spring-stored energymechanism with circuit-breaker control unit

3 Busbar I with disconnectorand earthing system

4 Busbar II with disconnectorand earthing system

5 Outgoing feeder modulewith disconnector andearthing switch

6 Make-proof earthing switch(high-speed)

7 Current transformer8 Voltage transformer9 Cable sealing end

10 Integrated local control cubicle

4

7

9

8

10

5

2

3

1 6


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


SF6-insulated switchgearup to 245 kV, type 8DN9

The clear bay configuration of the light-weight and compact 8DN9 switchgear isevident at first sight. Control and monitoringfacilities are easily accessible in spite ofthe compact design of the switchgear.The horizontally arranged circuit-breakerforms the basis of every bay configuration.The operating mechanism is easily acces-sible from the operator area. The other baymodules – of single-phase encapsulateddesign like the circuit-breaker module – arelocated on top of the circuit-breaker. Thethree-phase encapsulated passive busbaris partitioned off from the active equipment.Thanks to “single-function” assemblies(assignment of just one task to each module)and the versatile modular structure, evenunconventional arrangements can be setup out of a pool of only 20 different modules.The modules are connected to each otherby a standard interface which allows anextensive range of bay structures. Theswitchgear design with standardized mod-ules and the scope of services mean thatall kinds of bay structures can be set up ina minimal area.The compact design permits the supply ofdouble bays fully assembled, tested in thefactory and filled with SF6 gas at reducedpressure, which assures smooth and effi-cient installation and commissioning.The following major feeder control levelfunctions are performed in the local controlcubicle for each bay, which is integrated inthe operating front of the 8DN9 switch-gear: Fully interlocked local operation and

state-indication of all switching devicesmanaged reliably by the Siemens digitalswitchgear interlock system

Practical dialog between the digital feed-er protection system and central proces-sor of the feeder control system

Visual display of all signals required foroperation and monitoring, together withmeasured values for current, voltage andpower

Protection of all auxiliary current andvoltage transformer circuits

Transmission of all feeder information tothe substation control and protectionsystem

Factory assembly and tests are significantparts of the overall production conceptmentioned above. Two bays at a time un-dergo mechanical and electrical testingwith the aid of computer-controlled stands. Fig. 45: 8DN9 switchgear for

rated voltage 245 kV

Fig. 44: Switchgear bay 8DN9 up to 245 kV

3

1

7

109

8

Gas-tight bushingGas-permeable bushing

1 Circuit-breaker interrupter unit2 Spring-stored energy

mechanism with circuit-breakercontrol unit

3 Busbar disconnector I4 Busbar I5 Busbar disconnector II6 Busbar II7 Earthing switch

(work-in-progress)

8 Earthing switch(work-in-progress)

9 Outgoing-disconnector10 Make-proof earthing switch

(high-speed)11 Current transformer12 Voltage transformer13 Cable sealing end14 Integrated local control cubicle

5

11

12

13

4 6

7 910

811

5

12

132

3

1

14


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SF6-insulated switchgearup to 550 kV, type 8DQ1

The GIS type 8DQ1 is a modular switch-gear system for high power switching sta-tions with individual enclosure of all mod-ules for the three-phase system.The base unit for the switchgear forms ahorizontally arranged circuit-breaker on topof which are mounted the housings con-taining disconnectors, grounding switches,current transformers, etc. The busbar mod-ules are also single-phase encapsulatedand partitioned off from the active equip-ment.As a matter of course the busbar modulesof this switchgear system are passiveelements, too.Additional main characteristic features ofthe switchgear installation are: Circuit-breakers with two interrupter

units up to operating voltages of 550 kVand breaking currents of 63 kA (from63 kA to 100 kA, circuit-breakers withfour interrupter units have to be con-sidered)

Low switchgear center of gravity bymeans of circuit-breaker arranged hori-zontally in the lower portion

Utilization of the circuit-breaker trans-port frame as supporting device for theentire bay

The use of only a few modules andcombinations of equipment in one enclo-sure reduces the length of sealing facesand consequently lowers the risk ofleakage

Fig. 47: 8DQ1 switchgear for rated voltage 420 kV


Fig. 46: Switchgear bay 8DQ1 up to 550 kV

10 Grounding switch11 Current transformer12 Cable sealing end13 Local control cubicle14 Gas monitoring unit

(as part of control unit)15 Circuit-breaker control unit16 Electrohydraulic operating unit17 Oil tank18 Hydraulic storage cylinder

1 Circuit-breaker2 Busbar disconnector I3 Busbar I4 Busbar disconnector II5 Busbar II6 Grounding switch7 Voltage transformer8 Make-proof grounding

switch9 Cable disconnector

12 11 10 9 8 7 1 6

4

5

3

2

181716151413

12

5

4

6

11110

8

9

3

2

7


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Some examples for specialarrangement

Gas-insulated switchgear – usually accom-modated in buildings (as shown in a tower-type substation) – is expedient wheneverthe floor area is very expensive or restrict-ed or whenever ambient conditions neces-sitate their use (Fig. 50, page 2/34).For smaller switching stations, or in casesof expansion when there is no advantagein constructing a building, a favorablesolution is to install the substation in acontainer (Fig. 49).

Mobile containerized switchgear –even for high voltage

At medium-voltage levels, mobile contain-erized switchgear is the state of the art.But even high-voltage switching stationscan be built in this way and economicallyoperated in many applications.The heart is the metal-enclosed SF6-in-sulated switchgear, installed either in asheet-steel container or in a block housemade of prefabricated concrete elements.In contrast to conventional stationaryswitchgear, there is no need for complicat-ed constructions; mobile switching sta-tions have their own ”building“.

Mobile containerized switching stationscan be of single or multi-bay design usinga large number of different circuits andarrangements. All the usual connectioncomponents can be employed, such asoutdoor bushings, cable adapter boxes andSF6 tubular connections. If necessary, allthe equipment for control and protectionand for the local supply can be accommo-dated in the container. This allows exten-

sively independent operation of the instal-lation on site. Containerized switchgear ispreassembled in the factory and ready foroperation. On site, it is merely necessaryto set up the containers, fit the exteriorsystem parts and make the external con-nections. Shifting the switchgear assemblywork to the factory enhances the qualityand operational reliability. Mobile container-ized switchgear requires little space andusually fits in well with the environment.Rapid availability and short commissioningtimes are additional, significant advantagesfor the operators. Considerable cost re-ductions are achieved in the planning, con-struction work and assembly.Building authority approvals are either notrequired or only in a simple form. The in-stallation can be operated at various loca-tions in succession, and adaptation to localcircumstances is not a problem. These arethe possible applications for containerizedstations: Intermediate solutions for the

modernization of switching stations Low-cost transitional solutions when

tedious formalities are involved in thenew construction of transformer sub-stations, such as in the procurement ofland or establishing cable routes

Quick erection as an emergency stationin the event of malfunctions in existingswitchgear

Switching stations for movable, geo-thermal power plants

GIS up to 245 kV in a standard container

The dimensions of the 8DN9 switchgearmade it possible to accommodate all activecomponents of the switchgear (circuit-breaker, disconnector, grounding switch)and the local control cabinet in a standardcontainer.The floor area of 20 ft x 8 ft complieswith the ISO 668 standard. Although thecontainer is higher than the standarddimension of 8 ft, this will not cause anyproblems during transportation as provenby previously supplied equipment.German Lloyd, an approval authority, hasalready issued a test certificate for an evenhigher container construction.The standard dimensions and ISO cornerfittings will facilitate handling during trans-port in the 20 ft frame of a container shipand on a low-loader truck.Operating staff can enter the containerthrough two access doors.

Rent a GIS

Containerized gas-insulated high voltagesubstations for hire are now available. Inthis way, we can step into every breach,instantly and in a remarkably cost-effectivemanner.Whether for a few weeks, months or even2 to 3 years, a fair rent makes our InstantPower Service unbeatably economical.

Fig. 48: Containerized 8DN9 switchgear with stub feed in this example

Fig. 49: 8DN9 switchgear bay in a container

7 Current transformer 8 Outgoing

disconnector 9 Make-proof earthing

switch10 Voltage transformer11 Outdoor termination

1 Cable termination2 Make-proof earthing

switch3 Outgoing

disconnector4 Earthing switch5 Circuit breaker6 Earthing switch

1

2

3

6

4

5

7

9

10

11

8


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 50: Special arrangement for limited space. Sectional view of a building showing the compact nature ofgas-insulated substations

Specification guide formetal-enclosed SF6-insulatedswitchgear

The points below are not considered tobe comprehensive, but are a selection ofthe important ones.

General

These specifications cover the technicaldata applicable to metal-enclosed SF6 gas-insulated switchgear for switching anddistribution of power in cable and/or over-head line systems and at transformers.Key technical data are contained in thedata sheet and the single-line diagramattached to the inquiry.A general “Single-line diagram” and asketch showing the general arrangementof the substation and the transmission lineexist and shall form part of a proposal.The switchgear quoted shall be completeto form a functional, safe and reliable sys-tem after installation, even if certain partsrequired to this end are not specificallycalled for.

Applicable standards

All equipment shall be designed, built,tested and installed to the latest revisionsof the applicable IEC 60 standards (IECPubl. 60517 “High-voltage metal-enclosedswitchgear for rated voltages of 72.5 kVand above”, IEC Publ. 60129 “Alternatingcurrent disconnectors (isolators) andgrounding switches”, IEC Publ. 60056“High-voltage alternating-current circuit-breakers”), and IEC Publ. 60044 for instru-ment transformers.

Local conditions

The equipment described herein will beinstalled indoors. Suitable lightweight,prefabricated buildings shall be quoted ifavailable from the supplier.Only a flat concrete floor will be providedby the buyer with possible cutouts in caseof cable installation. The switchgear shallbe equipped with adjustable supports(feet). If steel support structures are re-quired for the switchgear, these shall beprovided by the supplier.For design purposes indoor temperaturesof – 5 °C to +40 °C and outdoor temper-atures of – 25 °C to +40 °C shall be consid-ered.For parts to be installed outdoors (over-head line connections) the applicable con-ditions in IEC Publication 60517 shall alsobe observed.

Air con-ditioningsystem

26.90

23.20

Relay room

Groundingresistor

Shuntreactor

13.8 kVswitchgear

15.95

11.50

8.90Cable duct

40 MVA transformer

Radiators

Compensator

2.20

–1.50

Gas-insulatedswitchgear type8DN9

All dimensions in m


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Work, material and design

Aluminium or aluminium alloys shall beused preferabely for the enclosures.Maximum reliability through minimumamount of erection work on site is re-quired. Subassemblies must be erectedand tested in the factory to the maximumextent. The size of the subassemblies shallbe limited only by the transport conditions.The material and thickness of the enclo-sure shall be selected to withstand an in-ternal arc and to prevent a burn-through orpuncturing of the housing within the firststage of protection, referred to a short-circuit current of 40 kA.Normally exterior surfaces of the switch-gear shall not require painting. If done foraesthetic reasons, surfaces shall be appro-priately prepared before painting, i.e. allenclosures are free of grease and blasted.Thereafter the housings shall be paintedwith no particular thickness required butto visually cover the surface for decorativereasons only. The interior color shall belight (white or light grey).All joints shall be machined and all cast-ings spotfaced for bolt heads, nuts andwashers.Assemblies shall have reliable provisionsto absorb thermal expansion and contrac-tions created by temperature cycling. Forthis purpose metal bellows-type compen-sators shall be installed. They must beprovided with adjustable tensioners.All solid post insulators shall be providedwith ribs (skirts).For supervision of the gas within the en-closures, density monitors with electricalcontacts for at least two pressure levelsshall be installed. The circuit-breakers,however, might be monitored by densitygauges fitted in circuit-breaker controlunits.The manufacturer assures that the pres-sure loss within each individual gas com-partment – and not referred to thetotal switchgear installation only – will benot more than 1% per year per gas com-partment.

Each gas-filled compartment shall beequipped with static filters of a capacityto absorb any water vapor penetrating intothe switchgear installation over a periodof at least 25 years.Long intervals between the necessary in-spections shall keep the maintenance costto a minimum. A minor inspection shallonly become necessary after ten years anda major inspection preferably after a periodexceeding 25 years of operation, unlessthe permissible number of operations ismet at an earlier date.

Arrangement and modules

ArrangementThe arrangement shall be single-phase orthree-phase enclosed.The assembly shall consist of completelyseparate pressurized sections designedto minimize the risk of damage to person-nel or adjacent sections in the event of afailure occurring within the equipment.Rupture diaphragms shall be provided toprevent the enclosures from uncontrolledbursting and suitable deflectors provideprotection for the operating personnel.In order to achieve maximum operatingreliability, no internal relief devices maybe installed because adjacent compart-ments would be affected.Modular design, complete segregation,arc-proof bushings and “plug-in” connec-tion pieces shall allow ready removal ofany section and replacement with mini-mum disturbance of the remaining pres-surized switchgear.

BusbarsAll busbars shall be three-phase or single-phase enclosed and be plug-connectedfrom bay to bay.

Circuit-breakersThe circuit-breaker shall be of the singlepressure (puffer) type with one interrupterper phase*. Heaters for the SF6 gas arenot permitted.The arc chambers and contacts of thecircuit-breaker shall be freely accessible.The circuit-breaker shall be designed tominimize switching overvoltages and alsoto be suitable for out-of-phase switching.The specified arc interruption performancemust be consistent over the entire operat-ing range, from line-charging currents tofull short-circuit currents.

The circuit breaker shall be designed towithstand at least 18–20 operations(depending on the voltage level) at fullshort-circuit rating without the necessityto open the circuit-breaker for service ormaintenance.The maximum tolerance for phase dis-agreement shall be 3 ms, i.e. until the lastpole has been closed or opened respec-tively after the first.A standard station battery required forcontrol and tripping may also be used forrecharging the operating mechanism.The energy storage system (hydraulic orspring operating system) will hold suf-ficient energy for all standard IEC close-open duty cycles.The control system shall provide alarmsignals and internal interlocks, but inhibittripping or closing of the circuit-breakerwhen there is insufficient energy capacityin the energy storage system, or theSF6 density within the circuit-breaker hasdropped below a minimum permissiblelevel.

DisconnectorsAll isolating switches shall be of the single-break type. DC motor operation (110, 125,220 or 250 V), completely suitable for re-mote operation, and a manual emergencydrive mechanism is required.Each motor-drive shall be self-containedand equipped with auxiliary switches inaddition to the mechanical indicators.Life lubrication of the bearings is required.

Grounding switchesWork-in-progress grounding switches shallgenerally be provided on either side of thecircuit-breaker. Additional grounding switch-es may be used for the grounding of bussections or other groups of the assembly.DC motor operation (110, 125, 220 or250 V), completely suitable for remoteoperation, and a manual emergency drivemechanism is required.Each motor drive shall be self-containedand equipped with auxiliary positionswitches in addition to the mechanical in-dicators. Life lubrication of the bearingsis required.

* two interrupters for voltages exceeding 245 kV


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 52: Cable termination module –Cable termination modules conforming to IEC areavailable for connecting the switchgear to high-volt-age cables. The standardized construction of thesemodules allows connection of various cross-sectionsand insulation types. Parallel cable connections forhigher rated currents are also possible using thesame module.

Fig. 53: Outdoor termination module –High-voltage bushings are used for transition fromSF6-to-air as insulating medium. The bushings can bematched to the particular requirements with regardto arcing and creepage distances. The connectionwith the switchgear is made by means of variable-design angular-type modules.

Fig. 51: Three phase cable termination module.Example for plug-in type cables.

Make-proof high-speed grounding switchesshall generally be installed at cable andoverhead-line terminals. DC motor opera-tion (110, 125, 220 or 250 V), completelysuitable for remote operation, and a manu-al emergency drive mechanism is required.Each motor drive shall be self-containedand equipped with auxiliary positionswitches in addition to the mechanical in-dicators. Life lubrication of the bearingsis required.These switches shall be equipped witha rapid closing mechanism to provide fault-making capability.

Instrument transformersCurrent transformers (CTs) shall be of thedry-type design not using epoxy resin asinsulation material. Cores shall be providedwith the accuracies and burdens as shownon the SLD. Voltage transformers shall beof the inductive type, with ratings up to200 VA. They shall be foil-gas-insulated.

Cable terminations

Single or three-phase, SF6 gas-insulated,metal-enclosed cable-end housings shallbe provided. The stress cone and suitablesealings to prevent oil or gas from leakinginto the SF6 switchgear are part of thecable manufacturer’s supply. A mating con-nection piece, which has to be fitted to thecable end, shall be made available by theswitchgear supplier.The cable end housing shall be suitablefor oil-type, gas-pressure-type and plastic-insulated (PE, PVC, etc.) cables as speci-fied on the SLD, or the data sheets.Facilities to safely isolate a feeder cableand to connect a high-voltage test cableto the switchgear or the cable shall beprovided.

Overhead line terminations

Terminations for the connection of over-head lines shall be supplied completewith SF6-to-air bushings, but without lineclamps.

Fig. 55: Transformer termination modules

Fig. 54: Transformer/reactor termination module –These termination modules form the direct connec-tion between the GIS and oil-insulated transformersor reactance coils. They can be matched economi-cally to various transformer dimensions by way ofstandardized modules.

Control

An electromechanical or solid-state inter-locking control board shall be supplied as astandard for each switchgear bay. This fail-safe interlock system will positively pre-vent maloperations. Mimic diagrams andposition indicators shall give clear demon-stration of the operation to the operatingpersonnel.Provisions for remote control shall besupplied.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 56: The modular system of the 8DQ1 switchgear enables all conceivable customer requirements to be metwith just a small number of components

Tests required

Partial discharge tests

All solid insulators fitted into the switch-gear shall be subjected to a routine partialdischarge test prior to being installed.No measurable partial discharge is allowedat 1.1 line-to-line voltage (approx. twicethe phase-to-ground voltage). This test en-sures maximum safety against insulatorfailure, good long-term performance andthus a very high degree of reliability.

Pressure tests

Each cast aluminium enclosure of theswitchgear shall be pressure-tested to atleast double the service pressure.

Leakage tests

Leakage tests performed on the subassem-blies shall ensure that the flanges and coverfaces are clean, and that the guaranteedleakage rate will not be exceeded.

Power frequency tests

Each assembly shall be subjected to pow-er-frequency withstand tests to verify thecorrect installation of the conductors andalso the fact that the insulator surfaces areclean and the switchgear as a whole is notpolluted inside.

Additional technical data

The supplier shall point out all dimensions,weights and other applicable data of theswitchgear that may affect the local con-ditions and handling of the equipment.Drawings showing the assembly of theswitchgear shall be part of the quotation.

Instructions

Detailed instruction manuals about instal-lation, operation and maintenance of theequipment shall be supplied by the con-tractor in case of an order.

Scope of supply

For all types of GIS Siemens suppliesthe following items and observes theseinterface points: Switchgear bay with circuit-breaker inter-

rupters, disconnectors and groundingswitches, instrument transformers, andbusbar housings as specified. For thedifferent feeder types, the following lim-its apply:– Overhead line feeder:

the connecting stud at the SF6-to-airbushing without the line clamp.

– Cable feeder:according to IEC 60859 the termina-tion housing, conductor coupling, andconnecting plate are part of the GISdelivery, while the cable stress conewith matching flange is part of the ca-ble supply (see Fig. 52 on page 2/36).

– Transformer feeder:connecting flange at switchgear bayand connecting bus ducts to trans-former including any expansion jointare delivered by Siemens. The SF6-to-oil bushings plus terminal enclo-sures are part of the transformerdelivery, unless agreed otherwise(see Fig. 54 on page 2/36)*.

Each feeder bay is equipped withgrounding pads. The local groundingnetwork and the connections to theswitchgear are in the delivery scopeof the installation contractor.

Initial SF6-gas filling for the entireswitchgear as supplied by Siemens isincluded. All gas interconnections fromthe switchgear bay to the integral gasservice and monitoring panel are sup-plied by Siemens as well.

Hydraulic oil for all circuit-breaker operat-ing mechanisms is supplied with theequipment.

Terminals and circuit protection for aux-iliary drive and control power are pro-vided with the equipment. Feeder cir-cuits and cables, and installation materialfor them are part of the installation con-tractor’s supply.

Local control, monitoring, and interlock-ing panels are supplied for each circuit-breaker bay to form completely oper-ational systems. Terminals for remotemonitoring and control are provided.

Mechanical support structures aboveground are supplied by Siemens; em-bedded steel and foundation work ispart of the installation contractor’s scope.

* Note: this interface point should always be closelycoordinated between switchgear manufacturer andtransformer supplier.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Gas-Insulated Transmission Lines (GIL)

Introduction

For high-power transmission systemswhere overhead lines are not suitable,alternatives are gas-insulated transmissionlines (GIL).The GIL exhibits the following differencesin comparison with cables: High power ratings

(transmission capacity up to 3000 MVAper System)

High overload capability Suitable for long distances

(100 km and more without compensa-tion of reactive power)

High short-circuit withstand capability(including internal arc faults)

Possibility of direct connection to gas-insulated switchgear (GIS) and gas-insu-lated arresters without cable entrancefitting

Multiple earthing points possible Non-flammable, no fire risk in case of

failuresThe innovations in the latest Siemens GILdevelopment are the considerable reduc-tion of costs and the introduction of buriedlaying technique for GIL for long-distancepower transmission.SF6 has been replaced by a gas mixtureof SF6 and N2 as insulating medium.

Siemens experience

Back in the 1960s with the introduction ofsulphur hexafluoride (SF6) as an insulatingand switching gas, the basis was found forthe development of gas-insulated switch-gear (GIS).On the basis of GIS experience, Siemensdeveloped SF6 gas-insulated lines to trans-mit electrical energy too. In the early 1970sinitial projects were planned and imple-mented. Such gas-insulated lines wereusually used within substations as busbarsor bus ducts to connect gas-insulatedswitchgear with overhead lines, the aimbeing to reduce clearances in comparisonto air-insulated overhead lines.Implemented projects include GIL laying intunnels, in sloping galleries, in verticalshafts and in open air installation.Flanging as well as welding has been ap-plied as jointing technique.

The gas-insulated transmission line tech-nique is a highly reliable system in termsof mechanical and electrical failures. Oncea system is commissioned and in service,it runs reliably without any dielectrical ormechanical failures as experience over thecourse of 20 years shows. For example,one particular Siemens GIL will not under-go its scheduled inspection after 20 yearsof service, as there has been no indicationof any weak point.Fig. 57 shows the arrangement of sixphases in a tunnel.

Basic design

In order to meet mechanical stability crite-ria, gas-insulated lines need minimumcross-sections of enclosure and conductor.With these minimum cross-sections, highpower transmission ratings are given.Due to the gas as insulating medium, lowcapacitive loads are given so that compen-sation of reactive power is not needed,even for long distances of 100 km andmore.

Reduction of SF6 content

Several tests have been carried out inSiemens facilities as well as in other testlaboratories world-wide since many years.Results of these investigations show thatthe bulk of the insulating gas for industrialprojects involving a considerable amountof gas should be nitrogen, a nontoxic nat-ural gas.However, another insulating gas should beadded to nitrogen in order to improve theinsulating capability and to minimize sizeand pressure. A N2/SF6 gas mixture withhigh nitrogen content (and sulphur hexa-fluoride portion as low as possible) wasfinally chosen as insulating medium.

Fig. 58: Long-term test set-up at the IPH, Berlin

The characteristics of N2/SF6 gas mixturesshow that with an SF6 content of only15–25% and a slightly higher pressure,the insulating capability of pure SF6 can beattained. Besides, the arcing behavior isimproved through this mixture. Tests haveproven that there would be no externaldamage or fire caused by an internal fail-ure.The technical data of the GIL are shown inFig. 59.

Fig. 57: GIL arrangement in the tunnel of the Wehrpumped storage station(4000 m length, in service since 1975)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Technical data

up to 550 kV

2000 – 4600 A

1500 – 3000 MVA

≈ 60 nF/km

1–100 km

10%/90%up to 35%/65%

directly buried

in tunnels/sloping galleries/vertical shafts

open air installation

Rated voltage

Rated current lr

Transmissioncapacity

Capacitance

Typical length

Gas mixture SF6/N2ranging from

Laying

clean assembly and productivity is enhan-ced by a high level of automation of theoverall process.

Anti-corrosion protection

Directly buried gas-insulated transmissionlines will be safeguarded by a passive andactive corrosion protection system. Thepassive corrosion protection system com-prises a PE or PP coating and assures atleast 40 years of protection. The active cor-rosion protection system provides protec-tion potential in relation to the aluminumsheath. An important requirement takeninto account is the situation of an earthfault with a high current of up to 63 kA toearth.

Testing

The GIL is already tested according tothe report IEC 61640 (1998) “Rigid high-voltage, gas-insulated transmission linesfor voltages of 72.5 kV and above.”

Long-term performances

Besides nearly 25 years of field experiencewith GIL installations world wide, the long-term performance of the GIL for long-dis-tance installations has been proven by theindependent test laboratory IPH, Berlin,Germany and the Berlin power utilityBEWAG according to long-term test proce-

D

Gas-Insulated Transmission Lines (GIL)

Jointing technique

In order to improve the gas-tightnessand to facilitate laying, flanges have beenavoided as jointing technique. Instead,welding has been chosen to join the vari-ous GIL construction units.The welding process is highly automated,with the use of an orbital welding machineto ensure high quality of the joints. Thisorbital welding machine contributes to highproductivity in the welding process andtherefore speeds up laying. The reliabilityof the welding process is controlled by anintegrated computerized qualityassurance system.

Laying

The most recently developed SiemensGILs are scheduled for directly buriedlaying.The laying technique must be as compat-ible as possible with the landscape andmust take account of the sequence ofseasons. The laying techniques for pipe-lines have been improved over many yearsand they are applicable for GIL as a ”pipe-line for electrical current“too. However,the GIL needs slightly different treatmentwhere the pipeline technique has to beadapted.The laying process is illustratedin Fig. 60.The assembly area needs to be protectedagainst dust, particles, humidity and otherenvironmental factors that might disturbthe dielectric system. Clean assemblytherefore plays an important role in settingup cross-country GILs under normal envi-ronmental conditions. The combination of

Fig. 59: GIL technical data

Fig. 60: GIL laying technique

Fig. 61: Siemens lab prototype for dielectric tests

dures for power cables. The test proce-dure consisted of load cycles with doubledvoltage and increased current as well asfrequently repeated high-voltage tests.The assembly and repair procedures underrealistic site conditions were examinedtoo. The Siemens GIL is the first one inthe world that has passed these tests,without any objection. Fig. 58 shows thetest setup arranged in a tunnel of 3 m di-ameter, corresponding to the tunnel usedin Berlin for installing a 420 kV transmis-sion link through the city.

References

Siemens has gathered experience withgas-insulated transmission lines at ratedvoltages of up to 550 kV and with systemlengths totalling more than 30 km.The first GIL stretch built by Siemens wasthe connection of the turbine generator/pumping motor of a pumped storagestation with the switchyard. The 420 kVGIL is laid in a tunnel through a mountainand has a length of 4000 m (Fig. 57). Thisconnection was commissioned in 1975 atthe Wehr pumped storage station in theBlack Forest in Southern Germany.


Fax: ++ 49-9131-7-34498e-mail: [email protected]


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Overhead Power Lines

Introduction

Since the very beginning of electric power,overhead lines have constituted the mostimportant component for transmission anddistribution. Their portion of overall lengthof electric circuits depends on the voltagelevel as well as on local conditions andpractice. In densely populated areas likeCentral Europe, underground cables prevailin the distribution sector and overheadpower lines in the high-voltage sector. Inother parts of the world, for example inNorth America, overhead lines are oftenused also for distribution purposes withincities. Siemens has planned, designed anderected overhead power lines on all impor-tant voltage levels in many parts of theworld.

Selection of line voltage

For distribution and transmission of electricpower standardized voltages according toIEC 60038 are used worldwide.For three-phase AC applications, three volt-age levels are distinguished: The low-voltage level up to 1 kV The medium-voltage level between 1 kV

and 36 kV and The high-voltage level up to 800 kV.For DC transmission the voltages varyfrom the mentioned data.Low-voltage lines serve households andsmall business consumers. Lines on themedium-voltage level supply small settle-ments, individual industrial plants andlarger consumers, the electric power beingtypically less than 10 MVA per circuit.The high-voltage circuits up to 145 kVserve for subtransmission of the electricpower regionally and feed the medium-voltage network. This high-voltage levelnetwork is often adopted to support themedium-voltage level even if the electricpower is below 10 MVA. Moreover, someof these high-voltage lines also transmitthe electric power from medium-sized gen-erating stations, such as hydro plants onsmall and medium rivers, and supply large-scale consumers, such as sizable industrialplants or steel mills. They constitute theconnection between the interconnectedhigh-voltage grid and the local distributionnetworks. The bandwidth of electrical pow-er transported corresponds to the broadrange of utilization, but, rarely exceeds100 MVA per circuit, while the surge im-pedance load is 35 MVA (approximately).

2000

1000

500

200

100

50

20

1010 20 50 100 200 500

km

MW Power per circuit

110 kV

220 kV

380 kV

750 kV

Transmission distance

245 kV lines were used in Central Europefor interconnection of utility networks be-fore the changeover to the 420 kV level forthis purpose. Long-distance transmission,for example between the hydro powerplants in the Alps and the consumers, wasperformed out by 245 kV lines.Nowadays, the importance of 245 kVlines is decreasing due to the applicationof 420 kV.

The 420 kV level represents the highestvoltage used for AC transmission inCentral Europe with the task of intercon-necting the utility networks and of trans-mitting the energy over long distances.Some 420 kV lines connect the nationalgrids of the individual European countriesenabling Europewide interconnected net-work operation. Large power plants, suchas nuclear stations, feed directly into the420 kV network. The thermal capacity ofthe 420 kV circuits may reach 2000 MVAwith a surge impedance load of approxi-mately 600 MVA and a transmission capacityup to 1200 MVA.

Fig. 62: Selection of rated voltage for power transmission


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

24

50

9.6

210

7

0.59

0.39

9.7

3.4

1.2

0.04

360

–

Rated voltage

20[kV]

Highest system voltage [kV]

Nominalcross-section [mm2]

Conductor diameter [mm]

Ampacity (at 80 °C con-ductor temperature) [A]

Thermal capacity [MVA]

Resistance at 20 °C [Ω/km]

Reactance at 50 Hz [Ω/km]

Effectivecapacitance [nF/km]

Capacitanceto ground [nF/km]

Charging power [kVA/km]

Ground-fault current [A/km]

Surge impedance [Ω]

Surgeimpedance load [MVA]

120

15.5

410

14

0.24

0.34

11.2

3.6

1.4

0.04

310

–

123

150

17.1

470

90

0.19

0.41

9.3

4.0

35

0.25

375

32

300

24.5

740

140

0.10

0.38

10

4.2

38

0.25

350

35

245

435

28.8

900

340

0.067

0.4

9.5

4.8

145

0.58

365

135

bundle2x240

2x21.9

1290

490

0.059

0.32

11.5

6.3

175

0.76

300

160

420

bundle4x240

4x21.9

2580

1700

0.030

0.26

14.4

6.5

650

1.35

240

600

bundle2x560

2x32.2

2080

1370

0.026

0.27

13.8

6.4

625

1.32

250

577

800

bundle4x560

4x32.2

4160

5400

0.013

0.28

13.1

6.1

2320

2.48

260

2170

110 220 380 750


The voltage level has to be selected basedon the duty of the line within the networkor on results of network planning. Siemenshas carried out such studies for utilities allover the world.

Selection of conductorsand ground wires

Conductors represent the most importantcomponents of an overhead power linesince they have to ensure economical andreliable transmission and contribute con-siderably to the total line costs.For many years aluminum and its alloyshave been the prevailing conducting mate-rials for power lines due to the favorableprice, the low weight and the necessity ofcertain minimum cross-sections.The conductors are prone to corrosion.Aluminum, in principle, is a very corrosivemetal. However, a dense oxide layer isformed which stops further corrosive at-tacks. Therefore, aluminum conductorsare well-suited also for corrosive areas, forexample a maritime climate.For aluminum conductors there are a num-ber of different designs in use. All-aluminumconductors (AAC) have the highest conduc-tivity for a given cross-section, howeverpossess only a low mechanical strength,which limits their application to shortspans and low tensile forces. To increasethe mechanical strength, wires made ofaluminum-magnesium-silicon alloys areadopted, the strength of which is twicethat of pure aluminum.All-aluminum and aluminum alloy con-ductors have shown susceptibility againsteolian vibrations. Compound conductorswith a steel core, so-called aluminumcables, steel reinforced (ACSR), avoid thisdisadvantage. The ratio between aluminumand steel ranges from 4.3:1 to 11:1. Expe-rience has demonstrated that ACSR has along life, too.Conductors are selected according to elec-trical, thermal, mechanical and economicaspects. The electric resistance as a resultof the conducting material and its cross-section is the most important featureaffecting the voltage drop and the energylosses along the line and, therefore, thetransmission costs. The cross-section hasto be selected such that the permissibletemperatures will not be exceeded duringnormal operation as well as under shortcircuit. With increasing cross-section theline costs increase, while the costs forlosses decrease. Depending on the dutyof a line and its power, a cross-section canbe determined which results in lowesttransmission costs. This cross-sectionshould be aimed for. The heat balance ofohmic losses and solar radiation againstconvection and radiation determines theconductor temperature. A current densityof 0.5 to 1.0 A /mm2 has proven to be aneconomical solution.

Overhead power lines with voltages high-er than 420 kV are needed to economicallytransmit bulk electric power over long dis-tances, a task typically arising when utiliz-ing hydro energy potentials far away fromconsumer centers. Fig. 62 depicts sche-matically the range of application for theindividual voltage levels dependingon the distance of transmission and thepower rating.

Fig. 63: Electric characteristics of AC overhead power lines (Data refer to one circuit of a double-circuit line)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


High voltage results in correspondinglyhigh-voltage gradients at the conductorsand in corona-related effects such as visi-ble discharges, radio interference, audiblenoise and energy losses. When selectingthe conductors, the voltage gradient hasto be limited to values between 15 and17 kV/cm. This aspect is important forlines with voltages of 245 kV and above.Therefore, bundle conductors are adoptedfor extra-high-voltage lines. Fig. 63 showstypical conductor configurations.From the mechanical point of view theconductors have to be designed for every-day conditions and for maximum loadsexerted on the conductor by wind and ice.As a rough figure, an everyday stress ofapproximately 20% of the conductor ulti-mate tensile stress can be adopted, result-ing in a limited risk of conductor damage.Ground wires can protect a line againstdirect lightning strokes and improve thesystem behavior in case of short circuits;therefore, lines with single-phase voltagesof 110 kV and above are usually equippedwith ground wires. Ground wires madeof ACSR with a sufficiently high aluminumcross-section satisfy both requirements.

Selection of insulators

Overhead line insulators are subject toelectrical and mechanical stress since theyhave to insulate the conductors from po-tential to ground and must provide physicalsupports. Insulators must be capable ofwithstanding these stresses under all con-ditions encountered in a specific line.The electrical stresses result from The power frequency voltage Temporary overvoltages at power

frequency and Switching and lightning overvoltages.Various insulator designs are in use,depending on the requirements and theexperience with certain insulator types.Cap and pin-type insulators (Fig. 64) aremade of porcelain or glass. The individualunits are connected by fittings of malleablecast iron. The insulating bodies are notpuncture-proof which is the reason for rel-atively numerous insulator failures.In Central Europe long-rod insulators(Fig. 65) are most frequently adopted.These insulators are puncture-proof. Fail-ures under operation are extremely rare.Long-rod insulators show a superior be-havior especially under pollution. The ten-sile loading of the porcelain body formsa disadvantage, which requires relativelylarge cross-sections. Composite insulatorsare made of a core with fiberglass-rein-forced resin and sheds of differing plasticmaterials. They offer light weight and hightensile strength and will gain increasingimportance for high-voltage lines.Insulator sets must provide a creepagepath long enough for the expected pollu-tion level, which is classified accordingto IEC 60815 from light with 16 mm/kV upto very heavy with 31 mm/kV.To cope with switching and lightning over-voltages, the insulator sets have to be de-signed with respect to insulation coordina-tion according to IEC 60071-1. Thesedesign aspects determine the gap be-tween the grounded fittings and the liveparts.Suspension insulator sets carry the con-ductor weight and are arranged more orless vertically. There are I-shaped (Fig. 66a)and V-shaped sets in use. Single, double ortriple sets cope with the mechanical load-ings and the design requirements.Tension insulator sets (Fig. 66b, c) termi-nate the conductors and are arranged inthe direction of the conductors. They areloaded by the conductor tensile force andhave to be rated accordingly.

Fig. 64: Cap and pin-type insulator

Fig. 65: Long-rod insulator with clevis and tongueconnection


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Cross arm

Conductor

Cross arm

ConductorCross arm


Fig. 66b: Double tension insulator set for 245 kV (elevation)

Fig. 66a: I-shaped suspension insulator set for 245 kV

Fig. 66c: Double tension insulator set for 245 kV (plan)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Selection and design of supports

Together with the line voltage, number ofcircuits and type of conductors the config-uration of the circuits determines the de-sign of overhead power lines. Additionally,lightning protection by ground wires, theterrain and the available space at the towersites have to be considered. In denselypopulated areas like Central Europe, thewidth of right-of-way and the space for thetower sites are limited. In the case of ex-tra-high voltages the conductor configura-tion affects the electrical characteristicsand the transmission capacity of the line.Very often there are contradicting require-ments, such as a tower height as low aspossible and a narrow right-of-way, whichcan only be met partly by compromises.The mutual clearance of the conductorsdepends on the voltage and the conductorsag. In ice-prone areas conductors shouldnot be arranged vertically in order to avoidconductor clashing after ice shedding.For low- and medium-voltage lines horizon-tal conductor configurations prevail whichfeature line post insulators as well as sus-pension insulators. Preferably poles madeof wood, concrete or steel are used.Fig. 67 shows some typical line configura-tions. Ground wires are omitted at thisvoltage level.For high and extra-high-voltage power linesa large variety of configurations are availa-ble which depend on the number of cir-cuits and on local conditions. Due to thevery limited right-of-way, more or less allhigh-voltage lines in Central Europe com-prise at least two circuits. Fig. 68 shows aseries of typical tower configurations. Ar-rangement e) is called the ”Danube“ con-figuration and is most often adopted. Itrepresents a fair compromise with respectto width of right-of-way, tower height andline costs.For lines comprising more than two cir-cuits there are many possibilities for con-figuring the supports. In the case of cir-cuits with differing voltages those circuitswith the lower voltage should be arrangedin the lowermost position (Fig. 68g).The arrangement of insulators dependson the task of a support within the line.Suspension towers support the conductorsin straight-line sections and at small bends.This tower type results in the lowestcosts; special attention should therefore bepaid to using this tower type as often aspossible.

Fig. 67: Configurations of medium-voltage supports

Fig. 68: Tower configurations for high-voltage lines

a b c d

a b c d

e f g h


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Angle towers have to carry the conductortensile forces at angle points of the line.The tension insulator sets permanentlyexert high forces on the supports. Variousloading conditions have to be met whendesigning angle towers. The climatic con-ditions are a determining factor as well.Finally, dead-end towers are used at theends of a transmission line. They carry thetotal conductor tensile forces of the con-nection to the substations.Depending on the size of the supportsand the acting forces, differing designs andmaterials are adopted. Poles made ofwood, concrete or steel are very oftenused for low and medium-voltage lines.Towers with lattice steel design, however,prevail at voltage levels of 110 kV andabove (Fig. 69). When designing the sup-port a number of conditions have to beconsidered. High wind and ice loads causethe maximum forces to act on suspensiontowers. In ice-prone areas unbalanced con-ductor tensile forces can result in torsionalloading. Additionally, special loading condi-tions are adopted for the purpose of failurecontainment, i.e. to limit the extent ofdamage. Finally, provisions have to bemade for construction and maintenanceconditions.Siemens adopts modern computer pro-grams for tower design in order to opti-mize the structures, select componentsand joints and determine foundationloadings.The stability of the support poles and tow-ers needs also accordingly designed foun-dations. The type of towers and poles, theloads, the soil conditions as well as the ac-cessibility to the line route and the availa-bility of machinery determine the selectionand design of foundation.Concrete blocks or concrete piers arein use for poles which exert bendingmoments on the foundation. For towerswith four legs a foundation is providedfor each individual leg (Fig. 70). Pad-and-chimney and concrete block foundationsrequire good bearing soil conditionswithout ground water. Driven or auguredpiles and piers are adopted for low bearingsoil, for sites with bearing soil in a greaterdepth and for high ground water level.In this case the soil conditions must permitpile driving. Concrete slabs can be usedfor good bearing soil, when subsoil andground water level prohibit pad and chim-ney foundations as well as piles. Siemenscan design all types of foundation and hasthe necessary equipment, such as piledrivers, grouting devices, soil and rockdrills, at its command to build all types ofpower line foundations. Fig. 70: Foundations for four-legged towers

Fig. 69: Lattice steel towers of a high-voltage line

Pad-and-chimneyfoundation

Rock anchorfoundation

Auger-boredfoundation

Pile foundation


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 71: Line profile established by computer

2T+0DH

1WA+0

DA

300.70302.50

232.50

255.00

11

11

f40=fE =

16.2013.00

292.00

279.00282.00

10.0016.00

0.47 292.00

5.746.07

f40=6.15fE =6.60

f40=2.11

281.50286.50 276.50

273.00273.50 280.00

280.50 284.50283.00

275.00275.50

270.50270.50

272.50270.00

267.50265.00

264.00263.o. D.175.00

36.00.0 66.0

106.0132.0 194.0

166.0 251.0264.0

291.0302.0

316.0331.0

346.0360.0

386.0405.0

426.0462

0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4

190.00g

171°0´Left conductor 251.47 m

190.00g

6.06.0

M20

251.0

M2160.0m

60.0m 50g

20 kV line 4.04.0 42

Roat


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


4WA+0

DA

223.00

284.20

3T+8DH

Ground wire: ACSR 265/35 * 80.00 N/mm2

Conductor: ACSR 265/35 * 80.00 N/mm2

Equivalent sag: 11.21 m at 40 °CEquivalent span: 340.44 m

Arable land

ForestFallow land

Road

Stream

Meadow

270.00

292.50

16.00

1.45

f40=5.56fE =5.87

24.20

Bushes, heightup to 5 m

16.7515.86

7.558.44

17.3016.38

11.3812.29

f40=17.46fE =16.52

263.00

064.00

263.00266.50

265.50264.00

261.50258.50

260.00260.00

260.00247.50

236.00229.00

223.00215.50

209.00207.00

0426.0

462.0506.0

534.0544.0

586.0626.0

666.0676.0

688.0744.0

776.0804.0

826.0848.0

904.0910.0

4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9

425.0 13.9g

Road crossingat km 10.543

4.04.0 234.0

169.00g

5.8

Left conductor 235.45 mRoad to XXX 169.00g

152°6´5.8


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Route selectionand tower spotting

Route selection and planning representincreasingly difficult tasks since the right-of-way for transmission lines is limited andmany aspects and interests have to beconsidered. Route selection and approvaldepend on the statutory conditions andprocedures and always involve iterativestudies carried out in the office and sur-veys in the terrain which consider and eval-uate a great variety of alternatives. Afterdefinition of the route the longitudinal pro-file has to be surveyed, identifying allcrossings over roads, rivers, railways,buildings and other overhead power lines.The results are evaluated with computerprograms to calculate and plot the line pro-file. The towers are spotted by means ofcomputer programs as well, which takeinto account the conductor sags under dif-ferent conditions, the ground clearances,objects crossed by the line, technical dataof the available tower range, tower andfoundation costs and costs for compensa-tion of landowners. The result is an eco-nomical design of a line, which accountsfor all the technical and environmental con-ditions. Line planning forms the basis formaterial acquisition and line erection.Fig. 71 shows a line profile establishedby computer.

Siemens’ activities andexperience

Siemens has been active in the overheadpower line field for more than 100 years.The activities comprise design and con-struction of rural electrification schemes,low and medium-voltage distribution lines,high-voltage lines and extra-high-voltageinstallations. To give an indication of whathas been carried out by Siemens, approxi-mately 20,000 km of high-voltage lines upto 245 kV and 10,000 km of extra-high-volt-age lines above 245 kV have been set upso far. Overhead power lines have beenerected by Siemens in Germany and Cen-tral Europe as well as in the Middle East,Africa, the Far East and South America.The 420 kV transmission lines across theElbe river in Germany comprising four cir-cuits and requiring 235 m tall towers aswell as the 420 kV line across the Bospho-rus in Turkey with a span of approximately1800 m (Fig. 72) are worthy of specialmention.


Fax: ++49-9131-33 5 44e-mail: [email protected]

Fig. 72: 420 kV line across the Bosphorus, longitudinal profile

BT2BS2BS1 suspension towertension towerBT

BSBT1

BosphorusEurope Asia

Dimensions in m

70

37.5124124

27.5

112 119 125 162.5

674 1757 668


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

HVDC

When technical and/or economical feasibilityof conventional high voltage AC transmis-sion technology reach their limits, highvoltage DC can offer the solution, namely For economical transmission of bulk

power over long distances For interconnection of asynchronous

power grids For power transmission across the sea,

when a cable length is long For interconnection of synchronous but

weak power grids, adding to their stability For additional exchange of active power

with other grids without having to increasethe short-circuit power of the system

For increasing the transmission capacityof existing rights-of-way by changingfrom AC to DC transmission systemSiemens offers HVDC systems as

Back-to-Back (B/B) stations to interconnectasynchronous networks, without any DCtransmission line in between

Power transmission via Dc submarinecables

Power transmission via long-distance DCoverhead lines

Back-to-Back (B/B):

To connect asynchronous high voltagepower systems or systems with differentfrequencies.To stabilize weak AC links or to supplyeven more active power, where the ACsystem reaches the limit of short-circuitcapability.

High-Voltage Direct Current Transmission

Fig. 75: Long-distance transmission

Special features

Valve technology Simple, easy-to-maintain mechanical

design Use of fire-retardant, self-extinguish-

ing material Minimized number of electrical

connections Minimized number of components Avoidance of potential sources of

failure ”Parallel“ cooling for the valve levels Oxygen-saturated cooling water.After more than 20 years of operation, thy-ristor valves based on this technology havedemonstrated their excellent reliability. The recent introduction of direct light-

triggered thyristors with integrated over-voltage protection further simplifies thevalve and reduces maintenance require-ments.

Control systemIn our HVDC control system, high-perform-ance components with proven records inmany other standard fields of applicationhave been integrated, thus adding to theoverall reliability of the system.Use of ”state-of-the-art“ microprocessor

systems for all functions.Redundant design for fault-tolerantsystems.

Filter technologySingle, double and triple-tuned as wellas high-pass passive filters, or any combi-nation thereof, can be installed.Active filters, mainly for the DC circuit,are available.Wherever possible, identical filters areselected so that the performance does notsignificantly change when one filter hasto be switched off.

Turnkey serviceOur experienced staff are prepared to de-sign, install and commission the wholeHVDC system on a turnkey basis.

Project financingWe are in a position to assist our custom-ers in finding proper project financing, too.

General services Extended support to customers from the

very beginning of HVDC system plan-ning including– Feasibility studies– Drafting the specification– Project execution– System operation and– Long-term maintenance– Consultancy on upgrading/replace-

ment of components/redesign of olderschemes, e.g. retrofit of mercury-arcvalves or relay-based controls

Fig. 74: Submarine cable transmission

Fig. 76: Earthquake-proof, fire-retardant thyristor valves in Sylmar East, Los Angeles

Fig. 73: Back-to-back link between asynchronous grids

Cable transmission (CT):

To transmit power across the sea withcables to supply islands/offshore platformsfrom the mainland and vice-versa.

Long-distance transmission (LD):

For transmission of bulk power over longdistances (beyond approx. 600 km, consid-ered as the break-even distance).


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Rehabilitation andmodernization of existingHVDC stations (Fig. 78)

The integration of state-of-the-art micro-processor systems or thyristors allows theowner better utilization of his investment,e.g. Higher availability Fewer outages Lower losses Better performance values Less maintenance.Higher availability means more operatinghours, better utilization and higher profitsfor the owner.The new Human-Machine Interface (HMI)system enhances the user-friendliness andincreases the reliability considerably dueto the operator guidance. This rules outmaloperation by the operator, because anincorrect command will be ignored by theHMI.

Fig. 77: Conventional DC measuring device (1) vs. thenew hybrid-optical device (2) with compositeinsulator (3) shows the reduced space requirementfor the new system (installed at HVDC converter sta-tion Sylmar, USA)

Studies during contract execution on:– HVDC systems basic design– System dynamic response– Load flow and reactive power

balance– Harmonic voltage distortion– Insulation coordination– Interference of radio and PLC– Special studies, if any

Typical ratings

Some typical ratings for HVDC schemesare given below for orientation purposes only:B/B: 100 ... 600 MWCT: 100 ... 800 MWLD: 300 ... 3000 MW (bipolar),whereby the lower rating is mainly deter-mined by economic aspects and the higherone limited by the constraints of the inter-connected networks.

Innovations

In recent years, the following innovativetechnologies and equipment have for ex-ample been successfully implemented bySiemens in diverse HVDC projects world-wide: Direct light-triggered thyristors

(already mentioned above) Hybrid-optical DC measuring system

(Fig. 77) Active harmonic filters Advanced eletrode line monitoring of

bipolar HVDC systems An SF6 HVDC circuit-breaker for use as

Metallic Return Transfer Breaker, devel-oped from a standard AC high-voltagebreaker.


2

1

3

Fig. 78: HVDC outdoor valves, 533 kV (Cahora Bassa Rehabilitation, Southern Africa)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 79: Human-Machine Interface with structure of HVDC control system




SER

HMI

VCSPole 1

OLCPole 1

OLCSC

OLCPole 2

VCSPole 2

LAN

CLCVBEPole 1

CLCVBEPole 2

OLCPole 2

TFRTFR

DC Yard

DC Protection

Communi-cation link tothe load dis-patch center

Communi-cation link tothe remotestation

GPS

Communi-cation link tothe remotestation

HMI Human-machine InterfaceGPS Global Positioning SystemOLC Open-Loop ControlCLC Closed-Loop ControlVBE Valve Base ElectronicsVCS Valve Cooling SystemsSER Sequence of Event

RecordingTFR Transient Fault RecordingLAN Local Area Network


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Power Compensation in Transmission Systems

Fig. 80: STATCOM inverter hall

Introduction

In many countries increasing powerconsumption leads to growing and moreinterconnected AC power systems. Thesecomplex systems consist of all types ofelectrical equipment, such as power plants,transmission lines, switchgear transform-ers, cables etc., and the consumers.Since power is often generated in thoseareas of a country with little demand, thetransmission and distribution system hasto provide the link between power gener-ation and load centers.Wherever power is to be transported, thesame basic requirements apply: Power transmission must be economical The risk of power system failure must

be low The quality of the power supply must

be highHowever, transmission systems do notbehave in an ideal manner. The systemsreact dynamically to changes in active andreactive power, influencing the magnitudeand profile of the power systems voltage.

Examples:

A load rejection at the end of a long-dis-tance transmission line will cause highovervoltages at the line end. However, ahigh load flow across the same line willdecrease the voltage at its end.

The transport of reactive power througha grid system produces additional lossesand limits the transmission of activepower via overhead lines or cables.

Load-flow distribution on parallel lines isoften a problem. One line could be load-ed up to its limit, while another only car-ries half or less of the rated current.Such operating conditions limit the actu-al transmittable amount of active power.

In some systems load switching and/orload rejection can lead to power swingswhich, if not instantaneously damped,can destabilize the complete grid systemand then result in a “Black Out”.

Reactive power compensation helps toavoid these and some other problems.In order to find the best solution for a gridsystem problem, studies have to be car-ried out simulating the behavior of the sys-tem during normal and continuous operat-ing conditions, and also for transientevents. Study facilities which cover digitalsimulations via computer as well as analogones in a transient network analyzer labo-ratory are available at Siemens.

Further information please contact:



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1 Transformer2 Thyristor-controlled reactor (TCR)3 Fixed connected capacitor/filter bank4 Thyristor-switched capacitor bank (TSC)

3442

1

Concept Operating diagram

Un

Iind Icap



UN

Iind IcapUD

UN

I

US

Id

Fig. 83: STATCOM

Types of reactive powercompensation

Parallel compensation

Parallel compensation is defined as anytype of reactive power compensation em-ploying either switched or controlled units,which are connected parallel to the trans-mission network at a power system node.In many cases switched compensation(reactors, capacitor banks or filters) canprovide an economical solution for reactivepower compensation using conventionalswitchgear.

Static VAr compensator (SVC)

In comparison to mechanically-switchedreactive power compensation, controlledcompensation (SVC, Fig. 81) offers the ad-vantage that rapid dynamic control of thereactive power is possible within narrowlimits, thus maintaining reactive powerbalance.Fig. 82 is a general outline of the problem-solving applications of SVCs in high-voltagesystems.

STATCOM

The availability of high power gate-turn-off(GTO) thyristors has led to the develop-ment of a Static Synchronous Compensa-tor (STATCOM), Fig. 80, page 2/52.The STATCOM is an “electronic generator”of dynamic reactive power, which is con-nected in shunt with the transmission line(Fig. 83) and designed to provide smooth,continuous voltage regulation, to preventvoltage collapse, to improve transmissionstability and to dampen power oscillations.The STATCOM supports subcycle speed ofresponse (transition between full capaci-tive and full inductive rating) and superiorperformance during system disturbancesto reduce system harmonics and resonanc-es. Particular advantages of the equipmentare the compact and modular constructionthat enables ease of siting and relocation,as well as flexibility in future rating up-grades (as grid requirements change) andthe generation of reactive current irrespec-tive of network voltage.

Fig. 82: Duties of SVCs

Fig. 81: Static VAr compensator (SVC)

Voltage controlReactive power controlOvervoltage limitation at load rejectionImprovement of AC system stabilityDamping of power oscillationsReactive power flow controlIncrease of transmission capabilityLoad reduction by voltage reductionSubsynchronous oscillation damping


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 85: Static Synchronous Series Compensator (SSSC)

Series compensation

Series compensation is defined as insertionof reactive power elements into transmis-sion lines. The most common application isthe series capacitor.

Thyristor-ControlledSeries Compensation (TCSC)

By providing continuous control of trans-mission line impendance, the Thyristor Con-trolled Series Compensation (TCSC, Fig. 84)offers several advantages over conventionalfixed series capacitor installations. Theseadvantages include: Continuous control of desired

compensation level Direct smooth control of power flow

within the network Improved capacitor bank protection Local mitigation of subsynchronous

oscillations (SSR). This permits higherlevels of compensation in networkswhere interactions with turbine-generatortorsional vibrations or with other controlor measuring systems are of concern.

Damping of electromechanical (0.5–2 Hz)power oscillations which often arise be-tween areas in a large interconnectedpower network. These oscillations aredue to the dynamics of interarea powertransfer and often exhibit poor dampingwhen the aggregate power transfer overa corridor is high relative to the transmis-sion strength.

Synchronous Series Compensation (SSSC)

The Static Synchronous Series Compensa-tor (SSSC) is a solid-state voltage genera-tor connected in series with the transmis-sion line through an insertion transformer(Fig. 85). The generation of a boost voltageadvancing or lagging behind the line cur-rent by 90° affects the voltage drop causedat the line reactance and can be used todampen transient oscillations and controlreal power flow independent of the magni-tude of the line current.


I

I

UD

Id

Inductive Capacitive

UT

UT

Bypass circuit breaker

Bypass switch

Bankdisconnectswitch 1

Bankdisconnectswitch 2MOV arrester

Dampingcircuit

Thyristor controlledreactor

Capacitors

Triggered spark gap

Valve arrester

Thyristorvalve


90° Ignition angle α

[Z]

Inductive Capacitive

Inadmissiblearea

180°

Fig. 84: Thyristor controlled Series Compensation (TCSC). Example: Single line diagram TCSC S. da Mesa


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Unified Power Flow Controller (UPFC)

The Unified Power Flow Controller (UPFC)is the fastest and most versatile FACTScontroller (Fig. 86). The UPFC constitutesa combination of the STATCOM and theSSSC. It can provide simultaneously andindependently real time control of all basicpower system parameters (transmissionvoltage, impedance and phase angle), de-terminig the transmitted real and reactivepower flow to optimize line utilization andsystem capability. The UPFC can enhancetransmission stability and dampen systemoscillations.


Comparison of reactive powercompensation facilities

The following tables show the character-istics and application areas of UPFC(Fig. 87a), parallel compensation and seriescompensation (Fig. 87b, page 2/56) andthe influence on various parameters suchas short-circuit rating, transmission phaseangle and voltage behavior at this load.

Fig. 86: Unified power-flow controller (UPFC)

Fig. 87a: Components for reactive power compensation, UPFC

1

Compen-sationelement

Location Short-circuitlevel

Voltageinfluence

Transmis-sion phaseangle

Voltageafter loadrejection

ApplicationsBehavior of compensation element

Real and reactive powerflow control, enhancingtransmission stabilityand dampening systemoscillations

Limited bycontrol

ControlledControlledReducedUPFC

UPFC (Parallel and/or series compensation)

UPFCE U

Concept Vector diagram

GTOConverter 1

GTOConverter 2

Ua Ub

Ub

UT

Ua

UT


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

2

3

4

5

Voltage stabilizationat high load

Reactive powercompensation at lowload; limitation oftemporary overvoltage

Reactive power andvoltage control,damping of powerswings to improvesystem stability

High

Low

Littleinfluence

Littleinfluence

Littleinfluence

Controlled

Voltagedrop

Voltagerise

Littleinfluence

Littleinfluence

Littleinfluence

StaticVAr com-pensator(SVC)

Shuntreactor

Shuntcapacitor

Compen-sationelement

Location Short-circuitlevel

Voltageinfluence

Transmis-sion phaseangle

Voltageafter loadrejection

ApplicationsBehavior of compensation element

SVCE U

Limited bycontrol

E U

E U

Long transmission lines,power flow distributionbetween parallel linesand SSR damping

Short lines, limitationof SC power

(Very) low

(Much)larger

Muchsmaller

Very good

(Very) slightReduced

VariableThyristorControlledSeriesCom-pensation(TCSC)

Seriesreactor

(Very) high

Long transmission lineswith high transmissionpower rating

Muchsmaller

Very goodIncreasedSeriescapacitor

(Very) low

TCSC

E U

E U

Real power flowcontrol, damping oftransient oscillations

Limited bycontrol

ControlledControlledReducedSSSC

E U

SSSC

Reactive power andvoltage control,damping of powerswings

Littleinfluence

ControlledNoinfluence

STATCOM Limited bycontrol

E UST

E U

6

7

8

9

Series compensation

Parallel compensation


Fig. 87b: Components of reactive power compensation, parallel compensation/series compensation

Medium-VoltageSwitchgear

Medium-VoltageSwitchgear

Contents Page

Introduction ...................................... 3/2

Primary Distribution

Selection Criteria andExplanations ...................................... 3/4

Selection Matrix ............................... 3/6

Air-Insulated Switchgear ............... 3/8

SF6-Insulated Switchgear ............ 3/24

Secondary Distribution

General ............................................. 3/46

Selection Matrix ............................. 3/48

Ring-Main Units ............................. 3/50

Consumer Substations .................. 3/60

Transformer Substations .............. 3/66

Industrial Load Center .................. 3/68

Medium-Voltage Devices

Product Range ................................ 3/72

Vacuum Circuit-Breakersand Contactors ............................... 3/74

Vacuum Interrupters ..................... 3/85

Disconnectors/Grounding Switches ...................... 3/86

HRC Fuses ....................................... 3/88

Insulators and Bushings .............. 3/89

Current Transformers/Voltage Transformers .................... 3/90

Surge Arresters .............................. 3/90

3


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Medium-Voltage Switchgear

Introduction

Primary and secondary distribution standsfor the two basic functions of the medium-voltage level in the distribution system.‘Power Supply Systems’ (PSS) includes theequipment of the Primary and SecondaryDistribution, all interconnecting equipment(cables, transformers, control systems,etc.) down to LV consumer distributions aswell as all the relating planning, engineer-ing, project/site management, installationand commissioning work involved, includ-ing turnkey projects with all necessaryelectrical and civil works equipment (Fig. 1).

‘Primary distribution’ means the switch-gear installation in the HV/MV transformermain substations. The capacity of equip-ment must be sufficient to transport theelectrical energy from the HV/MV trans-former input (up to 63 MVA) via busbarto the outgoing distribution lines or cablefeeders. The switchgear in these mainsubstations is of high importance for thesafe and flexible operation of the distribu-tion system. It has to be very reliable dur-ing its lifetime, flexible in configuration,and easy to operate with a minimum ofmaintenance.The type of switchgear insulation (air orSF6) is determined by local conditions, e.g.space available, economic considerations,building costs, environmental conditionsand the relative importance of mainte-nance.Design and configuration of the busbarare determined by the requirements of thelocal distribution system.These are: The number of feeders is given by the

outgoing lines of the system The busbar configuration depends on

the system (ring, feeder lines, oppositestation, etc.)

Mode of operation under normal condi-tions and in case of faults

Reliability requirements of consumers,etc.

Double busbars with longitudinal sectional-izing give the best flexibility in operation.However, for most of the operating situa-tions, single busbars are sufficient if thedistribution system has adequate redun-dancy (e.g. ring-type system).If there are only a few feeder lines whichcall for higher security, a mixed configura-tion is advisable.It is important to prepare enough sparefeeders or at least space in order to extendthe switchgear in case of further develop-ment and the need for additional feeders.As these substations, especially in denselypopulated areas, have to be located right inthe load center, the switchgear must bespace-saving and easy to install.The installation of this switchgear needsthorough planning in advance, including thesystem configuration and future area de-velopment. Especially where existing in-stallations have to be upgraded, the situa-tion of the distribution system should beanalyzed for simplification (system plan-ning and architectural system design).

‘Secondary distribution’ is the local areasupply of the individual MV/LV substationsor consumer connecting stations.The power capacity of MV/LV substa-tions depends on the requirements of theLV system. To reduce the network losses,the transformer substations should beinstalled directly at the load centers withtypical transformer ratings of 400 kVA tomax. 1000 kVA. Due to the great numberof stations, they must be space-saving andmaintenance-free.For high availability, MV/LV substations aremostly looped in by load-break switches.The line configuration is mostly of theopen-operated ring type or of radial strandswith opposite switching station. In theevent of a line fault, the disturbed sectionwill be switched free and the supply iscontinued by the second side of the line.This calls for reliable switchgear in the sub-stations. Such transformer substations canbe prefabricated units or single compo-nents, installed in any building or roomsexisting on site, consisting of medium-volt-age switchgear, transformers and low-volt-age distri-bution.Because of the extremely high numberof units in the network, high standardiza-tion of equipment is necessary. The mosteconomical solution for such substationsshould have climate-independent andmaintenance-free equipment, so that oper-ation of equipment does not require anymaintenance during its lifetime.Consumers with high power requirementshave mostly their own distribution systemon their building area. In this case, a con-sumer connection station with metering isnecessary. Depending on the downstreamconsumer system, circuit breakers or load-break switches have to be installed.For such transformer substations nonex-tensible and extensible switchgear, for in-stance RMUs, has been developed usingSF6 gas as insulation and arc-quenchingmedium in the case of load-break systems(RMUs), and SF6-gas insulation and vacu-um (for vcb feeders) as arc-quenching me-dium in the case of extensible modularswitchgear, consisting of load-break panelswith or without fuses, circuit-breaker pan-els and measuring panels.

3/3Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission and Distribution · 4th Edition

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Medium-Voltage Switchgear

Fig. 1: Medium voltage up to 36 kV – Distribution system with two basic functions: Primary distribution and secondary distribution

Customer station with circuit-breakerincoming panel and load-break switchoutgoing panels

Diagram 1:

Substation

Diagram 2: Diagram 3:

open ring

closed ring

HV/MV transformers up to 63 MVA

MV up to 36 kV

Primary distribution

Secondary distribution

Subtransmission up to 145 kVMain substation

Extensible switchgear for substationwith circuit-breakers e.g. Type 8DH


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Balancing of feeder on two systems dur-ing operation

Access to busbars required during oper-ation.

In double-busbar switchboards with dualfeeder breakers it is possible to connectconsumers of less importance by single-busbar panels. This assures the high availa-bility of a double-busbar switchboard forimportant panels, e.g. incoming feeders,with the low costs and the low space re-quirement of a single-busbar switchboardfor less important panels. These compositeswitchboards can be achieved with thetypes 8BK20 and 8DC11.

Type of insulation

The most common insulating mediumhas been air at atmospheric pressure, plussome solid dielectric materials. Under se-vere climatic conditions this requires pre-cautions to be taken against internal con-tamination, condensation, corrosion, orreduced dielectric strength in high alti-tudes.

General

Codes, standards and specifications

Design, rating, manufacture and testing ofour medium-voltage switchboards is gov-erned by international and national stand-ards. Most applicable IEC recommenda-tions and VDE/DIN standards apply to ourproducts, whereby it should be noted thatin Europe all national electrotechnicalstandards have been harmonized withinthe framework of the current IEC recom-mendations.Our major products in this section complyspecifically with the following code publi-cations: IEC 60 298 AC metal-enclosed switch-

gear and controlgear for rated voltagesabove 1 kV and up to and including72.5 kV

IEC 60 694 Common clauses for high-voltage switchgear and controlgearstandards

IEC 60 056 High-voltage alternating-cur-rent circuit-breakers

IEC 60 265-1 High-voltage switches IEC 60 470 High-voltage alternating cur-

rent contactors IEC 60 129 Alternating current discon-

nectors (isolators) and grounding switch-es

IEC 60 185 Current transformers IEC 60 186 Voltage transformers IEC 60 282 High-voltage fusesIn terms of electrical rating and testing,other national codes and specifications canbe met as well, e.g. ANSI C37, 20C,BS 5227, etc.In case of switchgear manufactured out-side of Germany in Siemens factories orworkshops, certain local standards can alsobe met; for specifics please inquire.

Busbar system

Switchgear installations for normal serviceconditions are preferably equipped withsingle-busbar systems. These switch-boards are clear in their arrangement,simple to operate, require relatively littlespace, and are low in inital cost and oper-ating expenses.Double-busbar switchboards can offeradvantages in the following cases: Operation with asynchronous feeders Feeders with different degrees of impor-

tance to maintain operation during emer-gency conditions

Isolation of consumers with shock load-ing from the normal network

Since 1982, insulating sulfur-hexafluoridegas (SF6-gas) at slight overpressure hasalso been used inside totally encapsulatedswitchboards as insulating medium formedium voltages to totally exclude thesedisturbing effects.All switchgear types in this section, withthe exception of the gas-insulated models8D and NX PLUS, use air as their primaryinsulation medium. Ribbed vacuum-pottedepoxy-resin post insulators are used asstructural supports for busbars and circuitbreakers throughout.In the gas-insulated metal-clad switchgear8D and NX PLUS, all effects of the envi-ronment on high-voltage-carrying parts areeliminated.Thus, not only an extremely compact andsafe, but also an exceptionally reliablepiece of switchgear is available. The addi-tional effort for encapsulating and sealingthe high-voltage-carrying parts requiresa higher price – at least in voltage ratingsbelow 24 kV. For a price comparison, seethe curves on the following page (Figs. 3, 4).

Primary DistributionSelection Criteria and Explanations

Fig. 2: Basic basbar configurations for medium-voltage switchgear

Single busbar withbus-tie breaker

Double busbars withdual-feeder breakers

Double busbars withsingle-feeder breakers

Double-busbar switchboardwith single-busbar feeders


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Voltage

8DC118DB10

8BK20

Voltage

(8BK20 = 100)!(8BK20 = 100)!

8DA10NX PLUS8BK20NX AIR8DC11

kV

Double busbar

160

130120110100

908070

0

Percentage

7.2 12 15 24 36kV

Single busbar

160

130120110100

908070

0

Percentage

7.2 12 15 24 36

Enclosure, Compartmentalization

IEC Publ. 60 298 subdivides metal-en-closed switchgear and controlgear intothree types: Metal-clad switchgear and controlgear Compartmented switchgear and con-

trolgear Cubicle switchgear and controlgear.Thus “metal-clad” and “cubicle” are sub-divisions of metal-enclosed switchgear,further describing construction details.In metal-clad switchgear the componentsare arranged in 3 separate compartments: Busbar compartment Circuit-breaker compartment Feeder-circuit compartmentwith earthed metal partitions betweeneach compartment.IEC 60 298-1990-12 Annex AA specifies a“Method for testing the metal-enclosedswitchgear and controlgear under condi-tions of arcing due to an internal fault”.Basically, the purpose of this test is toshow that persons standing in front of, oradjacent to a switchboard during internalarcing are not endangered by the effectsof such arcs. All switchboards describedin this section have successfully passedthese type tests.

Isolating method

To perform maintenance operations safely,one of two basic precautions must betaken before grounding and short-circuitingthe feeder: 1. Opening of an isolator switch with

clear indication of the OPEN condition. 2. Withdrawal of the interrupter carrier

from the operating into the isolationposition.

In both cases, the isolation gap must belarger than the sparkover distance fromlive parts to ground to avoid sparkoverof incoming overvoltages across the gap.The first method is commonly found infixed-mounted interrupter switchgear,whereas the second method is appliedin withdrawable switchgear.Withdrawable switchgear has primarilybeen designed to provide a safe environ-ment for maintenance work on circuit inter-rupters and instrument transformers.Therefore, if interrupters and instrumenttransformers are available that do not re-quire maintenance during their lifetime, thewithdrawable feature becomes obsolete.With the introduction of maintenance-freevacuum circuit-breaker bottles, and instru-ment transformers which are not subject

to dielectric stressing by high voltage,it is possible and safe to utilize totally en-closed, fixed-mounted and gas-insulatedswitchgear. Models 8DA, 8DB, 8DC andNX PLUS described in this section are ofthis design. Due to far fewer moving partsand their total shielding from the environ-ment, they have proved to be much morereliable.All air-insulated switchgear models in thissection are of the withdrawable type.

Switching device

Depending on the switching duty in indi-vidual switchboards and feeders, basicallythe following types of primary switchingdevices are used in the switchgear cubi-cles in this section:(Note: Not all types of switching devices can be used inall types of cubicle.)

1. Vacuum circuit-breakers 2. Vacuum contactors in conjunction

with HRC fuses 3. Vacuum switches, switch disconnec-

tors or gas-insulated three-positionswitch disconnectors in conjunction withHRC fuses.

To 1: Vacuum circuit-breakers

In the continuing efforts for safer and morereliable medium-voltage circuit-breakers,the vacuum interrupter is clearly the firstchoice of buyers of new circuit-breakersworldwide.It is maintenancefree up to 10,000 oper-ating cycles without any limitation in termsof time and it is recommended for all gen-eralpurpose applications. If high numbersof switching operations are anticipated(especially autoreclosing in overhead linesystems and switching of high-voltage mo-tors), their use is indicated. They are avail-

able in all ratings – see selection matrix onpages 3/72–3/73 for all power switchgearlisted in this section. Due to their mainte-nance-free design these breakers can beinstalled inside totally enclosed and gas-insulated switchgear.

To 2: Vacuum contactors

Vacuum contactors are used for frequentswitching operations in motor, transformerand capacitor bank feeders. They are type-tested, extremely reliable and compact de-vices and they are totally maintenance-free.Since contactors cannot interrupt fault cur-rents, they must always be used with cur-rent-limiting fuses to protect the equip-ment connected. Vacuum contactors canbe installed in the metal-enclosed, metal-clad switchgear types 8BK20, 8BK30 andNXAIR for 7.2 kV/31.5 kA.

To 3: Vacuum switches or …

Vacuum switches, switch disconnectorsand gas-insulated three-position switchdisconnectors in primary distribution switch-boards are used mostly for small trans-former feeders such as auxiliary transform-ers or load center substations. Because oftheir inability to interrupt fault currentsthey must always be used with current-limiting fuses. Vacuum switches and switchdisconnectors can be installed in the air-insulated switchboard types 8BK20 andNXAIR. Gas-insulated three-position switchdisconnectors can be installed in theswitchboard type 8DC11.

Primary DistributionSelection Criteria and Explanations

Fig. 3: Price relation Fig. 4: Price relation


++ 49 - 91 31-73 46 39


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Primary DistributionSelection Matrix

Fig. 5: Primary Distribution Selection Matrix

Standards Insulation Busbar system Enclosure,compartmentalization

Isolating method

Type-testedindoor switchgearto IEC 60 298

Swde

VacVac

Vac

Vac

VacVacSwVac

VacSw

Vac

Vac

Disconnector,fixed-mounted



Metal-enclosed,metal-clad



Metal-enclosed,metal-cladcubicle-type


Triple-polemetal-enclosed,metal-clad

Single-polemetal-enclosed,metal-clad

Single-polemetal-enclosed,metal-clad

Single busbar

Air-insulated

Double busbar

Single busbar

Double busbar

SF6-insulated

Draw-out section

Draw-out section

Draw-out section

Draw-out section

Draw-out section

VacVac



VacSw

VacDisconnector,fixed-mounted


Metal-enclosed,metal-cladcubicle-type

Draw-out section VacVacSw


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Primary DistributionSelection Matrix

3/38

3/20

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

40

–

40

31.5

Technical data

Maximum rated short-timecurrent [kA], 1/3 s

Maximum busbar ratedcurrent [A]

Maximum feeder ratedcurrent [A]7.2kV

12/15kV

17.5/24kV

36kV

Switchingdevice

Switchgeartype

8BK20

8BK30

8BK40

NXAIR

8BK20

8DC11

8DA10

8DB10

7.2kV

12/15kV

17.5/24kV

36kV

7.2kV

12/15kV

17.5/24kV

36kV

Vacuum circuit-breakerVacuum switch

Vacuum contactor

Vacuumcircuit-breaker

Vacuum circuit-breakerVacuum switchSwitch disconnectorVacuum contactor

Vacuum circuit-breakerSwitch disconnector

Vacuum circuit-breaker

Vacuumcircuit-breaker

* up to 17.5 kV

Page

Vacuum circuit-breakerVacuum switch

8DC11Vacuum circuit-breakerSwitch disconnector

NX PLUSVacuum circuit-breaker

4000 4000 20004000 4000 250050 50 25 3/8– –

NXAIRVacuum circuit-breakerVacuum switchSwitch disconnector

2500 2500 2500 –2500 2500 2500 –31.5 31.5 25

2500 2500 2500 –2500 2500 2500 –31.5 31.5 25 3/20

4000 4000 2000 –4000 4000 2500 –50 50 25 3/8

400 400 – –4000 4000 – –50 50 – 3/13

5000 5000 5000* –5000 5000 5000* –63 63 63* 3/16

1250 1250 1250 –1250 1250 1250 –25 25 25 3/24

2500 2500 2500 25003150 3150 3150 250040 40 3/3040

1250 1250 1250 –1250 1250 1250 –25 25 25 3/24

2500 2500 2500 25003150 3150 3150 250040 40 3/3040

2500 2500 2500 25002500 2500 2500 250031.5 31.5 31.5


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metal-clad switchgear 8BK20,air-insulated

From 7.2 to 24 kV Single and double-busbar

(back-to-back or face-to-face) Air-insulated Type-tested Metal-enclosed Metal-clad Withdrawable vacuum breaker Vacuum switch optional For indoor installation

Specific features

General-purpose switchgear Circuit-breaker mounted on horizontal

slide behind front door Cable connections from front or rear

Safety for operating and maintenancepersonnel

All switching operations behind closeddoors

Positive and robust mechanicalinterlocks

Arc-fault-tested metal enclosure Complete protection against contact

with live parts Line test with breaker inserted (option) Maintenance-free vacuum breaker

Tolerance to environment

Metal enclosure with optional gaskets Complete corrosion protection and

tropicalization of all parts. Vacuum-potted ribbed epoxy insulators

with high tracking resistance

General description

8BK20 switchboards consist of metal-cladcubicles of air-insulated switchgear withwithdrawable vacuum circuit-breakers.Fused vacuum switches can be usedoptionally. The breaker carriage is fully in-terlocked with the interrupter and the sta-tionary cubicle. It is manually moved ina horizontal direction from the ”Connect-ed“ position behind the closed front doorand without the use of auxiliary equip-ment.A fully isolated low-voltage compartmentis integrated. All commonly used feedercircuits and auxiliary devices are available.The switchgear cubicles and interruptersare factory-assembled and type-tested asper the applicable standards.

Fig. 6: Metal-clad switchgear type 8BK20 (inter-cubicle partition removed)

Stationary part

The cubicle is built as a self-supportingstructure, bolted together from rolled gal-vanized steel sheets and profile sections.Each cubicle is divided into three sealedand isolated compartments by partitions,i.e. the busbar, cable connection and circuit-breaker compartment.The fixed contacts of the primary discon-nectors are located within bushings, effec-tively maintaining the compartmentalizationin all operating states of the switchgear.The bushings are covered by automaticsteel safety shutters upon removal of thecircuit-breaker carriage from the ”Con-nected“ position.Each compartment in every model has itsown pressure-relief device. To reduce inter-nal arcing times and thus consequentialdamage, pressure switches can be in-stalled that trip the incoming feeder circuit-breaker(s) in less than 100 msec. This is aneconomical alternative to busbar differen-tial protection.

Breaker carriage

The carriage normally supports a vacuumcircuit-breaker with the associated operat-ing mechanism and auxiliary devices.Fused vacuum switches are optional. By manually moving the carriage with thespindle drive it can be brought into a dis-tinct ”Connected“ and ”Disconnected/Test“ position. To this effect, the arc andpressure-proof front door remains closed.To remove the switching element com-pletely from its compartment, a centralservice truck is used. Inspection can easilyand safely be carried out with the circuit-breaker in the ”Disconnected/Test“ posi-tion. All electrical and mechanical parts areeasily accessible in this position.Mechanical spring-charge and contact-position indicators are visible through theclosed door. Local mechanical ON/OFFpushbuttons are actived through the dooras well.For complete remote control, the circuit-breaker carriage can be equipped for motoroperation.

Air-Insulated SwitchgearType 8BK20


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Low-voltage compartment

All protective relays, monitoring and con-trol devices of a feeder can be accommo-dated in a metal-enclosed LV compartmenton top of the HV enclosure. Device-mount-ing plates, cabling troughs, and the centralLV terminal strip(s) are located behind aseparate lockable door. Full or partial plex-iglass windows, or mimic diagrams areavailable for these doors.

Main enclosure

The totally enclosed and sealed cubiclepermits installation in most equipmentrooms. With the optional dust protection,the switchgear is safeguarded againstinternal contamination, small animals androdents, and naturally against contact withlive parts. This eliminates the usual rea-sons for arc faults.Should arcing occur, nevertheless, thearc can be guided towards the end of thelineup, where damage is repaired mosteasily. For the latter reason, parititions be-tween individual cubicles of the same bussections are normally not used.

Fig. 7: Cross-section through 8BK20 cubicle

Busbars and primary disconnectors

Rectangular busbars drawn from pure cop-per are used exclusively. They are mount-ed on ribbed, cast-resin post insulatorswhich are sized to take up the dynamicforces resulting from short circuits. Solid-dielectric busbar insulation is available.The movable parts of the line and load-side primary disconnectors have flat,spring-loaded and silver-plated hemispheri-cal pressure contacts for low contact re-sistance and good ventilation. The parallelconnecting arms are designed to increasecontact pressure during short circuits. Thefixed contacts are silver-plated stubs withinthe circuit-breaker bushings or the busbarmountings.

Instrument transformers

Up to three multicore block-type currenttransformers plus three single-phasepotential transformers can be installed inthe lower compartment, PTs optionally onwithdrawable modules.The CTs carry the cable-connecting barsand lugs, and the fixed contacts of the (op-tional) grounding switch. All common bur-den and accuracy ratings of instrumenttransformers are available. Busbar meter-ing PTs with their current-limiting fuses areinstalled on withdrawable carriages, identi-cally to breaker carriages.


Cable and bar connections

Cables and bars are connected frombelow; entrance from above requires anauxiliary structure behind the cubicle.Single-phase or three-phase solid-dielectriccables can be connected from the front orthe rear of the cubicle (specify); stresscones are installed conveniently inside thecubicle.Make-proof grounding switches with man-ual operation can be installed below theCTs, engaging contacts behind the cablelugs. Operation of the fully interlockedgrounding switch is possible only with thebreaker carriage in the ”Disconnected/Test“ position.

Interlocking system

A series of sturdy mechanical interlocksforces the operator into the only safe oper-ating sequence of the switchgear, prevent-ing positively the following: Moving the carriage with the breaker

closed. Switching the breaker in any but the

locked ”Connected“ or ”Disconnected/Test“ position

Engaging the grounding switch with thecarriage in the ”Connected“ position,and moving the carriage into this posi-tion with the grounding switch engaged.

Degrees of protection

Standard degree of protection IP 3XDaccording to IEC 60529.Optionally, the cubicles can be protectedagainst harmful internal deposits of dustand against dripping water (IP 51), availableonly for cubicles without ventilation slots.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Installation

The switchboards are shipped in sectionsof up to three cubicles on stable woodenpallets which are suitable for rolling andforklift handling. These sections are boltedor spot-welded to channel iron sectionsembedded in a flat and level concrete floor.Front-connected types can be installedagainst the wall or free-standing; rear-con-nected cubicles require service aisles.Double-busbar installations in back-to-backconfiguration are installed free-standing.Cable feed-in is through correspondingcut-outs in the floor, plans for which arepart of the switchgear supply. Three-phase(armored) cables for voltages above 12 kVrequire sufficient clearance below theswitchgear to split up the phases (cable-floor, etc.). Circuit-breakers are shippedmounted on their carriages inside theswitchgear cubicles. For dimensions andweights, see Fig. 9.

Fig. 8: Cross-section through switchgear type 8BK20in back-to-back double-busbar arrangement for rated voltages up to 24 kV


Fig. 9

Rated voltage

Panel spacing

Width

Depth front conn.without channelwith channel

Depth rear conn.

Approx. weightincl. breaker

7.2

Weights and dimensions

800

2050

1650

17.5

1775

800

1775

1000

2250

2025

2150

1000

2150

24[kV]

[mm]

[mm]

[mm][mm]

[mm]

[kg]

800

2050

1650

1775

800

1775

800

2050

1650

1775

800

1775

1000

2250

2025

2150

1000

2150

12 15


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

7.2

12

15

17.5

24

Ratedvoltage

Ratedlightningimpulsevoltage

[kV]

60

75

95

95

125

20

28

36

38

50

31.540*50*

31.540*50*

31.540*50*

162025

162025

80110125

80110125

80110125

405063

405063

Rated short-time powerfrequencyvoltage

[kV]

Rated short-circuit-breakingcurrent/short-time current(1 or 3 savailable)

[kA] (rms)

Rated normal feeder current* Rated normal busbar currentRatedshort-circuitmakingcurrent

[kA]

–––

–––

–––

–

630[A]

1250[A]

–

–

–

––

–

2000[A]

–––

–––

2500[A]

–

–

–

–––

–––

3150[A]

–

–

–

–––

–––

40001)

[A]

Technical data

1250[A]

2000[A]

2500[A]

–––

–––

3150[A]

–––

–––

4000[A][kV]

* 1 s1) Ventilation unit with or without fan and ventilation slots in the front of the cubicle required.


Fig. 10


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 11: Available circuit options

8BK20 switchgear up to 24 kV

SectionalizerPanel

Withdraw-ableparts

Fixed parts Meteringpanel

Busbarmodules

Bus riser panel Busbar connec-tion panel


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Vacuum contactormotor starters 8BK30,air-insulated

From 3.6–12 kV Single-busbar Type-tested Metal-enclosed Metal-clad Withdrawable vacuum contactors

and HRC current-limiting fuses For direct lineup with 8BK20 switchgear For indoor installation

Specific features

Designed as extension to 8BK20 switch-gear with identical cross section

Contactor mounted on horizontally mov-ing truck – 400 mm panel spacing

Cable connection from front or rear Central or individual control power trans-

former Integrally-mounted electronic multifunc-

tion motor-protection relays available.

Safety of operating and maintenancepersonnel


Positive and robust mechanical inter-locks

Arc-fault-tested metal enclosure Complete protection against contact

with live parts Absolutely safe fuse replacement Maintenance-free vacuum interrupter

tubes


Metal enclosure with optional gaskets Complete corrosion protection and tropi-

calization of all parts Vacuum-potted ribbed expoy insulators

with high tracking resistance

Fig. 12: Metal-clad switchgear type 8BK30 with vacuum contactor (inter-cubicle partition removed)


Fig. 13

3.67.212

Ratedvoltage

BIL

[kV] [kV]

406060

102028

100020003000

400400400

PFWV

[kV]

Maximumrating ofmotor

[kW]

Rated busbar currentFeederrating

[A]

1250[A]

2000[A]

3150[A]

2500[A]

4000[A]

Technical data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

General description

8BK30 motor starters consist of metal-enclosed, air-insulated and metal-clad cubi-cles. Vacuum contactors on withdrawabletrucks, with or without control powertransformers, are used in conjunction withcurrent-limiting fuses as starter devices.The truck is fully interlocked with the struc-ture and is manually moved from the”Connected“ to the ”Disconnected/Test“position. A fully isolated low-voltage com-partment is integrated. All commonly usedstarter circuits and auxiliary devices areavailable.The starter cubicles and contactors arefactory-assembled and type-tested as perapplicable standards.

Fig. 14: Available circuits

The stationary part

The cubicle is constructed basically thesame as the matching switchgear cubicles8BK20, with the exception of the contactortruck.

Contactor truck

Vacuum contactor, HRC fuses, and controlpower transformer with fuses (if ordered)are mounted on the withdrawable truck.Auxiliary devices and interlocking compo-nents, plus the primary disconnects com-plete the assembly.


Space is provided for regular bimetallic orelectronic motor-protection relays, plus theusual auxiliary relays for starter control.The compartment is metal-enclosed andhas its own lockable door. All customerwiring is terminated on a central terminalstrip within this compartment.

Main enclosure

Practically identical to the associated8BK20 switchgear.


Horizontal busbars are identical to the onesin the associated 8BK20 switchgear.Primary disconnectors are adapted to thelow feeder fault currents of these starters.Silver-plated tulip contacts with round con-tact rods are used.

CTs and cable connection

Due to the limited let-through current ofthe HRC fuse, block-type CTs with lowerthermal rating can be used. Depending onthe protection scheme used, CTs with oneor two secondary windings areinstalled.All commonly used feeder cables up to300 mm2 can be terminated and connect-ed at the lower CT terminals.Grounding switches or surge-voltagelimiters are installed optionally below thecurrent transformers.

Reduced-voltage nonreversing (RVNR)with starter (reactor starting)

Full-voltagenonreversing(FVNR)

Reduced-voltage nonreversing (RVNR)with external reactor autotransformer”Korndorffer Method“



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Interlocking system

Contactor, truck and low-voltage plugs areintegrated into the interlocking system toassure the following safeguards: The truck cannot be moved into the

”Connected“ position before the LV plugis inserted.

The LV plug cannot be disconnectedwith the truck in the ”Connected“ posi-tion.

The truck cannot be moved with thecontactor in the ON position.

The contactor cannot be operated withthe truck in any other but the locked”Connected“ or ”Disconnected/Test“position.

The truck cannot be brought into the”Connected“ position with the ground-ing switch engaged.

The grounding switch cannot be en-gaged with the truck in the ”Connect-ed“ position.


Standard degree of protection IP 3XDaccording to IEC 60529.Optionally, the starters can be protectedagainst harmful internal deposits of dustand against dripping water in the”Operating“ position (IP 51).

Installation

Identical to the procedures outlined for8BK20 switchgear. Only the HRC fuses areshipped outside the enclosure, separatelypacked.

Fig. 15: Cross-section through switchgear type 8BK30


Fig. 16

Rated voltage

Width

Height

Depth

Approx. weightincl. contactor

3.6


2 x 400

2050

1650

700

7.2 12[kV]

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

[kg]

2 x 400

2050

1650

700

2 x 400

2050

1650

700


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Metal-clad switchgear 8BK40,air-insulated

From 7.2 to 17.5 kV Single and double-busbar

(back-to-back or face-to-face) Air-insulated Type-tested Metal-enclosed Metal-clad Withdrawable vacuum breaker For indoor installation

Specific features

General-purpose switchgear for ratedfeeder/busbar current up to 5000 A andshort-circuit breaking current up to63 kA

Circuit-breaker mounted on horizontallymoving truck

Cable connections from front



Positive and robust mechanicalinterlocks

Complete protection against contactwith live parts

Line test with breaker inserted (option) Maintenance-free vacuum circuit-

breaker


Sealed metal enclosure with optionalgaskets

Complete corrosion protection and tropi-calization of all parts

Vacuum-potted ribbed epoxy-insulatorswith high tracking resistance

Generator vacuum circuit-breaker panel

Suitable for use in steam, gas-turbine,hydro and pumped-storage power plants

Suitable for use in horizontal, L-shapedor vertical generator lead routing

Fig. 18: Cross-section through type 8BK40 generator panel

Fig. 17: Metal-clad switchgear type 8BK40 with vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH(inter-cubicle partition removed)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


General description

8BK40 switchboards consist of metal-cladcubicles of air-insulated switchgear withwithdrawable vacuum circuit-breakers. Thebreaker truck is fully interlocked with theinterrupter and the stationary cubicle.It is manually moved in a horizontal direc-tion from the ”Connected“ position behindthe closed front door and without the useof auxiliary equipment. A fully isolated low-voltage compartment is integrated.All commonly used feeder circuits and aux-iliary devices are available.The switchgear cubicles and interruptersare factory-assembled and type-tested asper applicable standards.

Stationary part

The cubicle is built as a self-supportingstructure, bolted together from rolled gal-vanized steel sheets and profile sections.Cubicles for rated voltages up to 17.5 kVare of identical construction. Each cubicleis divided into three sealed and isolatedcompartments by partitions, i.e. the bus-bar, cable connection and circuit-breakercompartment.The fixed contacts of the primary discon-nectors are located within insulating breakerbushings, effectively maintaining the com-partmentalization in all operating states ofthe switchgear. The bushings are coveredby automatic steel safety shutters uponremoval of the circuit-breaker elementfrom the ”Connected“ position.Each compartment in every model has itsown pressure-relief device. To reduce inter-nal arcing times and thus consequentialdamage, pressure-switches can be installedthat trip the incoming-feeder circuit-breaker(s)in less than 100 msec. This is an economicalternative to busbar differential protection.

Interrupter truck

The truck normally supports a vacuumcircuit-breaker with the associated operat-ing mechanism and auxiliary devices.By manually moving the truck with thespindle drive it can be brought into a dis-tinct ”Connected“ and ”Disconnected/Test“ position. To this effect, the frontdoor remains closed.Inspection can easily and safely be carriedout with the circuit-breaker in the ”Discon-nected/Test“ position. All electrical andmechanical parts are easily accessible inthis position.Mechanical spring-charge and contact-posi-

tion indicators are visible through theclosed door. Local mechanical ON/OFFpushbuttons are actived through the dooras well.For complete remote control, the circuit-breaker carriage can be equipped for motoroperation.


All protective relays, monitoring and con-trol devices of a feeder can be accommo-dated in a metal-enclosed LV compartmenton top of the HV enclosure. Device-mount-ing plates, cabling troughs, and the centralLV terminal strip(s) are located behind aseparate lockable door. Full or partial plex-iglass windows, or mimic diagramsare available for these doors.

Main enclosure

The totally enclosed and sealed cubiclepermits installation in most equipmentrooms. With the optional dust protection,the switchgear is safeguarded againstinternal contamination, small animals androdents, and naturally against contact withlive parts. This eliminates the usual rea-sons for arc faults. Should arcing occur,nevertheless, the arc can be guided

towards the end of the lineup, where dam-age is repaired most easily. For the latterreason, partitions between individual cubi-cles of the same bus sections are normallynot used.


Rectangular busbars drawn from purecopper are used exclusively. They aremounted on ribbed, cast-resin post insula-tors which are sized to take up the dyna-mic forces resulting from short circuits.The movable parts of the line and load-side primary disconnectors have flat,spring-loaded and silver-plated hemispheri-cal pressure contacts for low contact re-sistance and good ventilation. The parallelconnecting arms are designed to increasecontact pressure during short circuits. Thefixed contacts are silver-plated stubs withinthe circuit-breaker bushings.


Up to three multicore block-type currenttransformers plus three single-phasepotential transformers can be installed inthe lower compartment, PTs optionallyon withdrawable modules.

Fig. 19: Cross-section through panel type 8BK40


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

7.2

Technical data

Ratedvoltage

Ratedlightning-impulsevoltage

Ratedshort-timepower-frequencyvoltage

Ratedshort-circuit-breakingcurrent/short timecurrent

kA [rms]

Ratedshort-circuit-makingcurrent

[kA]

Rated normal feedercurrent

1250[A]

2500[A]

3150[A]

5000[A]

5000[A]

5063

20

28

36

38

60

75

95

95

12

15

17.5

125160

[kV] [kV]

Ratednormalbusbarcurrent

5063

5063

5063

125160

125160

125160

[kV]


The CTs carry the cable-connecting barsand lugs, and the fixed contacts of the (op-tional) grounding switch. All common bur-den and accuracy ratings of instrumenttransformers are available. Busbar meter-ing PTs with their current-limiting fuses areinstalled on a withdrawable truck, identicalto the breaker truck.

Cable and bar connections

Cables and bars are connected frombelow; entrance from above requires anauxiliary structure behind the cubicle.Single-phase or three-phase solid-dielectriccables can be connected from the front ofthe cubicle; stress cones are installed con-veniently inside the cubicle.Regular and make-proof grounding switch-es with manual operation can be installedbelow the CTs, engaging contacts behindthe cable lugs. Operation of the fully inter-locked grounding switch is possible onlywith the breaker carriage in the ”Discon-nected/Test“ position.

Interlocking system

A series of sturdy mechanical interlocksforces the operator into the only safe oper-ating sequence of the switchgear, prevent-ing positively the following: Moving the truck with the breaker

closed. Switching the breaker in any but the

locked ”Connected“ or ”Disconnected/Test“ position.

Engaging the grounding switch withthe truck in the ”Connected“ position,and moving the truck into this positionwith the grounding switch engaged.


Degree of protection IP 4X:In the ”Connected“ and the ”Disconnect-ed/Test“ position of the truck, the switch-gear is totally protected against contactwith live parts by objects larger than 2 mmin diameter.Optionally, the cubicles can be protectedagainst harmful internal deposits of dustand against drip water (IP 51).

Installation

The switchboards are shipped in sectionsof one cubicle on stable wooden palletswhich are suitable for rolling and forklifthandling. These sections are bolted orspot-welded to channel iron sections em-bedded in a flat and level concrete floor.

Front-connected types can be installedagainst the wall or free-standing. Double-busbar installations in back-to-back configu-ration are installed free-standing.Cable feed-in is through corresponding cut-outs in the floor; plans for which are partof the switchgear scope of supply. Three-phase (armored) cables for voltages above12 kV require sufficient clearance belowthe switchgear to split up the phases (cablefloor, etc.). Circuit-breakers are shippedmounted on their trucks inside the switch-gear cubicles. For preliminary dimensionsand weights, see Fig. 20.

Fig. 21

Fig. 20

7.2

1100

2500

2300

2800

Rated voltage

Width

Height

Depth

Approx. weightincl. breaker

Weight and dimensions

12 17.515[kV]

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

[kg]

1100

2500

2300

2800

1100

2500

2300

2800

1100

2500

2300

2800


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 22: Available circuit options for switchgear/generator panel type 8BK40

8BK40 switchgear up to 17.5 kV

PanelWithdraw-ableparts

Fixed parts Meteringpanel

Busbarmodules

Sectionalizer Bus riser panel

8BK40 generator vacuum CB panel

Variants Additional parts Optional parts


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metal-clad or cubicle typeswitchgear NXAIR, air-insulated

From 3.6 to 24 kV Single- and double-busbar (back to back

or face-to-face) Air-insulated Metal-enclosed Metal-clad or cubicle type Modular construction of individual panels Supplied as standard with bushing-

type transformers for selective trippingof feeders without any additionalmeasures.

Vacuum circuit-breaker moduletype NXACT

Specific features

General-purpose switchgear Circuit-breaker mounted on horizontal

slide or truck behind front door Cable connections from front or rear



Switchgear modules with intgrated inter-locking and control board

Panels tested for internal arcs toIEC 60 298, App. AA

Complete protection against contactwith live parts

Mechanical switch position indication onpanel front for switching device, discon-nector and earthing switch

Earthing of feeders by means of make-proof earthing switches.

Operation of all switching, disconnectingand earthing functions from panel front– Unambiguous assignment of actuating

openings and control elements to me-chanical switch position indications

– Mechanical switch position indicationsintegrated in mimic diagram

– Convenient height of actuating open-ings, control elements and mechanicalswitch position indications on high-voltage door, as well as low-voltageunit in door of low-voltage compart-ment.

– Logical interlocks prevent malopera-tion

Option: verification of dead state withhigh-voltage door closed, by means of avoltage detection system according toIEC 61 243-5

Fig. 23: Metal-clad switchgear type NXAIR

Air-Insulated SwitchgearType NXAIR

Flexibility

Wall mounting or free-standing arrange-ment

Cable connection from front or rear Connection of all familiar types of cables Available in truck-type or withdrawable

construction Optional left or right-hand arrangement

of hinges– of high-voltage doors– of doors of low-voltage compartments

Extension of existing switchgear at bothends without modification of panels

Easy replacement of bushing-type trans-formers from front

Screw-type mating contacts on bushing-type transformers can be easily replacedfrom front (from module compartment).

Reconnection of current transformers onsecondary side

Renewed availability

Internal fault withstand capability satis-fied according to standards

Separate pressure relief for every com-partment

Standard direction of pressure reliefupwards

Busbar fittings (e.g. voltage transform-ers, current transformers in run of bus-bar or make-proof earthing switches) ar-ranged in separate compartments abovebusbar compartments

Pressure-resistant additional compart-ments with pressure-proof barrier tobusbar compartment

Pressure-resistant floor covering Control cables inside panels arranged in

metallic cable ducts Cable testing without isolation of busbar

assured by separately opening shuttersof module compartment

Easy replacement of compartments byvirtue of self-supporting, modular andbolted construction

Replacement of module compartmentsand/or connection compartments possi-ble without having to isolate busbar

Bushing-type transformers for selectivedisconnection of feeders

Standards

The switchgear cubicles and interruptersare factory assembled and type-testedaccording to VDE 0670 Part 6 andIEC 60 298.


Standard degree of protection IP3XDaccording to IEC 60 529Optionally, the cubicles can be protectedagainst harmful internal deposits of dustand against dripping water (IP 51), availableonly for cubicles without ventilation slots.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

2

Door of low-voltagecompartment

Bay controller SIPROTEC 4type 7SJ62

3

4

Pressure relief ductBusbarsBushing-type insulatorBushing-type transformerMake-proof earthing switchCable connection for 2 cablesper phaseCablesCable bracketsWithdrawable partVacuum interruptersCombined operating andinterlocking unit for circuit-breaker, disconnector andearthing switchContact systemEarthing busbarOption: truck

123456

789

1011

121314

1

2

4

5

6

7

3

8

10

11

12

9

13

E

D

A

B

C

14

Fig. 24: Cross-section through cubicle type NXAIR


NXAIR is of modular construction.The main components are: A Module compartment B Busbar compartment C Connection compartment D NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module E Low-voltage compartment

Module compartment

Basic features

Housings are of sendzimir-galvanizedsheet-steel

High-voltage door and front frame withadditional epoxy resin powder coating

Module compartment to accomodatenecessary components (vacuum circuit-breaker module, vacuum contactor mod-ule, disconnector module, meteringmodule and transformer feeder module)for implementing various panel versions

With shutter operating mechanism High-voltage door pressure-proof in

event of internal arcs in panel Metallic cable ducts on side for laying

control cables (internal and external) Option: test sockets for capactive volt-

age detection system Low-voltage plug connectors for connec-

tion of switchgear modules to auxiliaryvoltage circuits.

NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module

Features

Integrated mechanical interlocks be-tween operating mechanisms

Integrated mechanical switch positionindications for circuit-breaker, withdrawa-ble part and earthing switch functions

Easy movement since only withdrawablepart is moved

Permanent interlock of carriage mecha-nism of switchgear module in panel


Accommodates equipment for protec-tion, control, measuring and metering,e.g. bay controller SIPROTEC 4 type7SJ62

Shock-protected from high-voltagesection by barriers

Low-voltage compartment can beremoved; ring and control cables areplugged in

Option: low-voltage compartment ofincreased height (980 mm) possible

Option: partition wall between panels.

Solid-state HMI(human-machine interface)

Bay controller SIPROTEC 4 type 7SJ62 forcontrol and protection (Fig.25)

Features

1 LCD for process and equipment data,e.g. for:– Measuring and metering values– Binary data for status of switchpanel

and device– Protection data– General signals– Alarm

2 Keys for navigation in menus and forentering values

3 Seven programmable LEDs with possi-ble application-related inscriptions, forindicating any desired process andequipment data

4 Four programmable function keys forfrequently performed actions.

Fig. 25: Bay controller


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


12

28 1)

75

31.5

31.5

80

2500

2500

Rated voltage

Rated short-timepower-frequencyvoltage

Rated lightningimpulse voltage

Rated short-circuitbreaking current

Rated short-timewithstand current

Rated short-circuitmaking current

Rated normalcurrent of busbar

Rated normalcurrent of feeder

Rated normalcurrent of trans-former feederpanels withHV HRC fuses 2)

Technical data

[kV]

[kV]

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[kA]

[A]

[A]

max.

max.

max.

max.

max.

15

36

95

31.5

31.5

80

2500

2500

17.5

38

95

25

25

63

2500

2500

24

50

125

25

25

63

2500

2500

Depends on rated current of fuse used

800

2000

2350

1350

600

Width

Height

Height with highLV compartment

Depth

Weight (approx.)


[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

[mm]

[kg]

800

2300

2650

1550

800

2300

2650

1550

800*) / 1000

2300

2650

1550

Fig. 26

*) up to 1250 A rated normal current of feeder

1) 42 kV on request

2) At 7.2 kV: max. rated current 250 Aat 12 kV: max rated current 150 Aat 15/17.5/24 kV: max. rated current 100 A

Fig. 27


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Incoming andoutgoing feederpanel with circuit-breaker module

Outgoing feederpanel withdisconnectormodule

Metering panelwith meteringmodule

Sectionalizerpanel of the bussectionalizer

Bus riser panelof the bussectionalizer

Spur panel withcircuit-breakermodule

Feeder panel withbusbar earthingswitch(optional)*

Feeder panelwith busbarconnection(optional)*

Feeder panel withbusbar voltagemetering(optional)*

Feeder panel withbusbar currentmetering(optional)*

Components shown with dashes are optional* Not for feeder panels with open-circuit ventilation,

busbar current metering up to 12 kV, 25 kA

Transformerfeeder panel withtransformerfeeder moduleand fuses

Switchdisconnectorpanel

Fig. 28: Available circuit options


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Gas-insulated switchgeartype 8DC11

From 3.6 up to 24 kV Triple-pole primary enclosure SF6-insulated Vacuum circuit-breakers, fixed-mounted Hermetically-sealed, welded, stainless-

steel switchgear enclosure Three-position disconnector as busbar

disconnector and feeder earthing switch Make-proof grounding with

vacuum circuit breaker Width 600 mm for all versions

up to 24 kV Plug-in, single-pole, solid-insulated bus-

bars with outer conductive coating Cable termination with external cone

connection system to EN 50181

Operator safety

Safe-to-touch and hermetically-sealedprimary enclosure

All high-voltage parts, including the cablesealing ends, busbars and voltage trans-formers are surrounded by groundedlayers or metal enclosures

Capacitive voltage indication for check-ing for ”dead“ state

Operating mechanisms and auxiliaryswitches safely accessible outside theprimary enclosure (switchgear enclo-sure)

Type-tested enclosure and interrogationinterlocking provide high degree of inter-nal arcing protection

Arc-fault-tested acc. to IEC 60 298 No need to interfere with the SF6-insu-

lation

Operational reliability

Hermetically-sealed primary enclosurefor protection against environmentaleffects (dirt, moisture, insects and ro-dents). Degree of protection IP65

Operating mechanism componentsmaintenance-free in indoor environment(DIN VDE 0670 Part 1000)

Breaker-operating mechanisms accessi-ble outside the enclosure (primary enclo-sure)

Inductive voltage transformer metal-enclosed for plug-in mounting outsidethe main circuit

Toroidal-core current transformerslocated outside the primary enclosure,i.e. free of dielectric stress

Fig. 29: Gas-insulated swichgear with vacuum circuit-breakers

SF6-Insulated SwitchgearType 8DC11

Complete switchgear interlocking withmechanical interrogation interlocks

Welded switchgear enclosure, perma-nently sealed

Minimum fire contribution Installation independent of attitude for

feeders without HRC fuses Corrosion protection for all climates

General description

Due to the excellent experience with vacu-um circuit breaker gas-insulated switch-gear, there is a worldwide rapidly increas-ing demand of this kind of switchgear evenin the so-called low-range field.

The 8DC11 is the result of the economicalcombination of SF6-insulation and vacuumtechnology. The insulating gas SF6 is usedfor internal insulation only; circuit interrup-tion takes place in standard vacuum break-er bottles. The safety for the personneland the environment is maximized. The8DC11 is completely maintenance-free.The welded gas-tight enclosure of the pri-mary part assures an endurance of 30 yearswithout any work on the gas system.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 30: Cross section through switchgear type 8DC11


Fig. 31: Principle of gas monitoring (with ”Ready for service“ indicator)

1. Modular design and compactdimensions

The 8DC switchboards consist of: The maintenance-free SF6-gas-insulated

switching module is three-phase encap-sulated and contains the vacuum circuit-breaker and 3 position selector switch(ON/OFF/READY TO EARTH)

Parts for which single-phase encapsula-tion is essential are safe to touch, easilyaccessible and not located in the switch-ing module, e.g. current and potentialtransformers

The busbars are even single-phaseencapsulated, i.e. they are insulated bysilicone rubber with an outer groundedcoating. The pluggable design assures ahigh degree of flexibility and makes alsothe installation of busbar CTs and PTssimple.

2. Factory-assembled well-proven test-ed components

Switchgear based on well-proven compo-nents.The 8DC switchgear design is based onassembling methods and componentswhich have been used for years in our SF6-insulated Ring Main Units (RMUs). For ex-ample, the stainless-steel switchgear en-closure is hermetically-sealed by weldingwithout any gaskets. Bushings for the bus-bar, cable and PT connection are welded inthis enclosure, as well as the rupture disc,which is installed for pressure relief in theunlikely event of an internal fault. Siemenshas had experience with this techniquesince 1982; 50,000 RMUs are running trou-ble-free.Cable plugs with the so-called outer-conesystem have been on the market for manyyears.The gas pressure monitoring system is nei-ther affected by temperature fluctuationsnor by pressure fluctuations and showsclearly whether the switchpanel is ”readyfor service“ or not. The monitor is magnet-ically coupled to an internal gas-pressurereference cell; mechanical penetrationthrough the housing is not required. A de-sign safe and reliable and, of course, well-proven in our RMUs.The vacuum circuit-breaker, i.e. the vacu-um interrupters and the operating mecha-nism, is also used in our standard switch-boards. The driving force for the primarycontacts of the vacuum interrupters istransferred via metal bellows into the SF6-gas-filled enclosure. A technology that hasbeen successfully in operation in morethan 100,000 vacuum interrupters over 20years.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

1

34

5

67

89

10

11 12

13

14

14

2

15

15


Busbar voltage transformer

Busbar current transformer

Busbar

SF6-filled enclosure

Three-position switch

Three-position switchoperating mechanism

Circuit-breaker operatingmechanism

Circuit-breaker(Vacuum interrupter)

Current transformers

Double cable connectionwith T-plugs

PT disconnector

Voltage transformers

Cable

Pressure relief duct

3

4

52

1

1

2

3

4

5

”Ready for service“ indicator

Pressure cell

Red indicator: Not ready

Green indicator: Ready

Magnetic coupling

Stainless-steelenclosure filled withSF6 gas at 0.5 bar(gauge) at 20 °C


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3. Current and potential transformersas per user’s application

A step forward in switchgear design with-out any restriction to the existing system!New switchgear developments are some-times overdesigned with the need for high-ly sophisticated secondary monitoring andprotection equipment, because current-and potential-measuring devices are usedwith limited rated outputs.The result:Limited application in distribution systemsdue to interface problems with existingdevices; difficult operation and resetting ofparameters.The Siemens 8DC switchgear has no re-strictions. Current and potential transform-ers with conventional characteristics areavailable for all kinds of protection require-ments. They are always fitted outside theSF6-gas-filled container in areas of single-pole accessibility, the safe-to-touch designof both makes any kind of setting and test-ing under all service conditions easy.Current transformers can be installed inthe cable connection compartment at thebushings and, if required additionally, atthe cables (inside the cable connectioncompartment). Busbar CTs for measuringand protection can be placed around thesilicone-rubber-insulated busbars in anypanel.Potential transformers are of the metal-clad pluggable design. Busbar PTs aredesigned for repeated tests with 80% ofthe rated power-frequency withstand volt-age, cable PTs can be isolated from thelive parts by means of a disconnectiondevice which is part of the SF6-gas-filledswitching module. This allows high-voltagetesting of the switchboard with AC and thecable with DC without having to removethe PTs.

4. No gas work at site and simplifiedinstallation

The demand for reliable, economical andmaintenance-free switchgear is increasingmore and more in all power supply sys-tems. Industrial companies and power sup-ply utilities are aware of the high invest-ment and service costs needed to keep areliable network running. Preventive main-tenance must be carried out by trained andcostly personnel.A modern switchgear design should notonly reduce the investment costs, but alsothe service costs in the long run!The Siemens 8DC switchgear has beendeveloped to fulfill those requirements.The modular concept with the mainte-nance-free units does not call for installa-tion specialists and expensive testing andcommissioning procedures. The switchingmodule with the circuit-breaker and thethree-position disconnector is sealed forlife by gas-tight welding without any gas-kets. All other high-voltage componentsare connected by means of plugs, a tech-nology well-known from cable plugs withlong- lasting service and proven experience.All cables will be connected by cable plugswith external cone connection system.In the case of XLPE cables, several manu-facturers even offer cable plugs with anouter conductive coating (also standard forthe busbars). Paper-insulated mass-impreg-nated cables can be connected as well byRaychem heat-shrinkable sealing ends andadapters.The pluggable busbars and PTs do notrequire work on the SF6 system at site. In-stallation costs are considerably reduced(all components are pluggable) because,contrary to standard GIS, even the site

HV tests can be omitted. Factory-testedquality is ensured thanks to simplifiedinstallation without any final adjustmentsor difficult assembly work.

5. Minimum space and maintenance-free, cost-saving factors

Panel dimensions reduced, cable-connec-tion compartment enlarged!The panel width of 600 mm and the depthof 1225 mm are just half of the truth. Moreimportant is the maximized size of the 8DCswitchgear cable-connection compartment.The access is from the switchgear frontand the gap from the cable terminal to theswitchgear floor amounts to 740 mm.There is no need for any aisle behind theswitchgear lineup and a cable cellar is su-perfluous. A cable trench saves civil engi-neering costs and is fully sufficient withcompact dimensions, such as width 500mm and depth 600 mm.Consequently, the costs for the plot of landand civil work are reduced. Even more,a substation can be located closer to theconsumer which can also solve cablerouting problems.

Busbar

Features

Single-pole, plug-in version Made of round-bar copper, silicon-

insulated Busbar connection with cross pieces

and end pieces, silicon-insulated Field control with the aid of electro-

conductive layers on the silicon-rubberinsulation (both inside and outside)

External layers earthed with the switch-gear enclosure to permit access

Insensitive to dirt and condensation Shock-hazard protected in form of metal

covering Switchgear can be extended or panels

replaced without affecting the SF6 gasenclosures.


Fig. 32: Plug-in busbar (front view with removed low-voltage panel)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Optional equipment indicated by means of broken linescan be installed/omitted in part or whole.

Vacuum circuit-breakerpanel and three-positiondisconnector

Disconnector panelwith three-positiondisconnector

Switch-disconnectorpanel with three-positionswitch disconnectorand HV HCR fuses

Busbar section with2 three-positiondisconnectors andvacuum circuit-breakerin one panel

Switch-disconnectorpanel with three-positionswitch disconnectorand HV HCR fuses

Circuit-breaker panel Disconnector panel Switch-disconnectorpanel with fuses

1)

Busbar section Metering

Basic versions

Fig. 35: Switchpanel versions

1) Current transformer: electrically, this is assigned to the switchpanel,its actual physical location, however, is on the adjacent panel.


5 6 7

1

4 2 3 1

23

4567

Primary part SF6-insulated,with vacuum interrupterPart of switchgear enclosureOperating-mechanism box(open)Fixed contact elementPole supportVacuum interrupterMovable contact elementMetal bellowsOperating mechanism

8 9

89

Fig. 33: Vacuum circuit-breaker (open on operating-mechanism side)

Fig. 34: Vacuum circuit-breaker (sectional view)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

[mm]

[mm]

[mm][mm]

[kg][kg]

600


2250

12252370

7001200

Width

Height

Depth single-busbardouble-busbar

Weight single-busbar(approx.) double-busbar

Fig. 36: Technical data of switchgear type 8DC11

Fig. 37


Climate and ambient conditions

The 8DC11 fixed-mounted circuit breakeris fully enclosed and entirely unaffectedby ambient conditions. All medium-voltage switching devices

are enclosed in a stainless-steel housing,which is welded gas-tight and filled withSF6 gas

Live parts outside the switchgear enclo-sure are single-pole enclosed

There are no points at which leakagecurrents of high-voltage potentials areable to flow off to ground

All essential components of the operat-ing mechanism are made of noncorrod-ing materials

Ambient temperature range:–5 to +55°C.

Internal arc test

Tests have been carried out with 8DC11switchgear in order to verify its behaviorunder conditions of internal arcing.The resistance to internal arcing complieswith the requirements of: IEC 60 298 AA DIN VDE 0670 Part 601, 9.84These guidelines have been applied inaccordance with PEHLA Guideline No. 4.

Protection against electric shockand the ingress of water and solidforeign bodies

The 8DC11 fixed-mounted circuit breakeroffer the following degrees of protection inaccordance with IEC 60259: IP3XD for external enclosure IP65 for high-voltage components of

switchpanels without HV HRC fuses

Cable connection systems

Features

8DC11 switchgear for thermoplastic-insulated cables with cross-sectionsup to 630 mm2

Standard cable termination height of740 mm

High connection point, simplifyingassembly and cable-testing work

Phase reversal simple, if necessary,due to symmetrical arrangement ofcable sealing ends

Cover panel of cable termination com-partment earthed

Nonconnected feeders:– Isolate– Ground– Secure against re-energizing(e.g. with padlock)

Types of cable termination

Circuit-breaker and disconnector panelswith cable T-plugs for bushings, with M16terminal thread according to EN 50181type C.Switch disconnector panels with elbowcable plugs for bushings, with plug-in con-nection according to EN 50181 type A.

7.2Rated voltage

Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage

Rated lightning impulsewithstand voltage

Rated short-circuitbreaking currentRated short-timecurrent, 3 s


Rated busbar current

Rated feeder current

Rated current of switch-disconnector panelswith fuses

Technical data

20

60

25

63

1250

1250

100

12

28

75

25

63

1250

1250

80

36

95

25

63

1250

1250

63

15

50

125

25

63

1250

1250

50

24

38

95

25

63

1250

1250

63

17.5[kV]

[kV]

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[A]

[A]

[A]

max.

max.

max. fuse


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 39: Types of cable termination, outer cone system

Fig. 38: Double busbar: Back-to-back arrangement (cross section)

Single cable Double cable Termination for surge arrester Terminationfor switch discon-nector panel

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Operating mechanism

Cable connection

Current transformer

Panel link

Busbar

Gas compartment

Three-position switch

Voltage transformer

5

6

7

8

9

1

2

3

4


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SF6-Insulated SwitchgearType 8DA/8DB10

Gas-insulated switchgeartype 8DA/8DB10

Single-busbar: type 8DADouble-busbar: type 8DB

From 7.2 to 40.5 kV Single and double-busbar Gas-insulated Type-tested Metal-clad (encapsulated) Compartmented Fixed-mounted vacuum breaker

Specific features

Practically maintenance-free compactswitchgear for the most severe serviceconditions

Fixed-mounted maintenance-free vacu-um breakers

Only two moving parts and two dynamicseals in gas enclosure of each pole

Feeder grounding via circuit-breaker Only 600 mm bay width and identical

dimensions from 7.2 to 40.5 kV

Safety and reliability

Safe to touch – hermetically-sealedgrounded metal enclosure.

All HV and internal mechanism partsmaintenance-free for 20 years

Minor gas service only after 10 years Arc-fault-tested Single-phase encapsulation –

no phase-to-phase arcing All switching operations from dead-front

operating panel Live line test facility on panel front Drive mechanism and CT secondaries

freely and safely accessible Fully insulated cable and busbar connec-

tions available Positive mechanical interlocking External parts of instrument transform-

ers free of dielectric stresses.


Hermetically-sealed enclosure protectsall high-voltage parts from the environ-ment

Installation independent of altitude Corrosion protection for all climates.

General description

The switchgear type 8DA10 represents thesuccessful generation of gas-insulated me-dium-voltage switchgear with fixed-mount-ed, maintenance-free vacuum circuit-break-ers. The insulating gas SF6 is used forinternal insulation only; circuit interruptiontakes place in standard vacuum breakerbottles.

1. Encapsulation

All high-voltage conductors and interrupterelements are enclosed in two identicalcast-aluminum housings, which are ar-ranged at 90° angles to each other. Thealuminum alloy used is corrosion-free.The upper container carries the copperbusbars with its associated vacuum-pottedepoxy insulators, and the three-way selec-tor switch for the feeder with the threepositions ON/ISOLATED/GROUNDINGSELECTED. The other housing containsthe vacuum breaker interrupter. The twohousings are sealed against each other,and against the cable connecting area byarc-proof and gas-tight epoxy bushingswith O-ring seals. Busbar enclosure andbreaker enclosures form separate gascompartments.The hermetical sealing of all HV compo-nents prevents contamination, moisture,and foreign objects of any kind – the lead-ing cause of arcing faults – from enteringthe switchgear. This reduces the require-ment for maintenance and the probabilityof a fault due to the above to practicallyzero. All moving parts and items requiringinspection and occasional lubrication arereadily accessible.

2. Insulation medium

Sulfur-hexafluoride (SF6) gas is the primeinsulation medium in this switchgear.Vacuum-potted cast-resin insulators andbushings supplement the gas and canwithstand the operating voltage in the ex-tremely unlikely case of a total gas loss ina compartment. The SF6 gas serves addi-tionally as corrosion inhibiter by keepingoxygen away from the inner components.The guaranteed leakage rate of any gascompartment is less than 1% per year.Thus no scheduled replenishment of gas isrequired. Each compartment has itsown gas supervision by contact-pressuregauges.

3. Three-position switch and circuit-breaker

The required isolation of any feeder fromthe busbar, and its often desired groundingis provided by means of a sturdy, mainte-nance-free three-way switch arranged be-tween the busbars and the vacuum break-er bottles. This switch is mechanicallyinterlocked with the circuit breaker. Theoperations ”On/Isolated“ and ”Isolated/Grounding selected“ are carried out bymeans of two different rotary levers. Thegrounding of the feeder is completed byclosing the circuit-breaker. To facilitatereplacement of a vacuum tube with thebusbars live, the switch is located entirelywithin the busbar compartment.The vacuum circuit-breakers used are ofthe type 3AH described on pages 3/74 ffof this section. Mounted in the gas-insulat-ed switchgear, the operating mechanism isplaced at the switchgear front and the vac-uum interrupters are located inside the gasfilled enclosures. The number of operatingcycles is 30,000. Since any switching arcthat occurs is contained within the vacuumtube, contamination of the insulating gas isnot possible.

4. Instrument transformers

Toroidal-type current transformers withmultiple secondary windings are arrangedoutside the metallic enclosure around thecable terminations. Thus there is no highpotential exposed on these CTs and sec-ondary connections are readily accessible.All commonly used burden and accuracyratings are available.Bus metering and measuring are by induc-tive, gas-insulated potential transformerswhich are plugged into fully insulated andgas-tight bushings on top of the switch-gear.

5. Feeder connections

All commonly used solid-dielectric insulat-ed single and three-phase cables can beconnected conveniently to the breaker en-closures from below. Normally, fully insu-lated plug-in terminations are used. Also,fully insulated and gas-insulated busbarsystems of the DURESCA/GAS LINK typecan be used. The latter two terminationmethods maintain the fully insulated andsafe-to-touch concept of the entire switch-gear, rendering the terminations mainte-nance-free as well.In special cases, air-insulated conventionalcable connection is available.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

8DB10

12345

6

7

8

9

10

13

12

11


Fig. 40: Schematic cross-section for switchgear type 8DA10, single-busbar

Fig. 41: Schematic cross-section for switchgear type 8DB10, double-busbar

Low-voltage cubicleSecondary equipment (SIPROTEC 4)BusbarCast aluminumDisconnectorOperating mechanism andinterlocking devicefor three-position switchThree-position switchCB pole with upper and lowerbushingsCB operating mechanismVacuum interrupterConnectionCurrent transformerRack

8DA10

123456

78

910111213

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

13

12

11


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

6. Low-voltage cabinet

All feeder-related electronic protectiondevices, auxiliary relays, and measuringand indicating devices are installed in met-al-enclosed low-voltage cabinets on top ofeach breaker bay. A central terminal stripof the lineup type is also located there forall LV customer wiring. PCB-type protec-tion relays and individual-type protectiondevices are normally used, depending onthe number of protective functions re-quired.

7. Interlocking system

The circuit-breaker is fully interlocked withthe isolator/grounding switch by means ofsolid mechanical linkages. It is impossibleto operate the isolator with the breakerclosed, or to remove the switch from theGROUND SELECTED position with thebreaker closed. Actual grounding is donevia the circuit-breaker itself.Busbar grounding is possible with theavailable make-proof grounding switch.If a bus sectionalizer or bus coupler is in-stalled, busbar grounding can be done viathe three-way switch and the correspond-ing circuit-breaker of these panels.The actual isolator position is positively dis-played by rigid mechanical indicators.

Switchgear type 8DB10, double-busbar

The double-busbar switchgear has beendeveloped from the components of theswitchgear type 8DA10. Two three-positionswitches are used for the selection of thebusbars. They have their own gas-filledcomponents. The second busbar system islocated phasewise behind the first busbarsystem.The bay width of the switchgear remainsunchanged; depth and height of each bayare increased (see dimension drawingsFig. 43).For parallel bus couplings, only one bay isrequired.

Fig. 42: Dimensions of switchgear type 8DA10, double-busbar

Fig. 43: Dimensions of switchgear type 8DB10, double-busbar


850 *

*

2350

2660

1525

600

2250


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


In accordance with IEC 60529: Degree of protection IP 3XD:The operating mechanism and the low-voltage cubicle have degree of protectionIP 3XD against contact with live parts withobjects larger than 1 mm in diameter. Pro-tection against dripping water is optionallyavailable. Space heaters inside the operat-ing mechanism and the LV cabinet areavailable for tropical climates. Degree of protection IP 65:By the nature of the enclosure, all high-voltage-carrying parts are totally protectedagainst contact with live parts, dust andwater jets.

Installation

The switchgear bays are shipped in prefab-ricated assemblies up to 5 bays wide onsolid wooden pallets, suitable for rolling,skidding and fork-lift handling. Double-bus-bar sections are shipped as single or dou-ble bays. The switchgear is designed forindoor operation; outdoor prefabricated en-closures are available. Each bay is set ontoembedded steel profile sections in a flatconcrete floor, with suitable cutouts for thecables or busbars. All conventional cablescan be connected, either with fully insulat-ed plug-in terminations (preferred), or withconventional air-insulated stress cones.Fully insulated busbars are also connecteddirectly, without any HV-carrying parts ex-posed. Operating aisles are required infront of and (in case of double-busbar sys-tems) behind the switchgear lineup.

Fig. 44


Fig. 45

Fig. 46

Ambient temperature and current-carrying capacity:

40 °C

35 °C

–5 °C

30 °C

35 °C

40 °C

45 °C

50 °C

Rated ambient temperature (peak)

Rated 24-h mean temperature

At elevated ambient temperatures,the equipment must be derated as follows(expressed in percent of current at ratedambient conditions).

110%

105%

100%

90%

80%

Minimum temperature

=

=

=

=

=


600

6001150

[mm]

[mm][mm]

[mm][mm]

[kg][kg]

Width

Height

Depth

Weight per bay

single-busbardouble-busbar



22502350

15252660

(8DA)(8DB)

(8DA)(8DB)

(8DA)(8DB)

approx.approx.

Rated voltage7.2/12/15 kV

Interfacetype

up to 300

Cable cross-sections for plug-in terminations 1)

2

3

4

17.5/24 kV 36 kV

Cable cross-section[mm2] [mm2] [mm2]

400 to 630

up to 300

400 to 630

up to 185

240 to 500

up to 1200 up to 1200 up to 1200

1) The plug-in terminations are of the inside cone type acc. to EN 50181: 1997


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 47

or

Options for circuit-breaker feeder ofswitchgear type 8DA10, single-busbar

Cable or barconnection,nondisconnectableor disconnectable

or

or

or

or

Voltagetransformer,nondisconnectableor disconnectable

Make-proofearthingswitch

Busbar currenttransformer

Busbar accessories

Mounted onbreaker housing

Mounted on currenttransformer housing

Mountedon panelconnections

Panel connectionoptions per phase

Totally gas orsolid-insulated bar

3 x plug-in cable terminationInterface type 2

3 x plug-in cableterminationInterface type 3

5 x plug-in cableterminationInterface type 2

2 x plug-in cableterminationInterface type 2 and 3with plug-in voltagetransformer

Totally solid-insulatedbar with plug-involtage transformer

Air-insulated cabletermination

Air-insulated bar

Surgearrester

Currenttransformer

1 x plug-in cableterminationInterface type 2 and 3

or

or

or

or

or

or

or

Sectionalizerwithout additionalspace required






Plug-in cable terminations are of theInside Cone Type acc. to EN 50181: 1997


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 48

Options for circuit-breaker feeder ofswitchgear type 8DB10, double-busbar

or

Mounted onpanel connections

Currenttransformer

Voltagetransformer,nondisconnectable

Voltagetransformer,disconnectable

Cable or barconnection,nondisconnectable

Make-proofearthingswitch

Sectionalizerwithout additionalspace required

Busbar currenttransformer

Cable or barconnection,disconnectable

Totally gas orsolid-insulated bar




2 x plug-in cable terminationInterface type 2 and 3with plug-in voltagetransformer

Totally solid insulatedbar with plug-involtage transformer

Air-insulated cabletermination

Air-insulated bar

1 x plug-in cableterminationInterface type 2 and 3

or

or

or

or

or

or

or

Surgearrester

or

or

orand

BB1 BB2

BB1 BB2

BB1 BB2

BB1 BB2 BB1BB2

BB1 BB2 BB1BB2

orBB1 BB2

or


Mounted onbreaker housing

Mounted on currenttransformer housing

BB1BB2

Busbar accessories

BB1BB2

orand



Panel connectionoptions per phase

Plug-in cable terminations are of theInside Cone Type acc. to EN 50181: 1997


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 49

7.2

20

60

40

110

3150

2500

12

28

75

36

95

110

15

50

125

24

38

95

17.5[kV]

[kV]

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[A][A]

[A]

Technical data

Rated voltage


Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage

Rated short-circuitbreaking currentand rated short-timecurrent 3s,


Rated current busbarwith twin busbar

Rated current feeder

max.

max.

max.max.

max.

36 40.5

40

110

40

3150

2500

3150

2500

110

3150

2500

110

3150

2500

110

2500

2500

110

2500

2500

70 85

170 180(200)

40404040

4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500 4500

Power Supply for Railway Systems

Type 8DA10 SF6 gas-insulated switchgear(single and double-pole) (Fig. 50a).This type has been upgraded for service inrailway networks with a basic-impulse in-sulation level (BIL) of 200 (230) kV.It is therefore the ideal switchgearfor 1 x 25 kV and 2 x 25 kV (50/60 Hz)railway networks.Typical occurrences in railway networksprove the suitability of the switchgear forsuch applications: Effects of lightning strikes Switching impulse voltage Breaking under asynchronous conditions

with a 180° phase difference Recovery voltage after breaking under

asynchronous conditions with a 180°phase difference.

Twin-Busbar System (TBS)

This primary distribution switchgear isbased on the worldwide proven SF6-insu-lated type 8DA / 8DB switchgear and hasbeen supplemented by a twin busbar(Fig. 50b).The use of standard components allowedus in a remarkably short time to createfrom a modular, compact type of switch-gear a high-current system unbeatable interms of minimal space requirement.The modular-structure busbars were ar-ranged in twin-busbar form. This twin-busbarsystem is supplied via a twin circuit-breakerand respective twin disconnector. All stand-ard panel types required (incoming feeder,coupler, outgoing feeder) are available.

Further Applications


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1-pole 2-pole

Further applications for 8DA/8DB

a) Power Supply for Railway Systems

b) High Power Busbar 4500 A with Twin Busbar System (TBS)

8DB (double busbar)8DA (single busbar)


Fig. 50 a/b


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Panel with integrated inside cone

Panel with separate inside cone

Panel with outside cone

SF6-Insulated SwitchgearType NX PLUS

Gas-insulated switchgear typeNX PLUS

From 7.2 up to 36 kV Single-busbar Metal enclosed/metal-clad Three-pole primary enclosure Gas-insulated Fixed-mounted circuit-breakers Three-position switch as busbar discon-

nector and feeder earthing switch Make-proof earthing with vacuum

circuit-breaker

Specific features

Used in transformer stations and sub-stations

Practically maintenance-free compactswitchgear for the most severe serviceconditions

Panel width 600 mm(with bus sectionalizer panel 900 mm)for all voltages up to 36 kV

General description

The switchgear type NX PLUS combinescompact design, long service life, climate-resistance and freedom from maintenance

1. Reliablility

Hermetically sealed primary enclosurefor protection against environmental ef-fects (dirt, moisture and small animals)

Operating mechanism componentsmaintenance-free in indoor environment(DIN VDE 0670 Part 1000)

Breaker operating mechanisms acces-sible outside the switchgear container(primary enclosure)

Inductive voltage transformers metal-enclosed for plug-in mounting outsidethe main circuit

Ring-core current transformers locatedoutside the primary enclosure

Complete interrogative interlockingsystem

Welded switchgear container, sealedfor life

Minimum fire load.

2. Insulation medium

Due to the excellent experience with vacu-um circuit-breaker gas-insulated switch-gear, there is a worldwide rapidly increas-ing demand of this kind of switchgear evenin the so-called low-range field.The insulating gas SF6 is used for internalinsulation only; circuit interruption takesplace in standard vacuum breaker bottles.The safety for the personnel and the envi-ronment is maximized.The NX PLUS is completely maintenance-free. The welded gas-tight enclosure of theprimary part assures a full service life with-out any work on the gas system.

Panel construction

Fig. 52

Fig. 51: SF6-insulated switchgearType NX PLUS with SIPROTEC

Features

Rated voltage up to 24 kV Rated short-circuit breaking current up

to 25 kA Rated normal currents of busbars up

to 2500 A and feeders up to 1250 A.

Features

Rated voltage up to 36 kV Rated short-circuit breaking current

up to 31.5 kA Rated normal currents of busbars and

feeders up to 2500 A.

Features

Rated voltage up to 36 kV Rated short-circuit breaking current

up to 31.5 kA Rated normal currents of busbars and



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5

3

2

1

4

67

8

9

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

10

29

29

29

231724

25 22

2129

2911

17

26

28

2227

12

34567

89

10

11

121314

15

16

1718

1920

21

2223

24

25

26

272829

Door of low-voltage compartment

SIPROTEC 4 bay controller, type7SJ63, for control and protection

EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton

Door to mechanical control board

Cover of connection compartment

Busbar cover

Busbar module, welded,SF6-insulated

Three-pole busbar system

Three-position switch, SF6-insulated,with the three positions:ON – OFF – EARTH

Module coupling between busbarmodule and circuit-breaker module

Circuit-breaker module, welded,SF6-insulated, with integrated cableconnection

Vacuum interrupter of circuit-breaker

Pressure-relief duct

Integrated cable connection as insidecone

Optional low-voltage compartment1100 mm high

Standard low-voltage compartment730 mm high

Ring-core current transformer

Manual and motor operatingmechanism of three-position switch

Mechanical control board

Manual and motor operatingmechanism of circuit-breaker

Voltage transformer connection socket as inside cone

Cable connection compartment

Module coupling betweencircuit-breaker and cable connectionmodule

Cable connection module, welded,SF6-insulated, with separate cableconnection

Separate cable connection as insidecone

Voltage transformer connection socket as outside cone

Cable connection as outside cone

Connection cables

Rupture diaphragm



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


24

50/60

50

125

31.5

80

2500

2500

Technical data

Rated voltage up to [kV]

Rated frequency [Hz]

Rated short-time power-frequency voltage [kV]

Rated lightning impulse voltage [kV]

Rated short-circuit max. [kA]breaking currentand rated short-timewithstand current, 3 s

Rated short-circuit making current max. [kA]

Rated normal current of busbar max. [A]

Rated normal current of feeder max. [A]

36 (40.5*)

50/60

70 (85*)

170 (185*)

31.5

80

2500

2500

*) On request

Width [mm]Width of sectionalizer panel (≤ 2000 A)

Width sectionalizer panel (> 2000 A) [mm]

Height [mm]Height with higher LV compartment [mm]

Depth [mm]

Weight per panel (approx.) [kg]


600900

1200

24502630

1600

800

Fig. 53


Hermetically-sealed enclosure protectsall high-voltage parts from the environ-ment

Installation independent of altitude Corrosion protection for all climates.

Operator safety

Safe-to-touch and hermetically sealedprimary enclosure

All HV parts, including the cable sealingends, busbars and voltage transformers,are surrounded by earthed layers or met-al enclosures

Capacitive voltage detection system forverification of safe isolation from supply

Operating mechanisms and auxiliaryswitches safely accessible outside theprimary enclosure (switchgear container)

Protective system interlock to preventoperation when enclosure is open

Type-tested enclosure and interrogativeinterlocks provide high degree of internalarcing protection.

Fig. 54


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Control board

Bay controller

Solid-state HMI(human-machine interface)SIPROTEC 4 bay controller, type 7SJ63,PROFIBUS-capable, control and protectionfor stand-alone or master operation.

Mechanical control board

Features

Arranged behind panel door Opening of door switches of the

SIPROTEC 4 bay controller, type 7SJ63,automatically

Three-position switch interlockedwith circuit-breaker

Cancelling of feeder earthing can beblocked mechanically.


1 LCD for process and equipment information, graphically as feeder mimic controldiagram and as text

2 Keys for navigating in menus, in feeder mimic control diagram and for entering values3 Keys for controlling the process4 Four programmable function keys for frequently performed actions5 Fourteen programmable LEDs with possible application-related inscriptions for

indicating any desired process and equipment data6 Two key-operated switches for “changeover between local and remote control“ and

“changeover between interlocked and non-interlocked position“.

Solid-state HMI with panel doorclosed

SIPROTEC 4 bay controller,type 7SJ63(The basic unit for this is in thelow-voltage compartment)

1

2

3

4

5

6

Fig. 55

Fig. 56

Mechanical control boardwith panel door open ON/OFF position indication for three-

position switchON/OFF operating shaft for three-positionswitchOFF/EARTHING PREPARED operatingshaft for three-position switchOFF/EARTHING PREPARED positionindication for three-position switchMimic diagramReady indication for busbar module(gas compartment monitoring)Ready indication for circuit-breakermodule (gas compartment monitoring)Interlocking for preselectionON/OFF position indication for circuit-breakerManual spring charging for circuit-breakerON pushbutton for circuit-breaker withsealable capOFF pushbutton for circuit-breakerLocking device for ”feeder earthed””Spring charged” indication for circuit-breakerOperating cycle counter for circuit-breaker

1

2

3

4

56

7

89

1011

121314

15

1 2 3 4

56

78

109

111213

1415


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Options for circuit-breaker panel

with cable connection as inside cone for: Rated voltage up to 36 kV Rated short-circuit breaking current up to

31.5 kA Rated normal currents of busbars and


Also available as Disconnector panel. 1)

Fittingsbefore circuit-breaker module

Fittingsafter circuit-breaker module 4)

Panel connectionfittings

Panel connectionversions

1 x plug-incable, sizes2 or 3

Voltagetrans-former,plug-intype

Currenttrans-former

Busbar fittings

Capacitivevoltagedetectionsystem

1 x plug-incable,size 2


Surgearrester,plug-intype

Busbarcurrenttrans-former

Surge arrester,plug-in type



4 x plug-incable, size 2

Solid-insulatedbar(e.g. Duresca bar)

or 2)

and 3)

or 2)

or 2)

or

or

or

or

1)


Fig. 57

1) Capacitive voltage detection system according to LRM or IVDS system.

2) Not possible with rated normal current of feeder of 2500 A.

3) Not possible with busbar voltage transformer.

4) Requires cable connection with container for separate inside cone.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Options for circuit-breaker panel

with cable connection as outside cone for: Rated voltage up to 24 kV Rated short-circuit breaking current up to

25 kA Rated normal currents of busbars up to

2500 A and feeders up to 1250 A.

Also available as Disconnector panel.

Panel connectionversions

Currenttrans-former

Busbar fittings

1 x plug-incable,size 2


Surgearrester,plug-intype

Busbarcurrenttrans-former

Fittingsbefore circuit-breaker module

Fittingsafter circuit-breaker module

Panel connectionfittings

1 x plug-incable

Voltagetrans-former,discon-nectable

Capaci-tivevoltagedetectionsystem

2 x plug-incable

Surge arresteror limiter,plug-in type

3 x plug-incable

1)

or

or or

or

or

and 2)

1)


Fig. 58

1) Capacitive voltage detection system according to LRM or IVDS system.

2) Not possible with busbar voltage transformer.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 59

Options for sectionalizer panel

Rated voltage up to 36 kV Rated short-circuit breaking current up to

31.5 kA Rated normal currents of busbar up to

2500 A.

Currenttransformer

1)

Capacitivevoltagedetectionsystem

Busbarcurrenttransformer

Busbarfittings

Fittings before circuit-breaker module

1)

and

Sectionalizer panel


1) Not possible with rated normal current of busbar of 2500 A.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Standards, specifications,guidelines

Standards

The NX PLUS switchgear complies withthe standards and specifications listedbelow: VDE 0670, Part 1000 VDE 0670, Part 6 VDE 0670, Part 101 et seq. VDE 0670, Part 2 IEC 60 694 IEC 60 298 IEC 60 056 IEC 60 129.In accordance with the obligatory harmoni-zation in the European Community, the na-tional standards of the member countriesconform to IEC 60 298.

Type of service location

NX PLUS switchgear can be used as anindoor installation in accordance withVDE 0101: Outside closed electrical operating areas

in locations not accessible to the generalpublic. Tools are required to removeswitchgear enclosures.

In closed electrical operating areas.A closed electrical operating area is aroom or area which is used solely forthe operation of electrical installations.This type of area is locked at all timesand accessible only to authorized trainedpersonnel and other skilled staff. Un-trained or unskilled persons must be ac-companied by authorized personnel.

Definition

“Make-proof earthing switches“ are earth-ing switches with short-circuit making ca-pacity (VDE 0670, Part 2).

Internal arc test,resistance to internal arcs

Internal arc test

Tests have been carried out with NX PLUSswitchgear, in order to verify its behaviourunder conditions of internal arcing.The resistance to internal arcing complieswith the requirements of VDE 0670, Part 6, Appendix AA IEC 60 298, Appendix AA.

Resistance to internal arcs

The possibility of faults in the NX PLUSfixed-mounted circuit-breaker switchgear ismuch less than in previous types, due tothe single-pole enclosure of external com-ponents and the SF6 insulation of theswitchgear: All external fault-causing factors have

been eliminated, such as:– Pollution deposits– Moisture– Small animals and foreign bodies

Maloperations are prevented by theclear, logical layout of the operating ele-ments

The three-position switch and the vacu-um circuit-breaker provide short-circuit-proof earthing of the feeder.

Should arcing occur in spite of this, thepressure is relieved towards the rear into aduct.In the improbable event of a fault insidethe switchgear container, the SF6 insula-tion restricts the arc energy to only about1/3 of that for air. The pressure-relief facil-ity in the rear panel of the switchgear con-tainer is designed to operate in an over-pressure range of 2 to 3.5 bar. The gasesare discharged towards the rear into a duct.The pressure-relief duct diverts the gasesupwards.

Protection against electric shock,the ingress of water and solid foreignbodies

The NX PLUS fixed-mounted circuit-break-er switchgear is fully enclosed and entirelyunaffected by climatic influences. All medium-voltage switching devices

are enclosed in a stainless steel contain-er, which is welded gas-tight and filledwith SF6 gas.

Live parts outside the switchgear con-tainer are single-pole insulated andscreened.

There are no points at which leakagecurrents of high-voltage potential areable to flow off to earth.

All essential components of the operat-ing mechanism are made of non-corrod-ing materials.


The NX PLUS fixed-mounted circuit-break-er switchgear offers the following degreesof protection in accordance with IEC 60 529: IP3XD for external enclosure IP65 for parts under high voltage



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Secondary DistributionSwitchgear and Transformer Substations

General

The secondary distribution network withits basic design of ring-main systems withcounter stations as well as radial-feedtransformer substations is designed inorder to reduce network losses and toprovide an economical solution for switch-gear and transformer substations.These are installed with an extremely highnumber of units in the distribution net-work. Therefore, high standardization ofequipment is necessary and economical.The described switchgear will show suchqualities.To reduce the network losses the trans-former substations should be installeddirectly at the load centers.The transformer substations consisting ofmedium-voltage switchgear, transformersand low-voltage distribution can be de-signed as prefabricated units or singlecomponents installed in any building orrooms existing on site.Due to the large number of units in thenetworks the most economical solution forsuch substations should have climate-inde-pendent and maintenance-free equipmentso that operation of the equipment doesnot need any maintenance work during itslifetime.For such transformer substations, nonex-tensible and extensible switchgear, for in-stance ring-main units (RMUs), have beendeveloped using SF6 gas as insulation andarc-quenching medium in the case of load-break systems (RMUs), and SF6 gas insula-tion and vacuum as arc-quenching mediumin the case of extensible modular switch-gear, consisting of load-break panels withor without fuses, circuit-breaker panels andmetering panels.Siemens has developed RMUs in accord-ance with these requirements.Ring-main units type 8DJ10, 8DJ20, 8DJ40and 8DH10 are type-tested, factory-fin-ished, metal-enclosed, SF6-insulated indoorswitchgear installations. They verifiablymeet all the demands encountered in net-work operation by virtue of the followingfeatures:

Features

Maximum personnel safety

High-grade steel housing and cable con-nection compartment tested for resist-ance to internal arcing

Logical interlocking Guided operating procedures Capacitive voltage indication integrated

in unit Safe testing for dead state on the

closed-off operating front Locked, grounded covers for fuse as-

sembly and cable connection compart-ments

Safe, reliable, maintenance-free

Corrosion-resistant hermetically weldedhigh-grade steel housing without sealsand resistant to pressure cycles

Insulating gas retaining its insulating andquenching properties throughout theservice life

Single-phase encapsulation outsidethe housing

Clear indication of readiness foroperation, unaffected by temperatureor altitude

Complete protection of the switchdisconnector/fuse combination, evenin the event of thermal overload ofthe HV HRC fuse (thermal protectionfunction)

Reliable, maintenance-free switchingdevices

Excellent resistance to ambient conditions

Robust, corrosion-resistant and mainte-nance-free operating mechanisms

Maintenance-free, all-climate, safe-to-touch cable terminations

Creepage-proof and free from partialdischarges

Maintenance-free, safe-to-touch,all-climate HV HRC fuse assembly

Environmental compatibility

Simple, problem-free disposal of theSF6 gas

Housing material can be recycled bynormal methods

Standards

The fixed-mounted ring-main unitstype 8DJ10, 8DJ20, 8DJ40 and 8DH10comply with the following standards:

In accordance with the harmonizationagreement reached by the European Unionmember states that their national specifica-tions conform to IEC PublicationNo. 60 298.

Resistance to internal arcing

– IEC Publ. 60 298, Annex AA– VDE 0670, Part 6


Fax: ++ 49 - 91 31-73 46 36

IEC Standard VDE Standard

IEC 60 694

IEC 60 298

IEC 60 129

IEC 60 282

IEC 60 265-1

IEC 60 420

IEC 60 056

IEC 61 243-5

VDE 0670 Part 1000

VDE 0670 Part 6

VDE 0670 Part 2

VDE 0670 Part 4

VDE 0670 Part 301

VDE 0670 Part 303

VDE 0670 Part 101–107

EVDE 0682 Part 415EN 61 243-5(E)

Fig. 60


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Secondary DistributionSwitchgear and Transformer Substations

Fig. 61: Secondary Distribution Network

G

RMU for transformersubstationsType 8DJ

Secondarydistribution

Primarydistribution

Extensible switchgearfor consumersubstationsType 8DH or 8AA

Extensible switchgearfor substations withcircuit-breakersType 8DH or 8AA


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Nonextensible

Codes,standards

Type ofinstallation

Insulation Enclosure Switchingdevice

Metal -enclosedfixed-mounted Load-break switch

RMU substconveconneStand

Medium-voltageindoor switchgear,type-testedaccording to:IEC 60 298DIN VDE 0670, Part 6

RMU low shousi

Extensible

SF6-gas-insulated

Air-insulated Metal-enclosedLoad-break switchVacuum CBMeasurement panels

ConsCB swup to

Switchgear

Transformer substations

ConsCB swup to

Execution ofthe transformer substation

Prefabricated, factory-assembled substations, with different type of housings,made of concrete, galvanized sheet steel or aluminium

Appl

Load-break switchVacuum CBMeasurement panels

Metal -enclosedfixed-mounted

SF6-gas-insulated

RMU substcable Stand

Secondary DistributionSelection Matrix

Fig. 62


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3s1s

3/50

3/53

3/60

3/64

Switchgeartype

RMU for transformersubstations, plug andconventional cableconnection,Standard Range 1

8DJ10

8DJ20

8DJ40RMU for extremelylow substationhousings

Consumer substation/CB switchgearup to 630 A

8DH10

8AA20

Technical data Page

Rated lightningimpulse withstandvoltage at:7.2/12 17.5/24[kV] [kV]

Rated voltage

[kV]

Maximum ratedshort-timewithstand current[kA] [kA]

Rated normal current

Busbar max.[A]

Feeder[A]

60/75 95/125

60/75 95/125

60/75 95/125

7.2–24

7.2–12

7.2–24

25 20

25 14.3

20 11.5

630 up to 630

Consumer substation/CB switchgearup to 630 A

25 20

20 11.5

20 11.5

16 9.3

7.2–15

17.5–24

7.2–12

17.5–24

1250 up to 630

1000 up to 1000

630 up to 630

Packagesubstation type(Example)

8FB1 3/66

3/58

Page

Application

8FB10

8FB11

8FB12

8FB15

8FB16

8FB17

Type of housing

630 kVA

up to 1000/1250 kVA

Transformerrating

8DJ10

8DJ20

8DJ40

HV sectionMedium-voltageswitchgear type

630 up to 630

630 up to 630

60/75 95/125

60/75 95/125

7.2–24 20 20

RMU for transformersubstations, highcable connection,Standard Range 2

Secondary DistributionSelection Matrix


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DJ10

Fig. 63: Example: Scheme 10

Ring-main unittype 8DJ10, 7.2–24 kVnonextensible, SF6-insulatedStandard Range 1

Typical use

SF6-insulated, metal-enclosed fixed-mount-ed ring-main units (RMU) type 8DJ10 areused for outdoor transformer substationsand indoor substation rooms with a varia-bility of 25 different schemes as a standarddelivery program.More than 60,000 RMUs of type 8DJ10are in worldwide operation.

Specific features

Maintenance-free, all-climate SF6 housings have no seals Remote-controlled motor operating

mechanism for all auxiliary voltages from24 V DC to 230 V AC

Easily extensible by virtue of trouble-freereplacement of units with identical cableconnection geometry

Standardized unit variants for operator-compatible concepts

Variable transformer cable connectionfacilities

Excellent economy by virtue of ambientcondition-resistant, maintenance-freecomponents

Versatile cable connection facilities,optional connection of mass-impregnat-ed or plastic-insulated cables or plugconnectors

Cables easily tested without having tobe dismantled


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 65: Cross section of SF6-insulated ring-main unit 8DJ10


Fig. 66: “Three-position load-break switch”ON–OFF–EARTH

Rated frequency

Rated current ofcable feeders

Rated current oftransformer feeders2)



Rated short-circuitmaking current of cablefeeder switches

Rated short-circuitmaking current oftransformer switches

Rated short-circuit current, 1s

Ambient temperature

7.2

50/60

400/630

200

20

60

63

25

25

min. – 50max. +80

[Hz]

[A]

[A]

[kV]

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[kA]

[°C]

1) Higher values on request2) Depending on HV HRC fuse assembly

12

50/60

400/630

200

28

75

52

25

21

50/60

400/630

200

36

95

52

25

21

50/60

400/630

200

38

95

52

25

21

50/60

400/630

200

50

125

40

25

16

15 17.5 24[kV]

Technical data (rated values)1)

Rated voltage

min. – 50max. +80

min. – 50max. +80

min. – 50max. +80

min. – 50max. +80

Fig. 64

1

2

3

4

5

6

HRC fuse boxes

Hermetically-scaled weldedstainless steel enclosure

SF6 insulation/quenching gas

Three-position load-break switch

Feeder cable with insulatedconnection alternative withT-plug system

Maintenance-free stored energymechanism

1

2

3

4

5

6


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 67: Schemes and dimensions


Dimensions [mm]

800

800

1360

1760

1170

800

1360

1760

1630

800

1360

1760

2070

800

1360

1760

1450

800

1105

1505

1700

800

Scheme 64Scheme 61

Examples out of 25 standard schemes

Without HV HRC fuses Combinations

With integrated HV HRC fuse assembly

Dimensions [mm]

WidthDepthHeight Version with

low support frameVersion withhigh support frame

Scheme 10 Scheme 71 Scheme 81

Scheme 70

1360

1760

WidthDepthHeight Version with

low support frameVersion withhigh support frame


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 68: Example: Scheme 10 (width 1060 mm)


Ring-main unittype 8DJ20, 7.2–24 kVnon extensible, SF6-insulatedStandard Range 2

Typical use

Same system as type 8DJ10 (page 3/50)but other geometrical dimensions anddesign, also single panel for transformerfeeder. Substations with control aisles Compact substations, substations by

pavements Tower base substations 7.2 kV to 24 kV Up to 25 kA

Specific features

Minimal dimensions Ease of operation Proven components from the

8DJ10 range Metal-enclosed All-climate Maintenance-free Capacitive voltage taps for

– incoming feeder cable– outgoing transformer feeder

Optional double cable connection Optional surge arrester connection Transformer cable connected via straight

or elbow plug Motor operating mechanism for auxiliary

voltages of 24 V DC – 230 V AC

8DJ20 switchgear

Overall heights 1200 mm, 1400 mmor 1650 mm

High cable termination For cable T-plugs Detachable lever mechanism Option: rotary operating mechanism


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Rated insulation level:Rated power-frequency withstand voltage Ud

Rated lightning impulse voltage Up

Rated frequency fr

Rated normal current Irfor ring-main feeders

for transformer feeders depending on the HV HRC fuse

Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 1 s

Rated short-time withstand current Ik, 3 s

Rated peak-withstand current Ip

Rated short-time making current Imafor transformer feeder

for ring-main feeder

Ambient temperature T

Rated filling pressure (at 20 °C)for insulation pre and for operation prm

7.2

[kV]

[kV]

[Hz]

[A]

[A]

[kA]

12 15 17.5 24[kV]Rated voltage Ur

[kA]

[kA]

[kA]

[kA]

[hpa]

28

75

50/60

400630

200

2025

20

5063

25

5063

500

38

95

50/60

400630

200

2125

20

5263

25

5263

500

50

125

50/60

400630

200

1621

20

4052

25

4052

500

36

95

50/60

400630

200

2125

20

5263

25

5263

500

[°C]

20

60

50/60

400630

200

2025

20

5063

25

5063

–40 to +70

500

Technical data

Fig. 69


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Transformer feederSection A-A

5

4

2

3

1

A

AStandardCable termination for elbow plugs(Option:cable-T-plugs), cable bushingdirected downlwards

HV HRC fuse compartment

RMU vessel, filled with SF6 gas

Three position load-breakswitch ON-OFF-Earth

Transformer cable with elbowplugs

Spring-assisted/stored-energymechanism

1

2

3

4

5

Fig. 70: Panel design / Example: ring-main transformer block, scheme 10


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Ring-main feeders

Cable connection withcable plugs, compatiblewith bushings ASG 36-400to DIN 47 636 with threadconnection M 16 x 2,connection at front

Transformer feeders

Cable connection withcable plugs, compatiblewith bushings ASG 24-250to DIN 47 636, optionallyASG 36 400 with plug/threadconnection M 16 x 2

Location of bushingsoptionally at front orat bottom

Dimensions in mm

Width

Depth

Height

Combinations withHV HRC fuses2)

Ring-main units withoutHV HRC fuses

Scheme 10

2

1

1060

780

1200

1400

1760

Transformer feederpanels with HV HRC fuses

710 + 350/per additional feeder

780

1200

1400

1760

2 – 5

0

Scheme 11/32/70/84

710

780

1200

1400

1760

0

1

Scheme 21Scheme 01

510

780

1200

1400

1760

0

1

1

1

Scheme 20

710

780

1200

1400

1760

–

2) others on requestFig. 71


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


e 10

3

1

1410

780

1200

1400

1760

Scheme 71 Scheme 72

4

1

1760

780

1200

1400

1760

2

2

1410

780

1200

1400

1760

Scheme 81

3

2

1760

780

1200

1400

1760

Scheme 82


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Ring-main unittype 8DJ40, 7.2–24 kVnonextensible, SF6-insulated

Typical use

SF6-insulated, metal-enclosed, fixed-mounted. Ring-main units type 8DJ40 aremainly used for transformer compact sub-stations. The main advantage of this switch-gear is the extremely high cable termina-tion for easy cable connection and cabletesting work.

Specific features

8DJ40 units are type-tested, factory-finished, metal-enclosed SF6-insulatedswitchgear installations and meet thefollowing operational specifications: High level of personnel safety and

reliability High availability High-level cable connection Minimum space requirement Uncomplicated design Separate operating mechanism

actuation for switch disconnectorand make-proof grounding switch,same switching direction in linewith VDEW recommendation

Ease of installation Motor operating mechanism

retrofittable Optional stored-energy release for

ring cable feeders Maintenance-free All-climate

Fig. 73

Rated frequency

Rated current ofcable feeders

Rated current oftransformer feeders



Rated short-circuitmaking current ofcable feeder switches

Rated short-circuitmaking current oftransformer switches2)

Rated short-time currentof cable feeder switches

Rated short-circuit time

Rated filling pressureat 20 °C

Ambient temperature

[kV]


Rated voltage 12 24

50

400/630*

≤ 200

28

75

50 (31.5)*

25

1

20 (12.5)*

0.5

min. – 40max. +70

[Hz]

[A]

[A]

[kV]

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[kA]

[s]

[barg]

[°C]

50

400/630*

≤ 200

50

125

40 (31.5)*

25

1

16 (12.5)*

0.5

min. – 40max. +70

1) Higher values on request2) Depending on HV HRC fuse assembly* With snap-action/stored-energy operating mechanism up to 400 A/12.5 kA, 1s

Fig. 72: Nonextensible RMU, type 8DJ40


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Width

Depth

Height

Scheme 10 Scheme 32

1140

760

1400/1250

909

760

1400/1250

Scheme 71

1442

760

1400/1250

Dimensions [mm]


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8DH10

The units have a grounded outer enclo-sure and are thus shockproof. This alsoapplies to the fuse assembly and thecable terminations. Plug-in cable sealingends are housed in a shock-proof metal-enclosed support frame

Fuses and cable connections are onlyaccessible when earthed

All bushings for electrical and mechani-cal connections are welded gas-tightwithout gaskets

Three-position switches are fitted forload switching, disconnection andgrounding, with the following switchpositions: closed, open and grounded.Make-proof earthing is effected by thethree-position switch (shown on page3/51)

Each switchgear unit can be composedas required from single panels and(preferably) panel blocks, which maycomprise up to three combined singlepanels

The 8DH10 switchgear is maintenance-free

Integrated current transformer suitablefor digital protection relays and protec-tion systems for CT operation release

Fig. 75: Extensible, modular switchgear type 8DH10

Consumer substationmodular switchgear type 8DH10extensible, SF6-insulated

Typical use

SF6-insulated, metal-enclosed fixed-mount-ed switchgear units type 8DH10 are indoorinstallations and are mainly used for powerdistribution in customer substations ormain substations.The units are particularly well suited forinstallation in industrial environments,damp river valleys, exposed dusty or sandyareas and in built-up urban areas.They can also be installed at high altitudeor where the ambient temperature is veryhigh.

Specific features

8DH10 fixed-mounted switchgear units aretype-tested, factory-assembled, SF6-insulat-ed, metal-enclosed switchgear units com-prising circuit-breaker panels, disconnectorpanels and metering panels.They meet the demands made on medi-um-voltage switchgear, such as High degree of operator safety, reliability

and availability No local SF6 work Simple to install and extend Operation not affected by environmental

factors Minimum space requirements Freedom from maintenance is met sub-

stantially better by these units than byearlier designs.

Busbars from panel blocks are locatedwithin the SF6 gas compartment. Con-nections with individual panels and otherblocks are provided by solid-insulatedplug-in busbars

Single-phase cast-resin enclosed insulat-ed fuse mounting outside the switch-gear housing ensures security againstphase-to-phase faults

All live components are protectedagainst humidity, contamination, corro-sive gases and vapours, dust and smallanimals

All normal types of T-plugs for thermo-plastic-insulated cables up to 300 m2

cross-section can be accommodated


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 76: Cross section of transformer feeder panel

Fig. 78: Combination of single panels with plug-in type, silicon-insulated busbar.No local SF6 gas work required during assembly or extension

Fig. 79: Cross-section of silicon-pluggedbusbar section.

LV cabinet

extensibleextensible

1

2

3

4

5

1

2

3

4

5

67

8

10

9

Fuse assemblyThree-position switchTransformer/cable feeder connectionHermetically-welded gas tankPlug-in busbar up to 1250 A

12345

Low-voltage compartmentCircuit-breaker operating mechanismMetal bellow welded to the gas tankPole-end kinematicsSpring-assisted mechanism

12345

Three-position switchRing-main cable termination(400/630 A T-plug system)Hermetically-welded RMU housingBusbar (up to 1250 A)Overpressure release system

67

89

10

Fig. 77: Cross section of circuit-breaker feeder panel

2

43

1

Plug bushing welded to the gas tank

Silicon adapter

Silicon-insulated busbar

Removable insulation cover toassemble the system at site

1

2

3

4


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 80

Rated frequency



Rated short-circuitbreaking current ofcircuit-breakers

Rated short-circuitcurrent, 1s


Busbar rated current

Feeder rated current– Circuit-breaker panels– Ring-main panels– Transformer panels2)

Rated current of bussectionalizer panels– without HV HRC fuses– with HV HRC fuses2)


Rated voltage

[Hz]

[kV]

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[kA]

[A]

[max. A][max. A][max. A]

[A][A]

1) Higher values on request2) Depending on HV HRC fuse assembly

[kV] 24

50/60

50

125

16

16

50

6301250

400/630200

400/630400/630

200

17.5

50/60

38

95

20

20

50

6301250

400/630200

400/630400/630

200

15

50/60

36

95

20

20

50

6301250

400/630200

400/630400/630

200

12

50/60

28

75

25

25

63

6301250

400/630200

400/630400/630

200

7.2

50/60

20

60

25

25

63

6301250

400/630200

400/630400/630

200


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



2 3 2 3

Width

Depth

Height

500

780

2000

Individual panels

Ring-main panel Transformer panel Billing meteringpanel

Busbar meteringand grounding panel

Dimensions [mm]

350

780

1400

500

780

1400

600*/850

780

1400/2000**

500

780

1450

Width

Depth

Height

700

780

1400

Blocks

Ring-main feeders Ring-main feeders Transformer feeders

1050

780

1400

Transformer feeders

1000

780

1400

1500

780

1400

Dimensions [mm]

* Width for version with combined instrument transformer** With low-voltage compartment

Circuit-breaker panel


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Rated voltage andinsulation level

24

50

125

16

40

630

630

17.5

38

95

16

40

630

630

12

28

75

20

50

630

630

7.2

20

60

20

50

630

630



Rated short-time current 1s


Rated busbar current1)

Rated feeder current

1) Higher values on request

[kV]

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[A]

[A]

Fig. 82: Extensible modulares switchgear type 8AA20

Load-breaker panels

Circuit-breaker panels

Metering panels

Dimensions Width Height Depth

12/24 kV[mm]

600/750

750/750

600/750

665/790 or 931/1131

931/1131

665/790 or 931/1131

2000

2000

2000

[mm]12/24 kV[mm]

Consumer substationmodular switchgeartype 8AA20, 7.2–24 kVextensible, air-insulated

Typical use

This air-insulated modular indoor switch-gear is used as a flexible system with a lotof panel variations. Panels with fused andunfused load-break switches, with truck-type vacuum circuit-breakers and meteringpanels can be combined with air-insulatedbusbars.The 8AA20 ring-main units are type-tested,factory-assembled metal-enclosed indoorswitchgear installations. They meet opera-tional requirements by virtue of the follow-ing features:

Personnel safety

Sheet-steel enclosure tested for resist-ance to internal arcing

All switching operations with doorclosed

Testing for dead state with door closed Insertion of barrier with door closed

Safety, reliability/maintenance

Complete mechanical interlocking Preventive interlocking between barrier

and switch disconnector Door locking

Excellent resistance to ambientconditions

High level of pollution protection byvirtue of sealed enclosure in all operat-ing states

Insulators with high pollution-layerresistance

Fig. 83

Fig. 84: Dimensions

Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8AA20


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 86a: Cross-section of cable feeder panel

1

2

1

2

34

Load-break switchGrounding switch

12

Vacuum circuit-breakerCurrent transformerPotential transformerGrounding switch

1234

Fig. 87: Schemes

Secondary DistributionSwitchgear Type 8AA20

Standards

The switchgear complies with thefollowing standards:

In accordance with the harmonizationagreement reached by the EC memberstates, their national specifications con-form to IEC Publ. No. 60 298.

Resistance to internal arcing

– IEC Publ. 60298, Annex AA– VDE 0670, Part 6

Type of service location

Air-insulated ring-main units can be usedin service locations and in closed electricalservice locations in accordance withVDE 0101.

Specific features

Switch disconnector fixed-mounted Switch disconnector with integrated

central operating mechanism Standard program includes numerous

circuit variants Operations enabled by protective inter-

locks; the insulating barrier is included inthe interlocking

Extensible by virtue of panel design Cubicles compartmentalized (option) Minimal cubicle dimensions without

extensive use of plastics Lines up with earlier type 8AA10 Withdrawable circuit-breaker section can

be moved into the service and discon-nected position with the door closed

Individual panels

Scheme 11/12

Circuit-breaker panels

Scheme 13/14

Scheme 21/22

Load-break panels

Scheme 23/24 Scheme 25/26

Scheme 33/34

Metering and cable panels

Fig. 86b: Cross-section of withdrawable typevacuum circuit-breaker panel

IEC Standard VDE Standard

IEC 60 694

IEC 60 298

IEC 60 129

IEC 60 282

IEC 60 265-1

IEC 60 420

IEC 60 056

IEC 61 243-5

VDE 0670 Part 1000

VDE 0670 Part 6

VDE 0670 Part 2

VDE 0670 Part 4

VDE 0670 Part 301

VDE 0670 Part 303

VDE 0670 Part 101–107

EVDE 0682 Part 415EN 61 243-5(E)

Fig. 85


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 88: Steel-clad outdoor substation 8FB1 for rated voltages up to 24 kV and transformers up to 1000 kVA

Factory-assembledpackaged substationstype 8FB1 (example)

Factory-assembled transformer substationsare available in different designs and di-mensions. As an example of a typical sub-station program, type 8FB1 is shown here.Other types are available on request.The transformer substations type 8FB1with up to 1000 kVA transformer ratingsand 7.2–24 kV are prefabricated and facto-ry-assembled, ready for connection of net-work cables on site.Special foundation not necessary. Distribution substations for

public power supply Nonwalk-in type Switchgear operated with open substa-

tion doors

General features/Applications

Power supply for LV systems, especiallyin load centers for public supply

Power supply for small and mediumindustrial plants with existing HV sidecable terminations

Particularly suitable for installation atsites subject to high atmospheric humid-ity, hostile environment, and stringentdemands regarding blending of the sta-tion with the surroundings

Extra reliability ensured by SF6-insulatedring-main units type 8DJ, which requireno maintenance and are not affected bythe climate

Brief description

The substation housing consists of a tor-sion-resistant bottom unit, with a concretetrough for the transformer, embedded inthe ground, and a hot-dip galvanized steelstructure mounted on it. It is subdividedinto three sections: HV section, transform-er section and LV section. The lateral sec-tion of the concrete trough serves asmounting surface for the HV and LV cubi-cles and also closes off the cable entrycompartments at the sides. These com-partments are closed off at the bottom andfront by hot-dip galvanized bolted steelcovers.Four threaded bushes for lifting the com-plete substation are located in the floor ofthe concrete trough. The substations arearc-fault-tested in order to ensure safetyfor personnel during operation and for thepedestrians passing by the installed sub-station.

HV section (as an example):

8DJ SF6-insulated ring-main unit(for details please refer to RMUs pages2/48–2/61)

Technical data:

Rated voltages and insulation levels7.2 kV 12 kV 15 kV 17.5 kV 24 kV60 75 95 95 125 kV (BIL)

Rating of cable circuits: 400 / 630 A Rating of transformer circuits: 200 A Degree of protection for HV parts: IP 65 Ambient temperature range:

–30°C/+55°C (other on request)

Transformer section:

Oil-cooled transformer with ratings up tomax. 1000 kVA. The transformer is con-nected with the 8DJ10 ring-main unit bythree single-core screened 35 mm2 plasticinsulated cables. The connection is madeby means of right-angle plugs or standardair-insulated sealing ends possible at thetransformer side.

LV section:

The LV section can take various forms tosuit the differing base configurations. Theconnection to the transformer is made byparallel cables instead of bare conductors.Incoming circuit: Circuit breaker, fused loaddisconnector, fuses or isolating links.Outgoing circuits: Tandem-type fuses,load-break switches, MCCB, or any otherrequested systems.Basic measuring and metering equipmentto suit the individual requirements.

Secondary DistributionTransformer Substations


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 89: Technical data, dimensions and weights

HV section:SF6-insulatedring-main unit(RMU)

High-voltagesection

Substationhousing type:

8FB17

H

Transformersection

T

Low-voltagesection

L

Transformer rating 1000 kVA

Overall dimensions,weights:LengthWidthHeight abovegroundHeight overallFloor areaVolumeWeight withouttransformer

[mm][mm][mm]

[mm][mm2][mm3]

[kg]

329013001650

21004.287.06approx. 2280

257021001650

21005.408.91approx. 2530

210021001650

21004.417.28approx. 2400

386015501700

23505.9810.17approx. 3400

312023001700

23507.1812.20approx. 3800

235023001700

23505.419.19approx. 3600

L H

H T L H T L T

8FB10 8FB11 8FB12 8FB15 8FB16

HL

H T L TH T L

630 kVA 630 kVA 630 kVA 1000 kVA 1000 kVA

Fig. 90: HV section:Compact substation 8FB with SF6-insulated RMU(two loop switches, one transformer feeder switchwith HRC fuses)

Fig. 91: Transformer section:Cable terminations to the transformer, as a example

Fig. 92: LV section:Example of LV distribution board

Secondary DistributionTransformer Substations


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Introduction

Industrial power supply systems call for amaximum level of operator safety, opera-tional reliability, economic efficiency andflexibility. And they likewise necessitate anintegral concept which includes “before”and “after” customer service, which cancope with the specific load requirementsand, above all, which is tailored to eachindividually occurring situation.With SITRABLOC® such a concept can beeasily turned into reality.

Industrial Load Center Substation

Fig. 94: Example of a schematic diagram

Load-centresubstation

8DC11/8DH10

Supply company'ssubstation

Substation

LV busways

Fig. 93

General

SITRABLOC is an acronym forSIemens TRAnsformer BLOC-type.

SITRABLOC is supplied with power froma medium-voltage substation via a fuse/switch-disconnector combination and a ra-dial cable. In the load center, where SITRA-BLOC is installed, several SITRABLOCs areconnected together by means of cables orbars.

Features

Due to the fuse/switch-disconnectorcombination, the short-circuit currentis limited, which means that the radialcable can be dimensioned according tothe size of the transformer.

In the event of cable faults, only oneSITRABLOC fails.

The short-circuit strength is increaseddue to connection of several stations inthe load center. The effect of this is that,in the event of a fault, large loads areselectively disconnected in a very shorttime.

The transmission losses are optimizedsince only short connections to theloads are necessary.

SITRABLOC has, in principle, two trans-former outputs:– 1250 kVA during AN operation

(ambient temperature up to 40 °C)– 1750 kVA during AF operation

(140% with forced cooling).These features ensure that, if one stationfails for whatever reason, supply of theloads is maintained without interruption.


Fax: ++ 49 - 91 31-73 15 73


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

LV Busway

Tap-Off Unit withHRC Fuses

ConsumerDistributionincl. Control

SITRABLOC

The SITRABLOC components are: Transformer housing

with roof-mounted ventilation for AN/AFoperating mode

GEAFOL Transformer(cast-resin insulated) with make-proofearthing switchAN operating mode: 100% load up toan ambient temperature of 40 °CAF operating mode: 140% load

LV circuit-breakeras per transformer AF load

Automatic power factor correctionequipment (tuned/detuned)

Control and metering panel as well ascentral monitoring interface

Universal connection to the LV distribu-tion busway system

Whether in the automobile or food indus-try, in paintshops or bottling lines, puttingSITRABLOC to work in the right place con-siderably reduces transmission losses.The energy is transformed in the productionarea itself, as close as possible to theloads. For installation of the system itself,no special building or fire-protection meas-ures are necessary.

Available with any level of output

SITRABLOC can be supplied with any levelof power output, the latter being controlledand protected by a fuse/switch-disconnec-tor combination.A high-current busbar system into whichup to four transformers can feed powerensures that even large loads can bebrought onto load without any loss ofenergy. Due to the interconnection of units,it is also ensured that large loads areswitched off selectively in the event ofa fault.

Integrated automatic powerfactor correction

With SITRABLOC, power factor correctionis integrated from the very beginning.Unavoidable energy losses – e.g. due tomagnetization in the case of motors andtransformers – are balanced out with pow-er capacitors directly in the low-voltagenetwork. The advantages are that the levelof active power transmitted increases andenergy costs are reduced (Fig. 97).

Technical data

Rated voltageTransformer rating AN/AFTransformer operating mode

Power factor correction

Busway systemDegree of protection

Dimensions (min) (LxHxD)Weight approx.

12 kV and 24 kV

1250 kVA/1750 kVA

100% AN up to 40 °C140% AF

up to 500 kVAr without reactorsup to 300 kVAr with reactors

1250 A, 1600 A, 2500 A

IP 23 for transformer housingIP 43 for LV cubicles

3600 mm x 2560 mm x 1400 mm

6000 kg

Fig. 95: Location sketch

Fig. 96

Fig. 97: Capacitor Banks


Reliability of supply

With the correctly designed transformeroutput, the n-1criterion is no longer a prob-lem. Even if one module fails (e.g. a medi-um-voltage switching device, a cable ortransformer) power continues to be sup-plied without the slightest interruption.None of the drives comes to a standstilland the whole manufacturing plant contin-ues to run reliably. These examples showthat, with SITRABLOC, the power is therewhen you need it – and safe, reliable andeconomical into the bargain.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 99: Transformer and earthing switch, LV Bloc

Operator safetyReduced costsLow system losses

Production

Circuit-breakers and switch disconnectorswith HV HRC fuses

t < 10 ms

Substation

Supply company’s substation

Power distribution

MMMMM

SITRABLOCSITRABLOCSITRABLOCSITRABLOC

M

How to understand this mode: Normal operating mode: 4x1250 kVA AN operating mode (100%) N -1 operating mode: 3x1750 kVA AF operating mode (≤ 140%)

N-1 criteria

With the respective design of a factory gridon the MV side as well as on the LV sidethe so called n-1 criteria is fulfilled. In caseone component fails on the line side of thetransformer e.g. circuit breaker or trans-former or cable to transformer, no interup-tion of the supply on the LV side will occur.

Example Fig 98:

Load required 5000 kVA = 4 x 1250 kVA.In case one load centre (SITRABLOC)is disconnected from the MV networkthe missing load will be supplied viathe remaining three (N-1) load centres.

Fig. 98: N-1 operating mode

SITRABLOC is a combination of everythingwhich present-day technology has to offer.Just one example of this are our GEAFOL®

cast-resin transformers.Their output: 100% load without fans plusreserves of up to 140% with fans. And asfar as persons are concerned, their safetyis ensured even in the direct vicinity of theinstallation.Another example is the SENTRON high-current busbar system. It can be laid out inany arrangement, is quick to install andconducts the current wherever you like –with almost no losses.The most important thing, however, is theuniformity of SITRABLOC throughout, irre-spective of the layout of the modules.

N-1 operating mode


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


The technology at a glance

SITRABLOC can cope with any require-ments. Its features include A transformer cubicle with or without

fans (AN/AF operation) GEAFOL cast-resin transformers with

make-proof earthing switch – AN opera-tion 1250 kVA, AF operation 1750 kVA

External medium-voltage switchgearwith fuse switch-disconnectors

Low-voltage circuit-breakers Automatic reactive-power compensation

– up to 500 kVAr unrestricted,up to 300 kVAr restricted

The SENTRON high-current busbar sys-tem – Connection to high-current busbarsystems from all directions

An ET 200 /PROFIBUS interface for cen-tral monitoring system (if required).

Fig. 100

GEAFOL transformerwith built-onmake-proof earthing switch

LV installation with circuit-breakers and automatic reactive-power compensation

LV busbar systemwith sliding link(e.g. SENTRON busways)

SITRABLOC

P P12/24 kV

0.4 kVOption

ET 200M

S7-400 S7-300 S5-155U

PROFIBUS-DP

COROS OP

ET 200C Field devicesET 200B

PG/PC

Information distribution

Communications interface

PROFIBUS


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Medium-Voltage DevicesProduct Range

Devices formedium-voltage switchgear

With the equipment program for switch-gear Siemens can deliver nearly everydevice which is required in the medium-voltage range between 7.2 and 36 kV.Fig. 101 gives an overview of the availabledevices and their main characteristics.All components and devices conform tointernational and national standards,as there are:

Vacuum circuit-breakers

IEC 60 056 IEC 60 694 BS5311

Vacuum switches

IEC 60 265-1in combination with Siemens fuses: IEC 60 420

Vacuum contactors

IEC 60 470 UL 347

Switch disconnectors

IEC 60 129 IEC 60 265-1

HV HRC fuses

IEC 60 282

Current and voltage transformers

IEC 60 185, 60 186 BS 3938, 3941 ANSI C57.13


Fax: ++ 49 - 91 31 - 73 46 54

Fig. 101: Equipment program for medium-voltage switchgear

Short-timecurrent(3s)

[kA]

3AF

3AY2

3AH

NX ACT

Type Ratedvoltage

[kV]

Short-circuitcurrent

[kA]

Indoor and outdoorcurrent and voltagetransformers

Device

Indoor vacuumcircuit-breaker

Outdoor vacuumcircuit-breaker

Components for3AH VCB

Indoor vacuum switch

Indoor vacuumcontactor

Vacuum interrupter

Indoor switchdisconnector

Indoor disconnectingand grounding switch

HV HRC fuses

Fuse bases

Indoor post insulators,Bushings

7.2 … 36

12

36

12 … 36

7.2 … 24

7.2 … 24

7.2 … 40.5

12 … 24

12 … 36

7.2 … 36

7.2 … 36

3.6 … 36

12 … 36

3.6 … 42

3CG

3TL

VS

3CJ

3D

3GD

3GH

3FA3FH/3FM

4M

3E

13.1 … 80

25

25

16 … 40

–

–

12.5 … 80

–

–

31.5 … 80

–

–

–

13.1 … 80

25

25

16 … 40

16 … 20

8 (1s)

12.5 … 80

18 … 26 (1s)

16 ... 63 (1s)

–

–

–

–

–

44peak withstandcurrent

Surge arresters


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Medium-Voltage DevicesProduct Range

PageRatedcurrent

[A]

3/74

3/80

3/81

3/82

3/84

3/85

3/86

3/87

3/88

3/88

3/89

3/90

3/90

3/78

mechanical

Applications/remarksOperating cycles

All applications, e.g. overhead lines, cables, transformers,motors, generators, capacitors, filter circuits, arc furnaces

All applications, e.g. overhead lines, cables, transformers,motors, generators, capacitors, filter circuits

Original equipment manufacturer (OEM) and retrofit

All applications, e.g. overhead lines, cables, transformers,motors, capacitors; high number of operations; fusesnecessary for short-circuit protection

All applications, especially motors with very high numberof operating cycles

For circuit breakers, switches and gas-insulated switchgear

Small number of operations, e.g. distribution transformers

Protection of personnel working on equipment

Short-circuit protection; short-circuit current limitation

Accommodation of HV HRC fuse links

Insulation of live parts from another,carrying and supporting function

Measuring and protection

Overvoltage protection

with ratedcurrent

with short-circuit current

25 … 100

25 … 50

50

–

–

–

25 … 100

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

10,000 …30,000

10,000

10,000

–

10,000

0.25x105 ... 2x106

10,000 …30,000

800 … 12,000

1250 … 2500

1600

1250 … 2500

800

400 … 800

630 … 4000

630

630 … 3000

6.3 … 250

400

–

–

–

20

–

–

–

–

–

–

1000

–

–

–

–

–

–

10,000 …120,000

10,000

10,000

–

10,000

1x106 ... 3x106

10,000 …30,000


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Properties of 3AH circuit breakers:

No relubrication

Nonwearing material pairs at the bearingpoints and nonaging greases make relubri-cation superfluous on 3AH circuit-breakersup to 10,000 operating cycles, even afterlong periods of standstill.

High availability

Continuous tests have proven that the3AHs are maintenance-free up to 10,000operating cycles: accelerated temperature/humidity change cycles between –25 and+60 °C prove that the 3AH functions relia-bly without maintenance.

Assured quality

Exemplary quality control with some hun-dred switching cycles per circuit-breaker,certified to DIN/ISO 9001.

No readjustment

Narrow tolerances in the production ofthe 3AH permanently prevent impermissi-ble play: even after frequent switchingthe 3AH circuit-breaker does not need tobe readjusted up to 10,000 operatingcycles.

Indoor vacuum circuit-breakerstype 3AH

The 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers arethree-phase medium-voltage circuit-break-ers for indoor installations.The 3AH circuit-breakers are suitable for: Rapid load transfer, synchronization Automatic reclosing up to 31.5 kA Breaking short-circuit currents with

very high initial rates of rise of the recov-ery voltage

Switching motors and generators Switching transformers and reactors Switching overhead lines and cables Switching capacitors Switching arc furnaces Switching filter circuits

Fig. 102: The complete 3AH program

Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3AH

Electrical data and products summary

Rated Vacuum circuit-breaker (Type)voltage at Rated short-circuit breaking current1) (Rated short-circuit making current)

[kV] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA] [kA]

13.1 16 20 25 31.5 40 50 63 up to 80(32.8) (40) (50) (63) (80) (100) (125) (160) (225)

7.2 3AH1 3AH1 3AH1 3AH1 3AH3 3AH33AH2 3AH2

12 3AH5 3AH5 3AH5 3AH5 3AH1 3AH1 3AH1 3AH3 3AH33AH1 3AH2 3AH2

15 3AH1 3AH1 3AH1 3AH1 3AH3 3AH33AH2 3AH2

17.5 3AH1 3AH5 3AH1 3AH1 3AH1 3AH3 3AH3 3AH38*)3AH2 3AH2

24 3AH1 3AH1 3AH1 3AH33AH5 3AH2 3AH4

36 3AH5 3AH3 3AH33AH4 3AH4

800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 800 A 1250 A 2500 A 1250 A 1250 A 1250 A 8000 Ato to to to to to to to to to1250 A 1250 A 2500 A 1250 A 2500 A 2500 A2) 3150 A 3150 A 4000 A 12000 A

Rated normal current1) DC component 36% (higher values on request). 2) 3150 A for rated voltage 17.5 kV. *) 3 switches in parallel

As standard circuit-breakers they are avail-able for the entire medium-voltage range.Circuit-breakers with reduced pole centerdistances, circuit-breakers for very highnumbers of switching cycles and single-phase versions are part of the program.The following breaker types are available: 3AH1 – the maintenance-free circuit-

breaker which covers the rangebetween 7.2 kV and 24 kV. It hasa lifetime of 10,000 operating cycles

3AH2 – the circuit-breaker for 60,000operating cycles in the range between7.2 kV and 24 kV

3AH3 – the maintenance-free circuit-breaker for high breaking capacities inthe range between 7.2 kV and 36 kV.It has a lifetime of 10,000 operatingcycles

3AH4 – the circuit-breaker for up to120,000 operating cycles

3AH5 – the economical circuit-breaker inthe lower range for 10,000 maintenance-free operating cycles


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Advantages of thevacuum switching principle

The most important advantages of theprinciple of arc extinction in a vacuum havemade the circuit-breakers a technically su-perior product and the principle on whichthey work the most economical extinctionmethod available: Constant dielectric:

In a vacuum there are no decompositionproducts and because the vacuum inter-rupter is hermetically sealed there areno environmental influences on it.

Constant contact resistance:The absence of oxidization in a vacuumkeeps the metal contact surface clean.For this reason, contact resistance canbe guaranteed to remain low over thewhole life of the equipment.

High total current:Because there is little erosion of con-tacts, the rated normal current can beinterrupted up to 30,000 times, theshort-circuit breaking current an averageof 50 times

Low chopping current:The chopping current in the Siemensvacuum interrupter is only 4 to 5 A dueto the use of a special contact material.

High reliability:The vacuum interrupters need no seal-ings as conventional circuit-breakers.This and the small number of movingparts inside makes them extremely relia-ble.

Fig. 103: Vacuum circuit-breakers type 3AH

Fig. 104: Front view of vacuum circuit-breaker 3AH1

3AH124 kV, 25 kA, 1250 A

3AH224 kV, 25 kA, 2500 A

3AH424 kV, 40 kA, 2500 A


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 105a: Dimensions of typical vacuum circuit-breakers type 3AH (Examples)

604522

210 210

520

190

105

437 473

60

604549

210 210

565

109

437587

105

190550

275 275662708 565

190

105

437535

60

Dimensions in mm

Dimensions in mm

Dimensions in mm

20 kA, up to 1250 A25 kA, up to 1250 A

3AH1,12 kV

16 kA, up to 1250 A,20 kA, up to 1250 A,25 kA, up to 1250 A

3AH1,24 kV

25 kA, 2500 A,31.5 kA, 2500 A,40 kA, 3150 A

3AH1, 3AH2,12 kV



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 105b: Dimensions of typical vacuum circuit-breakers type 3AH (Examples)

708 595670

275275190

105

437

109

610

648

211 483

564 733

750275 275

20kA, 2500 A25 kA, 2500 A

63 kA, 4000 A

3AH3,12 kV

31.5 kA, 2500 A,40 kA, 2500 A

3AH1, 3AH2,24 kV

3AH3, 3AH4,36 kV

776

820350 350

853

526211

612

564 1000734

Dimensions in mm

Dimensions in mm

Dimensions in mm


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Technical data

Rated voltage [kV]


Rated lightning impulse [kV]withstand voltage

Rated frequency [Hz]

Rated short-circuit [kA]breaking current (max.)

Rated short-circuit [kA]making current (max.)

Rated short-time [kA]withstand current 3 sec. (max.)

Rated normal current [A]

12

28

75

50/60

25

63

25

1250/2500

Medium-Voltage DevicesType NXACT

Indoor vacuum circuit-breakermodule type NXACT

General

NXACT combines the advantages of vacu-um circuit-breakers with additional integrat-ed functions.

More functions

Disconnector, earthing switch, operatorpanel and interlock are integrated in a sin-gle breaker module. The module is sup-plied pretested and ready for installation.

Ease of integration …

For the system builder, this means mini-mum project planning, ease of installationeven with subsequent retrofitting, no moretesting, simplified logistics – these fea-tures mean that NXACT is unbeatable,even with the overall cost of the substa-tion.Its compact design minimizes installationand commissioning time.In operation, NXACT is notable for theclear layout of its control panel, which isalways accessible at the front of theswitchgear.

Applications

Universal circuit-breaker module for allcommon medium-voltage switchgear

As three-pole medium-voltage circuit-breakers for all switching duties in in-door installations

For switching all resistive, inductive andcapacitive currents.

Typical uses

Overhead transmission lines Cables Transformers Capacitors Filter circuits* Motors Reactor coils

Fig. 106: NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module, 12 kV

Fig. 107

* Filter circuits cause an increase in voltageat the series-connected switching device.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Features

Integrated, mechanical interlocks be-tween operating mechanisms.

Integrated, mechanical switch positionindications for circuit-breaker, withdrawa-ble part and earthing switch function(optional).

Easy to withdraw, since only withdrawa-ble part is moved.

Fixed interlocking of circuit-breaker mod-ule with a switchpanel is possible.

Manual or motor operating mechanism(optional for the operating mechanisms).

Enforced connection of low-voltage plugwith the switchpanel, as soon as themodule is installed in a panel.

Maintenance-free operating mechanismswithin scope of switching cycles.

Medium-Voltage DevicesType NXACT

Dimensions in mm

Operating mechanismfor earthing switch

* Travel

NXACT vacuum circuit-breaker module

Front view Side view

517

730

586646

375

275

200 188

767140*

100

584156

Fig. 109

Fig. 108


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Rated voltage

Rated frequency

Rated lightning-impulse withstand voltage

Rated power-frequencywithstand voltage (dry and wet)



Rated current

36

170

70

25

Technical data

Type 3AFVacuum circuit-breaker type

50/60

63

1600

[kV]

[Hz]

[kV]

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[A]

Outdoor vacuum circuit-breakers type 3AF

The Siemens outdoor vacuum circuit-breakers are structure-mounted, easy-to-install vacuum circuit-breakers for use insystems up to 36 kV. The pole construc-tion is a porcelain-clad construction similarto conventional outdoor high-voltageswitchgear. The triple-pole circuit-breakeris fitted with reliable and well proven vacu-um interrupters. Adequate phase spacingand height have been provided to meetstandards and safety requirements.It is suitable for direct connection to over-head lines.The type design incorporates a minimumof moving parts and a simplicity of assem-bly assuring a long mechanical and electri-cal life. All the fundamental advantages ofusing vacuum interrupters like low operat-ing energy, lightweight construction, vir-tually shock-free performance leading toease of erection and reduction in founda-tion requirements, etc. have been retained.The Siemens outdoor vacuum circuit-breakers are designed and tested to meetthe requirements of IEC 60 056/IS 13118.

Advantages at a glance

High reliability Negligible maintenance Suitable for rapid autoreclosing duty Long electrical and mechanical life Completely environmentally compatible

Fig. 110: Outdoor vacuum circuit-breakertype 3AF for 36 kV

Fig. 112: Dimensions of outdoor circuit-breaker type 3AF for 36 kV

Fig. 111: Ratings for outdoor vacuum circuit-breakers

1830

725 725190

19301730

650450

24101810

3045

285 285


Dimensions in mm

350 350

Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3AF


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Medium-Voltage DevicesComponents, Type 3AY2

Components for vacuum circuit-breaker type 3AH

Vacuum circuit-breakers are available infixed-mounted as well as withdrawableform. When they are installed in substa-tions, isolating contacts, as well as fixedmating contacts and bushings are neces-sary. With the appropriate components,the 3AH vacuum circuit-breakers can beupgraded to the status of switchgearmodule.

Components

The following components can be ordered: Isolating contacts Cup-type bushings with fixed mating

contacts Truck with/or without interlocks Switchgear module

(Dimensions as per Figs. 115 and 116)

Technical data and product range

Components for 12 kV

Up to 2500 A/to 40 kA /1 sec.For 800 mm switchgear panel width:With 3AH1 – 7.2/12 kV breaker210 mm pole centre distanceWith 3AH5 – 12 kV breaker210 mm pole centre distance


To 2500 A/to 25 kA /1 sec.For 1000 mm switchgear panel width:With 3AH1 – 24 kV breaker275 mm pole centre distanceWith 3AH5 – 24 kV breaker275 mm pole centre distance

On request: components for 15 kV

To 2500 A/to 40 kA /1 sec.For 800 mm switchgear panel width:

With 3AH1 – 15 kV breaker210 mm pole centre distance

With 3AH5 – 17.5 kV breaker210 mm pole centre distance


To 1250 A/to 16 kA /1 sec.For 1200 mm switchgear panel width:

With 3AH5 – 36 kV breaker350 mm pole centre distance

Fig. 114: Switchgear module 12 kV, 25 kA, 1250 A

Dimensions in mm

Dimensions in mm



800

1000

1019227

1224295

945

1030

Fig. 115: 12 kV switchgear module

Fig. 116: 24 kV switchgear moduleFig. 113


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Indoor vacuum switchestype 3CG

The 3CG vacuum switches are multipur-pose switches conforming to IEC 60 265-1and DIN VDE 0670 Part 301.With these, all loads can be switched with-out any restriction and with a high degreeof reliability. The electrical and mechanicaldata are greater than for conventionalswitches. Moreover, the 3CG are mainte-nance free.The vacuum switch is therefore extremelyeconomical.Vacuum switches are suitable for thefollowing switching duties: Overhead lines Cables Transformers Motors Capacitors Switching under ground-fault conditions

3CG switches can be combined with HVHRC fuses up to 250 A. When installed inSiemens switchgear they comply with thespecifications of IEC 60 420 and VDE 0670,Part 303. Maximum ratings of fuses onrequest.

Fig. 117: Ratings for vacuum switches type 3CG

Fig. 118: Vacuum switch type 3CG for 12 kV, 800 A

Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3CG

Rated voltage U

Rated lightning-impulsewithstand voltage Ul,

Rated short-circuit makingcurrent Ima

Rated short-time current Im (3s)

Rated normal current In

Rated ring-main breakingcurrent Ic 1

Rated transformer breaking current

Rated capacitor breaking current

Rated cable-chargingbreaking current Ic

Rated breaking current forstalled motors Id

Transfer current according to IEC 60 420,Inductive switching capacity(cosϕ ≤ 0.15)

Switching capacity underground fault conditions:– Rated ground fault breaking current Ie– Rated cable-charging breaking current– Rated cable charging breaking current with superimposed load current

Number of switching cycles with In

[kV]

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[A]

[A]

[A]

[A]

[A]

[A]

[A]

[A][A]

[A]

Technical data

24

125

40

16

800

800

10

800

63

–

2000

63063

63+800

10,000

15

95

50

20

800

800

10

800

63

1250

2000

63063

63+800

10,000

12

75

50

20

800

800

10

800

63

1600

3000

63063

63+800

10,000

7.2

60

50

20

800

800

10

800

63

2500

5000

63063

63+800

10,000


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 119: Dimensions of vacuum switch type 3CG (Examples)

3CG,7.2 and 12 kV

3 CG,24 kV

630

275 275

379

684

708

537

435

43170

597

530

264

210 210

568

592

435

43170

492

482

Dimensions in mm

Dimensions in mm

Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3CG


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

280 mm

325 mm

340 mm

Fig. 120: Vacuum contactor type 3TL6 for fixedmounting

Vacuum contactorsType 3TL

The three-pole vacuum contactors type3TL are for medium-voltage systems be-tween 7.2 kV and 24 kV and incorporatea solenoid-operated mechanism for highswitching frequency and unlimited closingduration.They are suitable for the opera-tional switching of AC devices in indoorsystems and can perform, for example,the following switching duties: Switching of three-phase motors in

AC-3 and AC-4 operation Switching of transformers Switching of capacitors Switching of ohmic loads

(e.g. arc furnaces)

3TL vacuum contactors have the followingfeatures: Small dimensions Long electrical life

(up to 106 operating cycles) Maintenance-free Vertical or horizontal mounting

The vacuum contactors comply with thestandards for high-voltage AC contactorsbetween 1 kV and 12 kV according to IECPublication 60 470-1970 and DIN VDE 0660Part 103.3TL 6 and 3TL 8 contactors also complywith UL Standard 347.

The vacuum contactors are available indifferent designs: Type 3TL 6 with compact dimensions Type 3TL 71 and 3TL 81 with slender

design Fig. 122: Ratings for vacuum contactors type 3TL

Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3TL

Fig. 121: Vacuum contactor type 3TL8 for fixedmounting

390 mm

375 mm

220 mm

Vacuum contactor type

[kV][Hz][A]

[A][A]

Technical data of the 3TL 6/7/8 vacuum contactor

3TL 713TL 65 3TL 813TL 61

7.2 12 24 7.250/60 50/60 50/60 50/60450 450 800 400

4500 4500 4500 40003600 3600 3600 3200

3 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106

2 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 0.25 x 106

1 x 106 0.5 x 106 1 x 106 0.25 x 106

Rated normal voltageRated frequencyRated normal currentSwitching capacity accordingto utilization categoryAC-4 (cos ϕ = 0.35)Rated making currentRated breaking currentMechanical life ofcontactor Switching cyclesMechanical life ofvacuum interrupter Switching cyclesElectrical life ofvacuum interrupter(Rated normal current) Switching cycles


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Medium-Voltage DevicesType VS

Vacuum interrupters

Vacuum interrupters for the medium-volt-age range are available from Siemens forall applications on the international marketfrom 1 kV up to 40.5 kV.

Applications

Vacuum circuit-breakers Vacuum switches Vacuum contactors Transformer tap changers Circuit breakers for railway applications Autoreclosers Special applications, e.g. in nuclear

fusion

Compact designs

Siemens vacuum interrupters provide veryhigh switching capacity in very compactdimensions: for example vacuum interrupt-ers for 15 kV/40 kA with housing dimen-sions of 125 mm diameter by 161 mmlength, or for 12 kV/13.1 kA with 68 mmdiameter by 115 mm length.

Consistant quality assurance

Complete quality assurance (TQM andDIN/ISO 9001), rigorous material checkingof every delivery and 100% tests of theinterrupters for vacuum sealing assure reli-able operation and the long life of Siemensvacuum interrupters.

Environmental protection

In the manufacture of our vacuum inter-rupters we only use environmentally com-patible materials, such as copper, ceramicsand high-grade steel.The manufacturing processes do not dam-age the environment. For example, noCFCs are used in production (fulfilling theMontreal agreement); the components arecleaned in a ultrasonic plant.During operation vacuum interrupters donot affect the environment and are them-selves not affected by the environment.

Know-how for special applications

If necessary, Siemens is prepared to sup-plement the wide standard programby way of tailored, customized concepts.

Fig. 123: Vacuum interrupters from 1 kV up to 40.5 kV

Fig. 124a: Range of ratings for vacuum interrupters for CBs

Product range (extract)

Interrupters for vacuum circuit-breakers

Rated voltage [kV]Rated normal current [A]Rated short-circuit breaking current [kA]

Interrupters for vacuum contactors

Rated voltage [kV]Rated normal current [A]

7.2 to 40.5

630 to 4000

12.5 to 80

1 to 24

400 to 800


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Technical data

Rated voltage

Rated short-timewithstand current



[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[A]

12

20

50

630

15

26

65

630

24

18

45

630

Switch disconnectorstype 3CJ1

Indoor switch disconnectors type 3CJ1 aremultipurpose types and meet all the rele-vant standards both as the basic versionand in combination with (make-proof)grounding switches.The 3CJ1 indoor switch-disconnectorshave the following features: A modular system with all important

modules such as fuses, (make-proof)grounding switches, motor operatingmechanism, shunt releases and auxiliaryswitches

Good dielectric properties even underdifficult climatic conditions because ofthe exclusive use of standard post insu-lators for insulation against ground

No insulating partitions even with smallphase spacings

Simple maintenance and inspection

Fig. 125: Switch disconnector type 3CJ1

Fig. 126: Ratings for switch disconnectors type 3CJ1

Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3CJ1


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3D

Technical data

12

20 to 63

50 to 160

630 to 2500

Rated voltage

Rated short-timewithstand current (1s)



[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

[A]

24

20 to 31.5

50 to 80

630 to 2500

36

20 to 31.5

50 to 80

630 to 2500

Fig. 127: Disconnecting switch type 3DC

Disconnecting and groundingswitches type 3D

Disconnecting and grounding switchestype 3D are suitable for indoor installationsfrom 12 kV up to 36 kV.Disconnectors are mainly used to protectpersonnel working on equipment and musttherefore be very reliable and safe.This is assured even under difficult climaticconditions.Disconnecting and grounding switchestype 3D are supplied with a manual ormotor drive operating mechanism.

Fig. 128: Ratings for disconnectors type 3DC

Fig. 129: Ratings for grounding switches type 3DE

Technical data

12

20 to 63

50 to 160

Rated voltage

Rated short-timewithstand current (1s)

Rated peakwithstand current

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

24

20 to 31.5

50 to 80

36

20 to 31.5

50 to 80


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

HV HRC fusestype 3GD

HV HRC (high-voltage high-rupturing-capac-ity) fuses are used for short-circuit protec-tion in high-voltage switchgear. They pro-tect switchgear and components, such astransformers, motors, capacitors, voltagetransformers and cable feeders, from thedynamic and thermal effects of high short-circuit currents by breaking them as theyoccur.The HV HRC fuse links can only be usedto a limited degree as overload protectionbecause they only operate with certaintywhen their minimum breaking current hasalready been exceeded. Up to this currentthe integrated thermal striker prevents athermal overload on the fuse when used incircuit breaker/fuse combinations.Siemens HV HRC fuse links have the fol-lowing features: Use in indoor and outdoor installations Nonaging because the fuse element

is made of pure silver Thermal tripping Absolutely watertight Low power lossWith our 30 years of experience in themanufacture of HV HRC fuse links andwith production and quality assurancethat complies with DIN/ISO 9001,Siemens HV HRC fuse links meet thetoughest demands for safety and reliability.

Fuse-bases type 3GH

3GH fuse bases are used to accomodateHV HRC fuse links in switchgear.These fuse bases are suitable for: Indoor installations High air humidity Occasional condensation3GH HV HRC fuse bases are available assingle-phase and three-phase versions.On request, a switching state indicatorwith an auxiliary switch can be installed.

Fig. 131: Ratings for HV HRC fuse links type 3GD

Fig. 130: HV HRC fuse type 3GD

Fig. 132: Fuse bases type 3GH with HV HRC fuse links

Technical data

7.2

63 to 80

6.3 to 250

Rated voltage



[kV]

[kA]

[A]

12

40 to 63

6.3 to 160

24

31.5 to 40

6.3 to 100

36

31.5

6.3 to 40

Technical data

3.6/7.2

44

400

Rated voltage

Peak withstandcurrent

Rated current

[kV]

[kA]

[A]

12

44

400

24

44

400

36

44

400

Medium-Voltage DevicesType 3GD/3GH

Fig. 133: Ratings for fuse bases type 3GH


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 137: The principle of capacitive voltage indication with the 3FA4 divider post insulator

Medium-Voltage DevicesInsulators and Bushings

Insulators:Post insulators type 3FAand bushings type 3FH/3FM

Insulators (post insulators and bushings)are used to insulate live parts from one an-other and also fulfill mechanical carryingand supporting functions.The materials for insulators are variouscast resins and porcelains. The use ofthese materials, which have proved them-selves over many years of exposure to theroughest operating and ambient conditions,and the high quality standard to DIN/ISO9001 assure the high degree of reliabilityof the insulators.Special ribbed forms ensure high electricalstrength even when materials are deposit-ed on the surface and occasional conden-sation is formed.Post insulators and bushings are manufac-tured in various designs for indoor and out-door use depending on the application.Innovative solutions, such as the 3FA4divider post insulator with an integratedexpulsion-type arrester, provide optimumutility for the customer.Special designs are possible if requestedby the customer.

Fig. 134: Draw-lead bushing type 3FH5/6

Fig. 135: Post insulators type 3FA1/2

C1

V C2

M

A

L

U

U1

U2

LUU1

U2

ConductorOperating voltagePartial voltageacross C1Partial voltage acrossC2 and indicator

C1C2

VAM

Coupling capacitanceUndercapacitance

ArresterIndicatorMeasuring socket

12

65 to90

35 to50

3.75 to25

3.6

60 to65

27 to40

3.75 to16

24

100 to145

55 to75

3.75 to25

36

145 to190

75 to105

3.75 to16

Technical data

Rated voltage

Lightning-impulsewithstand voltage


Minimum failing load

[kV]

[kV]

[kV]

[kN]

Fig. 136: Ratings for post insulators type 3FA1/2


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

3EF

Technical data and product range

3EH2 3EE2

3.6 to 15 4.7 to 42 4.5 to 42

1 10 10

1 to 40 16 50 to 300

[kV]

[kA]

[kA]

For networks of

Rated discharge surge current

Short-circuit current strength

Current and voltagetransformers type 4M

Measuring transformers are electricaldevices that transform primary electricalquantities (currents and voltages) to pro-portional and in-phase quantities which aresafe for connected equipment and operat-ing personnel.The indoor post insulator current and volt-age transformers of the block type haveDIN-conformant dimensions and are usedin air-insulated switchgear. A maximum ofoperational safety is assured even underdifficult climatic conditions by the use ofcycloalyphatic resin systems and provencast-resin technology.Special customized versions (e.g. up to3 cores for current transformers, switcha-ble windings, capacitance layer for voltageindication) can be supplied on request.The program also includes cast-resin insu-lated-bushing current transformers andoutdoor current and voltage transformers.

Fig. 140: Ratings for current and voltage transformers

Fig. 138: Block current transformer type 4MA Fig. 139: Outdoor voltage transformer type 4MS4

Medium-Voltage DevicesType 4M and Type 3E

Surge arresters type 3E

Surge arresters have the function of pro-tecting the insulation of installations orcomponents from impermissible strain dueto voltage surges.The product range includes: Surge arresters for the protection

of high-voltage motors and dry-typetransformers.Range 3EF for cable networks up to15 kV.

Plug-in surge arresters for the protectionof distribution networks.Range 3EH2 for networks up to 42 kV.

Special arresters for the protectionof rotary machines and furnaces.Range 3EE2 for networks up to 42 kV.

Fig. 141: Surge arrester type 3EE2

Fig. 142

Technical data

12

10 to2500

80

Rated voltage

Primary ratedcurrent

Max. thermal ratedshort time current

Sec. thermallimit current

Current transformers Voltage transformers

[kV]

[A]

[kA]

[A]

24

10 to2500

80

36

10 to2500

80

12

5 to 10

24

5 to 13

36

8 to 17

4

Contents PageIntroduction .................................... 4/2

Advantages .................................... 4/2

Technical data ............................... 4/3

Cubicle design ............................... 4/4

Busbar system ............................... 4/5

Installation designs ...................... 4/6

Circuit-breaker design ................. 4/6

Withdrawable-unit design .......... 4/7

In-line plug-in design ................. 4/13

In-line-type plug-indesign 3NJ6 ................................. 4/14

Fixed-mounted design ................ 4/15

Communication withPROFIBUS®-DP ........................... 4/16

Frame and enclosure ................. 4/17

Forms of internal separation .... 4/18

Installation details ...................... 4/19

Low-VoltageSwitchboards

SIVACON

Low-VoltageSwitchboards

SIVACON

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission and Distribution · 4th Edition4/2

Low-Voltage Switchboards

General

The SIVACON low-voltage switchboardis an economical, practical and type-testedswitchgear and controlgear assembly(Fig. 3), used for example in power engi-neering, in the chemical, oil and capitalgoods industries and in public and privatebuilding systems.It is notable for its good availability andhigh degree of personnel and systemsafety. It can be used on all power levelsup to 6300 A: As main switchboard (power control

center or main distribution board) As motor control centre As subdistribution board.With the many combinations that theSIVACON modular design allows, a widerange of demands can be met both infixed-mounted plug-in and in withdrawable-unit design.All modules used are type-tested (TTA), i.ethey comply with the following standards: IEC 60439-1 DIN EN 60439-1 VDE 0660 Part 500also DIN VDE 0106 Part 100 VDE 0660 Part 500, supplement 2,

IEC 61641 (arcing faults)Certification DIN EN ISO 9001

Advantages of a SIVACONswitchboard

Type-tested standard modules Space-saving base areas from

400 x 400 mm Solid wall design for safe cubicle-

to-cubicle separation High packing density with

up to 40 feeders per cubicle Standard operator interface for all

withdrawable units Test and disconnected position

with door closed Visible isolating gaps and points

of contact Alternative busbar positioning

at top or rear Cable/bar connection from above

or below

Introduction

Low-voltage switchboards form the linkbetween equipment for generation, trans-mission (cables, overhead lines) andtransformation of electrical energy on theone hand, and the loads, such as motors,solenoid valves, actuators and devicesfor heating, lighting and air conditioningon the other.As the majority of applications are suppliedwith low voltage, the low-voltage switch-board is of special significance in bothpublic supply systems and industrial plants.

Fig. 1: Typical low-voltage network in an industrial plant

Reliable power supplies are conditionalon good availability, flexibility for process-related modifications and high operatingsafety on the part of the switchboard.Power distribution in a system usuallycomes via a main switchboard (powercontrol center or main distribution board)and a number of subdistribution boardsor motor control centers (Fig. 1).

M M M M M M M M

LTETFTST

Cable or busbar systemup to 4 MVAup to 690 V

up to 6300 A

3-50 Hz

up to 5000 A

Incoming circuit-breaker

Main switchboard

Circuit-breakers asfeeders to the sub-distribution boards

Connecting cables

Subdistributionboard e. g. services(Lighting, heating,air conditioning,etc.)

up to 100 A

Control

Motor control center 2in withdrawable-unitdesign for production/manufacturing

up to630 A

up to630 A

ET FT

LT

= Circuit-breaker design= Withdrawable-unit design= Fixed-mounted design= Plug-in design

Motor control center 1in withdrawable-unitdesign for production/manufacturing

up to630 A

up to100 A

up to100 A

ST

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



1 2 3

1

2

3

4

Circuit-breaker-design cubiclewith withdrawable circuit-breaker3WN, 1600 A

Withdrawable-unit-design cubiclewith miniature and normalwithdrawable units up to 250 kW

Plug-in design cubicle with in-linemodules and plug-in fuse strips3NJ6

Fixed-mounted-design cubiclewith modular function units

4

Fig. 3: SIVACON low-voltage switchboard

Technical data at a glance

Rated currentRated impulse withstand current (Ipk)Rated short-time withstand current (Icw)

Busbar currents (3- and 4-pole):

Rated insulation voltage (Ui)

Rated operational voltage (Ue)

1000 V

690 V

Horizontal main busbars

Vertical busbars

for circuit-breakers design

for fixed-mounted design / plug-in design

for withdrawable-unit design

See horizontal main busbars

up toup toup to

6300 A250 kA100 kA



Device rated

Circuit-breakersCable feedersMotor feeders

Power loss per cubicle with combinationof various cubicles (Pv)Degree of protection to IEC 60529, EN 60529

* Rated conditional short-circuit current Icc up to 100 kA** Mean value at simultaneity factor of all feeders of 0.6

up toup toup to

up toup toup to

2000 A

110 kA

50 kA*

1000 A

143 kA

65 kA*

up toup toup to

6300 A

1600 A

630 A

IP 20 up to IP 54

approx. 600 W**

up to

Fig. 2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Dimensions in mm

Cable connection compartment

Cross-wiring compartment

Busbar compartmentDevice compartment

400 600

600 400 400 400 400

Cubicle design

The cubicle is structured in modular gridbased on one modular spacing (1 M)corresponding to 175 mm. The effectivedevice installation space with a height of1750 mm therefore represents a heightof 10 M. The top and bottom space eachhas a height of 225 mm (Fig. 5).A cubicle is subdivided into four functioncompartments: Busbar compartment Device compartment Cable connection compartment Cross-wiring compartmentIn 400 mm deep cubicles, the busbar com-partment is at the top; in 600 mm deepcubicles it is at the rear. In double-frontsystems (1000 mm depth) and in a powercontrol center (1200 mm depth), the bus-bar compartment is located centrally.The switching device compartmentaccommodates switchgear and auxiliaryequipment.The cable connection compartment is lo-cated on the right-hand side of the cubicle.With circuit-breaker design, however, it isbelow the switching device compartment(Fig. 4).The cross-wiring compartment is locatedat the top front and is provided for leadingcontrol and loop lines from cubicle tocubicle.

Fig. 4: Cubicle design

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Busbar system

Together with the PEN or PE busbars,and if applicable the N busbars, the phaseconductor busbars L1, L2 and L3 formthe busbar system of a switchboard.One or more distribution busesand/or incoming and outgoing feederscan be connected to a horizontal mainbusbar. Depending on requirements,this main busbar passes through severalcubicles and can be linked with anothermain busbar via a coupling.A vertical distribution busbar is connectedwith the main busbar and suppliesoutgoing feeders within a cubicle.In a 400 mm deep cubicle (Fig. 5a) thephase conductors of the main busbar arealways at the top; the PEN or PE and Nconductors are always at the bottom.The maximum rated current at 35 °C is1965 A (non-ventilated), and 2250 A (venti-lated); the maximum short-circuit strengthis Ipk = 110 kA or Icw = 50 kA, respectively.In single-front systems with 600 mmcubicle depth (Fig. 5b), the main busbarsare behind the switching device compart-ment. In double-front systems of 1000 mmdepth (Fig. 5c), they are between the twoswitching device compartments (central).The phase conductors can be arranged atthe top or bottom; PEN, PE and N conduc-tors are always at the bottom. The maxi-mum rated current is at 35 °C 3250 A(non-ventilated) or 3500 A (ventilated);Ipk = 250 kA or Icw = 100 kA, respectively.In 1200 mm deep systems (power controlcenter) (Fig. 5d) the conductors arearranged as for double-front systems, butin duplicate; the phase conductors arealways at the top. The maximum ratedcurrent at 35 °C is 4850 A (non-ventilated)or 6300 A (ventilated); Ipk = 220 kA,Icw = 100 kA.

Fig. 5: Modular grid and location of main busbars

400

225

400

225

400

Top space Switching device compartment

Bottom space

400

225225

2200

225

10 x175

200

225

2200 10 x175

2200

a) b)

d)c)

225

10 x175

225

10 x175

200 400 400400

Dimensions in mm

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Installation designs

The following designs are availablefor the duties specified: Circuit-breaker design Withdrawable-unit design Plug-in design Fixed-mounted design

Circuit-breaker design

Distribution boards for substantial energyrequirements are generally followed bya number of subdistribution boards andloads. Particular demands are thereforemade in terms of long-term reliability andsafety. That is to say, ”supply“, ”coupling“and ”feeder“ functions must be reliablyavailable over long periods of time. Mainte-nance and testing must not involve longstandstill times. The circuit-breaker designcomponents meet these requirements.The circuit-breaker cubicles have separatefunction spaces for a switching devicecompartment, auxiliary equipment com-partment and cable/busbar connectioncompartment (Fig. 7).The auxiliary equipment compartment isabove the switching device compartment.The cable or busbar connection compart-ment is located below. With supply fromabove, the arrangement is a like a mirrorimage. The cubicle width is determined bythe breaker rated current.

Fig. 7: Circuit-breaker cubicle with withdrawable circuit-breaker 3WN, 1600 A rated current

Circuit-breaker design 3WN

The 3WN circuit-breakers in withdrawable-unit or fixed-mounted design are usedfor incoming supply, outgoing feeders andcouplings (longitudinal and transverse).The operational current can be shown onan LCD display in the control panel; thereis consequently no need for an ammeteror current transformer.

400600800

1000

/500

Cubicle width

[mm]

IN to 1600IN to 2500IN to 3200IN to 6300

Breaker ratedcurrent[A]

Fig. 6

The high short-time current-carrying capaci-ty for time-graded short-circuit protection(up to 500 ms) assures reliable operationof sections of the switchboard not affectedby a short circuit.With the aid of short-time grading controlfor very brief delay times (50 ms), thestresses and damage suffered by a switch-board in the event of a short-circuit can besubstantially minimized, regardless of thepreset delay time of the switching deviceconcerned.The withdrawable circuit-breaker hasthree positions between which it can bemoved with the aid of a crank or spindlemechanism. In the connected position themain and auxiliary contacts are closed.

In the test position the auxiliary contactsare closed. In the disconnected positionboth main and auxiliary contacts are open.Mechanical interlocks ensure that, in theprocess of moving from one position toanother, the circuit-breaker always reachesthe OPEN state or that closing is notpossible when the breaker is betweentwo positions.The circuit-breaker is always moved withthe door closed. The actual position inwhich it is can be telecommunicated viaa signaling switch.A kit, switch or withdrawable unit canbe used for grounding and short-circuiting.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Withdrawable-unit design

A major feature of withdrawable-unitdesign is removability and ease of replace-ment of equipment combinations underoperating conditions, i.e. a switchboardcan be adapted to process-related modifi-cations without having to be shut down.Withdrawable-unit design is used thereforemainly for switching and control of motors(Fig. 8).

Withdrawable units

The equipment of the main circuit of anoutgoing feeder and the relevant auxiliaryequipment are integrated as a function unitin a withdrawable unit, which can be easilyaccommodated in a cubicle.In basic state, all equipment and movableparts are within the withdrawable unit con-tours and thereby protected from damage.The facility for equipping the withdrawableunits from the rear allows plenty of spacefor auxiliary devices. Measuring instru-ments, indicator lights, pushbuttons, etc.are located on a hinged instrument panel,such that settings (e.g. on the overloadrelay) can be easily performed duringoperation.

Fig. 8: High packing density with up to 40 feeders percubicle

Fig. 9: SIVACON withdrawable units size 1, size 1/4 and 1/2

A distinction is made between miniature(sizes 1/4 and 1/2) and normal withdraw-able units (sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4) (Fig. 9).The normal withdrawable unit of size 1has a height of one modular spacing(175 mm) and can, with the use of a mini-ature withdrawable unit adapter, be re-placed by 4 withdrawable units of size 1/4or 2 units of size 1/2. The withdrawableunits of sizes 2, 3 and 4 have a height of2, 3 and 4 modular spacings, respectively.The maximum complement of a cubicle is,for example, 10 full-size withdrawableunits of size 1 or 40 miniature withdrawa-ble units of size 1/4 .

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Fig. 10: Withdrawable-unit principle

Moving isolating contact system

For main and auxiliary circuits the with-drawable units are equipped with a movingisolating contact system. It has contactson both the incoming and outgoing side;they can be moved by handcrank such thatthey come laterally out of the withdrawa-ble unit and engage with the fixed contactsin the cubicle. On miniature withdrawableunits the isolating contact system movesupwards into the miniature withdrawableunit adapter.A distinction is made between connected,disconnected and test position (Fig. 10).In the connected position both main andauxiliary contacts are closed; in the discon-nected position they are open. The testposition allows testing of the withdrawableunit for proper function in no-load (cold)state, in which the main contacts are open,but the auxiliary contacts are closed for theincoming control voltage.In all three positions the doors are closedand the withdrawable unit mechanicallyconnected with the switchboard.This assures optimal safety for personneland the degree of protection is upheld.Movement from the connected into thetest position and vice-versa always passesthrough the disconnected position; thisassures that all contactors drop out.

Operating error protection

Integrated maloperation protection ineach withdrawable unit reliably preventsmoving of the isolating contacts with themain circuit-breaker ”CLOSED“ (handcrankcannot be attached) (Fig. 11).

Fig. 11: Operating error protection prevents travel of the isolating contacts when the master switch is “ON”

Connected position

Disconnected position

Test position

L3L2L1N

L3L2L1N

L3L2L1N

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Indicating and signaling

The current position of a withdrawableunit is clearly indicated on the instrumentpanel. Such signals as ”feeder not avail-able“ (AZNV), ”test“ and ”AZNV and test“can be given by additional alarm switches.The alarm switch in the compartment(S21) is a limit switch of NC design; thatin the withdrawable unit (S20) is of NOdesign. Both are actuated by the mainisolating contacts of the withdrawable unit(Fig. 12).

Fig. 12: Circuitry and position of main and auxiliary contacts

X19 = Auxiliary isolating contactS20 = Alarm switch in withdrawable unit*S21 = Alarm switch in compartment*WU = Withdrawable unitCompt. = Compartment

*actuated by main isolating contact

TestAZNV AZNV/Test

*No signal, as auxiliary isolating contact open

*

Main isolatingcontact

Aux. isolatingcontact

In with-drawable unit- S 201 NO

In compartment

- S 211 NC

Connected

Disconnected

Test

Compt.WU Compt.WU Compt.WU

- X19

- Q1 - S2121

22

- S21

22COM

AZNV

Test

- X19

- Q1 - S21

- S20

21

22

21

- X19

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Fig. 13: Arcing fault-protected plug-on bar systemembedded in the left of the cubicle

Vertical distribution bus (plug-on bus)

The vertical plug-on bus with the phaseconductors L1, L2 and L3 is located on theleft-hand side of the cubicle and featuressafe-to-touch tap openings (Fig. 13).The vertical PE, PEN and N busbars areon the right-hand side of the cubicle ina separate, 400 mm wide cable connectioncompartment, equipped with variable cablebrackets.

Rated currents – fused and withdraw-able unit sizes of cable feeders

Rated currents – non-fused and with-drawable unit sizes of cable feeders

Fig. 14

I

D3063KL503KL523KL533KL553KL573KL61

3563

125160250400630

1/4 / 1/2112223

Device Ratedcurrent

With-drawableunitsize

Type [A]

Device

3RV1013RV1023RV1033RV1043VF33VF43VF53VF6

122550160160250400630

1/4 / 1/21/4 / 1/2 / 11/2 / 111224

Ratedcurrent

With-drawableunitsize

Type [A]

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Power ratings – fused and withdraw-able unit sizes of motor feeders

Fig. 15

FVNR FVR Star-delta starters

400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V

Full-voltagenon-reversing (FVNR)motor startersNormal-duty start [kW]

Full-voltagenon-reversing (FVNR)motor startersHeavy-duty start [kW]

Full-voltagereversing (FVR)motor startersReversing circuit [kW]

Star-delta starters[kW]

Withdrawableunit size

––

5590

160–

400500

1118.52275

160250

––

11222290

200355

1/41/212343+34+4

11223790

160500

7.5 15 22 45 90160 – –

7.5 153055

132200

11223790

132375

5.5 18.5 22 45110250 –

–

5.5222255132315

5.5 22 22 55160375

––

3055

132–

250355

––

3775

160–

315355

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



I

FVNR Star-delta startersFVR

II


––––––

7.5 18.5 22 75160250

7.5 18.5 30 90200315

1/41/21234

4 11 11 37132160

––––––

0.55 7.5 22 55160250

0.75 7.5 30 75200315

––––––

––

2255

110160

––

3075

132100

–––––

0.37 11 15 45160200

400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 690 V





––––––

690 V


11 18.5 22 75160250

11 18.5 30 90200250

––––––

4 11 11 37132160

3 15 15 45160200

––––––

5.5 11 22 75160250

5.5 11 30 90200315

––––––

400 V 500 V 690 V 400 V 500 V 400 V 500 V 690 V

––––––

1/41/21234

––

2255

110200

––

3075

132250

400 V 500 V 690 V





Power ratings – non-fused withoverload relay and withdrawable unit sizes of motor feeders

Coordination type 1

Coordination type 2

Fig. 16

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



I I

FVNR FVR

Full-voltage non-reversing (FVNR)motor startersNormal-duty start [kW]

Coordination type 1

Coordination type 2

Full-voltage reversing (FVR)motor startersReversing circuit [kW]

Full-voltage non-reversing (FVNR)motor startersNormal-duty start [kW]

Full-voltage reversing (FVR)motor startersReversing circuit [kW]

Modulheight[mm]

400 V1145–

400 V–1145

400 V7.545–

400 V–7.545

50100200

Modulheight[mm]

50100200

In-line plug-in design

The in-line plug-in design represents a low-priced alternative to both the classic fixed-mounted and the convenient withdrawableunit design. By virtue of the supply-sideplug-in contact, the modules provide thefacility for quick interchangeability withoutthe switchboard having to be isolated. Thisdesign is therefore used wherever chang-ing requirements are imposed on opera-tion, if for example motor ratings have tobe changed or new loads connected.In-line plug-in modules, a cost-effective,compact design for: Load outgoing feeders up to 45 kW 3RV outgoing circuit-breaker units up to

100 AThe modules are fitted with the newSIRIUSTM 3R switching devices. The com-pact overall width of the SIRIUS 3R devic-es, as well as the facility for lining them upwith connecting modules, are particularynoticeable in the extremely narrow con-struction of the in-line modules. A lateralguide rail in the cubicle facilitates handlingwhen replacing a module and at the sametime ensures positive contact with theplug-in bus system.

Fig. 17: In-line plug-in design combined with plug-infuse strips 3NJ6

Power ratings – non-fused withoverload relay and module height of motor feeders

Rated currents – non fused and modul-height of cable feeders

Type [A] [mm]

I

Device Ratedcurrent

3RV1013RV1023RV1033RV104

122550

100

5050

100100

Modul-height

Fig. 19

Fig. 18

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Device Ratedcurrent

In-line-type size

Type [A]

3NJ6110

3NJ6120

3NJ6140

3NJ6160

160

250

400

630

50

100

200

200

Height [mm]

Fuse-switch disconnector(single break)

In-line-type plug-in design 3NJ6

In-line-type switching devices allow space-saving installation of cable feeders ina cubicle and are particularly notable fortheir compact design (Fig. 20).The in-line-type switching devices featureplug-in contacts on the incoming side.They are alternatively available for cablefeeders up to 630 A as: Fuse module Fuse-switch disconnectors

(single-break) Fuse-switch disconnectors

(double-break)with or without solid-state fuse monitoring

Switch disconnectors

The single- or double-break in-line-typeswitching devices allow fuse changingin dead state.The main switch is actuated by pullinga vertical handle to the side.The modular design allows quick reequip-ping and easy replacement of in-line-typeswitching devices under operating condi-tions.The in-line-type switching devices havea height of 50 mm, 100 mm or 200 mm.A cubicle can consequently be equippedwith up to 35 in-line-type switchingdevices.

Vertical distribution bus (plug-on bus)

The vertical plug-on bus with the phaseconductors L1, L2 and L3 is located at theback in the cubicle and can be additionallyfitted with a shock-hazard protection.The vertical PE, PEN and N busbars areon the right-hand side of the cubicle ina separate, 400 mm wide cable connectioncompartment, equipped with variable cablebrackets.

Fig. 20: Cubicle with in-line-type switching devices

Fig. 21: Rated currents and installation data of in-line-type switching devices

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Fixed-mounted design

In certain applications, e.g. in buildinginstallation systems, either there is noneed to replace components underoperating conditions or short standstilltimes do not result in exceptional costs.In such cases the fixed-mounted design(Fig. 22) offers excellent economy, highreliability and flexibility by virtue of: Any combination of modular function

units Easy replacement of function units after

deenergizing the switchboard Brief modification or standstill times

by virtue of lateral vertical cubiclebusbars

Add-on components for subdivision andeven compartmentalization in accord-ance with requirements.

Modular function units

The modular function units enable versatileand efficient installation, above all when-ever operationally required changes or ad-aptations to new load data are necessary(Fig. 23). The subracks can be equipped asrequired with switching devices or combi-nations thereof; the function units can becombined as required within one cubicle.When the function modules are fitted inthe cubicle they are first attached in theopenings provided and then bolted to thecubicle. This securing system enablesuncomplicated ”one-man assembly“.

Vertical distribution bus (cubicle busbar)

The vertical cubicle busbar with the phaseconductors L1, L2 and L3 is fastened tothe left-hand side wall of the cubicle andoffers many connection facilities (withoutthe need for drilling or perforation) forcables and bars. It can be subdivided atthe top or bottom once per cubicle (forgroup circuits or couplings). The connec-tions are easily accessible and thereforeequally easy to check. A transparentshock-hazard protection allows visualinspection and assures a very high degreeof personnel safety.The vertical PE, PEN and N busbars are onthe right-hand side of the cubicle in a sepa-rate, up to 400 mm wide cable connectioncompartment, equipped with variable cablebrackets.

Fig. 22: Variable fixed-mounted design

Fig. 23: Fused modular function unit with direct protection, 45 kW

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Communication withPROFIBUS® -DP

With SIMOCODE®-DP for motor andcable feeders and the interface DP/3WNfor circuit-breakers type 3WN, SIVACONoffers an economical possibility of ex-changing data with automation systems.The widespread standardized, cross-manu-facturer-PROFIBUS®-DP serves as the bussystem, offering links to a very diverserange of programmable controllers. Easy installation planning Saving in wiring

Fig. 24

Communication-capable circuit-breaker3WN (Fig. 25)

Remote-control for opening and closing Remote diagnostics for preventive main-

tenance Signalling of operating states Transmission of current values e.g. for

power management

Communication-capable motorprotection and control deviceSIMOCODE-DP (Fig. 26)

Integrated full motor protection Extensive control functions Convenient diagnostics possibilities Autonomous operation of each feeder

via an operator control block

AS-interface (Fig. 27)

Status messages via AS-I modules(On/Off/Control)

Fig. 25: 3WN circuit-breaker

Fig. 26: SIMOCODE-DP in size 1/4 withdrawable unit Fig. 27: AS-interface modules 41

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Fig. 30: Cubicle dimensions and average weights

Fig. 29: Device compartment can be separated frominterconnected busbar

Fig. 28: Rear and top busbar system

Frame and enclosure

The galvanized SIVACON cubicle framesare of solid wall design and ensure reliablecubicle-to-cubicle separation.The enclosure is made of powder-coatedsteel sheets (Fig. 28 and 29).A cubicle front features one or more doors,depending on requirements and cubicletype. These doors are of 2 mm thick, pow-der-coated sheet steel and are hingedon the right or left (attached to the frame).Spring-loaded door locks prevent the doorsfrom flying open unintentionally, and alsoensure safe pressure equalization in theevent of an arcing fault.

Degree of protection (against foreignbodies/water, and personnel safety)

A distinction is made between ventilatedand non-ventilated cubicles.Ventilated cubicles are provided with slitsin the base space door and in the top plateand attain degree of protection in relationto the operating area of IP 20/21 orIP 40/41, respectively.Non-ventilated cubicles attain degreeof protection IP 54.In relation to the cable compartment,degree of protection IP 00 or IP 40, isgenerally attained.

2200 500600500600600800

10001000

400

600

1200

up to 1600up to 2000up to 1600up to 1600up to 2500up to 3200up to 4000up to 6300

285390325335440540700

1200

2200 1000 400600

1000

420480690

2200 1000 400600

1000

320380550

Height[mm]

Width[mm]

Depth[mm]

Rated current[A]

Approx. weight[kg]

Withdrawable-unit design/plug-in design

Fixed-mounted design

Circuit-breaker design

Cubicle dimensions andaverage weights

Top busbarsystem

Rear busbarsystem

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



4b4a3b3a2b2a1

Circuit-breakerdesign

Form

With-drawable-unitdesign

Fixed-mounteddesign– Modular– Compen-

sation

Plug-indesign– 3 NJ6– In-line

Form of internal separation

In accordance with IEC 60439-1, (Fig. 32)Depending on requirements, the functioncompartments can be subdivided as perthe following table:

Fig. 32: Forms of internal separation to IEC 60439-1

4

4

4

1

4

4

2 2

3 4 4

Form 4b

4

4

4

1

4

4

2 2

3 4 4

Form 4a

Form 3a

4

4

4

1

4

4

2 2

3 4 4

Form 3b

4

4

4

1

4

4

2 2

3 4 4

Form 2b

4

4

4

1

4

4

2 2

3 4 4

4

4

4

1

4

4

2 2

3 4 4

Form 2a

Form 1

4

4

4

1

4

4

2 2

3 4 4

1234

Functional unit

Terminal for external conductorsMain busbarBusbarIncoming circuitOutgoing circuit

Fig. 31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



400

900

600

1050

1000

1460

1200

1660

Cubicledepth

Transportbase depth

[mm]

[mm]

Installation details

Transport units

For transport purposes, individual cubiclesof a switchboard are combined to forma transport unit, up to a maximum lengthof 2400 mm.The transport base is 200 mm longer thanthe transport unit and is 190 mm high. Thetransport base depth is:

Floor penetrations

The cubicles feature floor penetrationsfor leading in cables for connection, or foran incoming supply from below (Fig. 35).

Fig. 35: Floor penetrations

Cubicle width - 100

Cubicle width - 100

Cubicle width - 100

Cubicle depth 1000 mm, 1200 mm

Cubicle depth 400 mm

Cubicle depth 600 mm

523

215 400

75

Diameter 14.125

323

38.5

Cubicle width

250 600

75

Diameter 14.1

323

38.5

Cubicle width

250

75

Diameter 14.1

38.5

Cubicle width

250

75

1000or1200

Cubicledepth - 77

Free space for cables andbar penetrations

25

25

Fig. 34

If the busbar is at the top, the main bus-bars between two transport units are con-nected via lugs which are bolted to thebusbar system.If the busbar is at the rear, the individualbars can be bolted together via connectionelements, as the conductors of theright-hand transport unit are offset to theleft and protrude beyond the cubicle edge.

Mounting

Cubicle depths 400 mm and 600 mm: Wall- or Floor-mountingCubicle depths 1000 mm and 1200 mm: Floor-mountingThe following minimum clearancesbetween the switchboard and anyobstacles must be observed:

There must be a minimum clearance of400 mm between the top and sides of thecubicle and any obstacles.

Clearances

Switchboard

75 mm100 mm 100 mm

Fig. 33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Operating and maintenance gangways

All doors of a SIVACON switchboard canbe fitted such that they close in the direc-tion of an escape route or emergency exit.If they are fitted differently, care must betaken that when doors are open, there isa minimum gangway of 500 mm (Fig. 36).In general, the door width must be takeninto account, i.e. a door must open throughat least 90°. (In circuit-breaker and fixed-mounted designs the maximum door widthis 1000 mm.)If a lifting truck is used to install a circuit-breaker, the gangway widths must suit thedimensions of the lifting truck.

Fig. 36: Reduced gangways in area of open doors

Fig. 37


Fax: ++ 49 - 3 41- 4 47 04 00www.ad.siemens.de

Min. gangway widthEscape route 600 or 700 mm

Free min. width500 mm1)

2)

20001)

600

700700 700

600

700

1) Minimum gangway height under covers or enclosures

1) Where switchboard fronts face each other, narrowing of the gangwayas a result of open doors (i.e. doors that do not close in the directionof the escape route) is reckoned with only on one side

2) Note door widths, i.e. it must be possible to open the doorthrough at least 90°

Dimensions in mm

HeightWidthDepth

HeightWidthDepth

Dimensions of lifting truck [mm]

Minimum gangway width [mm]

Approx. 1500

2000680920

Contents PageIntroduction ....................................... 5/2

Product Range .................................. 5/3

Electrical Design .............................. 5/4

Transformer Loss Evaluation ......... 5/6

Mechanical Design ......................... 5/8

Connection Systems ....................... 5/9

Accessories andProtective Devices ........................ 5/11

Technical DataDistribution Transformers ............ 5/13

Technical DataPower Transformers ...................... 5/18

On-load Tap Changers .................. 5/26

Cast-resin Dry-typeTransformers, GEAFOL .................. 5/27

Technical DataGEAFOL Cast-resinDry-type Transformers .................. 5/31

Special Transformers .................... 5/35

TransformersTransformers

5Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:22 Uhr1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Introduction

In addition, there are various special-purpose transformers such as convertertransformers, which can be both in therange of power transformers and in therange of distribution transformers as faras rated power and rated voltage are con-cerned.As special elements for network stabili-zation, arc-suppression coils and com-pensating reactors are available. Arc-sup-pression coils compensate the capacitivecurrent flowing through a ground fault andthus guarantee uninterrupted energy sup-ply. Compensating reactors compensatethe capacitive power of the cable networksand reduce overvoltages in case of loadrejection; the economic efficiency andstablility of the power transmission are im-proved.The general overview of our manufactur-ing/delivery program is shown in thetable ”Product Range“.

Standards and specifications, general

The transformers comply with the relevantVDE specifications, i.e. DIN VDE 0532”Transformers and reactors“ and the”Technical conditions of supply for three-phase transformers“ issued by VDEWand ZVEI.Therefore they also satisfy the require-ments of IEC Publication 76, Parts 1 to 5together with the standards and specifi-cations (HD and EN) of the EuropeanUnion (EU).Enquiries should be directed to the manu-facturer where other standards and spe-cifications are concerned. Only the US(ANSI/NEMA) and Canadian (CSA) stand-ards differ from IEC by any substantial de-gree. A design according to these stand-ards is also possible.

Important additional standards

DIN 42 500, HD 428: oil-immersedthree-phase distribution transformers50–2500 kVA

DIN 42 504: oil-immersed three-phasetransformers 2–10 MVA

DIN 42 508: oil-immersed three-phasetransformers 12.5–80 MVA

DIN 42 523, HD 538: three-phasedry-type transformers 100–2500 kVA

DIN 45 635 T30: noise level IEC 289: reactance coils and neutral

grounding transformers IEC 551: measurement of noise level IEC 726: dry-type transformers RAL: coating/varnish

Transformers are one of the primarycomponents for the transmission anddistribution of electrical energy.Their design results mainly from the rangeof application, the construction, the ratedpower and the voltage level.The scope of transformer types starts withgenerator transformers and ends with dis-tribution transformers.Transformers which are directly connectedto the generator of the power station arecalled generator transformers. Their powerrange goes up to far above 1000 MVA.Their voltage range extends to approx.1500 kV.The connection between the different high-voltage system levels is made via networktransformers (network interconnectingtransformers). Their power range exceeds1000 MVA. The voltage range exceeds1500 kV.Distribution transformers are within therange from 50 to 2500 kVA and max.36 kV. In the last step, they distributethe electrical energy to the consumersby feeding from the high-voltage into thelow-voltage distribution network. Theseare designed either as liquid-filled or asdry-type transformers.Transformers with a rated power up to2.5 MVA and a voltage up to 36 kV arereferred to as distribution transformers;all transformers of higher ratings areclassified as power transformers.

0.05–2.5

2.5–3000

0.10–20

≤ 36

36–1500

≤ 36

Ratedpower

Max.operatingvoltage

[MVA] [kV]

Oildistributiontransformers

GEAFOL-cast-resintransformers

Powertransformers

5/13–5/17

5/18–5/25

5/27–5/34

Figs.onpage

Fig. 1: Transformer types

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Product Range

Above 2.5 MVA up to more than 1000 MVA, above 30 kV up to 1500 kV(system and system interconnecting transformers, with separate windings orauto-connected), with on-load tap changers or off-circuit tap changers,of three- or single-phase design

Generator and powertransformers

50 to 2 500 kVA, highest voltage for equipment up to 36 kV,with copper or aluminum windings, hermetically sealed (TUMETIC®) orwith conservator (TUNORMA®) of three- or single-phase design

Oil-immerseddistribution transformers,TUMETIC, TUNORMA

Buchholz relays, oil testing equipment,oil flow indicators and other monitoring devicesFan control cabinets, control cabinets for parallel operation andautomatic voltage controlSensors (PTC, Pt 100)

Accessories

Advisory services for transformer specificationsOrganization, coordination and supervision of transportationSupervision of assembly and commissioningService/inspection troubleshooting servicesTraining of customer personnelInvestigation and assessment of oil problems

Service

Furnace and converter transformersTraction transformers mounted on rolling stock and appropriate on-load tap-changersSubstation transformers for traction systemsTransformers for train heating and point heatingTransformers for HVDC transmission systemsTransformers for audio frequencies in power supply systemsThree-phase neutral electromagnetic couplers and grounding transformersIgnition transformers

Special transformersfor industry, tractionand HVDC transmissionsystems

100 kVA to more than 20 MVA, highest voltage for equipment up to 36 kV,of three- or single-phase designGEAFOL®-SL substations

Cast-resin distributionand power transformersGEAFOL

Liquid-immersed shunt and current-limiting reactors up tothe highest rated powersReactors for HVDC transmission systems

Reactors

Fig. 2

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Dy1

iii

Dy5

Dy11

Yd1

Yd5

Yd11

ii

i

III II

I1

iiiii

iIII II

I

5

iiiii

i

III II

I11

iii

iii

III II

I11

iiiii

iIII II

I

5

iii

ii

i

III II

I1

Electrical Design

Power ratings and type of cooling

All power ratings in this guide are the pro-duct of rated voltage (times phase-factorfor three-phase transformers) and ratedcurrent of the line side winding (at centertap, if several taps are provided), expres-sed in kVA or MVA, as defined in IEC 76-1.If only one power rating and no coolingmethod are shown, natural oil-air cooling(ONAN or OA) is implied for oil-immersedtransformers. If two ratings are shown,forced-air cooling (ONAF or FA) in one ortwo steps is applicable.For cast resin transformers, natural aircooling (AN) is standard. Forced air cooling(AF) is also applicable.

Temperature rise

In accordance with IEC-76 the standardtemperature rise for oil-immersed powerand distribution transformers is: 65 K average winding temperature

(measured by the resistance method) 60 K top oil temperature

(measured by thermometer)The standard temperature rise for Siemenscast-resin transformers is 100 K (insulation class F) at HV and

LV winding.Whereby the standard ambient tempera-tures are defined as follows: 40 °C maximum temperature, 30 °C average on any one day, 20 °C average in any one year, –25 °C lowest temperature outdoors, –5 °C lowest temperature indoors.Higher ambient temperatures require acorresponding reduction in temperaturerise, and thus affect price or rated poweras follows: 1.5% surcharge for each 1 K above

standard temperature conditions, or 1.0% reduction of rated power for each

1 K above standard temperature condi-tions.

These adjustment factors are applicableup to 15 K above standard temperatureconditions.

Altitude of installation

The transformers are suitable for operationat altitudes up to 1000 meters above sealevel. Site altitudes above 1000 m necessi-tate the use of special designs and an in-crease/or a reduction of the transformerratings as follows (approximate values):

The primary winding (HV) is normallyconnected in delta, the secondary winding(LV) in wye. The electrical offset of thewindings in respect to each other is either30, 150 or 330 degrees standard (Dy1,Dy5, Dy11). Other vector groups aswell as single-phase transformers andautotransformers on request (Fig. 3).

Power transformers

Generator transformers and large powertransformers are usually connected in Yd.For HV windings higher than 110 kV, theneutral has a reduced insulation level.For star/star-connected transformers andautotransformers normally a tertiary wind-ing in delta, whose rating is a third of thatof the transformer, has to be added. Thisstabilizes the phase-to phase voltages inthe case of an unbalanced load and pre-vents the displacement of the neutralpoint.Single-phase transformers and autotrans-formers are used when the transportationpossibilities are limited. They will be con-nected at site to three-phase transformerbanks.

2% increase for every 500 m altitude (orpart there of) in excess of 1000 m, or

2% reduction of rated power for each500 m altitude (or part there of) in ex-cess of 1000 m.

Transformer losses and efficiencies

Losses and efficiencies stated in this guideare average values for guidance only. Theyare applicable if no loss evaluation figure isstated in the inquiry (see following chapter)and they are subject to the tolerances stat-ed in IEC 76-1, namely +10% of the totallosses, or +15% of each component loss,provided that the tolerance for the totallosses is not exceeded.If optimized and/or guaranteed losses with-out tolerances are required, this must bestated in the inquiry.

Connections and vector groups

Distribution transformers

The transformers listed in this guide areall three-phase transformers with one setof windings connected in star (wye) andthe other one in delta, whereby the neutralof the star-connected winding is fully ratedand brought to the outside.

Fig. 3: Most commonly used vector groups

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Electrical Design

≤ 1.1

3.6

7.2

12.0

17.5

24.0

36.0

52.0

72.5

123.0

145.0

170.0

245.0

Highestvoltagefor equip-ment Um(r. m. s.)

[kV]

Ratedshort-durationpower-frequencywithstandvoltage(r. m. s.)

[kV]

Rated lightning-impulse with-stand voltage(peak)

List 1[kV]

List 2[kV]

3

10

20

28

38

50

70

95

140

185

230

275

325

360

395

–

20

40

60

75

95

145

–

40

60

75

95

125

170

250

325

450

550

650

750

850

950

Higher test voltage withstand requirements must bestated in the inquiry and may result in a higher price.

Fig. 4: Insulation level

Insulation level

Power-frequency withstand voltages andlightning-impulse withstand voltages are inaccordance with IEC 76-3, Para. 5, Table II,as follows:

Conversion to 60 Hz – possibilities

All ratings in the selection tables of thisguide are based on 50 Hz operation.For 60 Hz operation, the following optionsapply: 1. Rated power and impedance voltage

are increased by 10%, all other parame-ters remain identical.

2. Rated power increases by 20%, butno-load losses increase by 30% andnoise level increases by 3 dB, all otherparameters remain identical (this lay-out is not possible for cast-resin trans-formers).

3. All technical data remain identical,price is reduced by 5%.

4. Temperature rise is reduced by 10 K,load losses are reduced by 15%, allother parameters remain identical.

Overloading

Overloading of Siemens transformers isguided by the relevant IEC-354 ”Loadingguide for oil-immersed transformers“and the (similar) ANSI C57.92 ”Guide forloading mineral-oil-immersed power trans-formers“.Overloading of GEAFOL cast-resin trans-formers on request.

Routine and special tests

All transformers are subjected to thefollowing routine tests in the factory: Measurement of winding resistance Measurement of voltage ratio and check

of polarity or vector group Measurement of impedance voltage Measurement of load loss Measurement of no-load loss and

no-load current Induced overvoltage withstand test Seperate-source voltage withstand test Partial discharge test (only GEAFOL

cast-resin transformers).The following special tests are optional andmust be specified in the inquiry: Lightning-impulse voltage test (LI test),

full-wave and chopped-wave (specify) Partial discharge test Heat-run test at natural or forced cooling

(specify) Noise level test Short-circuit test.Test certificates are issued for all theabove tests on request.

Transformer cell (indoor installation)

The transformer cell must have the neces-sary electrical clearances when an open airconnection is used. The ventilation systemmust be large enough to fulfill the recom-mendations for the maximum tempera-tures according to IEC.For larger power transformers either anoil/water cooling system has to be used orthe oil/air cooler (radiator bank) has to beinstalled outside the transformer cell.In these cases a ventilation system hasto be installed also to remove the heatcaused by the convection of the transform-er tank.

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


q = p100

+ 1

A. Capital cost

B. Cost of no-load loss

C. Cost of load loss

D. Cost resulting from demands charges

Cc =Cp · r

100

= purchase price

= depreciation factor

= interest factor

= interest rate in % p.a.= depreciation period in years

Cp

r = p · qn

qn – 1

pn

CP0 = Ce · 8760 h/year · P0

= energy charges

= no-load loss [kW]

Ce

P0

amountkWh

CPk = Ce · 8760 h/year · α2 · Pk

amountyear

amountyear

amountyear

α

Pk

=

= copper loss [kW]

constant operation loadrated load

CD =amount

yearCd (P0 + Pk)

Cd = demand charges amountkW · year

Transformer Loss Evaluation

The sharply increased cost of electricalenergy has made it almost mandatory forbuyers of electrical machinery to carefullyevaluate the inherent losses of theseitems. In case of distribution and powertransformers, which operate continuouslyand most frequently in loaded condition,this is especially important. As an example,the added cost of loss-optimized trans-formers can in most cases be recoveredvia savings in energy use in less than threeyears.Low-loss transformers use more andbetter materials for their construction andthus initially cost more. By stipulating lossevaluation figures in the transformer in-quiry, the manufacturer receives the nec-essary incentive to provide a loss-opti-mized transformer rather than the low-cost model.Detailed loss evaluation methods fortransformers have been developed andare described accurately in the literature,taking the project-specific evaluation fac-tors of a given customer into account.The following simplified method for a quickevaluation of different quoted transformerlosses is given, making the following as-sumptions: The transformers are operated con-

tinuously The transformers operate at partial load,

but this partial load is constant Additional cost and inflation factors are

not considered Demand charges are based on 100%

load.The total cost of owning and operating atransformer for one year is thus defined asfollows: A. Capital cost Cc

taking into account the purchase priceCp, the interest rate p, and the depre-ciation period n

B. Cost of no-load loss CP0,based on the no-load loss P0, andenergy cost Ce

C. Cost of load loss Cpk,based on the copper loss Pk, the equi-valent annual load factor a, and energycost Ce

D. Demand charges Cd,based on the amount set by the utility,and the total kW of connected load.

These individual costs are calculated asfollows:

Fig. 5

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr6

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Transformer Loss Evaluation

To demonstrate the usefulness of suchcalculations, the following arbitrary exam-ples are shown, using factors that canbe considered typical in Germany, andneglecting the effects of inflation on therate assumed:

A. Low-cost transformer B. Loss-optimized transformer

Depreciation periodInterest rateEnergy charge

Demand charge

Equivalent annual load factor

npCe

Cd

α

= 20 years= 12% p. a.= 0.25 DM/kWh

= 350

= 0.8

DMkW · yr

P0 = 2.6 kWPk = 20 kWCp = DM 25 000

P0 = 1.7 kWPk = 17 kWCp = DM 28 000

no-load lossload losspurchase price

no-load lossload losspurchase price

Cc25000 · 13.39

100

DM 3348/year

CP0 0.25 · 8760 · 2.6

DM 5694/year=

=

=

=

CPk 0.25 · 8760 · 0.64 · 20

DM 28 032/year=

=

CD 350 · (2.6 + 20)

DM 7910/year=

=

Total cost of owning and operating thistransformer is thus:

DM 44984.–/year

Cc28000 · 13.39

100

DM 3 749/year

CP0 0.25 · 8760 · 1.7

DM 3 723/year=

=

=

=

CPk 0.25 · 8760 · 0.64 · 17

DM 23 827/year=

=

CD 350 · (1.7 + 17)

DM 6 545/year=

=

Total cost of owning and operating thistransformer is thus:

DM 37 844.–/year

The energy saving of the optimized distribution transformer of DM 7140 per yearpays for the increased purchase price in less than one year.

Example: 1600 kVA distribution transformer

Depreciation factorr = 13.39

Fig. 6

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Mechanical Design

Fig. 9: Practically maintenancefree: transformer withthe TUPROTECT air-sealing system built into the con-servator

General mechanical designfor oil-immersed transformers:

Iron core made of grain-orientedelectrical sheet steel insulated on bothsides, core-type.

Windings consisting of copper sectionwire or copper strip. The insulationhas a high disruptive strength and istemperature-resistant, thus guaranteeinga long service life.

Designed to withstand short circuit forat least 2 seconds (IEC).

Oil-filled tank designed as tank withstrong corrugated walls or as radiatortank.

Transformer base with plain or flangedwheels (skid base available).

Cooling/insulation liquid: Mineral oilaccording to VDE 0370/IEC 296. Siliconeoil or synthetic liquids are available.

Standard coating for indoor installation.Coatings for outdoor installation andfor special applications (e.g. aggressiveatmosphere) are available.

Tank design andoil preservation system

Sealed-tank distribution transformers,TUMETIC®

In ratings up to 2500 kVA and 170 kV LIthis is the standard sealed-tank distributiontransformer without conservator and gascushion. The TUMETIC transformer isalways completely filled with oil; oil expan-sion is taken up by the flexible corrugatedsteel tank (variable volume tank design),whereby the maximum operating pressureremains at only a fraction of the usual.These transformers are always shippedcompletely filled with oil and sealed fortheir lifetime. Bushings can be exchangedfrom the outside without draining the oilbelow the top of the active part.The hermetically sealed system preventsoxygen, nitrogen, or humidity from contactwith the insulating oil. This improves theaging properties of the oil to the extentthat no maintenance is required on thesetransformers for their lifetime. Generallythe TUMETIC transformer is lower thanthe TUNORMA transformer. This designhas been in successful service since 1973.A special TUMETIC-Protection device hasbeen developed for this transformer.

Distribution transformers withconservator, TUNORMA®

This is the standard distribution transform-er design in all ratings. The oil level in thetank and the top-mounted bushings is keptconstant by a conservator vessel or expan-sion tank mounted at the highest point ofthe transformer. Oil-level changes due tothermal cycling affect the conservator only.The ambient air is prevented from directcontact with the insulating oil through oil-traps and dehydrating breathers.Tanks from 50 to approximately 4000 kVAare preferably of the corrugated steel de-sign, whereby the sidewalls are formed onautomatic machines into integral coolingpockets. Suitable spot welds and bracesrender the required mechanical stability.Tank bottom and cover are fabricated fromrolled and welded steel plate.Conventional radiators are available.

Power transformers

Power transformers of all ratings areequipped with conservators. Both the openand closed system are available.With the closed system ”TUPROTECT®“the oil does not come into contact with thesurrounding air. The oil expansion is com-pensated with an air bag. (This design isalso available for greater distribution trans-formers on request).The sealing bag consists of strong nylonbraid with a special double lining of ozoneand oil-resistant nitrile rubber. The interiorof this bag is in contact with the ambientair through a dehydrating breather;the outside of this bag is in direct contactwith the oil.All tanks, radiators and conservators(incl. conservator with airbag) are designedfor vacuum filling of the oil.For transformers with on-load tap changersa seperate smaller conservator is neces-sary for the diverter switch compartment.This seperate conservator (without air bag)is normally an integrated part of the mainconservator with its own magnetic oil levelindicator.Power transformers up to 10 MVA arefitted with weld-on radiators and areshipped extensively assembled; shippingconditions permitting.Ratings above 10 MVA require detachableradiators with individual butterfly valves,and partial dismantling of components forshipment.All the usual fittings and accessories for oiltreatment, shipping and installation ofthese transformers are provided as stand-ard. For monitoring and protective devices,see the listing on page 5/11.

Fig. 8: 630 kVA, three-phase, TUNORMA20 kV ± 2.5 %/0.4 kV distribution transformer

Fig. 7: Cross section of a TUMETIC three-phasedistribution transformer

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Connection Systems

Distribution transformers

All Siemens transformers have top-mount-ed HV and LV bushings according to DIN intheir standard version. Besides the openbushing arrangement for direct connectionof bare or insulated wires, three basic insu-lated termination systems are available:

Fully enclosed terminal box for cables(Fig. 11)

Available for either HV or LV side, or forboth. Horizontally split design in degreeof protection IP 44 or IP 54. (Totally en-closed and fully protected against contactwith live parts, plus protection against drip,splash, or spray water.)Cable installation through split cable glandsand removable plates facing diagonallydownwards. Optional conduit hubs. Suit-able for single-core or three-phase cableswith solid dielectric insulation, with orwithout stress cones. Multiple cables perphase are terminated on auxiliary busstructures attached to the bushings. Re-moval of transformer by simply bendingback the cables.

Insulated plug connectors (Fig. 12)

For substation installations, suitableHV can be attached via insulatedelbow connectors in LI ratings up to170 kV.

Flange connection (Fig. 13)

Air-insulated bus ducts, insulated busbars,or throat-connected switchgear cubiclesare connected via standardized flanges onsteel terminal enclosures. These can ac-commodate either HV, LV, or both bush-ings. Fiberglass-reinforced epoxy partitionsare available between HV and LV bushingsif flange/flange arrangements are chosen.The following combinations of connectionsystems are possible besides open bush-ing arrangements:

Cable box

Cable box

Flange

Flange

Elbow connector

Elbow connector

HV

Cable box

Flange/throat

Cable box

Flange/throat

Cable box

Flange/throat

LV

Fig 13: Flange connection for switchgear and bus ductsFig. 10: Combination of connection systems

Fig. 11: Fully enclosed cable connection box

Fig. 12: Grounded metal-elbow plug connectors

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr9

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Connection Systems

Power transformers

The most frequently used type of connec-tion for transformers is the outdoor bush-ing.Depending on voltage, current, systemconditions and transport requirements, thetransformers will be supplied with bush-ings arranged vertically, horizontally or in-clined. Up to about 110 kV it is usual touse oil-filled bushings according to DIN;condenser bushings are normally used forhigher voltages.Limited space or other design considera-tions often make it necessary to connectcables directly to the transformer. For volt-ages up to 30 kV air-filled cable boxes areused. For higher voltages the boxes areoil-filled. They may be attached to the tankcover or to its walls (Fig. 14).The space-saving design of SF6-insulatedswitchgear is one of its major advantages.The substation transformer is connecteddirectly to the SF6 switchgear. This elimi-nates the need for an intermediate link(cable, overhead line) between transform-er and system (Fig. 15).

Fig. 14: Transformers with oil-filled HV cable boxes

Fig. 15: Direct SF6-connection of the transformer to the switchgear

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr10

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Accessories and Protective DevicesAccessories not listed completely.Deviations are possible.

Fig. 16: Double-float Buchholz relay

Fig. 17: Dial-type contact thermometer

Double-float Buchholz relay (Fig. 16)

For sudden pressure rise and gas detec-tion in oil-immersed transformer tanks withconservator. Installed in the connectingpipe between tank and conservator andresponding to internal arcing faults andslow decomposition of insulating materials.Additionally, backup function of oil alarm.The relay is actuated either by pressurewaves or gas accumulation, or by loss ofoil below the relay level. Seperate contactsare installed for alarm and tripping.In case of a gas accumulation alarm, gassamples can be drawn directly at the relaywith a small chemical testing kit. Discolor-ing of two liquids indicates either arcing by-products or insulation decomposition prod-ucts in the oil. No change in color indicatesan air bubble.

Dial-type contact thermometer (Fig. 17)

Indicates actual top-oil temperature viacapillary tube. Sensor mounted in well intank cover. Up to four separately adjust-able alarm contacts and one maximumpointer are available. Installed to be read-able from the ground.With the addition of a CT-fed thermal re-plica circuit, the simulated hot-spot wind-ing temperature of one or more phasescan be indicated on identical thermo-meters. These instruments can also beused to control forced cooling equipment.

Magnetic oil-level indicator (Fig. 18)

The float position inside of the conservatoris transmitted magnetically through thetank wall to the indicator to preserve thetank sealing standard device without con-tacts; devices supplied with limit (position)switches for high- and low-level alarm areavailable. Readable from the ground.

Fig. 18: Magnetic oil-level indicator

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr11

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Accessories and Protective Devices

Protective device (Fig. 19) for hermeti-cally sealed transformers (TUMETIC)

For use on hermetically sealed TUMETICdistribution transformers. Gives alarmupon loss of oil and gas accumulation.Mounted directly at the (permanentlysealed) filler pipe of these transformers.

Pressure relief device (Fig. 20)

Relieves abnormally high internal pressureshock waves. Easily visible operationpointer and alarm contact. Reseals posi-tively after operation and continues tofunction without operator action.

Dehydrating breather (Fig. 21, 22)

A dehydrating breather removes most ofthe moisture from the air which is drawninto the conservator as the transformercools down. The absence of moisture inthe air largely eliminates any reduction inthe breakdown strength of the insulationand prevents any buildup of condensationin the conservator. Therefore, the dehy-drating breather contributes to safe andreliable operation of the transformer.

Bushing current transformer

Up to three ring-type current transformersper phase can be installed in power trans-formers on the upper and lower voltageside. These multiratio CTs are supplied inall common accuracy and burden ratingsfor metering and protection. Their second-ary terminals are brought out to short-circuiting-type terminal blocks in watertightterminal boxes.

Additional accessories

Besides the standard accessories and pro-tective devices there are additional itemsavailable, especially for large power trans-formers. They will be offered and installedon request.Examples are: Fiber-optic temperature measurements Permanent gas-in-oil analysis Permanent water-content measurement Sudden pressure rise relay,etc.

Fig. 20: Pressure relief device with alarm contact andautomatic resetting

Fig. 19: Protective device for hermetically sealedtransformers (TUMETIC)

Fig. 21: Dehydrating breather A DIN 42 567up to 5 MVA

Fig. 22: Dehydrating breather L DIN 42 562over 5 MVA

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr12

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


8

2W2V2U2N

1W2U1U

Oil drain plugThermometer pocketAdjustment for off-load tap changerRating plate (relocatable)Grounding terminals

23678

Towing eye, 30 mm dia.Lashing lugFiller pipeMounting facility forprotective device

9101112

2

H1

11

9

7

10 3 8

6

B1

12

E E A1

Technical Data Distribution TransformersTUNORMA and TUMETIC

Oil-immersed TUMETICand TUNORMA three-phasedistribution transformers

Standard: DIN 42500 Rated power: 50–2500 kVA Rated frequency: 50 Hz HV rating: up to 36 kV Taps on ± 2.5 % or ± 2 x 2.5 %

HV side: LV rating: 400–720 V

(special designs for upto 12 kV can be built)

Connection: HV winding: deltaLV winding: star(up to 100 kVA: zigzag)

Impedance 4 % (only up to HVvoltage at rated rating 24 kV andcurrent: ≤ 630 kVA) or

6 % (with rated power≥ 630 kVA or withHV rating > 24 kV)

Cooling: ONAN Protection class: IP00 Final coating: RAL 7033 (other

colours are available)

LIAC

Lightning-impulse test voltagePower-frequency test voltage

Um LI AC

1.1

12

24

36

[kV] [kV] [kV]

–

75

125

170

3

28

50

70

Fig. 23: Insulation level (IP00)The combinations B-A’ (normal losses)and A-C’ (reduced losses) are approxi-mately in line with previous standards.In addition there is the C-C’ combination.Transformers of this kind with additionallyreduced losses are especially economicalwith energy (maximum efficiency > 99%).The higher costs of these transformers arecounteracted by the energy savings whichthey make.Standard HD 428.3.S1 (= DIN 42500-3)specifies the losses for oil distributiontransformers up to Um = 36 kV. For loadlosses the listings D and E, for no-loadlosses the listings D’ and E’ were speci-fied. In order to find the most efficienttransformer, please see part ”Transformerloss evaluation“.

Losses

The standard HD 428.1.S1 (= DIN 42500Part 1) applies to three-phase oil-immerseddistribution transformers 50 Hz, from 50kVA to 2500 kVA, Um to 24 kV.For load losses (Pk), three different listings(A, B and C) were specified. There werealso three listings (A’, B’ and C’) for no-loadlosses (P0) and corresponding sound lev-els.Due to the different requirements, pairsof values were proposed which, in thenational standard, permit one or severalcombinations of losses.DIN 42500 specifies the combinationsA-C’, C-C’ and B-A’ as being most suitable.

2W2V2U2N

1W2U1U

Notes: Tank with strong corrugated walls shown in illustration is the preferred design. With HV ratings up to 24 kVand rated power up to 250 kVA (and with HV ratings > 24-36 kV and rated power up to 800 kVA), the conservator is fittedon the long side just above the LV bushings.

E82

H1

A1

4

E

9

7

10

1

3 8

6

B1

Oil level indicatorOil drain plugThermometer pocketBuchholz relay (optional extra)Dehydrating breather (optional extra)

12345

Adjustment for off-load tap changerRating plate (relocatable)Grounding terminalsTowing eye, 30 mm dia.Lashing lug

6789

10

5

Fig. 24: TUMETIC distribution transformer (sealed tank)

Fig. 25: TUNORMA distribution transformer (with conservator)

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr13

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


50

160

(200)

Soundpowerlevel

LWA[dB]

Dist.betweenwheelcenters

E[mm]

Totalweight

LengthA1

WidthB1

HeightH1

[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm]

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

Dimensions

* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C

42

34

34

42

34

33

x

45

35

35

45

35

35

x

47

37

38

47

37

37

x

48

38

38

48

38

38

x

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

..4744-3LB

..4744-3RB

..4744-3TB

..4767-3LB

..4767-3RB

..4767-3TB

..4780-3CB

..5044-3LB

..5044-3RB

..5044-3TB

..5067-3LB

..5067-3RB

..5067-3TB

..5080-3CB

..5244 -3LA

..5244-3RA

..5244-3TA

..5267-3LA

..5267-3RA

..5267-3TA

..5280-3CA

..5344-3LA

..5344-3RA

..5344-3TA

..5367-3LA

..5367-3RA

..5367-3TA

..5380-3CA

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-D´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-D´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-D´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-D´

190

125

125

190

125

125

230

320

210

210

320

210

210

380

460

300

300

460

300

300

520

550

360

360

550

360

360

600

55

47

47

55

47

47

52

59

49

49

59

49

49

56

62

52

52

62

52

52

59

63

53

53

63

53

53

61

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

340

400

420

370

430

480

500

500

570

600

520

600

640

660

620

700

760

660

730

800

900

720

840

900

800

890

950

1000

350

430

440

380

460

510

x

500

570

620

530

610

680

x

610

690

780

640

730

820

x

710

830

920

780

910

980

x

860

825

835

760

860

880

1000

1090

980

1030

1020

1030

960

1050

1140

1130

985

1150

1030

1120

1120

1190

1070

1130

1290

1110

1080

1250

980

1045

985

860

860

1100

x

1020

980

930

1140

1030

1060

x

1140

1010

1085

1150

930

1120

x

1190

1120

1130

1290

1230

1180

x

660

660

660

660

660

685

710

660

660

660

685

690

695

780

710

660

660

695

695

710

800

680

660

660

820

755

705

800

1210

1210

1220

1315

1300

1385

1530

1275

1315

1320

1360

1400

1425

1600

1350

1390

1380

1440

1540

1475

1700

1450

1470

1450

1595

1630

1595

1700

1085

1085

1095

1235

1220

1265

x

1110

1145

1150

1245

1280

1305

x

1185

1220

1215

1320

1420

1355

x

1285

1300

1285

1425

1460

1430

x

100

1350

1100

875

1350

1100

875

1450

2150

1750

1475

2150

1750

1475

2350

3100

2350

2000

3100

2350

2000

3350

3600

2760

2350

3600

2760

2350

3800

660

660

660

660

660

660

x

660

660

660

660

660

660

x

710

660

660

660

660

660

x

680

660

680

800

680

690

x

Ratedpower

Sn[kVA]

Max.ratedvolt.HVside

Um[kV]

Impe-dancevoltage

U2[%]

Type Combi-nation oflossesacc.CENELEC

No-loadlosses

P0[W]

Soundpress.level1 mtoler-ance+ 3 dB

LPA[dB]

Loadlosses

Pk 75*[W]4JB… 4HB…

x: on requestDimensions and weights are approximate values. Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.


Fig. 26: Selection table: oil-immersed distribution transformers 50 to 2500 kVA

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr14

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Soundpowerlevel

LWA[dB]


E[mm]

Totalweight

LengthA1

WidthB1

HeightH1

[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm]

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

Dimensions

250

400

(500)


Ratedpower

Sn[kVA]


Um[kV]

Impe-dancevoltage

U2[%]


No-loadlosses

P0[W]


LPA[dB]

Loadlosses

Pk 75*[W]4JB… 4HB…


..5444-3LA

..5444-3RA

..5444-3TA

..5467-3LA

..5467-3RA

..5467-3TA

..5480-3CA

..5544-3LA

..5544-3RA

..5544-3TA

..5567-3LA

..5567-3RA

..5567-3TA

..5580-3CA

..5644-3LA

..5644-3RA

..5644-3TA

..5667-3LA

..5667-3RA

..5667-3TA

..5580-3CA

..5744-3LA

..5744-3RA

..5744-3TA

..5767-3LA

..5767-3RA

..5767-3TA

..5780-3CA

50

40

40

49

39

40

x

50

40

40

50

40

40

x

52

42

42

52

42

42

x

53

42

43

53

42

43

x

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

4

4

4

4

4

4

6

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

650

425

425

650

425

425

650

780

510

510

780

510

510

760

930

610

610

930

610

610

930

1100

720

720

1100

720

720

1050

65

55

55

65

55

55

62

66

56

56

66

56

56

64

68

58

58

68

58

58

65

69

59

59

69

59

59

66

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

830

940

1050

920

1010

1120

1100

980

1120

1240

1050

1170

1250

1220

1180

1320

1470

1240

1370

1490

1480

1410

1650

1700

1460

1650

1860

1680

820

920

1070

900

1010

1140

x

960

1100

1260

1030

1150

1280

x

1160

1310

1470

1220

1350

1520

x

1380

1620

1710

1440

1620

1910

x

1300

1260

1220

1340

1140

1220

1350

1440

1400

1380

1450

1410

1395

1420

1470

1400

1410

1570

1475

1440

1470

1500

1560

1500

1470

1495

1535

1510

1300

1260

1220

1340

1190

1340

x

1330

1250

1260

1350

1270

1290

x

1390

1360

1390

1570

1400

1400

x

1430

1550

1470

1530

1420

1500

x

810

670

690

800

760

715

800

820

820

820

840

820

820

960

930

820

820

940

820

820

990

840

890

820

835

835

820

1030

1450

1480

1530

1620

1675

1640

1680

1655

1690

1665

1655

1755

1675

1700

1700

1700

1695

1655

1760

1765

1830

1710

1745

1745

1755

1815

1860

1900

1285

1415

1310

1450

1510

1475

x

1385

1415

1390

1510

1610

1540

x

1425

1430

1420

1510

1615

1540

x

1440

1470

1470

1610

1665

1645

x

(315)

4200

3250

2750

4200

3250

2750

4250

5000

3850

3250

5000

3850

3250

5400

6000

4600

3850

6000

4600

3850

6200

7100

5450

4550

7100

5450

4550

7800

810

820

700

760

680

710

x

820

820

820

840

820

820

x

930

820

820

940

820

820

x

840

890

820

850

820

820

x



Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10




Soundpowerlevel

LWA[dB]


E[mm]

Totalweight

LengthA1

WidthB1

HeightH1

[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm]

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

Dimensions

630

1000


Ratedpower

Sn[kVA]


Um[kV]

Impe-dancevoltage

U2[%]


No-loadlosses

P0[W]


LPA[dB]

Loadlosses

Pk 75*[W]4JB… 4HB…


53

43

43

53

43

43

53

43

43

53

43

43

x

55

45

44

55

45

44

x

55

45

45

55

45

45

x

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

4

4

4

6

6

6

4

4

4

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

..5844-3LA

..5844-3RA

..5844-3TA

..5844-3PA

..5844-3SA

..5844-3UA

..5867-3LA

..5867-3RA

..5867-3TA

..5867-3PA

..5867-3SA

..5867-3UA

..5880-3CA

..5944-3PA

..5944-3SA

..5944-3UA

..5967-3PA

..5967-3SA

..5967-3UA

..5980-3CA

..6044-3PA

..6044-3SA

..6044-3UA

..6067-3PA

..6067-3SA

..6067-3UA

..6080-3CA

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

1300

860

860

1200

800

800

1300

860

860

1200

800

800

1300

1450

950

950

1450

950

950

1520

1700

1100

1100

1700

1100

1100

1700

70

60

60

70

60

60

70

60

60

70

60

60

67

72

62

62

72

62

62

68

73

63

63

73

63

63

68

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

1660

1850

2000

1750

1950

2160

1690

1940

2100

1730

1970

2240

1950

1990

2210

2520

2000

2390

2590

2400

2450

2660

2800

2530

2750

2830

2850

1660

1810

1990

1760

1920

2130

1650

1920

2130

1720

1960

2210

x

1960

2290

2490

1950

2340

2550

x

2640

2610

2750

2720

2690

2810

x

1680

1495

1535

1720

1665

1670

1665

1685

1600

1780

1645

1740

1740

1780

1720

1760

1720

1760

1770

1800

1790

1830

1830

1830

1790

1725

2120

1480

1420

1380

1560

1600

1560

1640

1680

1490

1580

1640

1670

x

1540

1830

1710

1710

1710

1700

x

1630

1830

1830

1670

1740

1770

x

880

835

820

890

870

830

860

870

820

880

830

880

1080

1000

900

920

1000

960

930

1100

1000

1040

1040

1090

1050

990

1160

1755

1785

1860

1920

1740

1840

1810

1910

1940

1760

1810

1840

1940

1905

1935

1975

1885

1945

1985

2030

2095

2025

2105

2095

2055

2065

2220

1585

1510

1520

1685

1400

1500

1595

1695

1725

1610

1595

1625

x

1660

1630

1730

1670

1730

1780

x

2070

1770

1840

2120

1840

1850

x

(800)

8400

6500

5400

8700

6750

5600

8400

6500

5400

8700

6750

5600

8800

10700

8500

7400

10700

8500

7400

11000

13000

10500

9500

13000

10500

9500

13000

880

820

820

890

870

830

860

870

820

880

830

880

x

1000

960

920

1000

960

930

x

1000

1040

1040

1010

1050

990

x

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr16

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10




Soundpowerlevel

LWA[dB]


E[mm]

Totalweight

LengthA1

WidthB1

HeightH1

[kg] [mm] [mm] [mm]

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

TUM

ETIC

TUN

ORM

A

Dimensions

(1250)

(2000)

2500


Ratedpower

Sn[kVA]


Um[kV]

Impe-dancevoltage

U2[%]


No-loadlosses

P0[W]


LPA[dB]

Loadlosses

Pk 75*[W]4JB… 4HB…


..6144-3PA

..6144-3SA

..6144-3UA

..6167-3PA

..6167-3SA

..6167-3UA

..6180-3CA

..6244-3PA

..6244-3SA

..6244-3UA

..6267-3PA

..6267-3SA

..6267-3UA

..6280-3CA

..6344-3PA

..6344-3SA

..6344-3UA

..6367-3PA

..6367-3SA

..6367-3UA

..6380-3CA

..6444-3PA

..6444-3SA

..6444-3UA

..6467-3PA

..6467-3SA

..6467-3UA

..6480-3CA

56

46

46

56

46

46

x

57

47

47

57

47

47

x

58

49

49

58

49

49

x

61

51

51

61

51

51

x

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

B-A'

A-C'

C-C'

E-E´

2100

1300

1300

2100

1300

1300

2150

2600

1700

1700

2600

1700

1700

2600

2900

2050

2050

2900

2050

2050

3200

3500

2500

2500

3500

2500

2500

3800

74

64

64

74

64

64

70

76

66

66

76

66

66

71

78

68

68

78

68

68

75

81

71

71

81

71

71

76

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

2900

3100

3340

2950

3190

3390

3360

3450

3640

3930

3470

3670

4010

3930

4390

4270

4730

4480

4290

4910

5100

5200

5150

5790

5420

5260

5640

5900

3080

3040

3040

3200

3120

3330

x

3590

3590

3880

3690

3850

3950

x

4450

4430

4710

4500

4490

4840

x

5090

5110

5660

5220

5220

5470

x

1930

1810

1755

2020

1840

1810

2150

1970

2030

2020

2070

2030

2000

2170

2100

2080

2020

2020

2190

2110

2260

2115

2195

2190

2115

2195

2160

2320

1850

1780

1720

1780

1810

1780

x

1870

1760

1900

1830

2000

1850

x

1890

1840

1730

1860

2030

1980

x

2030

1950

2190

2030

2030

2080

x

1260

990

1015

1260

1060

1015

1250

1220

1080

1110

1280

1230

1030

1340

1330

1330

1330

1330

1330

1330

1380

1345

1345

1330

1335

1335

1330

1390

2110

2145

2235

2110

2115

2245

2350

2315

2315

2395

2335

2265

2305

2480

2555

2455

2495

2655

2425

2475

2560

2685

2535

2565

2785

2585

2605

2790

2070

1880

1970

2220

1900

2030

x

2095

2010

2070

2320

2120

2010

x

2540

2250

2170

2660

2280

2180

x

2550

2450

2240

2675

2580

2305

x

1600

16000

13200

11400

16000

13200

11400

16400

20000

17000

14000

20000

17000

14000

19200

25300

21200

17500

25300

21200

17500

22000

29000

26500

22000

29000

26500

22000

29400

1100

990

1000

1100

1060

990

x

1140

1090

1100

1120

1070

1030

x

1330

1330

1330

1330

1330

1330

x

1330

1330

1330

1330

1335

1330

x

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr17

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Power Transformers – General

Rated power HV range Type oftap changer

Figure/page

[kV]

25 to 123

25 to 123

up to 36

up to 36

72.5 to 145

Fig. 31, page 5/19

Fig. 33, page 5/20

Fig. 35, page 5/21

Fig. 38, page 5/22

Fig. 41, page 5/23

off-load

on-load

off-load

on-load

on-load

[MVA]

3.15 to 10

3.15 to 10

10/16 to 20/31.5

10/16 to 20/31.5

10/16 to 63/100

Note: Off-load tap changers are designed to be operated de-energized only.

Fig. 30: Types of power transformers

Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformers with off-and on-load tap changers

Cooling methods

Transformers up to 10 MVA are designedfor ONAN cooling.By adding fans to these transformers, therating can be increased by 25%.However, in general it is more economicalto select higher ONAN ratings rather thanto add fans.Transformers larger than 10 MVA are de-signed with ONAN/ONAF cooling.Explanation of cooling methods: ONAN: Oil-natural, air-natural cooling ONAF: Oil-natural, air-forced cooling (in

one or two steps)The arrangement with the attached radia-tors, as shown in the illustrations, is thepreferred design. However, other arrange-ments of the cooling equipment are alsopossible.Depending on transportation possibilitiesthe bushings, radiators and expansion tankhave be removed. If necessary, the oil hasto be drained and shipped separately.

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr18

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Power Transformers – Selection TablesTechnical Data, Dimensions and Weights

E

H

EW

L

Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformers withoff-load tap changer3 150–10 000 kVA,HV rating: up to 123 kV

Taps onHV side: ± 2 x 2.5 %

Rated frequency: 50 Hz Impedance 6-10 %

voltage: Connection: HV winding: star-

delta connectionalternatively availableup to 24 kVLV winding:star or delta

3150

4000

LV rating No-loadloss

DimensionsL/W/H

Rated power HV rating Load lossat 75 °C

Totalweight

Oilweight

E

5000

6300

8000

10000

[kW]

28

33

35

38

41

46

45

48

53

54

56

62

63

65

72

2800/1850/2870

3200/2170/2940

3100/2300/3630

2550/2510/3020

3150/2490/3730

4560/2200/4540

2550/2840/3200

3200/2690/3080

4780/2600/4540

2580/2770/3530

3250/2850/4000

4880/2630/4590

2670/2900/3720

4060/2750/4170

4970/2900/4810

1600

1900

3100

2300

3300

6300

2500

3700

6600

3300

4200

7300

3900

4700

8600

[mm]

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

[kVA]ONAN

[kV] [kV] [kW] [kg] [kg] [mm]

6.1–36

7.8–36

50–72.5

9.5–36

50–72.5

90–123

12.2–36

50–72.5

90–123

12.2–36

50–72.5

90–123

15.2–36

50–72.5

90–123

3–24

3–24

3–24

4–24

4–24

5–36

5–24

5–24

5–36

5–24

5–24

5–36

6–24

6–24

5–36

4.6

5.5

6.8

6.5

8.0

9.8

7.7

9.3

11.0

9.4

11.0

12.5

11.0

12.5

14.0

7200

8400

10800

9800

12200

17500

11700

13600

18900

14000

15900

21500

16600

18200

25000

Fig. 32

Fig. 31

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr19

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformerswith on-load tap changer3 150–10 000 kVA,HV rating: up to 123 kV

Taps on ± 16 % in ± 8 stepsHV side: of 2 %

Rated frequency: 50 Hz Impedance 6–10 %

voltage: Connection: HV winding: star

LV winding:star or delta

Fig. 33

10.9–36

9.2–36

50–72.5

11.5–36

50–72.5

90–123

14.4–36

50–72.5

90–123

18.3–36

50–72.5

90–123

22.9–36

50–72.5

90–123

kW

29

35

37

40

43

49

47

50

56

57

59

65

66

68

76

3400/2300/2900

3500/2700/3000

4150/2350/3600

3600/2400/3200

4200/2700/3700

5300/2700/4650

3700/2700/3300

4300/2900/3850

5600/2900/4650

3850/2500/3500

4600/2800/4050

5650/2950/4650

4400/2600/3650

5200/2850/4100

5750/2950/4700

2300

2600

4100

3100

4500

8000

3600

5000

8500

4500

6000

9000

5200

6500

10250

[mm]

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

1505

[kVA]ONAN

[kV] [kV] [kW] [kg] [kg] [mm]

3–24

3–24

4–24

4–24

5–24

5–36

5–24

5–24

5–36

5–24

5–24

5–36

6–24

6–24

5–36

4.8

5.8

7.1

6.8

8.4

9.8

8.1

9.8

11.5

9.9

11.5

13.1

11.5

13.1

14.7

9100

10300

13700

12300

15200

21800

14000

17000

23000

17000

19700

25500

20000

22500

29500

3150

4000

5000

6300

8000

10000

Rated power LV rating No-loadloss

HV rating Load lossat 75 °C

DimensionsL/W/H

Totalweight

Oilweight

E

Fig. 34

E

H

EW

L

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr20

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformerswith off-load tap changer10/16 to 20/31.5 MVAHV rating: up to 36 kV

Rated frequency: 50 Hz, tapping range± 2 x 2.5%

Connection of starHV winding:

Connection of star or deltaLV winding:

Cooling method: ONAN/ONAF LV range: 6 kV to 36 kV

Fig. 35

Fig. 36

Fig. 37

E

H

EW

LLs

Ws

Hs

[kW]

No-loadloss

12

14

16

19

Load loss atONAN

[kW] [kW]

ONAF

31

37

45

52

80

95

110

130

Impedance voltage ofONAN ONAF

[%] [%]

6.3

6.3

6.4

6.4

10

10

10

10

[MVA]

Rated power atONAN

[MVA]

10

12.5

16

20

16

20

25

31.5

ONAF

L x W x HShippingweightincl. oil

[MVA]

Rated power atONAN

[MVA]

ONAF

10

12.5

16

20

16

20

25

31.5

[kg][mm]

Totalweight

Dimensions

3700

3800

3900

4200

22

25

30

35

[mm] [kg]

2350

2350

2400

2450

3900

4000

4100

4600

[kg]

Oilweight

4200

4500

5000

5700

22000

23000

27000

31500

3600

3700

3800

3900

1550

1600

1600

1650

2650

2800

2800

3000

ShippingdimensionsLs x Ws x Hs

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:23 Uhr21

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformerwith on-load tap changer10/16 to 20/31.5 MVA,HV rating: up to 36 kV

Rated frequency: 50 Hz, tapping range± 16% in ± 9 steps


Connection of star or deltaLV winding:

Cooling method: ONAN/ONAF LV range: 6 kV to 36 kV

Fig. 38

Fig. 39

Fig. 40

Ls

H

Ws

WL

Hs

10

12.5

16

20

16

20

25

31.5

12

14

16

19

31

37

45

52

80

95

111

130

6.3

6.3

6.4

6.4

10

10

10

10

[kW]

No-loadloss

Load loss atONAN

[kW] [kW]

ONAFImpedance voltage ofONAN ONAF

[%] [%][MVA]

Rated power atONAN

[MVA]

ONAF

4800

4900

5050

5300

27000

30000

34000

41000

2450

2500

2500

2550

3900

4000

4100

4600

6200

6700

7000

9000

24000

27000

31000

37000

4400

4500

4650

5000

1550

1600

1650

1700

2600

2650

2650

3000


[MVA]

Rated power atONAN

[MVA]

ONAF

[kg][mm]

Totalweight

Dimensions

[mm] [kg][kg]

Oilweight

ShippingdimensionsLs x Ws x Hs

10

12.5

16

20

16

20

25

31.5

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:24 Uhr22

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Oil-immersed three-phasepower transformers withon-load tap changer10/16 to 63/100 MVA,HV rating: from 72.5 to 145 kV

Rated frequency: 50 Hz, tapping range± 16% in ± 9 steps


Connection star or deltaof LV winding:

Cooling method: ONAN/ONAF

Fig. 41

Fig. 42

[kW][MVA]

Rated power atONAN

No-loadloss

[MVA]

ONAF

10

12.5

16

20

25

31.5

40

50

63

31.5

13

15

17

20

24

28

35

41

49

Load loss atONAN

[kW] [kW]

ONAF

42

45

51

56

63

71

86

91

113

108

115

125

140

160

180

214

232

285

Impedance voltage ofONAN ONAF

[%] [%]

9.6

9.4

9.6

9.6

9.5

9.5

9.8

10.0

10.5

15.4

15.0

15.0

15.1

15.2

15.0

15.5

16.0

16.7

16

20

25

40

50

63

80

100


[kg][MVA] [mm]

Rated power atONAN ONAF

Totalweight

Dimensions

10

12.5

16

20

25

31.5

40

50

63

6600

6700

6750

6800

6900

7050

7100

7400

7800

39000

43000

48000

54000

61000

70000

82000

97000

118000

Ls x Ws x Hs

[mm] [kg]

2650

2700

2750

2800

2900

2950

3000

3100

3250

4700

4800

5300

5400

5400

5500

5700

5800

6100

[kg]

Oilweight

12000

12500

13500

14000

14500

17000

18000

20500

25500

35000

39000

43000

49000

56000

65000

75000

90000

109000

5200

5300

5400

5500

5700

5850

6100

6250

6800

1900

1950

2000

2000

2100

2150

2200

2300

2450

3000

3100

3000

3100

3150

3350

3450

3700

4000

Shipping dimensions

31.5

16

20

25

40

50

63

80

100

[MVA]

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:24 Uhr23

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 44: View into an 850/1100-MVA generator transformer

Fig. 43: Coal-fired power station in Germany with two 850-MVA generator transformers:Low-noise design, extended setting range and continuous overload capacity up to 1100 MVA

Power Transformersabove 100 MVA

The power rating range above 100 MVAcomprises mainly generator transformersand system-interconnecting transformerswith off-load and/or on-load tap changers.Depending on the on-site requirements, theycan be designed as transformers with sepa-rate windings or as autotransformers, three-or single-phase, for power ratings up to over1000 MVA and voltages up to 1500 kV.We manufacture these units according toIEC 76, VDE 0532 or other national specifi-cations.Offers for transformers larger than 100 MVAonly on request.

12

8

10

1

913

23

45

7

6

11

1 Five-limb core2 LV winding3 HV winding4 Tapped winding5 Tap leads6 LV bushings7 HV bushings8 Clamping frame9 On-load tap changer

10 Motor drive11 Schnabel-car-tank12 Conservator13 Water-cooling system

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:24 Uhr24

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 45: An integrated solution – the complete Monitoring System housed in a cubicle of the transformer itself

Power TransformersMonitoring System

Siemens Monitoring System:Efficient Condition Recordingand Diagnosis for Power Trans-formers

Complete acquisition and evaluation of upto 45 measured variables, automatic trendanalysis, diagnosis and early warning – thenew Siemens Monitoring System makesuse of all possible ways of monitoringpower transformers: Round the clock, withprecision sensors for voltage, temperatureor quality of insulation, and with powerfulsoftware for measured data processing,display or documentation – with on-linecommunication over any distance.Maintenance and utilization of power trans-formers are made more efficient all-round.Because the comprehensive informationprovided on the condition of the equipmentand auxiliaries ensures that maintenance iscarried out just where it's needed, costlyroutine inspections are a thing of the past.And because the maintenance is alwayspreventive, faults are reliably ruled out.All these advantages enhance availability –and thus ensure a long service life of yourpower transformers. This applies equally tonew and old transformers.Equipping new transformers with theSiemens Monitoring System ensures thatright from the start the user is in posses-sion of all essential data–for quick, compre-hensive analysis. And retrofitting on trans-formers already in service for considerableperiods pays off as well.Particularly in the case of old transformers,constant monitoring significantly reducesthe growing risk of failure.Offers for transformers larger 100 MVAonly on request.

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:25 Uhr25

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


On-load Tap Changers

The on-load tap changers installed inSiemens power transformers are manufac-tured by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen (MR).MR is a supplier of technically advancedon-load tap changers for oil-immersedpower transformers covering an applicationrange from 100 A to 4,500 A and up to420 kV. About 90,000 MR high-speed re-sistor-type tap changers are succesfully inservice worldwide.The great variety of tap changer models isbased on a modular system which is capa-ble of meeting the individual customer’sspecifications for the respective operatingconditions of the transformer. Dependingon the required application range selector,switches or diverter switches with tap se-lectors can be used, both available for neu-tral, delta or single-pole connection. Up to107 operating positions can be achieved bythe use of a multiple course tap selector.In addition to the well-known on-load tap-changer for installation in oil-immersedtransformers, MR offers also a standard-ized gas-insulated tap changer for indoorinstallation which will be mounted on dry-type transformers up to approx. 30 MVAand 36 kV, or SF6-type transformers up to40 MVA and 123 kV.The main characteristics of MRproducts are: Compact design Optimum adaption and economic

solutions offered by the great numberof variants

High reliability Long life Reduced maintenance Service friendlinessThe tap changers are mechanicallydriven – via the drive shafts and the bevelgear – by a motor drive attached to thetransformer tank. It is controlled accordingto the step-by-step principle. Electrical andmechanical safety devices prevent over-running of the end positions. Further safe-ty measures, such as the automatic restartfunction, a safety circuit to prevent falsephase sequence and running through posi-tions, ensure the reliable operation of mo-tor drives.

For operation under extremely onerousconditions an oil filter unit is availablefor filtering or filtering and drying of theswitching oil. Voltage monitoring is effect-ed by microprocessor-controlled operationcontrol systems or voltage regulatorswhich include a great variety of data inputand output facilities.In combination with a parallel control unit,several transformers connected in parallelcan be automatically controlled and moni-tored.Furthermore, Maschinenfabrik Reinhausenoffers a worldwide technical service tomaintain their high quality standard.Inspections at regular intervals with onlysmall maintenance requirements guaranteethe reliable operation expected with MRproducts.

Fig. 46: MR motor drive ED 100 S Fig. 47: Gas-insulated on-load tap changer

Fig. 48: Selection of on-load tap changers from the MR product range

Type VT

Type V Type H Type M Type G

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:25 Uhr26

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


* on-load tap changers on request.

HV windingConsisting of vacuum-potted single foil-type

aluminum coils.See enlarged detail

in Fig. 50

HV terminalsVariable arrangements,for optimal station design.HV tapping links on low-voltage side for adjust-ment to system con-ditions, reconnectablein de-energized state

Resilient spacersTo insulate core and

windings from mechani-cal vibrations, resultingin low noise emissions

LV windingMade of aluminum strip.

Turns firmly gluedtogether by means of

insulating sheet wrappermaterial

Cross-flow fansPermitting a 50% in-crease in the rated power

Temperature monitoringBy PTC thermistor detec-tors in the LV winding

Paint finish onsteel partsMultiple coating,RAL 5009. On request:Two-component varnishor hot-dip galvanizing(for particularly aggressiveenvironments)

Clamping frame and truckRollers can be swung

around for lengthways orsideways travel

Insulation:Mixture of epoxy resin

and quartz powderMakes the transformer

maintenance-free, moist-ure-proof, tropicalized,

flame-resistant and self-extinguishing

LV terminalsNormal arrangement:Top, rearSpecial version: Bottom,available on request atextra charge

Ambient class E2Climatic category C2(If the transformer is in-stalled outdoors, degreeof protection IP 23 mustbe assured)

Three-leg coreMade of grain-oriented,

low-loss electrolami-nations insulated on

both sides

Fire class F1

Cast-resin Dry-type Transformers, GEAFOL

Standards and regulations

GEAFOL® cast-resin dry-type transformerscomply with IEC recommendationNo. 726, CENELEC HD 464, HD 538and DIN 42 523.

Advantages and applications

GEAFOL distribution and power trans-formers in ratings from 100 to more than20 000 kVA and LI values up to 170 kVare full substitutes for oil-immersed trans-formers with comparable electrical andmechanical data.GEAFOL transformers are designed forindoor installation close to their point ofuse at the center of the major consumers.

They only make use of flame-retardentinorganic insulating materials which freethese transformers from all restrictionsthat apply to oil-filled electrical equipment,such as oil-collecting pits, fire walls, fire-extinguishing equipment, etc.GEAFOL transformers are installed wher-ever oil-filled units cannot be used: insidebuildings, in tunnels, on ships, cranes andoffshore platforms, in ground-water catch-ment areas, in food processing plants, etc.Often they are combined with their prima-ry and secondary switchgear and distribu-tion boards into compact substations thatare installed directly at their point of use.As thyristor-converter transformers forvariable speed drives they can be installedtogether with the converters at the drive

location. This reduces civil works, cablecosts, transmission losses, and installationcosts.GEAFOL transformers are fully LI-rated.They have similar noise levels to compara-ble oil-filled transformers. Taking the aboveindirect cost reductions into account, theyare also frequently cost-competitive.By virtue of their design, GEAFOL trans-formers are completely maintenance-freefor their lifetime.GEAFOL transformers have been insuccessful service since 1965. A lot oflicenses have been granted to majormanufactures throughout the world since.

Fig. 49: GEAFOL cast-resin dry-type transformer

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:25 Uhr27

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



1

8

8

223344

5 6

6

7

7U

U

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1

2

3

4

8

7

6

5

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

Round-wirewinding

Stripwinding

HV winding

The high-voltage windings are woundfrom aluminum foil, interleaved with high-grade polypropylene insulating foil. Theassembled and connected individual coilsare placed in a heated mold, and are pot-ted in a vaccum furnace with a mixtureof pure silica (quartz sand) and speciallyblended epoxy resins. The only connec-tions to the outside are copper bushings,which are internally bonded to the alumi-num winding connections.The external star or delta connectionsare made of insulated copper connectorsto guarantee an optimal installation design.The resulting high-voltage windings arefire-resistant, moistureproof, corrosion-proof, and show excellent aging propertiesunder all indoor operating conditions.(For outdoor use, specially designed sheet-metal enclosures are available.)The foil windings combine a simple wind-ing technique with a high degree of elec-trical safety. The insulation is subjectedto less electrical stress than in othertypes of windings. In a conven-tional round-wire winding,the interturn voltagecan add up to twice theinterlayer voltage, whilein a foil winding it never exeeds the volt-age per turn because a layer consists ofonly one winding turn. Result: a high ACvoltage and impulse-voltage withstandcapacity.Why aluminum? The thermal expansioncoefficients of aluminum and cast resin areso similar that thermal stresses resultingfrom load changes are kept to a minimum(see Fig. 50).

LV winding

The standard low-voltage winding with itsconsiderably reduced dielectric stresses iswound from single aluminum sheets withinterleaved cast-resin impregnated fiber-glass fabric.The assembled coils are then oven-curedto form uniformly bonded solid cylindersthat are impervious to moisture. Throughthe single-sheet winding design, excellentdynamic stability under short-circuit con-ditions is achieved. Connections are sub-merged-arc-welded to the aluminumsheets and are extended either as alu-minum or copper busbars to the secondaryterminals.

Fig. 50: High-voltage encapsulated winding design of GEAFOL cast-resin transformer and voltage stress of aconventional round-wire winding (above) and the foil winding (below)

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:25 Uhr28

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Fire safety

GEAFOL transformers use only flame-retardent and self-extinguishing materialsin their construction. No additional sub-stances, such as aluminum oxide trihy-drate, which could negatively influencethe mechanical stability of the cast-resinmolding material, are used. Internal arcingfrom electrical faults and externally appliedflames do not cause the transformers toburst or burn. After the source of ignitionis removed, the transformer is self-extin-guishing. This design has been approvedby fire officials in many countries for instal-lation in populated buildings and otherstructures.The environmental safety of the combus-tion residues has been proven in manytests.

Categorization of cast-resintransformers

Dry-type transformers have to be cate-gorized under the sections listed below: Environmental category Climatic category Fire categoryThese categories have to be shown on therating plate of each dry-type transformer.

The properties laid down in the standardsfor ratings within the approximate categoryrelating to environment (humidity), climateand fire behavior have to be demonstratedby means of tests.These tests are described for the environ-mental category (code number E0, E1 andE2) and for the climatic category (codenumber C1, C2) in DIN VDE 0532 Part 6(corresponding to HD 464). According tothis standard, they are to be carried out oncomplete transformers.The tests of fire behavior (fire categorycode numbers F0 and F1) are limited totests on a duplication of a complete trans-former. It consists of a core leg, a low-volt-age winding and a high-voltage winding.The specifications for fire category F2 aredetermined by agreement between themanufacturer and the customer.Siemens have carried out a lot of tests.The results for our GEAFOL transformersare something to be proud of: Environmental category E2 Climatic category C2 Fire category F1This good behavior is solely due to theGEAFOL cast-resin mix which has beenused successfully for decades.

Insulation class and temperature rise

The high-voltage winding and the low-voltage winding utilize class F insulatingmaterials with a mean temperature riseof 100 K (standard design).

Overload capability

GEAFOL transformers can be overloadedpermanently up to 50% (with a corre-sponding increase in impedance voltage)if additional radial cooling fans are installed.(Dimensions increase by approximately200 mm in length and width.) Short-timeoverloads are uncritical as long as themaximum winding temperatures are notexceeded for extended periods of time.

Temperature monitoring

Each GEAFOL transformer is fitted withthree temperature sensors installed inthe LV winding, and a solid-state trippingdevice with relay output. The PTC thermis-tors used for sensing are selected for theapplicable maximum hot-spot winding tem-perature. Additional sets of sensors withlower temperature points can be installedfor them and for fan control purposes. Ad-ditional dial-type thermometers and Pt100are available, too. For operating voltagesof the LV winding of 3.6 kV and higher,special temperature measuring equipmentcan be provided.Auxiliary wiring is run in protective conduitand terminated in a central LV terminalbox (optional). Each wire and terminal isidentified, and a wiring diagram is perma-nently attached to the inside cover of thisterminal box.

Installation and enclosures

Indoor installation in electrical operatingrooms or in various sheet-metal enclosuresis the preferred method of installation.The transformers need only be protectedagainst access to the terminals or thewinding surfaces, against direct sunlight,and against water. Sufficient ventilationmust be provided by the installation loca-tion or the enclosure. Otherwise forced-aircooling must be specified or provided byothers.

Fig. 51: Flammability test of cast-resin transformer

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:25 Uhr29

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Instead of the standard open terminals,insulated plug-type elbow connectors canbe supplied for the high-voltage side withLI ratings up to 170 kV. Primary cables areusually fed to the transformer from trench-es below, but can also be connected fromabove.Secondary connections can be made bymultiple insulated cables, or by busbars,from either below or above. Secondaryterminals are either aluminum or copperbusbar stubs, drilled to specification.A variety of indoor and outdoor enclosuresin different protection classes are availablefor the transformers alone, or for indoorcompact substations in conjunction withhigh- and low-voltage switchgear cubicles.

Recycling of GEAFOL transformers

Of all the GEAFOL transformers manufac-tured since 1965, even the oldest units arenot about to reach the end of their servicelife expectancy. In spite of this, a lot ofexperiences have been made over theyears with the recycling of coils that havebecome unusable due to faulty manufac-ture or damage. These experiences showthat all the metallic components, i.e. ap-prox. 90% of all materials, can be fully re-covered economically. The recycling meth-od used by Siemens does not pollute theenvironment. In view of the value of thesecondary raw materials, the procedurecan be economical even considering thecurrently small amounts.

Fig. 53: Radial cooling fans on GEAFOL transformer for AF cooling

Fig. 52: GEAFOL transformer with plug-type cable connections

Fig. 54: GEAFOL transformer in protective housing to IP 20/40

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:26 Uhr30

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


GEAFOL Cast-resin Selection Tables,Technical Data, Dimensions and Weights

Um LJ AC

1.1

12

24

36

[kV] [kV] [kV]

–

75

95**

145**

3

28

50

70

E

H1

2U 2V 2W

A1EB1

2N

Standard: DIN 42523 Rated power: 100–20000 kVA* Rated frequency: 50 Hz HV rating: up to 36 kV LV rating: up to 780 V;

special designsfor up to 12 kV arepossible

Tappings on ± 2.5% or ± 2 x 2.5%HV side:

Connection: HV winding: deltaLV winding: star

Impedance 4–8%voltage at ratedcurrent:

Insulation class: HV/LV = F/F Temperature HV/LV = 100/100 K

rise: Color of metal RAL 5009 (other

parts: colors are available)

Soundpowerlevel

LWA[dB]

Distancebetweenwheelcenters

E[mm]

Totalweight

Length Width Height

GGES[kg]

A1[mm]

B1[mm]

H1[mm]

Dimensions

* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C** In case of short-circuits at 120 °C

45

37

45

37

45

37

45

37

47

39

47

39

47

39

47

39

12

24

12

24

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

.5044-3CA

.5044-3GA

.5044-3DA

.5044-3HA

.5064-3CA

.5064-3GA

.5064-3DA

.5064-3HA

.5244-3CA

.5244-3GA

.5244-3DA

.5244-3HA

.5264-3CA

.5264-3GA

.5264-3DA

.5264-3HA

440

320

360

300

600

400

420

330

610

440

500

400

800

580

600

480

59

51

59

51

59

51

59

51

62

54

62

54

62

54

62

54

without wheels

without wheels

without wheels

without wheels

without wheels

without wheels

without wheels

without wheels

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

630

760

590

660

750

830

660

770

770

920

750

850

910

940

820

900

1210

1230

1190

1230

1310

1300

1250

1300

1220

1290

1270

1300

1330

1310

1310

1350

705

710

705

710

755

755

750

755

710

720

720

725

725

720

725

765

835

890

860

855

935

940

915

930

1040

1050

990

985

1090

1095

1075

1060

1600

1600

2000

2000

1500

1500

1800

1800

2300

2300

2300

2300

2200

2200

2500

2500

Ratedpower

Sn[kVA]

Ratedvoltage

Um[kV]

Impe-dancevoltage

U2[%]

Type No-loadlosses

P0[W]

LPA[dB]

Loadlosses

Pk 75*[W]4GB…

Rated power figures in parentheses are not standardized.

1900

1900

2300

2300

1750

1750

2050

2050

2600

2600

2700

2700

2500

2500

2900

2900

Loadlosses

Pk 120**[W]

100

160

Dimensions and weights are approximate values and valid for 400 V on the secondary side, vector-group can be Dyn 5 or Dyn 11.


Fig. 56: GEAFOL cast-resin transformer

Fig. 55: Insulation level

Fig. 57: GEAFOL cast-resin transformers 50 to 2500 kVA

* power rating > 2.5 MVA upon request** other levels upon request

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:26 Uhr31

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10




(315)

Soundpowerlevel

LWA[dB]


E[mm]

Totalweight

Length Width Height

GGES[kg]

A1[mm]

B1[mm]

H1[mm]

Dimensions


50

42

50

42

50

41

50

41

50

52

43

51

43

51

43

51

43

51

52

44

52

44

52

44

52

44

52

53

45

53

45

53

44

53

45

53

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

6

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

6

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

6

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

6

.5444-3CA

.5444-3GA

.5444-3DA

.5444-3HA

.5464-3CA

.5464-3GA

.5464-3DA

.5464-3HA

.5475-3DA

.5544-3CA

.5544-3GA

.5544-3DA

.5544-3HA

.5564-3CA

.5564-3GA

.5564-3DA

.5564-3HA

.5575-3DA

.5644-3CA

.5644-3GA

.5644-3DA

.5644-3HA

.5664-3CA

.5664-3GA

.5664-3DA

.5664-3HA

.5675-3DA

.5744-3CA

.5744-3GA

.5744-3DA

.5744-3HA

.5764-3CA

.5764-3GA

.5764-3DA

.5764-3HA

.5775-3DA

820

600

700

570

1050

800

880

650

1300

980

720

850

680

1250

930

1000

780

1450

1150

880

1000

820

1450

1100

1200

940

1700

1350

1000

1200

980

1700

1270

1400

1100

1900

65

57

65

57

65

57

65

57

65

67

59

67

59

67

59

67

59

67

68

60

68

60

68

60

68

60

68

69

61

69

61

69

61

69

61

69

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

520

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

1040

1170

990

1120

1190

1230

990

1180

1700

1160

1320

1150

1290

1250

1400

1190

1300

1900

1310

1430

1250

1350

1410

1570

1350

1460

2100

1520

1740

1470

1620

1620

1830

1580

1720

2600

1330

1330

1350

1390

1390

1400

1360

1430

1900

1370

1380

1380

1410

1410

1440

1410

1460

1950

1380

1380

1410

1430

1440

1460

1480

1480

2000

1410

1450

1460

1490

1500

1540

1540

1560

2050

730

730

740

745

735

735

735

745

900

820

820

830

830

820

825

825

830

920

820

820

825

830

825

830

835

835

920

830

835

845

845

835

840

850

850

940

1110

1135

1065

1090

1120

1150

1140

1160

1350

1125

1195

1140

1165

1195

1205

1185

1195

1400

1265

1290

1195

1195

1280

1280

1275

1280

1440

1320

1345

1275

1290

1330

1350

1305

1320

1500

250 3000

3000

2900

2900

2900

2900

3100

3100

3800

3300

3300

3400

3400

3400

3400

3600

3600

4500

4300

4300

4300

4300

3900

3900

4100

4100

5100

4900

4900

5600

5600

4800

4800

5000

5000

6000

Ratedpower

Sn[kVA]

Ratedvoltage

Um[kV]

Impe-dancevoltage

U2[%]

Type No-loadlosses

P0[W]

LPA[dB]

Loadlosses

Pk 75*[W]4GB…


3500

3400

3300

3300

3300

3300

3600

3600

4370

3800

3800

3900

3900

3900

3900

4100

4100

5170

4900

4900

4900

4900

4500

4500

4700

4700

5860

5600

5600

6400

6400

5500

5500

5700

5700

6900

Loadlosses

Pk 120**[W]



400

(500)

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:26 Uhr32

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Soundpowerlevel

LWA[dB]


E[mm]

Totalweight

Length Width Height

GGES[kg]

A1[mm]

B1[mm]

H1[mm]

Dimensions

(800)


54

45

54

45

53

45

53

45

53

55

47

55

47

55

47

55

47

55

55

47

56

47

55

47

55

47

55

57

49

57

49

57

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

6

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

6

4

4

6

6

4

4

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

.5844-3CA

.5844-3GA

.5844-3DA

.5844-3HA

.5864-3CA

.5864-3GA

.5864-3DA

.5864-3HA

.5875-3DA

.5944-3CA

.5944-3GA

.5944-3DA

.5944-3HA

.5964-3CA

.5964-3GA

.5964-3DA

.5964-3HA

.5975-3DA

.6044-3CA

.6044-3GA

.6044-3DA

.6044-3HA

.6064-3CA

..6064-3GA

.6064-3DA

.6064-3HA

.6075-3DA

.6144-3DA

.6144-3HA

.6164-3DA

.6164-3HA

.6175-3DA

1500

1150

1370

1150

1950

1500

1650

1250

2200

1850

1450

1700

1350

2100

1600

1900

1450

2600

2200

1650

2000

1500

2400

1850

2300

1750

3000

2400

1850

2700

2100

3500

70

62

70

62

70

62

70

62

70

72

64

72

64

72

64

71

64

72

73

65

73

65

73

65

73

65

73

75

67

75

67

75

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

670

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

820

520

1830

2070

1770

1990

1860

2100

1810

2050

2900

2080

2430

2060

2330

2150

2550

2110

2390

3300

2480

2850

2420

2750

2570

3060

2510

2910

3900

2900

3370

3020

3490

4500

1510

1470

1550

1590

1550

1600

1580

1620

2070

1570

1590

1560

1600

1610

1650

1610

1630

2140

1590

1620

1620

1660

1660

1680

1680

1730

2200

1780

1790

1820

1850

2300

840

835

860

865

845

850

855

860

940

850

855

865

870

845

855

860

865

950

990

990

990

990

990

990

990

990

1050

990

990

990

990

1060

1345

1505

1295

1310

1380

1400

1345

1370

1650

1560

1640

1490

1530

1580

1620

1590

1595

1850

1775

1795

1560

1560

1730

1815

1620

1645

1900

1605

1705

1635

1675

2000

630 6400

6400

6400

6400

6000

6000

6400

6400

7000

7800

7800

7600

7600

7500

7500

7900

7900

8200

8900

8900

8500

8500

8700

8700

9200

9600

9500

9600

10500

10000

10500

11000

7300

7300

7400

7400

6900

6900

7300

7300

8000

9000

9000

8700

8700

8600

8600

9100

9100

9400

10200

10200

9700

9700

10000

10000

10500

11000

10900

11000

12000

11500

12000

12600

Ratedpower

Sn[kVA]

Ratedvoltage

Um[kV]

Impe-dancevoltage

U2[%]

Type No-loadlosses

P0[W]

LPA[dB]

Loadlosses

Pk 75*[W]4GB…


Loadlosses

Pk 120**[W]



(1250)

1000


Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:26 Uhr33

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



Soundpowerlevel

LWA[dB]


E[mm]

Totalweight

Length Width Height

GGES[kg]

A1[mm]

B1[mm]

H1[mm]

Dimensions

(2000)

2500

* In case of short-circuits at 75 °C** In case of short-circuits at 120 °CRated power >2500 kVA to 20 MVA on request.

58

50

58

49

58

59

51

59

51

59

62

51

61

51

61

12

24

36

12

24

36

12

24

36

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

.6244-3DA

.6244-3HA

.6264-3DA

.6264-3HA

.6275-3DA

.6344-3DA

.6344-3HA

.6364-3DA

.6364-3HA

.6375-3DA

.6444-3DA

.6444-3HA

.6464-3DA

.6464-3HA

.6475-3DA

2800

2100

3100

2400

4300

3600

2650

4000

3000

5100

4300

3000

5000

3600

6400

76

68

76

68

76

78

70

78

70

78

81

71

81

71

81

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

1070

3550

4170

3640

4080

5600

4380

5140

4410

4920

6300

5130

6230

5280

6220

7900

1840

1880

1880

1900

2500

1950

1990

2020

2040

2500

2110

2170

2170

2220

2700

995

1005

995

1005

1100

1280

1280

1280

1280

1280

1280

1280

1280

1280

1280

2025

2065

2035

2035

2400

2150

2205

2160

2180

2400

2150

2205

2160

2180

2400

1600 11000

11400

11800

12300

12700

14000

14500

14500

14900

15400

17600

18400

17600

18000

18700

12500

13000

13500

14000

14600

16000

16500

16500

17000

17700

20000

21000

20000

20500

21500

Ratedpower

Sn[kVA]

Ratedvoltage

Um[kV]

Impe-dancevoltage

U2[%]

Type No-loadlosses

P0[W]

LPA[dB]

Loadlosses

Pk 75*[W]4GB…


Loadlosses

Pk 120**[W]




Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:26 Uhr34

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Special Transformers

GEAFOL cast-resin transformerswith oil-free tap-changers

The voltage-regulating cast-resin trans-formers connected on the load side of themedium-voltage power supply system feedthe plant-side distribution transformers.The tap-changer-controlled transformersused in these medium-voltage systemsneed to have appropriately high ratings.Siemens offers suitable transformers in itsGEAFOL design which has proved suc-cessful over many years and is available inratings of up to 20 MVA. With forced cool-ing it is even possible to increase the pow-er ratings still further by 40%. The range ofrated voltage extends to 36 kV and themaximum impulse voltage is 200 kV. Themain applications of this type of transform-er are in modern industrial plants, hospi-tals, office and appartment blocks andshopping centers.

Fig. 61: 16/22-MVA GEAFOL cast-resin transformer with oil-free on-load tap changer

Linking single-pole tap-changer modulestogether in threes by means of insulatingshafts produces a triple-pole tap-changer ineither star or delta connection for regulat-ing the output voltage of GEAFOL trans-formers. In its nine operating positions,this type of tap-changer has a ratedthrough-current of 500 A and a rated volt-age of 900 V per step. This allows voltagefluctuations of up to 8100 V to be kept un-der control. However, the maximum con-trol range utilizes only 20% of therated voltage.

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:26 Uhr35

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Special Transformers

Transformers for thyristorconverters

These are special oil-immersed or cast-resin power transformers that are desig-ned for the special demands of thyristorconverter or diode rectifier operation.The effects of such conversion equipmenton transformers and additional construc-tion requirements are as follows: Increased load by harmonic currents Balancing of phase currents in multiple

winding systems (e.g. 12-pulse systems) Overload factor up to 2.5 Types for 12-pulse systems, if required.Siemens supplies oil-filled converter trans-formers of all ratings and configurationsknown today, and dry-type cast-resin con-verter transformers up to more than20 MVA and 200 kV LI.To define and quote for such transformers,it is necessary to know considerable de-tails on the converter to be supplied andon the line feeding it. These transformersare almost exclusively inquired togetherwith the respective drive or rectifier sys-tem and are always custom-engineered forthe given application.

Neutral grounding transformers

When a neutral grounding reactor orground-fault neutralizer is required in athree-phase system and no suitable neutralis available, a neutral must be providedby using a neutral grounding transformer.Neutral grounding transformers are avail-able for continuous operation or short-timeoperation.The zero impedance is normally low.The standard vector groups are zigzag orwye/delta. Some other vector groups arealso possible.Neutral grounding transformers can bebuilt by Siemens in all common powerratings.Normally, the neutral grounding transform-ers are built in oil-immersed design, how-ever, they can also be built in cast-resindesign.

Fig. 62: Dry-type converter transformer GEAFOL


Distribution transformers:Fax: ++49-7021-508548Power transformers:Fax: ++49-911-4342147

Ohne Namen-1 22.09.1999, 16:27 Uhr36

Contents PageGeneral overview ........................ 6/2

Application hints ......................... 6/4

Power System Protection

Introduction ................................... 6/8

Relay selection guide ................ 6/22

Relay portraits ............................ 6/25

Typical protection schemes ..... 6/42

Protection coordination ............ 6/62

6

Contents PageLocal and Remote Control

Introduction ................................. 6/71

SINAUT LSAOverview ...................................... 6/74

SINAUT LSASubstation automationdistributed structure .................. 6/78

SINAUT LSASubstation automationcentralized structure(Enhanced RTU) .......................... 6/91

SINAUT LSACompact remoteterminal units .............................. 6/93

SICAM Overview ........................ 6/96

SICAM RTU Remote terminalunits (RTUs) ................................. 6/97

SICAM SASSubstation automation ............ 6/108

SICAM PCCSubstation automation ............ 6/118

Device dimensions .................. 6/125

Power Quality

Introduction ............................... 6/131

Measuring and recording ...... 6/132

Compensation systemsIntroduction ............................... 6/146

Passive compensationsystems ...................................... 6/147

Active compensationsystems ...................................... 6/154

Protection andSubstation ControlProtection andSubstation Control


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Automation

Engineering,Para-meterizing

SIPROTEC-IEDs:– Relays– Bay control units– Transducers– etc.

Moni-toringandcontrol

SICAM WinCC

PROFIBUS

GPS

System control centersIEC 60870-5-101

SICAM plusTools

IEC 60870-5-103O.F.

WireRS485

Fig. 2a: Protection and control in HV GIS switchgear Fig. 2b: Protection and control in bay dedicatedkiosks of an EHV switchyard

General overview

Three trends have emerged in the sphereof substation secondary equipment: intelli-gent electronic devices (IEDs), open com-munication and operation with a PC.Numerical relays and cumputerized substa-tion control are now state-of-the-art.The multitude of conventional, individualdevices prevalent in the past as well ascomprehensive parallel wiring are beingreplaced by a small number of multifunc-tional devices with serial connections.

One design for all applications

In this respect, Siemens offers a uniform,universal technology for the entire func-tional scope of secondary equipment, bothin the construction and connection of thedevices and in their operation and commu-nication. This results in uniformity of de-sign, coordinated interfaces and the sameoperating concept being establishedthroughout, whether in power system andgenerator protection, in measurement andrecording systems, in substation controland protection or in telecontrol.All devices are highly compact and im-mune to interference, and are thereforealso suitable for direct installation inswitchgear cells. Furthermore, all devicesand systems are largely self-monitoring,which means that previously costly mainte-nance can be reduced considerably.

“Complete technology from one partner“

The Protection and Substation Control Sys-tems Division of the Siemens Power Trans-mission and Distribution Group suppliesdevices and systems for: Power System Protection Substation Control Remote Control (RTUs) Measurement and Recording Monitoring and Conditioning of Power

QualityThis covers all of the measurement, con-trol, automation and protection functionsfor substations*.Furthermore, our activities cover: Consulting Planning Design Commissioning and ServiceThis uniform technology ”all from onesource“ saves the user time and money inthe planning, assembly and operation ofhis substations.

Fig. 1: The digital substation control system SICAM implements all of the control, measurement and automationfunctions of a substation. Protection relays are connected serially

Fig. 3: For the user, “complete technology from one source” has many advantages*An exception is revenue metering. Meters are separate products of our Metering Division.

Protection and Substation ControlGeneral Overview

by means of SCADA-like operation controland high-performance, uniformly operable PC tools

Rationalization of operation

by means of integration of many functionsinto one unit and compact equipment design

Savings in terms of spaceand costs

by means of uniform design,coordinated interfaces and universally identical EMC

Simplified planning andoperational reliability

Efficient parameterizationand operation

by means of PC tools with uniform operatorinterface

High levels of reliabilityand availability

by means of type-tested system technology, completeself-monitoring and the use of proven technology– 20 years of practical experience with digital protection,

more than 150,000 devices in operation (1999)– 15 years of practical experience with substation

automation (SINAUT LSA and SICAM), over1500 substations in operation (1999)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

System Protection

Siemens offers a complete spectrum ofmultifunctional, numerical relays for allapplications in the field of network andmachine protection.Uniform design and electromagnetic-inter-ference-free construction in metal housingswith conventional connection terminals inaccordance with public utility requirementsassure simple system design and usagejust as with conventional relays.Numerical measurement techniques en-sure precise operation and necessitate lessmaintenance thanks to their continuousself-monitoring capability.

The integration of additional protectionand other functions, such as real-timeoperational measurements, event and faultrecording, all in one unit economizes onspace, design and wiring costs.Setting and programming of the devicescan be performed through the integral,plaintext, menu-guided operator display orby using the comfortable PC program DIG-SI for Windows*.Open serial interfaces, IEC 870-5-103-com-pliant, allow free communication with high-er level control systems, including thosefrom other manufacturers. Connection to aProfibus substation LAN is optionally possible.

Thus the on-line measurements and faultdata registered in the protective relayscan be used for local and remote controlor can be transmitted via telephone mo-dem connections to the workplace of theservice engineer.Siemens supplies individual devices aswell as complete protection systems infactory finished cubicles. For complex ap-plications, for example, in the field of extra-high-voltage transmission, type and designtest facilities are available together with anextensive and comprehensive networkmodel using the most modern simulationand evaluation techniques.

Line protectionpilot protection relays7SD5

SIMEAS TMeasuringtransducers

SIMEAS Q, M, NPower qualityrecorders

SIPCONPower conditioners

Substation automationSICAM/SINAUT LSA

Power qualitySIMEAS/SIPCON

ProtectionSIPROTEC

SINAUT LSASubstation automationsystems, centralized anddecentralized

SICAM SASSubstation automationsystems, LAN-based(Profibus)

SINAUT LSACompact unit6MB552Minicompact unit6MB553

Remote terminal units

SICAM RTUEnhanced RTU6MD2010

Feeder protectionovercurrent/overload relays7SJ5 and 7SJ6

Line protectiondistance relays7SA5

Busbar protection7SS5 and 7VH8

Generator/motor protection7UM5

Transformer protection7UT5

Protection and substation automation

SIMEAS RFault recorders(Oscillostores)

SICAM PCCEnergy automationbased on PC and LAN(Profibus)

Fig. 4: Siemens Protection and Substation Control comprises these systems and product ranges

* Windows is a registered product of Microsoft



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Substation control

The digital substation control systemsSICAM and SINAUT LSA provide all con-trol, measurement and automation func-tions (e.g. transformer tap changing) re-quired by a switching station. They operatewith distributed intelligence. Commu-nication between feeder-located devicesand central unit is made via interference-free fiber optic connections.Devices are extremely compact and can bebuilt directly into medium and high-voltageswitchgear.To input data, set and program the system,the unique PC programs SICAM PlusToolsand LSA-TOOLS are available. Parametersand values are input at the central unit anddownloaded to the field devices, thus en-suring error-free and consistent data trans-fer.The operator interface is menu-guided,with SCADA comparable functions, that is,with a level of convenience which was pre-viously only available in a network controlcenter. Optional telecontrol functions canbe added to allow coupling of the systemto one or more network control centers.In contrast to conventional controls, digitaltechnology saves enormously on spaceand wiring. SICAM and LSA systems aresubjected to full factory tests and are deliv-ered in fully functional condition.

Remote control

Siemens remote control equipment6MB55* and 6MD2010 fulfills all the clas-sic functions of remote measurement andcontrol. Furthermore, because of the pow-erful microprocessors with 32-bit technolo-gy, they provide comprehensive data pre-processing, automation functions and bulkstorage of operational and fault informa-tion.In the classic case, connections to theswitchgear are made through coupling re-lays and transducers. This method allowsan economically favorable solution whenmodernizing or renewing the secondarysystems in older installations. Alternatively,especially for new installations, direct con-nection is also possible. Digital protectiondevices can be connected by serial linksthrough fiber-optic conductors.In addition, the functions ”operating andmonitoring“ can be provided by the con-nection of a PC, thus raising the telecontrolunit to the level of a central station controlsystem. Using the facility of nodal func-tions, it is also possible to build regionalcontrol points so that several substationscan be controlled from one location.

Switchgear interlocking

The digital interlocking system 8TK is usedfor important substations in particular withmultiple busbar arrangements. It preventsfalse switching and provides an additionallocal bay control function which allows fail-safe switching, even when the substationcontrol system is not available. Thereforethe safety of operating personnel andequipment is considerabely enhanced.The 8TK system can be used as a stand-alone interlocked control, or as back-upsystem together with the digital 6MB sub-station control.

Power Quality(Measurement, recording and powercompensation)

The SIMEAS product range offers equip-ment for the superversion of power supplyquality (harmonic content, distortion factor,peak loads, power factor, etc.), fault re-corders (Oscillostore), data logging printersand measurement transducers.Stored data can be transmitted manually orautomatically to PC evaluation systemswhere it can be analyzed by intelligent pro-grams. Expert systems are also appliedhere. This leads to rapid fault analysis andvaluable indicators for the improvement ofnetwork reliability.For local bulk data storage and transmis-sion, the central processor DAKON canbe installed at substation level. Data trans-mission circuits for analog telephone ordigital ISDN networks are incorporated asstandard. Connection to local or wide-areanetworks (LAN, WAN) is equally possible.We also have the SIMEAS T series of com-pact and powerful measurement transduc-ers with analog and digital outputs.The SIPCON Power Conditioner solvesnumerous system problems. It compen-sates (for example) unbalanced loads orsystem voltage dips and suppressessystem harmonics. It performs these func-tions so that sensitive loads are assured ofsuitable voltage quality at all times. In addi-tion, the system ist also capable of elimi-nating the perturbation produced by irregu-lar loads. The use of SIPCON can enableenergy suppliers worldwide to provide theend consumer with distinctive quality ofsupply.

Advantages for the user

The concept of ”Complete technologyfrom one partner“ offers the user manyadvantages: High-level security for his systems

and operational rationalization possibili-ties– powerful system solutions with the

most modern technology– compliance with international standards

Integration in the overall systemSIPROTEC-SICAM-SIMATIC

Space and cost savings– integration of many functions into one

unit and compact equipment packaging Simple planning and secure operation

– unified design, matched interfacesand EMI security throughout

Rationalized programming and handling– menu-guided PC Tools and unified

keypads and displays Fast, flexible mounting, reduced wiring Simple, fast commissioning Effective spare part stocking, high

flexibility High-level operational security and avail-

ability– continuous self-monitoring and proven

technology:– 20 years digital relay experience (more

than 150,000 units in operation)– 10 years of SINAUT LSA and SICAM

substation control (more than 1500systems in operation)

Rapid problem solving– comprehensive advice and fast re-

sponse from local sales andworkshop facilities worldwide.

Application hints

All named devices and systems for pro-tection, metering and control are designedto be used in the harsh environment ofelectrical substations, power plants andthe various industrial application areas.When the devices were developed, specialemphasis was placed on EMI. The devicesare in accordance with IEC 60 255 stand-ards. Detailed information is contained inthe device manuals.Reliable operation of the devices is notaffected by the usual interference fromthe switchgear, even when the device ismounted directly in a low-voltage compart-ment of a medium-voltage cubicle.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

It must, however, be ensured that the coilsof auxiliary relays located on the samepanel, or in the same cubicle, are fittedwith suitable spike quenching elements(e.g. free-wheeling diodes).When used in conjunction with switchgearfor 100 kV or above, all external connectioncables should be fitted with a screengrounded at both ends and capable of car-rying currents. That means that the crosssection of the screen should be at least4 mm2 for a single cable and 2.5 mm2 formultiple cables in one cable duct.All equipment proposed in this guideis built-up either in closed housings(type 7XP20) or cubicles with protectiondegree IP 51 according to IEC 60 529: Protected against access to dangerous

parts with a wire Sealed against dust Protected against dripping water

Climatic conditions:

Permissible temperature duringservice–5 °C to +55 °Cpermissible temperature during storage–25 °C to +55 °Cpermissible temperature during transport–25 °C to +70 °CStorage and transport with standardworks packaging

Permissible humidityMean value per year ≤ 75% relative hu-midity; on 30 days per year 95% relativehumidity; Condensation not permissible

We recommend that units be installedsuch that they are not subjected to directsunlight, nor to large temperature fluctua-tions which may give rise to condensation.

Mechanical stress

Vibration and shock during operation

Standards:IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2

Vibration– sinusoidalIEC 60255-21-1, class 1– 10 Hz to 60 Hz:

± 0.035 mm amplitude;IEC 60068-2-6– 60 Hz to 150 Hz:

0.5 g accelerationsweep rate 10 octaves/min20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes

Vibration and shock during transport

Standards:IEC 60255-21and IEC 60068-2

Vibration– sinusoidalIEC 60255-21-1, class 2– 5 Hz to 8 Hz:

± 7.5 mm amplitude;IEC 60068-2-6– 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration

sweep rate 1 octave/min20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes

ShockIEC 60255-21-2, class 1IEC 60068-2-27

Insulation tests

Standards:IEC 60255-5– High-voltage test (routine test)

2 kV (rms), 50 Hz– Impulse voltage test (type test)

all circuits, class III5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J; 3 positiveand 3 negative shots at intervals of 5 s

Fig. 5: Installation of the numerical protection in thedoor of the low-voltage section of medium-voltage cell

Electromagnetic compatibility

EC Conformity declaration (CE mark):

All Siemens protection and control prod-ucts recommended in this guide complywith the EMC Directive 99/336/EEC of theCouncil of the European Community andfurther relevant IEC 255 standards on elec-tromagnetic compatibility.All products carry the CE mark.

EMC tests; immunity (type tests)

Standards:IEC 60255-22 (product standard)EN 50082-2 (generic standard)

High frequencyIEC 60255-22-1 class III– 2.5 kV (peak);

1 MHz; τ = 15 µs;400 shots/s;duration 2 s

Electrostatic dischargeIEC 60255-22-2 class IIIand EN 61000-4-2 class III– 4 kV contact discharge;

8 kV air discharge;both polarities;150 pF; Ri = 330 Ohm

Radio-frequency electromagnetic field,nonmodulated;IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III– 10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz

Radio-frequency electromagnetic field,amplitude-modulated;ENV 50140, class III– 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz, 80%;

1 kHz; AM Radio-frequency electromagnetic field,

pulse-modulated;ENV 50140/ENV 50204, class III– 10 V/m; 900 MHz;

repetition frequency 200 Hz;duty cycle 50%

Fast transientsIEC 60255-22-4 and EN 61000-4-4,class III– 2 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;

burst length 15 ms; repetition rate300 ms; both polarities;Ri = 50 Ohm; duration 1 min

Conducted disturbances induced byradio-frequency fields HF,amplitude-modulatedENV 50141, class III– 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;

80%; 1kHz; AM Power-frequency magnetic field

EN 61000-4-8, class IV– 30 A/m continuous;

300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz

Protection and Substation ControlApplication Hints


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

C.t. designaccording to ANSI/IEEE C 57.13

Class C of this standard defines the c.t. byits secondary terminal voltage at 20 timesnominal current, for which the ratio errorshall not exceed 10%. Standard classesare C100, C200, C400 and C800 for 5 Anominal secondary current.This terminal voltage can be approximatelycalculated from the IEC data as follows:

EMC tests; emission (type tests)

Standard:EN 50081-2 (generic standard)

Interference field strength CISPR 11,EN 55011, class A– 30 MHz to 1000 MHz

Conducted interference voltage,aux. voltage CISPR 22, EN 55022,class B– 150 kHz to 30 MHz


Instrument transformers must complywith the applicable IEC recommendationsIEC 60044, formerly IEC 60185 (c.t.) and186 (p.t.), ANSI/IEEE C57.13 or other com-parable standards.

Potential transformers

Potential transformers (p.t.) in single- ordouble-pole design for all primary voltageshave single or dual secondary windings of100, 110 or 120 V/ 3, with output ratingsbetween 10 and 300 VA, and accuraciesof 0.2, 0.5 or 1% to suit the particularapplication. Primary BIL values are select-ed to match those of the associatedswitchgear.

Current transformers

Current transformers (c.t.) are usually ofthe single-ratio type with wound or bar-type primaries of adequate thermal rating.Single, dual or triple secondary windings of1 or 5 A are standard.1 A rating however should be preferred,particularly in HV and EHV stations, to re-duce the burden of the connecting leads.Output power (rated burden in VA), accura-cy and saturation characteristics (accuracylimiting factor) of the cores and secondarywindings must meet the particular applica-tion.The c.t. classification code of IEC is usedin the following:

Measuring cores

They are normally specified with 0.5% or1.0% accuracy (class 0.5 M or 1.0 M), andan accuracy limiting factor of 5 or 10.The required output power (rated burden)must be higher than the actually connect-ed burden. Typical values are 5, 10, 15 VA.Higher values are normally not necessarywhen only electronic meters and recordersare connected.A typical specification could be: 0.5 M 10,15 VA.

The required c.t. accuracy-limiting factorKALF can be determined by calculation,as shown in Fig. 6.The overdimensioning factor KOF dependson the type of relay and the primary d.c.time constant. For the normal case, withshort-circuit time constants lower than100 ms, the necessary value for K*ALF canbe taken from the table in Fig. 9.The recommended values are based onextensive type tests.

C.t. design according to BS 3938

In this case the c.t. is defined by the knee-point voltage UKN and the internal second-ary resistance Ri.The design values according to IEC 60 185can be approximately transferred into theBS standard definition by the followingformula:

Fig. 6: C.t. dimensioning formulae

Cores for revenue metering

In this case, class 0.2 M is normallyrequired.

Protection cores:

The size of the protection core dependsmainly on the maximum short-circuit cur-rent and the total burden (internal c.t. bur-den, plus burden of connecting leads, plusrelay burden).Further, an overdimensioning factor has tobe considered to cover the influence of thed.c. component in the short-circuit current.In general, an accuracy of 1% (class 5 P) isspecified. The accuracy limiting factor KALFshould normally be designed so thatat least the maximum short-circuit currentcan be transmitted without saturation(d.c. component not considered).This results, as a rule, in rated accuracylimiting factors of 10 or 20 dependent onthe rated burden of the c.t. in relation tothe connected burden. A typical specifica-tion for protection cores for distributionfeeders is 5P10, 15 VA or 5P20, 10 VA.The requirements for protective currenttransformers for transient performance arespecified in IEC 60044-6. The recom-mended calculation procedure for satura-tion-free design, however, leads to veryhigh c.t. dimensions.In many practical cases, the c.t.s cannotbe designed to avoid saturation under allcircumstances because of cost and spacereasons, particularly with metal-enclosedswitchgear.The Siemens relays are therefore designedto tolerate c.t. saturation to a large extent.The numerical relays proposed in thisguide are particularly stable in this casedue to their integral saturation detectionfunction.

KALF : Rated c.t. accuracy limiting factorK*ALF : Effective c.t. accuracy

limiting factorRBN : Rated burden resistanceRBC : Connected burdenRi : Internal c.t. burden (resistance

of the c.t. secondary winding)

Iscc.max. = Maximum short-circuit currentIN = Rated primary c.t. currentKOF = Overdimensioning factor

RBC + Ri

RBN + Ri

KALF> K*ALF

Iscc.max.K*ALF>

IN

KOF

with:

Fig. 7: BS c.t. definition

Fig. 8: ANSI c.t. definition

Example:IEC 185 : 600/1, 15 VA, 5P10, Ri = 4 Ohm

(RNC + Ri) • I2N • KALFUKN =

1.3

BS : UKN = (15 + 4) • 1 • 10 = 146 V1.3

Ri = 4 Ohm

I2N = Nominal secondary current

Example:IEC 185 : 600/5, 25 VA, 5P20,

20Vs.t. max = 20 x 5 A x RBN •

KALF

with:

RBN = PBN

INsec

2and I

Nsec = 5 A, we get

Vs.t. max = PBN • KALF

5

Vs.t. max = 25 • 20 =5

ANSI C57.13:

= 100, i.e. class C100



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Relay burden

The c.t. burdens of the numerical relays ofSiemens are below 0.1 VA and can there-fore be neglected for a practical estimation.Exceptions are the busbar protection 7SS50(1.5 VA) and the pilot wire relays 7SD502,7SD600 (4 VA) and 7SD503 (3 VA + 9 VA per100 Ohm pilot wire resistance).Intermediate c.t.s are normally no longerapplicable as the ratio adaption for busbarand transformer protection is numericallyperformed in the relay.Analog static relays in gereral also haveburdens below about 1 VA.Mechanical relays, however, have a muchhigher burden, up to the order of 10 VA.This has to be considered when older re-lays are connected to the same c.t. circuit.In any case, the relevant relay manualsshould always be consulted for the actualburden values.

Fig. 9: Required effective accuracy limiting factor K*ALF

Fig. 10 Fig. 11

Burden of the connection leads

The resistance of the current loop fromthe c.t. to the relay has to be considered:


Relay type Minimum K*ALF

o/c protection7SJ511, 512, 551,7SJ60, 61, 62, 63

, at least 20IHigh set point

IN

=

Transformerdifferential protection7UT51

>– 50 for each side

Line differential(fiber-optic) protection7SD511/512

andIscc. max. (external fault)

IN

[K*ALF . IN](line-end 1)1

3<3= <

[K*ALF . IN](line-end 2)

Line differential(pilot wire) protection7SD502/503/600

andIscc. max. (external fault)

IN

K*ALF (line-end 1)

K*ALF (line-end 2)

3

4<=

4

3<

Iscc. max. (outflowing current for ext. fault)

IN

Numerical busbarprotection (low impe-dance type) 7SS5

=1

2

Distance protection7SA511, 7SA513,7SA522

TN < 50 ms:

a = 2

TN < 100 ms:

a = 3 for 7SA511

a = 2 for 7SA513

and 7SA522

andIscc. max. (line-end fault)

IN

10=

IN

Iscc. max. (close-in fault)a=

AR l =

2 ρ lOhm

l = single conductor lengthfrom the c.t. to the relay in m.

Specific resistance:

ρ = 0.0179 (copper wires)

A = conductor cross sectionin mm2

Ohm mm2

m

Example: Stability-verification of thenumerical busbar protection 7SS50

1 A2RBN =

15 VA= 15 Ohm;

1 A2RRelay =

1.5 VA= 1.5 Ohm

15 + 4KALF >

1.8 + 425 = 7.6

600/15 P 10,15 VA,Ri = 4 Ohm

50=Iscc.max.

IN

30,000

600=

7SS5

I scc.max. = 30 kA

l = 50 mA = 6 mm2

Result:

The rated KALF-factor (10) is higherthan the calculated value (7.6).Therefore, the stability criterium isfulfilled.

Rl6

=2 0.0179 50

0.3 Ohm=

RBC = Rl + RRelay =

= 0.3 + 1.5 = 1.8 Ohm

Given case:

2K*ALF >

150 = 25

According to Fig. 9:


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Introduction

Siemens is one of the world’s leading sup-pliers of protective equipment for powersystems.Thousands of our relays ensure first-classperformance in transmission and distribu-tion networks on all voltage levels, all overthe world, in countries of tropical heat orarctic frost.For many years, Siemens has also signifi-cantly influenced the development of pro-tection technology. In 1976, the first minicomputer (process

computer)-based protection system wascommissioned: A total of 10 systemsfor 110/20 kV substations were suppliedand are still operating satisfactorily today.

Since 1985, we have been the first tomanufacture a range of fully numericalrelays with standardized communicationinterfaces.Today, Siemens offers a complete pro-gram of protective relays for all applica-tions including numerical busbar protec-tion.To date (1999), more than 150,000 numer-ical protection relays from Siemens areproviding successful service, as stand-alone devices in traditional systems oras components of coordinated protec-tion and substation control.Meanwhile, the innovative SIPROTEC 4series has been launched, incorporatingthe many years of operational experi-ence with thousands of relays, togetherwith users’ requirements (power author-ity recommendations).

State of the art

Mechanical and solid-state (static) relayshave been almost completely phased outof our production because numerical relaysare now preferred by the users due totheir decisive advantages: Compact design and lower cost due to

integration of many functions into onerelay

High availability even with less mainte-nance due to integral self-monitoring

No drift (aging) of measuring characteris-tics due to fully numerical processing

High measuring accuracy due to digitalfiltering and optimized measuring algo-rithms

Many integrated add-on functions,for example, for load-monitoring andevent/fault recording

Local operation keypad and display de-signed to modern ergonomic criteria

Easy and secure read-out of informationvia serial interfaces with a PC, locally orremotely

Possibility to communicate with higher-level control systems using standardizedprotocols (open communication)

Fig. 12: Numerical relay ranges of Siemens

Power System ProtectionIntroduction

SIPROTEC 3 SIPROTEC 4


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Modern protection management

All the functions, for example, of a line pro-tection scheme can be incorporated in oneunit: Distance protection with associated

add-on and monitoring functions Universal teleprotection interface Autoreclose and synchronism check

Protection-related information can becalled up on-line or off-line, such as: Distance to fault Fault currents and voltages Relay operation data (fault detector pick-

up, operating times etc.) Set values Line load data (kV, A, MW, kVAr)To fulfill vital protection redundancy require-ments, only those functions which are in-terdependent and directly associated witheach other are integrated in the same unit.For back-up protection, one or more addi-tional units have to be provided.

Supervisory control

2167NFL792585SMERFRBM

Distance protectionDirectional ground-fault protectionDistance-to-fault locatorAutoreclosureSynchro-checkCarrier interface (teleprotection)Self-monitoringEvent recordingFault recordingBreaker monitor

Breaker monitor

Relay monitor

Fault record

01.10.93

Fault report

BM

Serial link to station – or personal computer

SM ER FR2579FL67N21

to remote line end kA,kV,Hz,MW,MVAr,MVA,

85

Load monitor

52

All relays can stand fully alone. Thus, thetraditional protection concept of separatemain and alternate protection as well asthe external connection to the switchyardremain unchanged.

”One feeder, one relay“ concept

Analog protection schemes have been en-gineered and assembled from individualrelays. Interwiring between these relaysand scheme testing has been carried outmanually in the workshop.Data sharing now allows for the integrationof several protection and protection relatedtasks into one single numerical relay. Onlya few external devices may be required forcompletion of the total scheme. This hassignificantly lowered the costs of engineer-ing, assembly, panel wiring, testing andcommissioning. Scheme failure probabilityhas also been lowered.Engineering has moved from schematicdiagrams towards a parameter definitionprocedure. The documentation is providedby the relay itself. Free allocation of LEDoperation indicators and output contactsprovides more application design flexibility.

Measuring included

For many applications, the protective-currenttransformer accuracy is sufficient for oper-ational measuring. The additional mea-suring c.t. was more for protection ofmeasuring instruments under system faultconditions. Due to the low thermal with-stand ability of the measuring instruments,they could not be connected to the protec-tion c.t.. Consequently, additional measur-ing c.t.s and measuring instruments arenow only necessary where high accuracyis required, e.g. for revenue metering.

Fig. 13: Numerical relays, increased information availability



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

On-line remote data exchange

A powerful serial data link provides forinterrogation of digitized measured valuesand other information stored in the pro-tection units, for printout and furtherprocessing at the substation or systemcontrol level.In the opposite direction, settings may bealtered or test routines initiated from a re-mote control center.For greater distances, especially in outdoorswitchyards, fiber-optic cables are prefera-bly used. This technique has the advantagethat it is totally unaffected by electromag-netic interference.

Off-line dialog with numerical relays

A simple built-in operator panel whichrequires no special software knowledge orcodeword tables is used for parameterinput and readout.This allows operator dialog with the protec-tion relay. Answers appear largely in plain-text on the display of the operator panel.Dialog is divided into three main phases: Input, alternation and readout of settings Testing the functions of the protection

device and Readout of relay operation data for the

three last system faults and the autore-close counter.

Modern system protectionmanagement

A more versatile notebook PC may beused for upgraded protection manage-ment.The MS Windows-compatible relay opera-tion program DIGSI is available for enteringand readout of setpoints and archiving ofprotection data.The relays may be set in 2 steps. First, allrelay settings are prepared in the officewith the aid of a local PC and stored on afloppy or the hard disk. At site, the set-tings can then be downloaded from a PCinto the relay. The relay confirms the set-tings and thus provides an unquestionablerecord.Vice versa, after a system fault, the relaymemory can be uploaded to a PC, andcomprehensive fault analysis can then takeplace in the engineer’s office.Alternatively, the total relay dialog can beguided from any remote location through amodem-telephone connection (Fig. 15).

Protection Laptop

RecordingPersonal computer

Assigning

Recording andconfirmation

DIGSI

DIGSI

System level to remote control

Substationlevel

Modem(option)

Bay level

Dataconcentrator

ERTU

Control

Coordinatedprotection & control

RTU

Relay

52

Fig. 14: PC-aided setting procedure

Fig. 15: Communication options



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Parameter

Line data

O/C Phase settings

O/C Earth settings

Fault Recording

Breaker Fall

1000

1100

1200

1500

2800

3900

DParameter

Line data

O/C Phase settings

O/C Earth settings

Fault Recording

Breaker Fall

1000

1100

1200

1500

2800

3900

CParameter

Line data

O/C Phase settings

O/C Earth settings

Fault Recording

Breaker Fall

1000

1100

1200

1500

2800

3900

BParameter

Line data

O/C Phase settings

O/C Ground settings

Fault recording

Breaker fail

1000

1100

1200

1500

2800

3900

A

Relay data management

Analog-distribution-type relays have some20–30 setpoints. If we consider a powersystem with about 500 relays, then thenumber adds up to 10,000 settings. Thisrequires considerable expenditure in set-ting the relays and filing retrieval setpoints.A personal computer-aided man-machinedialog and archiving program, e.g. DIGSI,assists the relay engineer in data filing andretrieval. The program files all settingssystematically in substation-feeder-relayorder.

Corrective rather than preventivemaintenance

Numerical relays monitor their own hard-ware and software. Exhaustive self-moni-toring and failure diagnostic routines arenot restricted to the protective relay itself,but are methodically carried through fromcurrent transformer circuits to tripping re-lay coils.Equipment failures and faults in the c.t. cir-cuits are immediately reported and the pro-tective relay blocked.Thus, the service personnel are now ableto correct the failure upon occurrence, re-sulting in a significantly upgraded availabilityof the protection system.

Adaptive relaying

Numerical relays now offer secure, con-venient and comprehensive matching tochanging conditions. Matching may be initi-ated either by the relay’s own intelligenceor from the outside world via contacts orserial telegrams. Modern numerical relayscontain a number of parameter sets thatcan be pretested during commissioning ofthe scheme (Fig. 17). One set is normallyoperative. Transfer to the other sets can becontrolled via binary inputs or serial datalink. There are a number of applications forwhich multiple setting groups can upgradethe scheme performance, e.g.a) for use as a voltage-dependent control

of o/c relay pickup values to overcomealternator fault current decrement to be-low normal load current when the AVRis not in automatic operation.

b) for maintaining short operation timeswith lower fault currents, e.g. automaticchange of settings if one supply trans-former is taken out of service.

c) for “switch-onto-fault” protection to pro-vide shorter time settings when energiz-ing a circuit after maintenance.The normal settings can be restoredautomatically after a time delay.

Fig. 16: System-wide setting and relay operation library

Fig. 17: Alternate parameter groups

10 000setpoints

200setpoints

sub

bay

20setpoints

bay

4flags

OH-Line

1200flagsp. a.

system

Relay operationsSetpoints

1

1

1

300 faults p. a.approx. 6,000 kmOHL (fault rate:5 p. a. and 100 km)

systemapprox.500relays

d) for autoreclose programs, i.e. instanta-neous operation for first trip and delayedoperation after unsuccessful reclosure.

e) for cold load pick-up problems wherehigh starting currents may cause relayoperation.

f) for ”ring open“ or ”ring closed“ operation.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Plausibility check of input quantitiese.g. iL1 + iL2 + iL3 = iE

uL1 + uL2 + uL3 = uE

Check of analog-to-digital conversionby comparison withconverted reference quantities

A

D

Hardware and software monitoring ofthe microprocessor system incl. memory,e.g. by watchdog and

cyclic memory checks

Micro-processorsystem

Monitoring of the tripping relaysoperated via dual channels

Relay

Tripping check or test reclosure by localor remote operation (not automatic)

Meas.inputs

Currentinputs(100 x /N,1 s)

Voltageinputs(140 Vcontin-uous)

A/Dconverter

Processorsystem

Input filter V.24SerialInterfaces

PC interfaceLSA interface

Memory:RAMEEPROMEPROM

Input/outputports

Input/outputunits

Binaryinputs

Alarmrelay

Com-mandrelay

LEDdis-plays0001

01010011

Amplifier

Input/outputcontacts

digital10 Vanalog

100 V/1 A,5 A analog

FO

Mode of operation

Numerical protection relays operate on thebasis of numerical measuring principles.The analog measured values of current andvoltage are decoupled galvanically from theplant secondary circuits via input transduc-ers (Fig. 18). After analog filtering, thesampling and the analog-to-digital conver-sion take place. The sampling rate is, de-pending on the different protection princi-ples, between 12 and 20 samples perperiod. With certain devices (e.g. generatorprotection) a continuous adjustment of thesampling rate takes place depending onthe actual system frequency.The protection principle is based on a cy-clic calculation algorithm, utilizing the sam-pled current and voltage analog measuredvalues. The fault detections determined bythis process must be established in severalsequential calculations before protectionreactions can follow.A trip command is transferred to the com-mand relay by the processor, utilizing adual channel control.The numerical protection concept offers avariety of advantages, especially with re-gard to higher security, reliability and userfriendliness, such as: High measurement accuracy:

The high ultilization of adaptive algo-rithms produce accurate results evenduring problematic conditions

Good long-term stability:Due to the digital mode of operation,drift phenomena at components due toageing do not lead to changes in accura-cy of measurement or time delays

Security against over and underfunctionWith this concept, the danger of an unde-tected error in the device causing protec-tion failure in the event of a network faultis clearly reduced when compared to con-ventional protection technology. Cyclicaland preventive maintenance services havetherefore become largely obsolete.The integrated self-monitoring system(Fig. 19) encompasses the following areas:– Analog inputs– Microprocessor system– Command relays.

Fig. 18: Block diagram of numerical protection

Fig. 19: Self-monitoring system

Power System ProtectionRelay Design and Operation


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Implemented Functions

SIOPROTEC relays are available with avariety of protective functions. See relaycharts (page 6/20 and following).The high processing power of modern nu-merical devices allow further integration ofnon-protective add-on functions.

The question as to whether separate orcombined relays should be used for pro-tection and control cannot be uniformly an-swered. In transmission type substations,separation into independent hardware unitsis still preferred, whereas on the distribu-tion level a trend towards higher functionintegration can be observed. Here, com-bined feeder relays for protection, monitor-ing and control are on the march (Fig. 20).

Most of the relays of this guide are stand-alone protection relays. The exception inthe SIPROTEC 3 series is the distributionfeeder relay 7SJ531 that also integratescontrol functions. Per feeder, only one re-lay package ist needed in this case leadingto a considerable reduction in space undwiring.

With the new SIPROTEC 4 series (types7SJ61, 62 and 63), Siemens supports bothstand-alone and combined solutions on thebasis of a single hardware and softwareplatform. The user can decide within widelimits on the configuration of the controland protection functions in the feeder,without compromising the reliability of theprotection functions (Fig. 21).

Fig. 21: SIPROTEC 4 relays 7SJ61/62/63, implemented function

The following solutions are available withinone relay family: Separate control and protection relays Protection relays including remote con-

trol of the feeder breaker via the serialcommunication link


27

47

Auto reclosing

Local/Remote controlCommands/Feedback indications

Motorcontrol(only 7SJ63)

Communica-tions moduleRS23/485fiber opticIEC 60870-5-103PROFIBUS FMS

Faultrecording

21FL

6467

5150 51N50N 4946

51N60N

79M

Inrushrestrain 50BF

14

Breakerfailureprotection Locked

rotor

Motor protection (option)Starting time

Startinhibit

Directional ground-fault detection (option)

Rotating fieldmonitoring

Directional (option)

Metering values

Metered powervalues pulses

Calculated

V, Watts,Vars f.p.f.

I2 limit values

Vf (option)

Fault locator

PLC logic52

74TC 86

Trip circuitsupervision Lockout

&

Busbar

HMI

7SJ61/62/63

7SJ62/63

4837 66/86

67N67

810/U 59

Combined feeder relays for protection,monitoring and control

Mixed use of the different relay types isreadily possible on account of the uniformoperation and communication procedures.

Fig. 20: Switchgear with numerical relay (7SJ62)and traditional control

Switchgear with combined protectionand control relay (7SJ63)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Integration of relays in the substationautomation

Basically, Siemens numerical relaysare all equipped with an interface to IEC60870-5-103 for open communication withsubstation control systems either fromSiemens (SINAUT LSA or SICAM, seepage 6/71 ff) or of any other supplier.The relays of the newer SIPROTEC 4series, however, are even more flexibleand equipped with communication options.SIPROTEC 4 relays may also be connectedto the SINAUT LSA system or to a systemof another supplier via IEC 60870-5-103.But, SICAM 4 relays were originally de-signed as components of the new SICAMsubstation automation system, and theircommon use offers the most technical andcost benefits.SIPROTEC 4 protection and SICAM stationcontrol, which is based on SIMATIC, are ofuniform design, and communication is basedon the Profibus standard.SIPROTEC 4 relays can in this case beconnected to the Profibus substation LANof the SICAM system via one serial inter-face. Through a second serial interface,e.g. IEC 60 870-5-103, the relay can sepa-rately communicate with a remote PC via amodem-telephone line (Fig. 22).

Local relay operation

All operator actions can be executed andinformation displayed on an integrated userinterface.Many advantages are already to be foundon the clear and user-friendly front panel: Positioning and grouping of the keys

supports the natural operating process(ergonomic design)

Large non-reflective back-lit display Programmable (freely assignable) LEDs

for important messages Arrows arrangement of the keys for

easy navigation in the function tree Operator-friendly input of the setting val-

ues via the numeric keys or with a PCby using the operating program DIGSI 4

Command input protected by key lock(6MD63/7SJ63 only) or password

Four programmable keys for frequentlyused functions >at the press of a but-ton<


Fig. 22: SIPROTEC 4 relays, communication options

DIGSI 4

SICAMSAS

DIGSI 4

Telephoneconnection

PROFIBUS FMS

Modem IEC 60870-5-103

IEC 60870-5-103

DIGSI 4

Fig. 24: Front view of the combined protection,monitoring and control relay 7SJ63

Fig. 23: Front view of the protection relay 7SJ62

1

2

3

4 567

1

2

3

4

6

7

1 Large illuminated display2 Cursor keys3 LED with reset key

4 Control (7SJ61/62 uses function keys)5 Key switches

6 Freely programmablefunction keys

7 Numerical keypad


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

DIGSI 4 the PC program for operatingSIPROTEC 4 relays

For the user, DIGSI is synonymous withconvenient, user-friendly parameterizingand operation of digital protection relays.DIGSI 4 is a logical innovation for operationof protection and bay control units of theSIPROTEC 4 family.The PC operating program DIGSI 4 is thehuman-machine interface between theuser and the SIPROTEC 4 units. It featuresmodern, intuitive operating procedures.With DIGSI 4, the SIPROTEC 4 units ca beconfigured and queried. The interface provides you only with

what is really necessary, irrespective ofwhich unit you are currently configuring.

Contextual menus for every situationprovide you with made-to-measure func-tionality – searching through menuhierarchies is a thing of the past.

Explorer – operation on the MS Win-dows 95® Standard – shows the optionsin logically structured form.

Even with marshalling, you have theoverall picture – a matrix shows you at aglance, for example, which LEDs arelinked to which protection controlfunction(s). It just takes a click with themouse to establish these links by afingertip.

Thus, you can also use the PC to link upwith the relay via star coupler or channelswitch, as well via the PROFIBUS® of asubstation control system. The integrat-ed administrating system ensures clearaddressing of the feeders and relays of asubstation.

Access authorization by means of pass-words protects the individual functions,such as for example parameterizing,commissioning and control, from unau-thorized access.

When configuring the operator environ-ment and interfaces, we have attachedimportance to continuity with the SICAMautomation system. This means that youcan readily use DIGSI on the station con-trol level in conjunction with SICAM.Thus, the way is open to the SIMATICautomation world.

Fig. 26: Function range


Fig. 27: Range of operational measured values

Fig. 25: Substation manager for managing of substation and device data


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


DIGSI 4 matrix

The DIGSI 4 matrix allows the user to seethe overall view of the relay configurationat a glance. For example, you can displayall the LEDs that are linked to binary inputsor show external signals that are connect-ed to the relay. And with one click ofthe button, connections can be switched(Fig. 28).

Display editor

A display editor is available to design thedisplay on SIPROTEC 4 units. The prede-fined symbol sets can be expanded to suitthe user. The drawing of a one-line dia-gram is extremely simple. Load monitoringvalues (analog values) can be placed whererequired (Fig. 29).

Commissioning

Special attention has been paid to commis-sioning. All binary inputs and outputs canbe read and set directly. This can simplifythe wire checking process significantly forthe user.

CFC: Planning instead of programminglogic

With the help of the graphical CFC (Contin-uous Function Chart)Tool, you can config-ure interlocks and switching sequencessimply by drawing the logic sequences; nospecial knowledge of software is required.Logical elements such as AND, OR andtime elements are available (Fig. 30) .

Hardware and software platform

Pentium 133 MHz or above, with atleast 32 Mbytes RAM

DIGSI requires about 200 Mbytes hard-disk space

Additional hard-disk space per installedprotection device 2 Mbytes

One free serial interface to the protec-tion device (COM 1 to COM 4)

One CD ROM drive (required for in-stallation)

WINDOWS 95/98 or NT 4

Fig. 30: CFC logic with module library

Fig. 29: Display Editor

Fig. 28: DIGSI 4 allocation matrix


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 31: Operation of the protection relays using PC and DIGSI 3 software program

Fig. 32: Parameterization using DIGSI 3


Operation of SIPROTEC 3 Relays

Most of the Siemens numerical relays be-long to the series SIPROTEC 3. (Only thedistribution protection relays 7SJ61/62,the combined protection and control relay7SJ63 and the line protection 7SA522 arepresently available in the version SIPRO-TEC 4).Both relay series are widely compatible andcan be used together in protection and con-trol systems. SIPROTEC 3 relays howeverare not applicable with PROFIBUS but onlywith the IEC 60870-5-103 communicationstandard.The operation of SIPROTEC 3 and 4 relaysis very similar. Some novel features of thePC operating program DIGSI 4 like the CFCfunction and the graphical setting matrixare however not contained in DIGSI 3.

Operation of SIPROTEC 3 relays via inte-gral key pad and LCD display:

Each parameter can be accessed and al-tered via the integrated operator panel or aPC connected to the front side serial com-munication interface.The setting values can be accessed directlyvia 4-digit addresses or by paging throughthe menu. The display appears on an alpha-numeric LCD display with 2 lines with16 characters per line.Also the rear side IEC 60870-5-103 com-patible serial interface can be used for therelay dialog with a PC, when not occupiedfor the connection to a substation automa-tion system. This rear side interface is inparticular used for remote relay communi-cation with a PC (see page 6/19).Most relays allow for the storage of severalsetting groups (in general 4) which can beactivated via binary relay input, serial inter-face or operator panel.Binary inputs, alarm contact outputs, indi-cating LEDs and command output relayscan be freely assigned to the internal relayfunctions.

DIGSI 3 the PC program for operatingSIPROTEC 3 relays

For setting of SIPROTEC 3 relays, theDIGSI 3 version is applicable. (Figs. 31 and32). It is a WINDOWS-based program thatallows comfortable user-guided relay set-ting, load monitoring and readout of storedfault reports, including oscillographic faultrecords. It is also a valuable tool for com-missioning as it allows an online overviewdisplay of all measuring values.DIGSI comes with the program DIGRA forgraphic display and evaluation of oscillo-graphic fault records (see next page).For remote relay communication, the pro-gram WINDIMOD is offered (option).The DIGSI 3 program requires the follow-ing hardware and software platform:

PC 386 SX or above, with at least4 Mbytes Ram

10 Mbytes hard-disc space for DIGSI 3 2 to 3 Mbytes additional hard-disc space

per installed protection device One free serial interface to the protec-

tion device (COM 1 to COM 4) One floppy disc drive 3.5", high density

with 1.44 Mbytes or CD ROM drive forprogram installation

WINDOWS version 3.1 or higherThese requirements relate to the casewhen DIGSI 3 is used as stand-alone ver-sion. When used together with DIGSI 4,the requirements for DIGSI 4 apply. In thiscase DIGSI 3 and DIGSI 4 run under thecommon DIGSI 4 substation manager.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fault analysis

The evaluation of faults is simplified by nu-merical protection technology. In the eventof a fault in the network, all events as wellas the analog traces of the measured volt-ages and currents are recorded.The following types of memory are avail-able: 1 operational event memory

Alarms that are not directly assigned toa fault in the network (e.g. monitoringalarms, alternation of a set value, block-ing of the automatic reclose function).

5 fault-event historiesAlarms that occurred during the last3 faults on the network (e.g. type offault detection, trip commands, fault lo-cation, autoreclose commands). A re-close cycle with one or more reclosuresis treated as one fault history. Each newfault in the network overrides the oldestfault history.

A memory for the fault recordings forvoltage and current. Up to 8 fault record-ings are stored. The fault recordingmemory is organized as a ring buffer, i.e.a new fault entry overrides the oldestfault record.

1 earth-fault event memory (optional forisolated or resonant grounded networks)Event record of the sensitive earth faultdetector (e.g. faulted phase, real compo-nent of residual current).

The time tag attached to the fault-recordevents is a relative time from fault detec-tion with a resolution of 1 ms. In the caseof devices with integrated battery back-upclock, the operational events as well as thefault detection are assigned the internalclock time and date stamp.The memory for operational events andfault record events is protected against fail-ure of auxiliary supply with battery back-upsupply.The integrated operator interface or a PCsupported by the programming tool DIGSIis used to retrieve fault reports as well asfor the input of settings and marshalling.

Evaluation of the fault recording

Readout of the fault record from the pro-tection device by DIGSI is done by fault-proof scanning procedures in accordancewith the standard recommendation fortransmission of fault records.A fault record can also be read out repeat-edly. In addition to analog values, such asvoltage and current, binary tracks can alsobe transferred and presented.DIGSI is supplied together with theDIGRA (Digsi Graphic) program, whichprovides the customer with full graphicaloperating and evaluation functionality likethat of the digital fault recorders (Oscil-lostores) from Siemens (see Fig. 33).Real-time presentation of analog distur-bance records, overlaying and zooming ofcurves and visualization of binary tracks(e.g. trip command, reclose command, etc.)are also part of the extensive graphicalfunctionality, as are setting of measurementcursors, spectrum analysis and fault resist-ance derivation.

Fig. 33: Display and evaluation of a fault record using DIGSI

Data security, data interfaces

DIGSI is a closed system as far as protec-tion parameter security is concerned. Thesecurity of the stored data of the operatingPC is ensured by checksums. This meansthat it is only possible to change data withDIGSI, which subsequently calculates achecksum for the changed data and storesit with the data. Changes in the data andthus in safety-related protection data arereliably detected.DIGSI is, however, also an open system.The data export function supports exportof parameterization and marshalling data instandard ASCII format. This permits simpleaccess to these data by other programs,such as test programs, without endanger-ing the security of data within the DIGSIprogram system.With the import and export of fault recordsin IEEE standard format COMTRADE (ANSI),a high-performance data interface is pro-duced which supports import and export offault records into the DIGSI partner programDIGRA.This enables the export of fault recordsfrom Siemens protection units to custom-er-specific programs via the COMTRADEformat.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Remote relay interrogation

The numerical relay range of Siemens canalso be operated from a remotely locatedPC via modem-telephone connection.Up to 254 relays can be addressed viaone modem connection if the star coupler7XV53 is used as a communication node(Fig. 34).The relays are connected to the star cou-pler via optical fiber links.Every protection device which belongs toa DIGSI substation structure has a uniqueaddress.The attached relays are always listening,but only the addressed one answers theoperator command which comes from thecentral PC.If the relay located in a station is to be op-erated from a remote office, then a devicefile is opened in DIGSI and protection dia-log is chosen via modem.After password input, DIGSI establishes aconnection to the protection device afterreceiving a call-back from the system.In this way secure and timesaving remotesetting and readout of data are possible.Diagnostics and control of test routines arealso possible without the need to visit thesubstation.

Housing and terminal system

The protection devices and the corre-sponding supplementary devices are avail-able mainly in 7XP20 housings (Figs. 35 to42). The dimension drawings are to befound on 6/36 and the following pages.Installing of the modules in a cubicle with-out the housing is not permissible.The width of the housing conforms to the19" system with the divisions 1/6, 1/3, 1/2or 1/1 of a 19" rack. The termination mod-ule is located at the rear of devices forpanel flush mounting or cubicle mounting.For electrical connection, screwed termi-nals of the SIPROTEC 3 relay series andalso parallel crimp contacts are provided.For field wiring, the use of the screwedterminals is recommended; snap-in con-nection requires special tools.To withdraw crimp contact terminations ofthe SIPROTEC 3 relay series the followingtool is recommended:Extraction tool No. 135900 (from Weid-müller, Paderbornstrasse 157, D-32760Detmold).

7XV53

7**67**57SJ60 7RW60 7SD60

RS485 Bus

opt.

RS485

DIGSI

DIGSIPC, remotely located

Modem

Office

Substation

AnalogISDN

Modem,optionally withcall-back function

Star coupler

Signal converter

PC,centrally locatedin the substation(option)

Fig. 34: Remote relay communication

The heavy-duty current plug connectorsprovide automatic shorting of the c.t. cir-cuits whenever the modules are with-drawn. This does not release from the careto be taken when c.t. secondary circuitsare concerned.In the housing version for surface mount-ing, the terminations are wired up on ter-minal strips on the top and bottom of thedevice. For this purpose two-tier terminalblocks are used to attain the required num-ber of terminals (Fig. 36 right).According to IEC 60529 the degree of pro-tection is indicated by the identifying IP,followed by a number for the degree ofprotection. The first digit indicates the pro-tection against accidental contact and in-gress of solid foreign bodies, the seconddigit indicates the protection against water.7XP20 housings are protected against ac-cess to dangerous parts by wire, dust anddripping water (IP 51).


For mounting of devices into cubicles, the8MC cubicle system is recommended. It isdescribed in Siemens Catalog NV21.The standard cubicle has the followingdimensions:2200 mm x 900 mm x 600 mm (HxWxD).These cubicles are provided with a 44 Uhigh mounting rack (standard height unitU = 44.45 mm). It can swivel as much as180° in a swing frame.The rack provides for a mounting width of19", allowing, for example, 2 devices witha width of 1/2 x 19" to be mounted. Thedevices in the 7XP20 housing are securedto rails by screws. Module racks are notrequired (see Fig. 65b on page 6/33).


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


SIPROTEC 3 Relay Series

SIPROTEC 3 relays come in 1/6 to 1/1 of19" wide cases with a standard height of243 mm.Their size is compatible with SIPROTEC 4relays. Therefore, exchange is always pos-sible.Versions for flush and surface mountingare available.

Fig. 36: SIPROTEC 3 relays left: Connection methodfor panel flush mounting including fiber-optic inter-faces;

Fig. 36 Right: Connection method for panel surfacemounting

1/3 1/2 of 19" width

Fig. 35a/b: Numerical protection relays of the SIPROTEC 3 series in 7XP20 standard housing

1/1 of 19" width

Terminations:

Surface mounted version:

Screw terminals (max. wire cross sec-tion 7 mm2) for all wired terminations atthe top and bottom of the housing

2 FMS plugs for fiber optic terminationof the serial communication link at thebottom of the housing

4 termination points for measured volt-ages, binary inputs or relay outputs(max. 1.5 mm2) or

Flush-mounted version:Each termination may be made via screwterminal or crimp contact. The terminationmodules used each contain:

2 termination points for measured cur-rents (screw termination max. 4 mm2,crimp contact max. 2.5 mm2)

2 FSMA plugs for the fiber optic termina-tion of the serial communication link

Fig. 35c


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SIPROTEC 4 Relay Series

SIPROTEC 4 relays come in 1/6 to 1/1 of19" wide cases with a standard height of243 mm.Their size is compatible with SIPROTEC 3relays. Therefore, compatible exchange isalways possible.All wires (cables) are connected at the rearside of the relay via ring tongue terminals.A special relay version with loose cable-connected operator panel (Fig. 42) is alsoavailable. It allows for example installationof the relay itself in the low-voltage com-partment and of the operator panel sepa-rately in the door of the switchgear.In this version voltage terminals are of theplug-in type. Current terminals are againscrew-type.

Fig. 38: 1/6 of 19" Fig. 39: 1/3 of 19"

Fig. 40: 1/2 of 19" Fig. 41: SIPROTEC 4 relay case versions

Fig. 42: SIPROTEC 4 combined protection, control and monitoring relay 7SJ63 with separate operator panel


Fig. 37

Connectionring cable lugs

Wmax = 12mmd1 = 5mm

Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2

(AWG 13–11)

Directconnection

Solid conductor, flexiblelead, connector sleeve

Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2

(AWG 13–11)

2-pin or 3-pinconnectorsWire size

0.5 – 1.0mm2

0.75 – 1.5mm2

1.0 – 2.5mm2

Special relay version (Fig. 42)with plug-in terminals:Current terminals:Screw type as above

Connectionring cable lugs

Wmax = 10mmd1 = 4 mm

Wire size 1.0 – 2.6 mm2

(AWG 17–13)Directconnection

Solid conductor, flexiblelead, connector sleeve

Wire size 0.5 – 2.5 mm2

(AWG 20–13)

Voltage terminals:

Terminations:

Voltage terminals:

Standard relay version withscrew terminals:Current terminals:

W

d1


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

ANSINo.*

14

21

21N

24

25

27

27/59/81

32

32F

32R

37

40

46

47

48

49

49R

49S

50

50N

51G

* ANSI/IEEE C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers

7SJ5

117S

J512

7SJ5

317S

J60

7SJ6

17S

J62

7SJ6

3

Ove

rcur

rent

7SA

511

7SA

513

7SA

522

7SD

600

7SD

502

7SD

503

7SD

511

7SD

512

Fibe

r-op

tic c

urre

ntco

mpa

riso

n

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Description

Protection functions

Zero speed and underspeed dev.

Distance protection, phase

Distance protection, ground

Overfluxing

Synchronism check

Undervoltage

U/f protection

Directional power

Forward power

Reverse power

Undercurrent or underpower

Field failure

Load unbalance, negative phasesequence overcurrent

Phase sequence voltage

Incomplete sequence, lockedrotor, failure to accelerate

Thermal overload

Rotor thermal protection

Stator thermal protection

Instantaneous overcurrent

Instantaneous ground faultovercurrent

Ground overcurrent relay

Pilo

t wir

e di

ffere

ntia

l

Dis

tanc

e

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–– – – – – – ––

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Type

Relay Selection Guide

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Diff

eren

tial

7VH

807U

T512

7UT5

137S

S50/

527V

H83

7UM

511

7UM

512

7UM

515

7UM

516

Gen

erat

or p

rote

ctio

n

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

– – –– – –

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

7SJ5

51M

otor

pro

tect

ion

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Fig. 43a

Power System ProtectionRelay Selection Guide


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 43b



7SJ5

51

Ove

rcur

rent

Mot

or p

rote

ctio

n

Diff

eren

tial

7VH

807U

T512

7UT5

137S

S50/

527V

H83

7UM

511

7UM

512

7UM

515

7UM

516

Gen

erat

or p

rote

ctio

n

Fibe

r-op

tic c

urre

ntco

mpa

riso

n

ANSINo.*

Pilo

t wir

e di

ffere

ntia

l

Dis

tanc

e

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Stator ground-fault overcurrent

Overcurrent with time delay

Ground-fault overcurrentwith time delay

Overvoltage

Residual voltage ground-faultprotection

Rotor ground fault

Directional overcurrent

Directional ground-faultovercurrent

Stator ground-fault, directionalovercurrent

Out-of-step protection

Autoreclose

Frequency relay

Carrier interface

Lockout relay, start inhibit

Differential protection, generator

Differential protection, transf.

Differential protection, bus-bar

Differential protection, motor

Differential protection, line

Restricted earth-fault protection

Voltage and power directional rel.

Breaker failure

51GN

51

51N

59

59N

64R

67

67N

67G

68/78

79

81

85

86

87G

87T

87B

87M

87L

87N

92

50BF

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Description


Type

7SA

511

7SA

513

7SA

522

7SD

600

7SD

502

7SD

503

7SD

511

7SD

512

7SJ5

117S

J512

7SJ5

57S

J531

7SJ6

07S

J61

7SJ6

27S

J63

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 43c

ANSINo.*

24

25

27

27/59/81

50BF

59

79

81


7RW

600

Volta

ge, F

requ

ency

7VK5

12

Bre

aker

failu

re

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Description


Overfluxing

Synchronism check

Synchronizing

Undervoltage

U/f protection

Breaker failure

Overvoltage

Autoreclose

Frequency relay

Sync

hron

izin

g

Aut

orec

lose

+Sy

nchr

onis

m c

heck

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Type

Relay Selection Guide

7VE5

1

7SV5

12

7SV6

00

–

–

–

–

–

–

– –

–

–


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

50 50N

51N51

49

46

50 50N

51N51

BF

67

67N

79

48

79

*

**

* only with 7SJ512

Relay portraits

Siemens manufactures a complete seriesof numerical relays for all kinds of protec-tion application.The series is briefly portrayed on the fol-lowing pages.

7SJ600

Universal overcurrentand overload protection

Phase-segregated measurement andindication (Input 3 ph, IE calculated)

All instantaneous, i.d.m.t. and d.t.characteristics can be set individuallyfor phase and ground faults

Selectable setting groups Integral autoreclose function (option) Thermal overload, unbalanced load

and locked rotor protection Suitable for busbar protection with

reverse interlocking With load monitoring, event and fault

memory

7SJ602*

Universal overcurrentand overload protection

Functions as 7SJ600, however additionally: Fourth current input transformer for con-

nection to an independent ground cur-rent source (e.g. core-balance CT)

Optical data interface as alternative tothe wired RS485 version (located at therelay bottom)

Serial PC interface at the relay front

7SJ511

Universal overcurrent protection

Phase-segregated measurement andindication (3 ph and E)

I.d.m.t and d.t. characteristics can be setindividually for phase and ground faults

Suitable for busbar protection withreverse interlocking

With integral breaker failureprotection

With load monitoring, event and faultmemory

Inrush stabilization

7SJ512

Digital overcurrent-time protectionwith additional functions

Same features as 7SJ511, plus: Autoreclose Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-

tion for isolated, resonant or high-resist-ance grounded networks

Directional module when used asdirectional overcurrent relay (optional)

Selectable setting groups Inrush stabilization

Fig. 44: 7SJ600/7SJ602 Fig. 45: 7SJ511/512

*) Commencement of delivery planned for end of 1999

Power System ProtectionRelay Portraits


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

51

67 81o/u

27

37

46

49R

50

27

51N

76N

74TC

59

51N

59

50G 86

48

49

51

51G

56 50BF50N 79 86

7SJ61

7SJ62 additionally:

FL 4946 47

7SJ61

Universal overcurrentand overload protection withcontrol functions

Phase-segregated measurement andindication (input 3 ph and E)

All instantaneous, i.d.m.t. and d.t. char-acteristics can be set individually forphase and ground faults

Selectable setting groups Inrush stabilization Integral autoreclose function (option) Thermal overload, unbalanced load and

locked rotor protection Suitable for busbar protection with

reserve interlocking With load monitoring, event and fault

memory With integral breaker failure protection With trip circuit supervision

Control functions:

Measured-value acquisition (current) Limit values of current Control of 1 C.B. Switchgear interlocking isolator/C.B.

7SJ62

Digital overcurrent and overload protectionwith additional functionsFeatures as 7SJ61, plus:

Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-tion for isolated, resonant or high-resistance grounded networks

Directional overcurrent protection Selectable setting groups Over and undervoltage protection Over and underfrequency protection Distance to fault locator (option)

Control functions:

Measured-value acquisition (voltage) P, Q, cos ϕ and meter-reading calculation Measured-value recording Limit values of I, V, P, Q, f, cos ϕ

7SJ551

Universal motor protectionand overcurrent relay

Thermal overload pretection– separate thermal replica for stator and

rotor based on true RMS currentmeasurement

– up to 2 heating time constants for thestator thermal replica

– separate cooling time constants forstator and rotor thermal replica

– ambient temperature biasing ofthermal replica

Connection of up to 8 RTD sensorsground elements

Real-Time Clock: last 3 events are storedwith real-time stamps of alarm and tripdata

Fig. 46: 7SJ61/7SJ62 Fig. 47: 7SJ551



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1051

64

67N

46

51N

BF

49LR

37

27

50 7950N 49 59

5

49

79

33

67N

37

51N

67

46

21FL

14

51

81u/o

50N

66/86

86

27

49LR

50

50BF

48

74TC

59

Combined feeder protection and controlrelay 7SJ63

Line protection

Nondirectional time overcurrent Directional time overcurrent IEC/ANSI and user definable TOC curves Overload protection Sensitive directional ground fault Negative sequence overcurrent Under/Overvoltage Under/Overfrequency Breaker failure Autoreclosure Fault locator

Motor protection

Thermal overload Locked rotor Start inhibit Undercurrent

Control functions

Control up to 5 C.B. Switchgear interlocking isolator/C.B. Key-operated switching authority Feeder control diagram Status indication of feeder devices at

graphic display Measured-value acquisition Signal and command indications P, Q, cos ϕ and meter-reading calculation Measured-value recording Event logging Switching statistics Switchgear interlocking 2 measuring transducer inputs

Combined feeder protection and controlrelay 7SJ531

Line protection

Nondirectional time overcurrent Directional time overcurrent IEC/ANSI and user-definable TOC curves Overload protection Sensitive directional ground fault Negative sequence overcurrent Under/Overvoltage Breaker failure Autoreclosure Fault locator

Motor protection

Thermal overload Locked rotor Start inhibit Undercurrent

Control functions

Measured-value acquisition Signal and command indications P, Q, cos ϕ and meter-reading calculation Measured-value recording Event logging Switching statistics Feeder control diagram with load

indication Switchgear interlocking

I/O Capability

Fig. 49: 7SJ63

Fig. 50: 7SJ531


Fig. 48

11

8+Life

0

3

1/2 of 19"

24/20

11+Life

4(2)

5

1/1 of 19"

37/33

14+Life

8(4)

5

1/1 of 19"

Binaryinputs

Contactoutputs

Motorcontroloutputs

Control ofswitchingdevices

Cases

7SJ631 7SJ632/3 7SJ635/6


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

21

21N

67N

79

25

85

68

78

49

51N

47

21 67N

8521N

78

49

7SA511

Line protection withdistance-to-fault locator

Universal distance relay for all networks,with many additional functions, including Universal carrier interface (PUTT, POTT,

Blocking, Unblocking) Power swing blocking or tripping Selectable setting groups Sensitive directional ground-fault deter-

mining for isolated and compensatednetworks

High-resistance ground-fault protectionfor grounded networks

Single and three-pole autoreclose Synchrocheck Thermal overload protection for cables Free marshalling of optocoupler inputs

and relay outputs Line load monitoring, event and fault re-

cording Selectable setting groups

Fig. 51: 7SA5117SA510

Line protection with distance-to-fault locator

(Reduced version of 7SA511)Universal distance protection, suitable forall networks, with additional functions,including Universal carrier interface (PUTT, POTT,

Blocking, Unblocking) Power swing blocking and/or tripping Selectable setting groups Sensitive directional ground-fault deter-

mining for isolated and compensatednetworks

High-resistance ground-fault protectionfor grounded networks

Thermal overload protection for cables Free marshalling of optocoupler inputs

and relay outputs Line load monitoring, event and fault

recording Three-pole autoreclose

Fig. 52: 7SA510



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

21 21N

7968

50N51N

85

67N

59

FL

85N

2579 50BF*

21 25

5921N

67N

85

7950BF

68 78

FL50N51N

85N

7SA522

Full scheme distance protectionwith add-on functions

Quadrilateral or MHO characteristic Sub-cycle operating time Universal teleprotection interface (PUTT,

POTT, Blocking, Unblocking) Weak infeed protection Power swing blocking/tripping High-resistance ground-fault protection

(time delayed or as directional compari-son scheme)

Overvoltage protection Switch-onto-fault protection Stub bus O/C protection Single and three-pole multi-shot auto-

reclosure*) Synchro-check*) Breaker failure protection*) Trip circuit supervision Fault locator w./w.o. parallel line com-

pensation Oscillographic fault recording Voltage phase sequence

7SA513

Transmission line protectionwith distance-to-fault locator

Full scheme distance protection, withoperating times less than one cycle(20 ms at 50 Hz), with a package ofextra functions which cover all the de-mands of extra-high-voltage applications

Suitable for series-compensated lines Universal carrier interface (permissive

and blocking procedures programmable) Power swing blocking or tripping Parallel line compensation Load compensation that ensures high

accuracy even for high-resistance faultsand double-end infeed

High-resistance ground fault protection Backup ground-fault protection Overvoltage protection Single and three-pole autoreclose Synchrocheck option Breaker failure protection Free marshalling of a comprehensive

range of optocoupler inputs and relayoutputs

Selectable setting groups Line load monitoring, event and fault

recording High-performance measurement using

digital signal processors Flash EPROM memories

Fig. 53: 7SA522

Fig. 54: 7SA513


*) available with Version 4.1 (Commencement of delivery planned for Oct. 1999)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

87L

49

5051

BF 79

87L

49

5051

BF

Fig. 55: 7SD511 Fig. 56: 7SD512

7SD511

Current-comparison protectionfor overhead lines and cables

With phase-segregated measurement For serial data transmission

(19.2 kbits/sec)– with integrated optical transmitter/

receiver for direct fiber-optic link upto approx. 15 km distance

– or with the additional digital signaltransmission device 7VR5012 up to150 km fiber-optic length

– or through a 64 kbit/s channel of avail-able multipurpose PCM devices, viafiber-optic or microwave link

Integral overload and breaker failureprotection

Emergency operation as overcurrentbackup protection on failure of data link

Automatic measurement and correctionof signal transmission time, i.e. channel-swapping is permissible

Line load monitoring, event and faultrecording

7SD512

Current-comparison protectionfor overhead lines and cables

with functions as 7SD511, but additionallywith autoreclose function for single andthree-pole fast and delayed autoreclosure.

7SD502

Pilot-wire differential protection for linesand cables (2 pilot wires)

Up to about 25 km telephone-type pilotwire length

With integrated overcurrent back-up andoverload protection

Also applicable to 3-terminal lines(2 devices at each end)

7SD503

Pilot-wire differential protection for linesand cables (3 pilot wires)

Up to about 15 km pilot wire length With integrated overcurrent back-up and

overload protection Also applicable to 3-terminal lines

(2 devices at each end)

Fig. 57: 7SD502/503


87L

49

50

51


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

87T

49

87REF50G

50/51

**

* 87REF or 50G

87T 49 50/51

7SD600

Pilot wire differential protection for linesand cables (2 pilot wires)

Up to about 10 km telephone-type pilotwire length

Connection to an external current sum-mation transformer

Pilot wire supervision (option) Remote trip command External current summation transformer

4AM4930 to be ordered separately

Fig. 58: 7SD600

Fig. 59: 7UT512 Fig. 60: 7UT513


87 L

7UT512

Differential protection for machines andpower transformers

with additional functions, such as: Numerical matching to transformer ratio

and connection group (no matchingtransformers necessary)

Thermal overload protection Backup overcurrent protection Measured-value indication for commis-

sioning (no separate instruments neces-sary)

Load monitor, event and fault recording

7UT513

Differential protectionfor three-winding transformers

with the same functions as 7UT512, plus: Sensitive restricted ground-fault

protection Sensitive d.t. or i.d.m.t. ground-fault-

o/c-protection


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

87BB BF

7SS50

Numerical busbar andbreaker failure protection

With absolutely secure 2-out-of-2 meas-urement and additional check zone, eachprocessed on separate microprocessorhardware

Mixed current measurement With fast operating time (< 15 ms) Extreme stability against c.t. saturation Completely self-monitoring, including c.t.

circuits, isolator positions and run time With integrated circuit-breaker failure

protection With commissioning-friendly aids (indica-

tion of all feeder, operating and stabiliz-ing currents)

With event and fault recording Designed for single and multiple bus-

bars, up to 8 busbar sections and 32bays

7SS52

Distributed numerical busbarand breaker failure protection

With absolutely secure 2-out-of-2 meas-urement and additional check zone, eachprocessed on separate microprocessorhardware

Phase-segregated measurement With fast operating time (< 15 ms) Extreme stability against c.t. saturation Completely self-monitoring, including c.t.

circuits, isolator positions and run time With integrated 2-stage circuit-breaker

failure protection

Fig. 63: 7VH83

Fig. 64: 7VH80

Fig. 61: 7SS50 Fig. 62: 7SS52


With commissioning-friendly aids (indica-tion of all feeder, operating and stabiliz-ing currents)

With event and fault recording Designed for single and multiple bus-

bars, up to 12 busbar sections and 48bays

7VH80

High impedance differential relay

Single-phase type Robust solid-state design

87

87

Inrush stabilized through filtering Fast operation: 15 ms (l > 5 x setting) Optionally, external voltage limiters

(varistor)

7VH83

High impedance differential relay

Three-phase type Robust solid-state design Integral buswire supervision Integral c.t. shorting relay Inrush stabilized through filtering Fast operation: 21 ms (l > 5 x setting) Optionally, external voltage limiters

(varistors)

1 2 3 48

Bay units

Central unit

Optic fibers


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 65b: Numerical protection of a generating unit(example). Cubicle design.

7UM511/12/15/16

Multifunctional devicesfor machine protection

With 10 protection functions on average,with flexible combination to form com-plete protection systems, from thesmallest to the largest motor generatorunits (see Fig. 66)

With improved measurement methodsbased on Fourier filters and the evalua-tion of symmetrical components (fullynumeric, frequency compensated)

With load monitoring, event and faultrecording

See also separate reference list formachine protection.Order No. E50001-U321-A39-X-7600

7VE51

Paralleling device

for synchronization of generators andnetworks Absolutely secure against spurious

switching due to duplicate measurementwith different procedures

With numerical measurand filtering thatensures exact synchronization even innetworks suffering transients

With synchrocheck option Available in two versions: 7VE511 with-

out, 7VE512 with voltage and frequencybalancing


7UT512

7UM511

7UM512

7UT513

7VE51

7SJ511

G

3281u 59 40 497UM511

517SJ511

87T7UT513

257VE51 Synchronizing

59N 64R 467UM512

87G7UT512

Fig. 65a: Numerical protection of a generating unit(example). Single-line diagram.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


1) for special applications2) IE> sensitive stage,suitable for rotor or statorearth fault protection3) altogether 4 frequency stages,to be used as either f> or f<4) altogether 4 frequency stages,to be used as either f> or f<5) tank protection6) evaluation of displacement voltage7) 1 stage

ANSINo.*

51

51, 37

49

46

87

59

27

59GN

53GN

81o

81u

3Z

40

64R

24

21

78

87N


2)

6)

3)

3)

2)

4

2

Function

Overcurrent

Overcurrent/Undercurrent

Thermal overload

Load unbalance

Differential protection

Overvoltage

Undervoltage

U< with frequency evaluation

Direct voltage

Stator

ground fault protection <90%

Stator

ground fault protection 100%

Interturn fault protection

Overfrequency

Underfrequency

Reverse power

Forward power1)

Underexcitation (field failure)

protection

Rotor

ground fault protection

Overexcitation

protection

Impedance protection

Out-of-step protection

Restricted ground fault prot.

Trip control inputs

Trip circuit monitoring

Relay

Numerical generator protectionProtection functions

7UM

511

I>, t(+U<)

IE>, t

I>>, t

I ><, t

I2t

I2ln>, t

(I2lln)2 t

∆lG>

∆lT>

∆lg>

U>, t

U>>, t

U>, t

t = f(U<)

U(f)<, t

U=><, t

UE >,t

UE + lE>,t

RE <,t

UW >,t

f>

f<

(–P)>, t

(+P)>, t

ϑ>, t

ϑ1 + Ue>, t

RE<, t(fN)

RE<, t(1Hz)

IE>, t(fN)

U/f >, t

(U/f)2 t

Z<, t

ϑ (Z) >, n

∆lE

t, trip

7UM

512

4)

4)

7)

7)

4

2

7UM

515

3)

3)

4

2

7UM

516

4

2

Fig. 66


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

59 27 59N 81

24

7VK512

Autoreclose and check-synchronism relay

Highly flexible autoreclose relay with orwithout check-synchronism function.Available functions include: Single or/and three-pole auto-reclosure Up to 10 autoreclose shots Independently settable dead times and

reclaim time Sequential fault recognition Check-synchronism or dead line/dead

bus charging Selectable setting groups Event and fault recording (voltage inputs)

7SV512

Breaker failure protection relay

Variable and failsafe breaker failure pro-tection (2-out-of-4 current check,2-channel logic and trip circuits)

Phase selective for single and three-poleautoreclosure

Reset time < 10 ms (sinusoidal current) < 20 ms worst case

“No current“ condition control using thebreaker auxiliary contacts

Integral end fault protection Selectable setting groups Event and fault recording

7SV600

Breaker failure protection relay

Phase selective for single and three-poleautoreclosure

Reset time < 10 ms (Sinusoidal current) < 20 ms worst case

“No current“ condition control using thebreaker auxiliary contacts

Selectable setting groups Event and fault recording Lockout of trip command

7RW600

Voltage and Frequency Relay

Intelligent protection and monitoringdevice

Two separate voltage measuring inputs Applicable as two independent single-

phase units or one multiphase unit(positive sequence voltage)

High-set and low-set voltage supervisionU>>, U>, U<

4-step frequency supervision f>< 4-step rate of change of frequency

supervision df/dt> All voltage, frequency and df/dt steps

with separate definite time delay setting Overfluxing (overexcitation) protection

U/f (t) as thermal model,U/f >> (DT delay)

Voltage and frequency indication Fault recording

(momentary or RMS values) RS485 serial interface for connection of

a PC or coordination with controlsystems

Fig. 67: 7RW600


Fig. 68: 7SV600

50BF


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Front view

Case 7XP2030-2 for relays 7SD511, 7SJ511/12, 7SJ531, 7UT512, 7VE51, 7SV512, 7SK512

145

150

17230 29.5

266244

231.5

1.5

10

Opticalfibreinterface

131.57.310513.2 5.4

ø 5or

M4 255.8

146

245

ø 6

Side view Panel cutout

225

220 17230 29.5

266

1,5

231.5

10

Optical fiber interface180

ø 5or

M4

206.513.67.3

245 255.8

221

ø 6

5.4

Front view

Case 7XP2040-2 for relays 7SA511, 7UT513, 7SD512, 7UM5**, 7VE512, 7SD502/503

Side view Panel cutout

56.5±0.370

75

Back view

244266

Side view

Case 7XP20 for relays 7SJ600, 7RW600, 7SD600, 7SV600

37 172 29.5

245 +1 255 ±0.3

71+2

ø 5or

M4

7.3

ø 6

Panel cutout

Fig. 69

Fig. 70

Fig. 71

All dimensions in mm.

Power System ProtectionRelay Dimensions


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 72

Fig. 73

Fig. 74

70172 29.530

266244

75

Case 7XP2020-2 for relay 7VH83

3056.3

13.27.3

ø 5or

M4

5.4

71

ø 6

255.8245

Front view Side view Back view Panel cutout


Case for relay 7SJ551

105 17230

266

29.5

115

244 255.9

86.4100

Front view Side view Back view


172 29.530

133111.0

75

Case 7XP2010-2 for relay 7VH80, 7TR93

3056.3

20.57.3

ø 5or M4

5.4

71

ø 6

122.5112

70

Front view Side view Back view Panel cutout


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Case for 7SJ61, 62

Case for 7SJ631/632/633

Panel cutoutRear view 1

Sideview

341.33

146/5.74

105/4.13131.5/5.17

ø6/0.24diameter

ø5 or M4/0.2 diameter

150/5.90145/5.70

244/

9.61

RS232-port

SUB-DConnector

FO2

0.07

29.51.16

172/6.77

Mounting plate

244/

9.61

RS232-port

SUB-DConnector

FO2

0.07

29.51.16

172/6.77

Mounting plate

Sideview

225/8.85220/8.66

221/8.70

180/7.08206.5/8.12

ø5 or M4/0.2 diameter

ø6/0.24diameter

Panel cutoutRear view 1

266/10.47

266/10.47

255.8/10.07245/9.65

255.8/10.07245/9.64

Fig. 75


Fig. 76b

Fig. 76a


13.2

7.3

245

405

431.5

5.4

255.8

446

ø 6

ø 5 or M4

Panel cutout

266

445

450

Front view

2661.5

10

30 172 29.5

Optical fiberinterface

Side view

Case 7XP2060-2 for relay 7SA513


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Side view Rear view Side view

Case for 7SJ631/632/633Special version with detached operator panel

225/8.85220/8.66 Mounting

plate

Connection cable68 poles to basicunit length 2.5 m/8 ft.,2.4 in

29.51.16

27.11.06

20.07

266/

10.4

7

RS232-port

Mounting plate

FO

202.5/7.97 291.14

301.18

266/10.47 312/12.28 244/9.61

Detached operator panel


Fig. 77: 7SJ63, 1/2 surface mounting case (only with detached panel, see Fig. 42, page 6/21)


Case for 7SJ635/636:Special version with detached operator panel Rear view

Side view

Mounting plate

SUB-DConnector

FO

202.5/7.97 291.14

301.18

266/10.47 312/12.28 244/9.61

450/17.71

445/17.51

Fig. 78: 7SJ63, 1/1 surface mounting case (only with detached panel, see Fig. 42, page 6/21)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

7XR9672 Core-balance current transformer (zero sequence c.t.)

14

K

102

200

120

2

55

120

14.5 x 6.5 K

L

k l96 104

M6

7XR9600 Core-balance current transformer (zero sequence c.t.)

170

143

81

94

8012

Diam.6.4

54

Diam.149

Fig. 79

Fig. 80



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 81

4AM4930 Current summation transformer for relay 7SD600

90

92

121

62

110

75

64

110

G H I K L M Y

A B C D E F Z

G H I K L M Y

64

63.563.5 100


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

6

5

4

3

2

1

10

9

8

7

11

13

12

20

16

15

14

19

18

17

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

Radial feeder circuit

Ring main circuit

Distribution feeder with reclosers

Parallel feeder circuit

Cable or short overhead line with infeedfrom both ends

Overhead lines or longer cables with infeedfrom both ends

Subtransmission line

Transmission line with reactor

Transmission line or cable(with wide band communication)

Transmission line, breaker-and-a-half terminal

Cables andoverhead lines

Applicationgroup

Circuit equipmentprotected

Transformers Small transformer infeed

Large or important transformer infeed

Dual infeed with single transformer

Parallel incoming transformer feeder

Parallel incoming transformer feeder with bus tie

Three-winding transformer

Autotransformer

Large autotransformer bank

Motors Small and medium-sized motors

Large HV motors

Generators Smallest generator < 500 kW

Small generator, around 1 MW

Large generator > 1 MW

Large generator >1 MW feeding into a networkwith isolated neutral

Generator-transformer unit

Busbars Busbar protection by o/c relays withreverse interlocking

High-impedance differential busbar protection

Low-impedance differential busbar protection

6/43

6/43

6/44

6/44

6/45

6/45

6/46

6/48

6/49

6/49

Page

6/51

6/51

6/52

6/52

6/53

6/53

6/54

6/54

6/55

6/55

6/56

6/56

6/57

6/57

6/59

6/60

6/61

6/61

Circuitnumber

Power System ProtectionTypical Protection Schemes

Fig. 82


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


1. Radial feeder circuit

Notes:

1) Autoreclosure 79 only with O.H. lines.2) Negative sequence o/c protection 46 as

sensitive backup protection against un-symmetrical faults.

General hints:

– The relay at the far end (D) gets theshortest operating time.Relays further upstream have to betime-graded against the next down-stream relay in steps of about 0.3seconds.

– Inverse-time curves can be selectedaccording to the following criteria:

– Definite time:source impedance large compared tothe line impedance, i.e. small currentvariation between near and far endfaults

– Inverse time:Longer lines, where the fault current ismuch less at the end of the line than atthe local end.

– Very or extremely inverse time:Lines where the line impedance is largecompared to the source impedance(high difference for close-in and remotefaults) or lines, where coordination withfuses or reclosers is necessary.Steeper characteristics provide alsohigher stability on service restoration(cold load pick-up and transformer inrush currents)

2. Ring main circuit

General hints:

– Operating time of overcurrent relays tobe coordinated with downstream fusesof load transformers.(Preferably very inverse time characteris-tic with about 0.2 s grading-time delay

– Thermal overload protection for thecables (option)

– Negative sequence o/c protection 46 assensitive protection against unsymmetri-cal faults (option)

Fig. 83

Fig. 84

51N51 46 79

51N51 46

51N51 46

Infeed

Furtherfeeders

I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ARC

2) 1)

I>, t IE>, t I2>, t

A

B

C

Load

Load Load

D I>, t IE>, t I2>, t

7SJ60

7SJ60

7SJ60

Transformerprotection,see Fig. 94

51N51 46 49

I>, t IE>, t I2>, t52

5252

51N51 46 49

I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ϑ>52ϑ>

Infeed

7SJ60

Transformerprotection,see Fig. 97

7SJ60


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


3. Distribution feeder withreclosers

General hints:

– The feeder relay operating characteris-tics, delay times and autoreclosurecycles must be carefully coordinatedwith downstream reclosers, sectionaliz-ers and fuses.The instantaneous zone 50/50N is nor-mally set to reach out to the first mainfeeder sectionalizing point. It has to en-sure fast clearing of close-in faults andprevent blowing of fuses in this area(“fuse saving”). Fast autoreclosure isinitiated in this case.Further time delayed tripping and reclo-sure steps (normally 2 or 3) have to begraded against the recloser.

– The o/c relay should automaticallyswitch over to less sensitive characteris-tics after longer breaker interruptiontimes to enable overriding of subse-quent cold load pick-up and transformerinrush currents.

Fig. 85

Fig. 86

4. Parallel feeder circuit

General hints:

– This circuit is preferably used for theinterruption-free supply of importantconsumers without significant backfeed.

– The directional o/c protection 67/67Ntrips instantaneously for faults on theprotected line. This allows the savingof one time-grading interval for the o/c-relays at the infeed.

– The o/c relay functions 51/51N haveeach to be time-graded against therelays located upstream.

52

50/51

50N/51N

46

79

52

7SJ60

Infeed

I>>,I>, t

IE>>,IE>, t

I2>, t

Auto-reclose

Recloser

Sectionalizers

Fuses

Furtherfeeders

52

51N51 49 46 7SJ60

7SJ6267N67 51 51N

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

52

Infeed

Protectionsame asline or cable 1

I>, t IE>, t I2>, tϑ>

Load

O H line orcable 1

O H line orcable 2

Load


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Cables or short overhead lines withinfeed from both ends

Notes:

1) Autoreclosure only with overhead lines2) Overload protection only with cables3) Differential protection options:

– Type 7SD511/12 with direct fiber-opticconnection up to about 20 km or via a64 kbit/s channel of a general purposePCM connection (optical fiber, micro-wave)

– Type 7SD600 with 2-wire pilot cablesup to about 10 km

– Type 7SD502 with 2-wire pilot cablesup to about 20 km

– Type 7SD503 with 3-wire pilot cablesup to about 10 km.

4) Functions 49 and 79 only with relays7SD5**. 7SD600 is a cost-effective solu-tion where only the function 87L isrequired (external current summationtransformer 4AM4930 to be orderedseparately)


Fig. 87

Fig. 88

6. Overhead lines or longer cables withinfeed from both ends

Notes:

1) Teleprotection logic 85 for transfer tripor blocking schemes. Signal transmis-sion via pilot wire, power-line carrier,microwave or optical fiber (to be pro-vided separately). The teleprotectionsupplement is only necessary if fastfault clearance on 100% line length isrequired, i.e. second zone tripping(about 0.3 s delay) cannot be acceptedfor far end faults.

2) Directional ground-fault protection 67Nwith inverse-time delay against high-resistance faults

3) Single or multishot autoreclosure 79only with overhead lines

4) Reduced version 7SA510 may be usedwhere no, or only 3-pole autoreclosureis required.

5252

52

51N/51N 87L

79

49

1)

2)

52

51N/51N

87L

79

49

1)

2)

3)

52

52

52

52 52 52 52

4)

4)

7SD600 or7SD5**

7SD600 or7SD5**

Load

Infeed

Sameprotectionfor parallel line,if applicable

Line orcable

Backfeed

7SJ60

7SJ60

2)

3)

2)

3)

1)

4)

4)

7SA511

52

52

52

85 79

52

52

52

52

52 52 52 52

21/21N

79

67N

67N21/21N

85

7SA511

Load

Infeed

Sameprotectionfor parallel line,if applicable

Line orcable

Backfeed


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


7. Subtransmission line

Note:

1) Connection to open delta winding ifavailable. Relays 7SA511 and 7SJ512can, however, also be set to calculatethe zero-sequence voltage internally.

General hints:

– Distance teleprotection is proposed asmain, and time graded directional O/C asbackup protection.

– The 67N function of 7SA511 providesadditional high-resistance ground faultprotection. It can be used in a directionalcomparison scheme in parallel with the21/21N-function, but only in POTT mode.If the distance protection scheme ope-rates in PUTT mode, 67N is only availa-ble as time-delayed function.

– Recommended schemes:PUTT on medium and long lines withphase shift carrier or other secure com-munication channel.POTT on short lines.BLOCKING with On/Off carrier (all linelengths).

Fig. 89

7SJ62

Signal transmissionequipment

2121N7925

67N6878

BF

85

5151N

6767N

SR

CH To remoteline end

1)

7SA511


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Application criteria for frequently used teleprotection schemes

Dependable chan-nel (only with ex-ternal faults)

Amplitude modu-lated ON/OFFpower line carrier(same frequencycan be used at allterminals)

Permissive under-reaching transferredtripping (PUTT)

Permissive over-reaching transferredtripping (POTT)

Blocking Unblocking

Applicable only with Frequency shift

power line carrier

All kinds of line(Preferred USpractice)

Short lines in particu-lar when high fault re-sistance coverage isrequired

Multi-terminal andtapped lines with in-termediate infeed ef-fects

Line con-figuration:

Signal trans-mission:

Secure and dependable channel: Frequency shift power line carrier (phase-to-

phase HF coupling to the protected line, betterHF coupling to a parallel running line to avoidsending through the fault)

Microwave, in particular digital (PCM) Fiber optic cables

Preferredapplication

No distance zoneoverreaching pro-blems, when appliedwith CCVTs on shortlines

Applicable to extremeshort lines below theminimum zone settinglimit

No problems with theimpact of parallel linecoupling.

Simple method Tripping of underrea-

ching zone does notdepend on the chan-nel (release signalfrom the remote lineend not necessary).

No distance zone ortime coordination be-tween line ends ne-cessary, i.e. this modecan easily be usedwith different relaytypes.

Parallel, teed andtapped lines maycause underreachproblems. Carefulconsideration of zero-sequence couplingand intermediate in-feed effects is neces-sary.

Not applicable withweak infeed termi-nals.

Except that a weakinfeed supplementis not necessary

No continuous on-line supervision ofthe channel possi-ble!

Advantages:

Drawbacks:

same asfor POTT

same asfor POTT

same asfor POTT

Fig. 90

Same as for POTT,however, loss of re-mote end signaldoes not completelyblock the protectionscheme. Tripping isin this case releasedwith a short timedelay of about20 ms (unblockinglogic).

EHV linesNormally used withmedium and long lines

(7SA511/513 relays al-low use also with shortlines due to their inde-pendent X and R settingof all distance zones).

Distance zone andtime coordination withremote line end relaysnecessary

Tripping depends onreceipt of remote endsignal (additional inde-pendent underrea-ching zone of 7SA511/513 relays avoids thisproblem).

Weak infeed supple-ment necessary


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


8. Transmission line with reactor

Note:

1) 51G only applicable with grounded reac-tor neutral.

2) If phase CTs at the low-voltage reactorside are not available, the high-voltagephase CTs and the CT in the neutral canbe connected to a restricted ground faultprotection using one 7VH80 high-imped-ance relay.

General hints:

– Distance relays are proposed as main 1and main 2 protection. Duplicated 7SA513is recommended for long (>100 km) andheavily loaded lines or series-compensat-ed lines and in all cases where extremeshort operating times are required dueto system stability problems.7SA513 as main 1 and 7SA511 as main2 can be used in the normal case.

– Operating time of the 7SA513 relay is inthe range of 15 to 25 ms dependent onthe particular fault condition, while theoperating time of the 7SA511 is 25 to35 ms respectively.These tripping times are valid for faultsin the underreaching distance zone(80 to 85% of the line length). Remoteend faults must be cleared by the super-imposed teleprotection scheme. Itsoverall operating time depends on thesignal transmission time of the channel(typically 15 to 20 ms for frequency shiftaudio-tone PLC or Microwave channels,and lower than 10 ms for ON/OFF PLCor digital PCM signalling via opticalfibres).Teleprotection schemes based on7SA513 and 7SA511 have therefore ope-rating times in the order of 40 ms and50 ms each. With state-of-the-art two-cycle circuit breakers, fault clearingtimes well below 100 ms (4 to 5 cycles)can normally be achived.

– Dissimilar carrier schemes are recom-mended for main 1 and main 2 protec-tion, for example PUTT, and POTT orBlocking/Unblocking

– Both 7SA513 and 7SA511 can practiseselective single-pole and/or three-poletripping and autoreclosure.The ground current directional compari-son protection 67N of the 7SA513 relayuses phase selectors based on symmet-rical components. Thus, single pole au-toreclosure can also be practised withhigh-resistance faults.The 67N function of the 7SA511 relayshould be used as time delayed direc-tional O/C backup in this case.

– The 67N functions are provided as high-impendance fault protection. 67N of the7SA513 relay is normally used with anadditional channel as separate carrierscheme. Use of a common channel withdistance protection is only possible inthe POTT mode. The 67N function in the7SA511 is blocked when function 21/21N picks up. It can therefore only beused in parallel with the distance direc-tional comparison scheme POTT usingone common channel. Alternatively, it canbe used as time-delayed backup protec-tion.

Fig. 91

67N79

25

To remoteline end

BF6879

CC

TC1 TC2

7SA51385

25

CVT

7SA522 or7SA511

2121N59

2121N

6879

797SJ600

7VH8387R

SR

Direct TripChannel

52R52L

SR

Channel2

SR

Trip52L

Reactor

7SJ600

5151N

5050N

2)

Channel3

85

67N

BF, 59BF

BF

51G


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


10. Transmission line, breaker-and-a-halfterminal

Notes:

1) When the line is switched off and theline isolator is open, high through-fault-currents in the diameter may cause mal-operation of the distance relay due tounequal CT errors (saturation).Normal practice is therefore to block thedistance protection (21/21N) and the di-rectional ground fault protection (67N)under this condition via an auxiliary con-tact of the line isolator. Instead, a stand-by overcurrent function (50/50N, 51/51N)is released to protect the remaining stubbetween the breakers (“stub“protection).

2) Overvoltage protection only with7SA513

General hints:

– The protection functions of one diame-ter of a breaker-and-a-half arrangementare shown.

– The currents of two CTs have each to besummed up to get the relevant linecurrent as input for main 1 and 2 lineprotection.

To remoteline end

CC

TC1 TC2

79 97L

52L

SR

Channel1

79

6879

59

BF

BF

2121N

67N

25

7SA522 or7SA511

SR

PCMFOWire

Direct connection with dedicatedfibers up to about 20 km

85

X.21

1)

7SD512

optial fiber

Fig. 92

9. Transmission line or cable(with wide band communication)

Note:

1) Overvoltage protection only with7SA513

General hints:

– Digital PCM coded communication (withn x 64 kBit/s channels) between lineends is now getting more and more fre-quently available, either directly by opti-cal or microwave point-to-point links, orvia a general purpose digital communica-tion network.In both cases, the unit-type current com-parison protection 7SD511/12 can beapplied. It provides absolute phase and-zone selectivity by phase-segregatedmeasurement, and is not affected bypower swing or parallel line zero-se-quence coupling effects. It is further acurrent-only protection that does notneed VT connection. For this reason, theadverse effects of CVT transients arenot applicable.This makes it in particular suitable fordouble and multicircuit lines where com-plex fault situations can occur.Pilot wire protection can only be appliedto short lines or cables due to the inher-ent limitation of the applied measuringprinciple. The 7SD511/12 can be appliedto lines up to about 20 km in direct re-lay-to-relay connection via dedicated op-tical fiber cores (see also application 5),and also to much longer distances up toabout 100 km by using separate PCMdevices for optical fiber or microwavetransmission.The 7SD511/512 then uses only a smallpart (64 kBit/s) of the total transmissioncapacity being in the order of Mbits/s.

– The unit protection 7SD511 can be com-bined with the distance relay 7SA513 or7SA511 to form a redundant protectionsystem with dissimilar measuring princi-ples complementing each other. Thisprovides the highest degree of availabili-ty. Also, separate signal transmissionways should be used for main 1 andmain 2 protection, e.g. optical fiber ormicro-wave, and power line carrier(PLC).1. The criteria for selection of 7SA513 or

7SA511 are the same as discussed inapplication 8.The current comparison protectionhas a typical operating time of 25 msfor faults on 100% line length includ-ing signalling time.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


– The location of the CTs on both sides ofthe circuit-breakers is typical for substa-tions with dead-tank breakers. Live-tankbreakers may have CTs only on one sideto reduce cost. A Fault between circuitbreakers and CT (end fault) may thenstill be fed from one side even when thebreaker has opened. Consequently, finalfault clearing by cascaded tripping has tobe accepted in this case.The 7SV512 relay provides the neces-sary end fault protection function andtrips the breakers of the remaining in-feeding circuits.

– For the selection of the main 1 and main2 line protection schemes, the com-ments of application examples 8 and 9apply.

– Autoreclosure (79) and synchrocheckfunction (25) are each assigned directlyto the circuit breakers and controlled bymain 1 and 2 line protection in parallel.In case of a line fault, both adjacentbreakers have to be tripped by the lineprotection. The sequence of automaticreclosure of both breakers or, alterna-tively, the automatic reclosure of only

one breaker and the manual closure ofthe other breaker, may be made selecta-ble by a control switch.

– A coordinated scheme of control circuitsis necessary to ensure selective tripping,interlocking and reclosing of the twobreakers of one line (or transformerfeeder).

– The voltages for synchrochecking haveto be selected according to the breakerand isolator positions by a voltage repli-ca circuit.

Fig. 93

79

7VK512UBB1

25UBB1

UL1 or UL2or UBB2

52

87BB1

7SS5. or7VH83

79

7VK512

25UL1 or UBB1

UL2 or UBB2

52

79

7VK512

25

UL2 orUL1 or UBB1

UBB2

52

BFUBB2

BF

BF

87BB2

7SS5. or7VH83

85

5050N 5951

51N

7SA522 or7SA51121

21N 67N

Line 1

1) 1) 2)

87L 7SD511/12

Line 2

UL2

BB1

BB2

Main 1

Main 2

Protection of Line 2(or transformer,if applicable)

UL1

7SV512 or7SV600

7SV512 or7SV600

7SV512 or7SV600


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


11. Small transformer infeed

General hints:

– Ground-faults on the secondary side aredetected by current relay 51G which,however, has to be time-graded againstdownstream feeder protection relays.The restricted ground-fault relay 87N canoptionally be provided to achieve fastclearance of ground faults in the trans-former secondary winding.Relay 7VH80 is of the high-impedancetype and requires class X CTs with equaltransformation ratio.

– Primary breaker and relay may be re-placed by fuses.

12. Large or important transformerinfeed

Notes:

1) Three winding transformer relaytype 7UT513 may be replaced by two-winding type 7UT512 plus high-imped-ance-type restricted ground-fault relay7VH80. However, class X CT coreswould additionally be necessary in thiscase. (See small transformer protection)

2) 51G may additionally be provided,in particular for the protection of theneutral resistance, if provided.

3) Relays 7UT512/513 provide numericalratio and vector group adaption.Matching transformers as used withtraditional relays are therefore no longerapplicable.

5150 50N 49

7SJ60

52

52

46

63

87N

51G

7SJ60

RN

52

HV infeed

I>> I>, t IE> ϑ>

Load

Optional resistor orreactor

I2>, t

I>>

IE>7VH80

o/c-relay

Distribution bus

Fuse

Load

5150 51N 49 46

52

52

7UT513

51G 7SJ60

87N

51N51

87T

52

52

63

7SJ60 or7SJ61

I>> I>, t IE> ϑ> I2>, t

Load

HV infeed High voltage, e.g. 115 kV

2)

1)

I>, t IE>, t

7SJ60

Load

Load bus, e.g. 13.8 kV

Fig. 95

Fig. 94


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

13. Dual-infeed with single transformer

Notes:

1) Line CTs are to be connected to sepa-rate stabilizing inputs of the differentialrelay 87T in order to assure stability incase of line through-fault currents.

2) Relay 7UT513 provides numerical ratioand vector group adaption. Matchingtransformers, as used with traditionalrelays, are therefore no longer applica-ble.

14. Parallel incoming transformerfeeders

Note:

1) The directional functions 67 and 67Ndo not apply for cases where the trans-formers are equipped with transformerdifferential relays 87T.


52 52

46

51 51N50

49

63

7SJ60

7SJ60

52

52 52 52

7UT51387T87N

Protection line 1same as line 2

Load

I>> IE>

Protection line 221/21N or 87L + 51 + optionally 67/67N

I>> I>, t IE>, t

ϑ>I2>

7SJ60 or7SJ61

Loadbus

51G

51N51

5150 51N 49 46

52

52

51G

52

52

52 52

63

51N51

52

67 67N

I>, t IE>, t IE>

7SJ62

I>> I>, t IE>, t ϑ> I2>, t

Load

HV infeed 1

7SJ60

Load

HV infeed 27SJ60 or

7SJ61

Protection

same asinfeed 1

I>

1)

Load

Loadbus

IE>, t

Fig. 97

Fig. 96


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

15. Parallel incoming transformerfeeders with bus tie

Note:

1) Overcurrent relays 51, 51N each con-nected as a partial differential scheme.This provides simple and fast busbarprotection and saves one time-gradingstep.


16. Three-winding transformer

Notes:

1) The zero-sequence current must beblocked from entering the differentialrelay by a delta winding in the CT con-nection on the transformer sides withgrounded winding neutral. This is to avoidfalse operation with external groundfaults (numerical relays provide this func-tion by calculation). About 30% sensitivi-ty, however, is then lost in case of inter-nal faults.Optionally, the zero-sequence currentcan be regained by introducing the wind-ing neutral current in the differential re-lay (87T). Relay type 7UT513 providestwo current inputs for this purpose.By using this feature, the ground faultsensitivity can be upgraded again to itsoriginal value.

2) Restricted ground fault protection (87T)is optional. It provides back-up protec-tion for ground faults and increasedground fault sensitivity (about 10%IN,compared to about 20 to 30%IN of thetransformer differential relay).Separate class X CT-cores with equaltransmission ratio are additionally re-quired for this protection.

General hint:

– In this example, the transformer feedstwo different distribution networks withcogeneration. Restraining differential re-lay inputs are therefore provided at eachtransformer side.If both distribution networks only con-sume load and no through-feed is possi-ble from one MV network to the other,parallel connection of the CTs of the twoMV transformer windings is admissibleallowing the use of a two-winding differ-ential relay (7UT512).

HV Infeed

51 51N 51N51

7SJ60

87N 7VH80

7SJ60 7SJ60

63

87T 7UT513

87N 7VH80

M.V.

52

52 52 52 52M.V.

51G 51G 7SJ60

1)

51

I>, t

49

ϑ>

46

I2>, t

50

I>>7SJ60 or7SJ61

Load

I>, t IE>, t IE>,tI>, t

Backfeed Load Backfeed

Fig. 98

Fig. 99

5150 51N 49 46

52

52

51G

51 51N

52

52

5151N

52

63 63

I>> I>, t IE>, t ϑ> I2>, t

Load

Infeed 1

7SJ60

Load

I>, t IE>, t I>, tIE>, t

7SJ60 7SJ60

Infeed 27SJ60

Protectionsame asinfeed 1


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

1063

52

7UT513

52

51

50BF

7SJ60

59N

7RW60

87TL

49

87TH7VH83

51G

7SJ60

EHV

50BF

50BF

52

7SV600 7SV60021 68

78 7SA513

52

52

50BF

50BF

7SV600

7SV600

21

21N

6878

7SA511

HV

21N

51N 50BF 46 50

51

63

52

7UT513

52

51

50BF

7SJ60

59N

7RW60

52

87T 49

7SJ60

51N

50BF

46

5051

87N 7VH80

7SJ60 or7SJ61

2)

1)

1)

1)


17. Autotransformer

Notes:

1) 87N high-impedance protection requiresspecial class X current transformer coreswith equal transmission ratio.

2) The 7SJ60 relay can alternatively beconnected in series with the 7UT513 re-lay to save this CT core.

General hint:

– Two different protection schemes areprovided:87T is chosen as low-impedance three-winding version (7UT513). 87N is a sin-gle-phase high-impedance relay (7VH80)connected as restricted ground fault pro-tection. (In this example, it is assumedthat the phaseends of the transformerwinding are not accessible on the neu-tral side, i.e. there exists a CT only in theneutral grounding connection.)

18. Large autotransformer bank

General hints:

– The transformer bank is connected in a11/2 breaker arrangement.Duplicated differential protection is pro-posed:Main 1: Low-impedance differential pro-tection 87TL (7UT513) connected to thetransformer bushing CTs.Main 2: High-impedance overall differen-tial protection 87TH (7VH83). Separateclass X cores and equal CT ratios are re-quired for this type of protection.

– Back-up protection is provided by dis-tance relays (7SA513 and 7SA511), each“looking“ with an instantaneous firstzone about 80% into the transformerand with a time-delayed zone beyondthe transformer.

– The tertiary winding is assumed to feeda small station supply network with iso-lated neutral.

Fig. 100

Fig. 101


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

49CR

52

4951N50 7SJ60

M

49CR

52

50 7SJ62 or7SJ551

51G 67G

M

Lockedrotor

I>>

IE>

ϑ> I2>

4649

I<

37

2)7XR961)60/1A

3)

I>> Lockedrotor

IE> ϑ>

46

I2>


Fig. 102a

19. Small and medium-sized motors< about 1 MW

a) With effective or low-resistancegrounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor)

General hint:

– Applicable to low-voltage motors andhigh-voltage motors with low-resistancegrounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor).

49CR

52

50

7UT512

51G 67G

7SJ62 or7SJ551

49T

Speedswitch M

87M

37

Lockedrotor

I>>

IE>

ϑ> I2>

4649

U<

27

2)7XR961)60/1A

Startupsuper-visior

I<Optional

RTD's 4)optional

3)

3)

5) 6)

Fig. 102b

Fig. 103

b) With high-resistance grounded infeed(IE ≤ IN Motor)

Notes:

1) Window-type zero sequence CT.2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-

tion 67N only applicable with infeedfrom isolated or Peterson-coil-groundednetwork.(For dimensioning of the sensitive direc-tional ground fault protection, see alsoapplication circuit No. 24)

3) If 67G ist not applicable, relay 7SJ602can be applied.

20. Large HV motors > about 1 MW

Notes:

1) Window-type zero sequence CT.2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-

tion 67N only applicable with infeedfrom isolated or Peterson-coil-groundednetwork.

3) This function is only needed for motorswhere the runup time is longer than thesafe stall time tE.

According to IEC 79-7, the tE-time is thetime needed to heat up AC windings,when carrying the starting current IA,from the temperature reached in ratedservice and at maximum ambient tem-perature to the limiting temperature.A separate speed switch is used tosupervise actual starting of the motor.The motor breaker is tripped if the motordoes not reach speed in the preset time.The speed switch is part of the motordelivery itself.

4) Pt100, Ni100, Ni1205) 49T only available with relay type 7SJ56) High impedance relay 7VH83 may be

used instead of 7UT12 if separateclass x CTs. are provided at the terminaland star-point side of the motor winding.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

7SJ60G

46 495151N

I>, IE>, t

LV

I2> ϑ>

G146 4951

51N7SJ60

RN =VN

√3 • (0.5 to 1) • Irated

I>, IE>, t I2> ϑ>

MV

Generator 2

1)

Fig. 104b: With resistance grounded neutral

21. Smallest generators < 500 kW

Fig. 104a: With solidly grounded neutral

22. Small generator, typically 1 MW

Note:

1) Two CTs in V connection also sufficient.

Fig. 105


52

7UM511

G

51

51G

64R

PI>, t

IE>, t

I2>

4632

L.O.F

40

1)

Field

Note:

1) If a window-type zero-sequence CT isprovided for sensitive ground fault pro-tection, relay 7SJ602 with separateground current input can be used(similar to Fig. 102b of application exam-ple 19b).


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Three-phase-CTs inresidual (Holmgreen)connection

Three-phase-CTs inresidual (Holmgreen)connection with specialfactory calibration tominimum residual falsecurrent (≤ 2 mA)

2 mA 5 mA 8 mA12 mA

1A CT: ca. 50 mA5A CT: ca. 200 mA

2 – 3‰ of secondaryrated CT current In SEC:

10 – 15 mA with 5A CTs

In general not suitable forsensitive earth faultprotection

1A CTs are notrecommented inthis case

Core-balance c.t. 60/1 A:1 single CT2 parallel CTs3 parallel CTs4 parallel CTs

Relay ground current inputconnected to:

Minimum relay setting: Comments:

52

7UM511

G

51G

64R

P

87

87G

51

27

81

59

51 32 46 40 49

7SJ60

MV

I

RE Field<

I>, t

2)

IG

O/Cv.c.

I2> L.O.F. ϑ>

1)

1)

U<

U>

f>

IE>, t

Field

3)

rise of output voltage above upper limit.2) Differential relaying options:

– 7UT512: Low-impedance differentialprotection 87

– 7UT513: Low-impedance differen-tial 87 with integral restricted ground-fault protection 87G

– 7VH83: High-impedance differentialprotection 87 (requires class X CTs)

3) 7SJ60 used as voltage-controlled o/cprotection.Function 27 of 7UM511 is used toswitch over to a second, more sensitivesetting group.


24. Large generator > 1 MW feeding intoa network with isolated neutral

General hints:

– The setting range of the directionalground fault protection 67G in the7UM511 relay is 2 – 100 mA.Dependent on the current transformeraccuracy, a certain minimum setting isrequired to avoid false operation on loador transient rush currents:

23. Smallest generators > 1 MW

Notes:

1) Functions 81 und 59 only requiredwhere prime mover can assume excessspeed and voltage regulator may permit

Fig. 106

Fig. 107


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Notes:

1) The standard core-balance CT 7XR96has a transformation ratio of 60/1 A.

2) Instead of an open delta winding at theterminal VT, a single-phase VT at themachine neutral could be used as zero-sequence polarizing voltage.

3) The grounding transformer is designedfor a short-time rating of 20 seconds. Toprevent overloading, the load resistor isautomatically switched off by a time-de-layed zero-sequence voltage relay (59G+ 62) and a contactor (52).

4) During the startup time of the generatorwith open breaker, the grounding sourceis not available. To ensure ground faultprotection during this time interval, anauxilliary contact of the breaker can beused to change over the directionalground fault relay function (67G) to azero-sequence voltage detection func-tion (59G) via a contact converter input.

Fig. 108

– In practice, efforts are generally made toprotect about 90% of the machine wind-ing, measured from the machine termi-nals. The full ground current for a termi-nal fault must then be ten times thesetting value which corresponds to thefault current of a fault at 10% distancefrom the machine neutral.For the most sensitive setting of 2 mA,we need therefore 20 mA secondaryground current, corresponding to (60/1) x20 mA = 1.2 A primary.This current may be delivered by thenetwork ground capacitances if enoughcables are contained. In this case, thedirectional ground fault protection (67G)has to be set to reactive power mea-surement (U x I x sin w).If sufficient capacitive ground current isnot available, a grounding transformerwith resistive zero-sequence load can beinstalled as ground current source at thestation busbar. The 67G function has inthis case to be set to active (wattmetric)power measurement (U x I x cosw).The smallest standard grounding trans-former TGAG 3541 has a 20 s short timerating of PG = 27 kVA.

In a 5kV network, it would deliver:

IG 20s = ––––––- = –––––––––––– = 9.4 A

corresponding to a relay input current of9.4 A x 1/60 = 156 mA. This would pro-vide a 90% protection range with a set-ting of about 15 mA, allowing the use of4 parallel connected core balance CTs.The resistance at the 500V open-deltawinding of the grounding transformerwould then have to be designed forRG = USEC

2 / PG = 500 V2 / 27,000 VA =9.26 Ohm (27 KW, 20 s).For a 5 MVA machine and 600/5 A CTswith special calibration for minimum re-sidual false current, we would get a sec-ondary current of IG SEC = 9.4 A /(600/5) =78 mA.With a relay setting of 12 mA, the pro-tection range would in this case be100 (1- ––) = 85%.

A 3 x PG

U N

A 3 x 27,000VA

5000V

1278

87

52

7UT512

Small grid with isolated neutral

1)

REF<

I2>I>, t

IE U< U> f

Uo >

4)

P L.O.F

7UM512

Single-phase VT

2)

7XR9660/1A

GField

64F

51 46 32

27

40

59 81

59G

67G

52

RB

GroundingtransformerUN

3100

3 3500

V

3)

62

59G


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

25. Generator-transformer unit

Notes:

1) 100% stator ground-fault protectionbased on 20 Hz voltage injection

2) Sensitive field ground-fault protectionbased on 1 Hz voltage injection

3) Only used functions shown, furtherintegrated functions available in each re-lay type (see ”Relay Selection Guide“,Fig. 43).


87U

87TU

Unittrans.

63

71 Oil low

Transf. fault press

51TN

Transf. neut. OC

Unit diff.51

Unit aux.backup

78

40

32

59Overvolt.

Loss ofsync.

Loss offield

Overfreq.

Volt/Hz

51TN

Unitaux.

Trans.diff.

87T

Trans.neut.OC

81N

24

49S

87G

StatorO.L.

Gen.diff.

G

2146

Neg.seq.

Sys.backup

59GN

Gen.neut. OV

51GN

64R64R2

E

Fieldgrd.

Fieldgrd.

63

71Transf.fault press

Oil low

Reversepower

2)

1)

52

A

46 59 81N 49 64R40

32 21 7859GN

51GN

64R2

241) 2)

87G and optionally

87U

5151N

87T2

optionally3

87TU

7UM511

7UM516

7UM515

7UT512

7UT513

7SJ60

Relaytype

Functions 3) Numberof relaysrequired

1

1

1

1

3Fig. 109


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


26. Busbar protection by O/C relayswith reverse interlocking

General hint:

Applicable to distribution busbars withoutsubstantial (< 0.25 x IN) backfeed from theoutgoing feeders

Fig. 110

52

52

5050N

5151N

52

5050N

5151N

5050N

5151N

52

5050N

5151N

7SJ60

7SJ60

7SJ60 7SJ60

t0 = 50 ms

I> I>, t I> I>, t

I>, t0 I>, t

I> I>, t

Infeed

Reverse interlocking


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 111

87BB

87S.V.

5151N

Transformerprotection

7VH83

52 52

G

Feederprotection

Feederprotection

52

G

Feederprotection

86Alarm

Load

1)

5050N

Back-feed

7SS5

52

Infeed

Transformer protection

52 52

Feederprotection

52

Bus tieprotection

BF

86

87BB

Load

Feederprotection

Isolatorreplica

Fig. 112

27. High impedance busbarprotection

General hints:

– Normally used with single busbarand 1 1/2 breaker schemes

– Requires separate class X current trans-former cores. All CTs must have thesame transformation ratio

Note:

1) A varistor is normally applied accrossthe relay input terminals to limit the volt-age to a value safety below the insula-tion voltage of the secondary circuits(see page 6/70).

28. Low-impedance busbar protection

General hints:

– Preferably used for multiple bus-barschemes where an isolator replica isnecessary

– The numerical busbar protection 7SS5provides additional breaker failure pro-tection

– CT transformation ratios can be differ-ent, e.g. 600/1 A in the feeders and2000/1 at the bus tie

– The protection system and the isolatorreplica are continuously self-monitoredby the 7SS5

– Feeder protection can be connected tothe same CT core.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Power System ProtectionProtection Coordination

High-resistance grounding requires muchmore sensitive setting in the order ofsome amperes primary.The ground-fault current of motors andgenerators, for example, should be limitedto values below 10 A in order to avoid ironburning.Residual-current relays in the star pointconnection of CTs can in this case not beused, in particular with rated CT primarycurrents higher than 200 A. The pickupvalue of the zero-sequence relay wouldin this case be in the order of the errorcurrents of the CTs.A special zero-sequence CT is thereforeused in this case as ground current sensor.The window-type current transformer7XR96 is designed for a ratio of 60/1 A.The detection of 6 A primary would thenrequire a relay pickup setting of 0.1 Asecondary.

Fig. 113: Transformer inrush currents, typical data

Rated transformer power [MVA]

Time constant of inrush current

12.0

11.0

10.0

9.0

8.0

7.0

6.0

5.0

4.0

3.0

2.0

1.0

102 100 400

Peak value of inrush current

IRush^

IN^

Nominal power[MVA]

Time constant[s]

0.5 . . . 1.0

0.16 . . . 0.2

1.0 . . . 10

0.2 . . . 1.2

>10

1.2 . . . 720

An even more sensitive setting is appliedin isolated or Peterson-coil-grounded net-works where very low ground currents occurwith single-phase-to-ground faults.Settings of 20 mA and less may then berequired depending on the minimumground-fault current.Sensitive directional ground-fault relays(integrated in the relays 7SJ512, 7SJ55and 7SA511) allow settings as low as 5 mA.

Protection coordination

Relay operating characteristics and theirsetting must be carefully coordinated inorder to achieve selectivity. The aim is ba-sically to switch off only the faulted com-ponent and to leave the rest of the powersystem in service in order to minimize sup-ply interruptions and to assure stability.

Sensivity

Protection should be as sensitive as possi-ble to detect faults at the lowest possiblecurrent level.At the same time, however, it shouldremain stable under all permissible load,overload and through-fault conditions.

Phase-fault relays

The pick-up values of phase o/c relays arenormally set 30% above the maximumload current, provided that sufficient short-circuit current is available.This practice is recommmended in particu-lar for mechanical relays with reset ratiosof 0.8 to 0.85.Numerical relays have high reset ratiosnear 0.95 and allow therefore about 10%lower setting.Feeders with high transformer and/ormotor load require special consideration.

Transformer feeders

The energizing of transformers causesinrush currents that may last for seconds,depending on their size (Fig. 113).Selection of the pickup current and as-signed time delay have to be coordinatedso that the rush current decreases belowthe relay o/c reset value before the setoperating time has elapsed.The rush current typically contains onlyabout 50% fundamental frequency compo-nent.Numerical relays that filter out harmonicsand the DC component of the rush currentcan therefore be set more sensitive. Theinrush current peak values of Fig. 113 willbe nearly reduced to one half in this case.

Ground-fault relays

Residual-current relays enable a muchmore sensitive setting, as load currents donot have to be considered (except 4-wirecircuits with single-phase load). In solidlyand low-resistance grounded systems asetting of 10 to 20% rated load current isgenerally applied.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 114: Typical motor current-time characteristics

be high for mechanical relays (about 0.1 s)and negligible for numerical relays(20 ms).

Inverse-time relays (51)

For the time grading of inverse-time relays,the same rules apply in principle as for thedefinite time relays. The time grading isfirst calculated for the maximum fault leveland then checked for lower current levels(Fig. 115).

Fig. 115: Coordination of inverse-time relays

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Time in seconds

10

High set instantaneous o/c step

Motor thermal limit curve

Permissible locked rotor time

Motor starting current

Locked rotor current

Overload protection characteristic

10000

1000

100

10

1

.1

.01

.001

Current in multplies of full-load amps

Time

0.2–0.4 seconds

51

5151

Maximum feeder fault levelCurrent

Main

Feeder

Differential relays (87)

Transformer differential relays are normallyset to pickup values between 20 and 30%rated current. The higher value has to bechosen when the transformer is fittedwith a tap changer.Restricted ground-fault relays and high-resistance motor/generator differential re-lays are, as a rule, set to about 10% ratedcurrent.

Instantaneous o/c protection (50)

This is typically applied on the final supplyload or on any protective device with suffi-cient circuit impedance between itself andthe next downstream protective device.The setting at transformers, for example,must be chosen about 20 to 30% higherthan the maximum through-fault current.

Motor feeders

The energizing of motors causes a startingcurrent of initially 5 to 6 times rated cur-rent (locked rotor current).A typical time-current curve for an inductionmotor is shown in Fig. 114.In the first 100 ms, a fast decaying assy-metrical inrush current appears additional-ly. With conventional relays it was currentpractice to set the instantaneous o/c stepfor short-circuit protection 20 to 30%above the locked-rotor current with a short-time delay of 50 to 100 ms to override theasymmetrical inrush period.Numerical relays are able to filter out theasymmetrical current component very fastso that the setting of an additional timedelay is no longer applicable.The overload protection characteristicshould follow the thermal motor character-istic as closely as possible. The adaption isto be made by setting of the pickup valueand the thermal time constant, using thedata supplied by the motor manufacturer.Further, the locked-rotor protection timerhas to be set according to the characteristicmotor value.

Time grading of o/c relays (51)

The selectivity of overcurrent protectionis based on time grading of the relay oper-ating characteristics. The relay closer tothe infeed (upstream relay) is time-delayedagainst the relay further away from theinfeed (downstream relay).This is shown in Fig. 116 by the exampleof definite time o/c relays.The overshoot times takes into accountthe fact that the measuring relay contin-ues to operate due to its inertia, evenwhen the fault current is interrupted. Thismay

If the same characteristic is used for all re-lays, or when the upstream relay has asteeper characteristic (e.g. very much overnormal inverse), then selectivity is automati-cally fulfilled at lower currents.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 116: Time grading of overcurrent-time relays

* also called overtravel or coasting time

Example 1

tTG = 0.10 + 0.15 + 0.15 = 0.40 s

Example 2

Mechanical relays: tOS = 0.15 sOil circuit-breaker t52F = 0.10 sSafety margin for measuring errors,etc.: tM = 0.15

Numerical relays: tOS = 0.02 sVacuum breaker: t52F = 0.08 sSafety margin: tM = 0.10 s

tTG = 0.08 + 0.02 + 0.10 = 0.20 s

t51M – t51F = t52F + tOS + tM

Time grading tTG

52M

52F 52F

Operating time

0.2–0.4Time grading

51

5151

M

FF

Interruption offault current

Faultdetection

Faultinception

Circuit-breaker

Set time delay Interruption time

Overshoot*

Margin tM

t51M

t51F t52FI>

I>tOS


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Calculation example

The feeder configuration of Fig. 117 andthe assigned load and short-circuit currentsare given.Numerical o/c relays 7SJ60 with normalinverse-time characteristic are applied.The relay operating times dependent oncurrent can be taken from the diagram orderived from the formula given in Fig. 118.The IP /IN settings shown in Fig. 117 havebeen chosen to get pickup values safelyabove maximum load current.This current setting shall be lowest forthe relay farthest downstream. The relaysfurther upstream shall each have equal orhigher current setting.The time multiplier settings can now becalculated as follows:

Station C:

For coordination with the fuses, weconsider the fault in location F1.The short-circuit current related to13.8 kV is 523 A.This results in 7.47 for I/IP at the o/crelay in location C.

With this value and TP = 0.05we derive from Fig. 118an operating time of tA = 0.17 s

This setting was selected for the o/c relayto get a safe grading time over the fuse onthe transformer low-voltage side.The setting values for the relay at station Care therefore: Current tap: IP /IN = 0.7 Time multipler: TP = 0.05

Station B:

The relay in B has a back-up function forthe relay in C.The maximum through-fault current of1.395 A becomes effective for a fault inlocation F2.For the relay in C, we obtain an operatingtime of 0.11 s (I/IP = 19.9).We assume that no special requirementsfor short operating times exist and cantherefore choose an average time gradinginterval of 0.3 s. The operating time of therelay in B can then be calculated: tB = 0.11 + 0.3 = 0.41 s Value of IP /IN = 1395 A = 6.34

220 Asee Fig. 117.

With the operating time 0.41 sand IP /IN = 6.34,we can now derive TP = 0.11from Fig. 118.


Fig. 117

The setting values for the relay at station Bare herewith Current tap: IP /IN = 1.1 Time multiplier TP = 0.11Given these settings, we can also checkthe operating time of the relay in B for aclose-in fault in F3:The short-circuit current increases in thiscase to 2690 A (see Fig. 117). The corre-sponding I/IP value is 12.23. With this value and the set value of

TP = 0.11we obtain again from Fig. 118an operating time of 0.3 s.

Station A:

We add the time grading interval of0.3 s and find the desired operating timetA = 0.3 + 0.3 = 0.6 s.

Following the same procedure as for therelay in station B we obtain the followingvalues for the relay in station A: Current tap: IP /IN = 1.0 Time multiplier: TP = 0.17 For the close-in fault at location F4 we

obtain an operating time of 0.48 s.

Fig. 118: Normal inverse time-characteristic ofrelay 7SJ60

Example: Time grading of inverse-time relays for a radial feeder

– – – – –

*) Iscc.max. = Maximum short-circuit current** Ip/IN = Relay current multiplier setting*** Iprim = Primary setting current corresponding to Ip/IN

A

B

C

D

Station

300

170

50

Max. Load[A]

Iscc. max.*[A]

4500

2690

1395

523

400/5

200/5

100/5

Ip/IN **CT ratio Iprim***[A]

1.0

1.1

0.7

400

220

70

11.25

12.23

19.93

Fuse:160 A

515151

A F4 F3 F2

13.8 kVLoad

L.V. 75.

7SJ607SJ607SJ60

I /Ip =Iscc. max.

Iprim

F1

Load

Load

B C D13.8 kV/0.4 kV

1.0 MVA5.0%

I/Ip [A]

Tp [s]

Normal inverse

.

3.2

1.6

0.8

0.4

0.2

0.1

0.05

t [s]

1

2

345

10

20

304050

100

0.14

(I/Ip)0.02 – 1Tp [s]t =

82 10 20640.05

0.1

0.2

0.30.40.50


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


The normal way

To prove the selectivity over the wholerange of possible short-circuit currents, it isnormal practice to draw the set operatingcurves in a common diagram with doublelog scales. These diagrams can be manual-ly calculated and drawn point by point orconstructed by using templates.Today computer programs are also availa-ble for this purpose. Fig. 119 shows the re-lay coordination diagram for the exampleselected, as calculated by the Siemensprogram CUSS (computer-aided protectivegrading).

Fig. 119: O/c time grading diagram

Note:

To simplify calculations, only inverse-timecharacteristics have been used for this ex-ample. About 0.1 s shorter operating timescould have been reached for high-currentfaults by additionally applying the instanta-neous zones I>> of the 7SJ60 relays.

IA>,t

IC>,t

IB>,t

t [s]

t [m

in]

210 5

2

5

.01

.001

2

5

.1

2

5

1

2

5

10

2

5

100

2100 5 21000 5

I –

0.4

kVm

ax=

16.

000

kAI s

cc

= 1

395

AI s

cc

= 2

690

AI m

ax =

450

0 A

fuse 13.8/0.4 KV1.0 MVA5.0%

VDE 160

Bus-C

Bus-B

7SJ600

7SJ600

7SJ600

Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 xInTp = 0.05 – 3.2 sI>>= 0.1 – 25. xIn

Ip = 1.0 xInTp = 0.17 sI>> = ∞

Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 xInTp = 0.05 – 3.2 sI>> = 0.1 – 25. xIn

Ip = 1.1 xInTp = 0.11 sI>> = ∞

Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 xInTp = 0.05 – 3.2 sI>> = 0.1 – 25. xIn

Ip = 0.7 xInTp = 0.05 sI>> = ∞

IN

400/5 A

200/5 A

100/5 A

A

TR

fuse

I [A]

10 4

2 51000 10 4 10 52 5 2

13.80 kV 0.40 kV

1

HRC fuse 160 A

Setting range Setting

I>>I>, t

I>>I>, t

I>>I>, t

52

52

52


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Coordination of o/c relays with fusesand low-voltage trip devices

The procedure is similar to the above de-scribed grading of o/c relays. Usually atime interval between 0.1 and 0.2 secondsis sufficient for a safe time coordination.Very and extremely inverse characteristicsare often more suitable than normal in-verse curves in this case. Fig. 120 showstypical examples.Simple consumer-utility interrupts use apower fuse on the primary side of the sup-ply transformers (Fig. 120a).In this case, the operating characteristic ofthe o/c relay at the infeed has to be coordi-nated with the fuse curve.Very inverse characteristics may be usedwith expulsion-type fuses (fuse cutouts)while extremly inverse versions adapt bet-ter to current limiting fuses.In any case, the final decision should bemade by plotting the curves in the log-logcoordination diagram.Electronic trip devices of LV breakers havelong-delay, short-delay and instantaneouszones.Numerical o/c relays with one inverse timeand two definite-time zones can be closelyadapted (Fig. 120b).

Fig. 120: Coordination of an o/c relay with an MV fuse and a low-voltage breaker trip device

Time

Current

Time

Current

0.2 seconds

Maximum fault level at MV bus

Secondarybreaker

o/c relay

0.2 seconds

Maximum fault available at HV bus

Fuse

Inverse relay

I>>

I2>, t2

I1>, t1

a)

b)

LV bus

MV

an

51

Fuse

MV bus

an

5051

LV bus

Otherconsumers


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 121: Grading of distance zones

Fig. 122: Operating characteristic of Siemens distance relays 7SA511 and 7SA513

Where measured line or cable impedancesare available, the reach setting may also beextended to 90%. The second and thirdzones have to keep a safety margin ofabout 15 to 20% to the correspondingzones of the following lines. The shortestfollowing line has always to be considered(Fig. 121).As a general rule, the second zone shouldat least reach 20% over the next station toensure back-up for busbar faults, and thethird zone should cover the largest follow-ing line as back-up for the line protection.

Grading of zone times

The first zone normally operates unde-layed. For the grading of the time intervalsof the second and third zones, the samerules as for o/c relays apply (see Fig. 116).For the quadrilateral characteristics (relays7SA511 and 7SA513) only the reactancevalues (X values) have to be consideredfor the reach setting. The setting of theR values should cover the line resistanceand possible arc or fault resistances. Thearc resistance can be roughly estimatedas follows:

Fig. 123

Fig. 124

The shortest setting of the numericalSiemens relays is 0.05 ohms for 1 Arelays, corresponding to 0.01 ohms for5 A relays.This allows distance protection of distribu-tion cables down to the range of some500 meters.

B

t1

ZLA-B~

t2

t3Z3A

A C DZLB-C ZLC-D

Z2A

Z1A

Z2B

Z1B Z1C

Load LoadLoad

Z1A = 0.85 • ZLA-B

Z2A = 0.85 • (ZLA-B+Z1B)

Z3A = 0.85 • (ZLA-B+Z2B)

Operatingtime

X1A

X2A

X3A

R3AR2AR1A

X

RA

B

C

D

IArc = arc length in mIscc Min = minimum short-circuit current

Iscc Min

RArc =IArc x 2kV/m

XPrimary Minimum =

= XRelay Min xVTratio

CTratio

[Ohm]

Imin =XPrim.Min

X’Line [Ohm/km]

[Ohm][km]

Typical settings of the ratio R/X are:– Short lines and cables (≤ 10 km):

R/X = 2 to 10– Medium line lengths < 25 km: R/X = 2– Longer lines 25 to 50 km: R/X = 1

Shortest feeder protectable bydistance relays

The shortest feeder that can be protectedby underreach distance zones without theneed for signaling links depends on theshortest settable relay reactance.

Coordination of distance relays

The reach setting of distance times musttake into account the limited relay accuracyincluding transient overreach (5% accord-ing to IEC 60255-6), the CT error (1% forclass 5P and 3% for class 10P) and a secu-rity margin of about 5%. Further, the lineparameters are normally only calculated,not measured. This is a further source oferrors.A setting of 80–85% is therefore commonpractice; 80% is used for mechanical relayswhile 85% can be used for the more accu-rate numerical relays.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Breaker failure protection setting

Most digital relays of this guide provide theBF protection as an integral function. Theinitiation of the BF protection by the inter-nal protection functions then takes placevia software logic. However, the BF protec-tion function may also be initiated fromoutside via binary inputs by an alternateprotection. In this case the operating timeof intermediate relays (BFI time) may haveto be considered. Finally, the tripping ofthe infeeding breakers needs auxiliary re-lays which add a small time delay (BFT) tothe overall fault clearing time.This is in particular the case with 1-and-1/2-breaker or ring bus arrangementswhere a separate breaker failure relay(7SV600 or 7SV512) is used per breaker(see application example 10).The deciding criterion of BF protectiontime coordination is the reset time of thecurrent detector (50BF) which must not beexceeded under any condition of currentinterruption. The reset times specified inthe Siemens digital relay manuals are validfor the worst-case condition: interruptionof a fully offset short-circuit current andlow current pick-up setting (0.1 to 0.2times rated CT current).The reset time is 1 cycle for EHV relays(7SA513, 7SV512) and 1.5 to 2 cycles fordistribution type relays (7SJ***).Fig. 126 shows the time chart for a typicalbreaker failure protection scheme. Thestated times in parentheses apply fortransmission system protection and thetimes in square brackets for distributionsystem protection.

Fig. 125

Fig. 126

Normal interrupting time

Fault incidence

Protect. Breaker inter.

time(1~)[2~]

time(2~)[4~]

Currentdetector(50 BF)reset time

(1~)[2~]

Margin

(2,5~)[2,5~]

BFI BF timer (F) (62BF)

0,5~

BFT

0,5~

Adjacentbreakerint. time

(2~)[4~]

Total breaker failure interrupting time

(5~)[8~]

(9~) [15~]

BFI =breaker failureinitiation time(intermediaterelays, if any)BFT =breaker failuretripping time(auxilary relays,if any)

62BF

OR

50BF

P1

P2

Breaker failure protection,logic circuit

P1 P2: primary protection

: alternate protection

AND


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

VRmax = 2 2VKN (VF –VKN) > 2kV

with VF = (RCT + 2·RL + RR)IFmax Through

N

Voltage limitation by a varistoris required if:

Given: n = 8 feedersN = 600/1 AVKN = 500 VRCT = 4 OhmImR = 30 mA (at relay setpoint)RL = 3 Ohm (max.)IRset = 20 mARR = 10 kOhmIVar = 50 mA (at relay setpoint)

Sensitivity:

IFmin = N·(IRset + Ivar + n·ImR)

IFmin = ·(0.02 + 0.05 + 8·0.03)

IFmin = 186 A (31% IN)

6001

Stability:

IFmaxThrough < N· ·IRset

IFmax Through < · ·0.02

IFmax Through < 17 kA (28·IN)

6001

10,0003 + 4

RRRL + RCT

Calculation example:

Fig. 127

Fig. 128

Fig. 129

Fig. 130

VKN =CT knee point voltageVR =RR·IRset

VKN ≥ 2·VR

ImR

V

VKN

VR

Im

RCT

RL

RCT

RL

RCT

RL

RCT

RL

RRVaristor87B

1 2 3 n


High-impedance differentialprotection: Verification of design

The following designdata must be established:

CT data

The CTs must all have the same ratio andshould be of low leakage flux design ac-cording to Class TPS of IEC 44-6 (Class Xof BS 3938). The excitation characteristicand the secondary winding resistance areto be provided by the manufacturer.The knee-point voltage of the CT is requiredto be designed at least for two times therelay pick-up voltage to assure dependableoperation with internal faults.

Differential relay

The differential relay must be a high-impedance relay designed as sensitivecurrent relay (7VH80/83: 20 mA) withseries resistor. If the series resistor isintegrated in the relay, the setting valuesmay be directly calibrated in volts, as withthe relays 7VH80/83 (6 to 60 V or 24 to240 V).

Sensitivity

For the relay to operate in case of an inter-nal fault, the primary current must reach aminimum value to supply the set relaypickup current (IR-set), the varistor leakagecurrent (Ivar) and the magnetizing currentsof all parallel-connected CTs (n·ImR).Low relay voltage setting and CTs with lowmagnetizing demand therefore increasethe protection sensitivity.

Fig. 131

Stability with external faults

This check is made by assuming an exter-nal fault with maximum through-faultcurrent and full saturation of the CT in thefaulted feeder. The saturated CT ist thenonly effective with its secondary windingresistance RCT, and the appearing relay volt-age VR corresponds to the voltage drop ofthe infeeding currents (through-faultcurrent) at RCT and RL. The current at therelay must under this condition safely staybelow the relay pickup value.In practice, the wiring resistances RL maynot be equal. In this case, the worstcondition with the highest relay voltage(corresponding to the highest relay current)must be sought by considering all possibleexternal feeder faults.

Setting

The setting is always a trade-off betweensensitivity and stability. A higher voltagesetting leads to enhanced through-faultstability, but, also to higher CT magnetizingand varistor leakage currents resulting con-sequently in a higher primary pickup cur-rent.A higher voltage setting also requires ahigher knee-point voltage of the CTs andtherefore greater size of the CTs.A sensitivity of 10 to 20% IN is normal formotor and transformer differential protec-tion, or for restricted ground-fault protection.With busbar protection a pickup value≥ 50 % IN is normally applied.An increased pickup value can be achie-ved by connecting a resistor in parallel tothe relay.

Varistor

Voltage limitation by a varistor is needed ifpeak voltages near or above the insulationvoltage (2 kV) are to be expected. A limita-tion to 1500 V rms is then recommended.This can be checked for the maximum in-ternal fault current by applying the formulashown for VR-max.A restricted ground-fault protection maynormally not require a varistor, but, a bus-bar protection in general does.The electrical varistor characteristic can beexpressed as V=K·IB. K and B are the varis-tor constants.

RelaysettingV rms

K

≤125125–240

B Varistortype

450900

0.250.25

600A/S1/S256600A/S1/S1088

Sensitivity:

Stability:

IFmin = N·(IRset + Ivar + n·ImR)

IFThrough max < N· ·IRset

RRRL + RCT

N = CT ratioIRset = Set relay pickup currentIVar = Varistor spill currentImR = CT magnetizing current at

relay pickup voltage


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlIntroduction

State-of-the-art

Modern protection and substation controluses microprocessor technology and serialcommunication to upgrade substation op-eration, to enhance reliability and to reduceoverall life cycle cost.The traditional conglomeration of often to-tally different devices such as relays, me-ters, switchboards and RTUs is replaced bya few multifunctional, intelligent devicesof uniform design. And, instead of exten-sive parallel wiring (centralized solution,Fig. 132), only a few serial links are used(decentralized solution, Fig. 133).Control of the substation takes place withmenu-guided procedures at a central VDUworkplace.

Fig. 132: Central structure of traditional protection and control

F F

Traditional protection and substation control

Remote terminal unit

To network control center

Alarm annunciationand local control

Marshalling rack

Approx. 20 to40 cores per bay

Mimic displayPushbuttonsPosition indicatorsInterposing relaysLocal/remote switch

Control

Indication lampsMeasuring instrumentsTransducersTerminal blocksMiniature circuit breakers

Monitoring

e.g.Overcurrent relaysGround-fault relaysReclosing relaysAuxiliary relays

Protection


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 133: Decentralized structure of modern protection and control


* The compact central control unit can be located in a separate cubicle ordirectly in the low-voltage compartment of the switchgear

Coordinated protection and substation control system

Printer

PC

Control center

Compact centralcontrol unitincluding RTU functions

Shown withopen door

**

Combined protectionand control relay

Low-voltage compartmentof the medium-voltage

switchgear

Protectionrelay

ControlI/O unit

*

Profibus Substation LAN


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Substation control andprotection system

For numerical substation control and pro-tection system applications, two differentsystems are available: SINAUT LSA SICAMBy virtue of their different functions andspecific advantages, the two systems cov-er different applications. This means that itis possible to configure an optimum sys-tem for every application.SINAUT LSA is typically used primarily formedium-voltage and high-voltage applica-tions in power supply utilities.The principal use for SICAM products iscurrently in medium-voltage applicationsfor power suppliers and industry.Other features in which they differ aresummarized in Fig. 134.

SINAUT LSA substation control system

Since 1986, SINAUT LSA systems haveproved themselves in practice in over 1500substations. The SINAUT LSA substationautomation system was the first digitalsystem to have integrated all the followingfunctions in a single equipment family: Telecontrol Local Control Monitoring Automation and ProtectionSINAUT LSA has significantly extended thescope of performance and functionality ofconventional secondary equipment. It isdesign and operation-friendly to a very con-siderable extent.SINAUT LSA is a system matched to re-quirements – from the hardware to the PCtools – and is tailored in optimum form tothe function of numerical substation con-trol and protection systems.Fig. 134 shows the principal applicationaspects of the SINAUT LSA substationcontrol and protection system in compari-son with the SICAM systems.

SICAM Substation Automation System

Units of the SICAM family have been inservice since 1996. The SICAM system isbased on SIMATIC*) and PC standardmodules. SICAM possesses an open com-munication system with standardized inter-faces. Thus, SICAM is a flexible systemcapable of uncomplicated further develop-ment.

The SICAM family offers of the followingoptions: SICAM SAS, the substation automation

system with the following features:– Principal function:

substation automation– Decentralized and centralized process

connection– Local control and monitoring with ar-

chive function– Communication with the System

Control Center SICAM RTU, the telecontrol system with

central process connection and the fol-lowing features:– Principal function: information commu-

nication

– Central process connection– PLC functions– Communication with Control Center

SICAM PCC, the PC-based SubstationControl System with the following fea-tures:– Principal function: local substation su-

pervision and control– Decentralized process connection– LAN/WAN communication with

IEC 60870-6 TASE.2– Flexible communication– Linkage to Office® products.

Fig. 134: Table shows the principal application aspects of the SICAM and SINAUT LSA system families.

+++ Ideally suitable++ Very suitable+ Suitable

(1) Linkage as telecontrol remote stationIED – Intelligent Electronic Device

Telecontrol data concentrator(connection of telecontrol remotestations)

SINAUT LSACentral anddecentralconnection SAS RTU PCC

Telecontrol communication viaWAN with TCP/IP

Telecontrol communication usingstandard protocols IEC 870-5-101,DNP3.0, SINAUT 8FW

Supplementing of project-specifictelecontrol protocols

+++

Supply of existing telecontrolprotocols

IED link using IEC 870-5-103

IED link using DNP3.0

Expansion of existing SICAMsubstations

Incorporation in SIMATICautomation solutions

Linkage of PROFIBUS DP-IEDs

Addition of project-specific IEDprotocols

Uncomplicated, low-cost design

SICAM

++

+ ++++

+++ +++ +++

+ ++ +++++

+++ + ++

+++ ++

+++ +++

+++ ++++++

+++ ++++

+++ ++++

+ ++++

+ ++ ++++++

+++

Expansion of existingSINAUT LSA substations

++(1) ++(1)+++

+

Principal application aspects of SINAUT LSA and SICAM

*)Siemens PLCs and Industrial Automation Systems.For detailed information see: Catalog ST 70,Siemens Components for Totally Integrated Automation.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSINAUT LSA – Overview

Technical proceedings

The first coordinated protection and sub-station control system SINAUT LSA wascommissioned in 1986 and continuouslyfurther developed over subsequent years.It now features the following main charac-teristics: Coordinated system structure Optical communication network

(star configuration) High processing power

(32-bit µP technology) Standardized serial interfaces and com-

munication protocols Uniform design of all components Complete range of protection and con-

trol functions Comprehensive user-software support

packages.Currently (1999) over 1500 systems are insuccessful operation on all voltage levelsup to 400 kV.

System structureand scope of functions

The SINAUT LSA system performs super-visory local control, switchgear interlock-ing, bay and station protection, synchro-nizing, transformer tap-changer control,switching sequence programs, event andfault recording, telecontrol, etc.It consists of the independent subsystems(Fig. 135): Supervisory control 6MB5** Protection 7S***Normally, switchgear interlocking is inte-grated as a software program in the super-visory control system. Local bay control isimplemented in the bay-dedicated I/O con-trol units 6MB524.For complex substations with multiple bus-bars, however, the interlocking functioncan also be provided as an independentbackup system (System 8TK).Communication and data exchange be-tween components is performed via serialdata links. Optical-fiber connections arepreferred to ensure EMI compatibility.The communication structure of the con-trol system is designed as a hierarchicalstar configuration. It operates in the pollingprocedure with a fixed assignment of themaster function to the central unit. Thedata transmission mode is asynchronous,half-duplex, protected with a hammingdistance d = 4, and complies with theIEC Standard 60870-5.Each subsystem can operate fully in stand-alone mode even in the event of loss ofcommunication.

Data sharing between protection and con-trol via the so-called informative interfaceaccording to IEC 60870-5-103 is restrictedto noncritical measuring or event recordingfunctions. The protection units, for exam-ple, deliver r.m.s. values of currents, volt-ages, power, instantaneous values for os-cillographic fault recording and time-taggedoperating events for fault reporting.Besides the high data transmission securi-ty, the system also provides self-monitor-ing of individual components.The distributed structure also makes theSINAUT LSA system attractive for refur-bishment programs or extensions, whereconventional secondary equipment has tobe integrated.It is general practice to provide protectionof HV and EHV substations as separate,self-contained relays that can communi-cate with the control system, but functionotherwise completely independently.At lower voltage levels, however, higherintegrated solutions are accepted for costreasons.For distribution-type substations combinedprotection and control feeder units (e.g.7SJ63) are available which integrate allnecessary functions of one feeder, includ-

ing: local feeder control, overcurrent andoverload protection, breaker-failure protec-tion and metering.

Supervisory control

The substation is monitored and controlledfrom the operator‘s desk (Fig. 136). TheVDU shows overview diagrams and com-plete details of the switchgear includingmeasurands on a color display. All eventand alarm annunciations are selectable inthe form of lists. The control procedure ismenu-guided and uses mouse and keyboard.The operation is therefore extremely user-friendly.

Automatic functions

Apart from the switchgear interlocking pro-vided, a series of automatic functions en-sure effective and secure system operation.Automatic switching sequences, such aschanging of busbars, can be user-pro-grammed and started locally or remotely.Furthermore, the synchronizing functionhas been integrated into the system soft-ware and is available as an option.

VDU

Event Logger

Modem

”Master Unit“ (i. e. 6MB55)

Stationlevel

Time signal

Bay Protection 7SBay Control Unit6 MB 524 includinginterlocking

Switchyard

Baylevel

1…

ParallelSerial

…n

LSAPROCESS

Operator’sdesk

Modem

EngineeringAnalysis

System Control Center

Fig. 135: Distributed structure of coordinated protection and control system SINAUT LSA


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


The synchronizing function runs on the rel-evant 6MB524 bay control units. The per-formance of these functions correspondsto modern digital stand-alone units. Theadvantages of the integrated solution,however, are: External auxiliary relay circuits for the

selection of measurands are no longerapplicable.

Adaptive parameter setting becomespossible from local or remote controllevels.

High processing powerThe processing power of the central con-trol unit has been enormously increasedby the introduction of the 32-bit µP tech-nology. This permits, on the one hand, amore compact design and provides, on theother hand, sufficient processing reservefor the future introduction of additionalfunctions.

Static memoriesA decisive step in the direction of userfriendliness has been made with the imple-mentation of large nonvolatile Flash EPROMmemories. The system parameters can beloaded via a serial port at the front panel ofthe central unit. Bay level parameters areautomatically downloaded.

Analog value processingThe further processing of raw measureddata, such as the calculation of maximum,minimum or effective values, with as-signed real time, is contained as standardfunction.A Flash EPROM mass storage can option-ally be provided to record measured values,fault events or fault oscillograms.The storedinformation can be read out locally or re-motely by a telephone modem connection.Further data evaluation (harmonic analysis,etc.) is then possible by means of a specialPC program (LSA PROCESS).

Compact designA real reduction in space and cost hasbeen achieved by the creation of compactI/O and central units. The processing hard-ware is enclosed in metallic cases withEMI-proof terminals and optical serial inter-faces. All units are type tested accordingto the latest IEC standards.In this way, the complete control and pro-tection equipment can be directly integrat-ed into the MV or HV switchgear(Fig. 137, 138).

Switchgear interlockingand local control

With the introduction of the bay controlunit 6MB524, the switchgear interlockingand the local control function have beenintegrated completely into the SINAUTLSA station control system. That meansthat there is no technical need for an addi-tional switchgear interlocking like the 8TKsystem, because the SINAUT LSA systemhas the same reliability according to thetesting of interlocking conditions. However,the 8TK system is still available for the casethat an interlocking system with seperatehardware and software is required.

Fig. 137: Switchgear-integrated controland protection

Fig. 138: View of a low-voltage compartment

The interlocking function ensures fail-safeswitching and personal safety down to thelowest control level, i.e. directly at theswitchpanel, even when supervisory con-trol is not available.The bay control unit 6MB524 uses code-words to protect the switchgear from un-authorized operation. With these code-words, the authorization for local switch-ing and unlocked local switching can bereached. The bay-to-bay interlocking condi-tions are checked in the SINAUT LSA cen-tral unit. Each 6MB524 bay control unit hasan optical fiber link to this central unit.

Fig. 136: Digital substation control, operator desk. Control of a 400 kV substation (double control unit)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Numerical protection

A complete range of fully digital (numeri-cal) relays is available (see chapter PowerSystem Protection 6/8 and followingpages).They all have a uniform design compatiblewith the control units (Fig. 139). This ap-plies to the hardware as well as to the soft-ware structure and the operating proce-dures. Metallic standard cases, IEC 60255-tested, with EMI-secure terminals, ensurean uncomplicated application comparableto mechanical relays. The LCD display andsetting keypad are integrated. Additionallya RS232 port is provided on the front panelfor the connection of a PC as an HMI.The rear terminal block contains an optical-fiber interface for the data communicationwith the SINAUT LSA control system.The relays are normally linked directly tothe relevant I/O control unit at the baylevel. Connection to the central controlsystem unit is, however, also possible.The numerical relays are multifunctionaland contain, for example, all the necessaryprotection functions for a line feeder ortransformer. At higher voltage levels, addi-tional, main or back-up relays are applied.The new relay generation has extendedmemory capacity for fault recording (5 sec-onds, 1 ms resolution) and nonvolatilememory for important fault information.The serial link between protection and con-trol uses standard protocols in accordancewith IEC 60870-5-103.In this way, supplier compatibility andinterchangeability of protection devices isachieved.

Communication with control centres

The SINAUT LSA system uses protocolsthat comply with IEC Standard 60870-5. Inmany cases an adaption to existing propri-etary protocols is necessary, when the sys-tem control center has been supplied byanother manufacturer.For this purpose, an extensive protocol li-brary has been developed (approx. 100protocol variants). Further protocols can beprovided on demand.

Fig. 140: Enhanced remote terminal unit 6MB55, application options

Fig. 139: Numerical protection, standard design

Enhanced remote terminal units

For substations with existing remote ter-minal units, an enhancement towards thedecentralized SINAUT LSA performancelevel is feasible.The telecontrol system 6MB55 replacesoutdated remote terminal units (Fig. 140).Conventional RTUs are connected to theswitchgear via interposing relays andmeasuring transducers with a marshallingrack as a common interface.The centralized version SINAUT LSA canbe directly connected to this interface. Thetotally parallel wiring can be left in its origi-nal state.In this manner, it is possible to enhancethe RTU function and to include substationmonitoring and control with the sameperformance level as the decentralizedSINAUT LSA system.Upgrading of existing substations can thusbe achieved with a minimum of cost andeffort.

VF Modem

Telephone networkRemote control

VF Modem

Marshalling rackPrinter Operator

terminal

Interposing relays,transducers

Existingswitchyard Extended switchyard

ERTU

Modem

Systemcontrolcenter

Substationlevel

Bay level

Managementterminal


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Downloading of parametersduring startup

LSATOOLSparameterization station

Documentation

Loading ofparameters

Network control center

Master unit

PC inputs

Input/outputunits


Engineering system LSATOOLS

In parallel with the upgrading of the centralunit hardware, a novel parameterizing anddocumentation system LSATOOLS hasbeen developed. It uses modern graphicalpresentation management methods,including pull-down menus and multiwin-dowing.LSATOOLS enables the complete configu-ration, parameterization and documentationof the system to be carried out on a PCworkstation. It ensures that a consistentdatabase for the project is maintained fromdesign to commissioning (Fig. 141).The system parameters, generated byLSATOOLS, can be serially loaded into theFlash EPROM memory of the central controlunit and will then be automatically down-loaded to the bay level devices(Fig. 142).Care has been taken to ensure that chang-es and expansions are possible withoutrequiring a complete retest of the system.Because of the object-oriented structure ofLSATOOLS, it is easily possible for the sys-tem engineer to add new bays with allnecessary information.

Fig. 141: Engineering system LSATOOLS

Fig. 142: PC-aided parameterization of SINAUT LSA with LSATOOLS and downloading of parameters

Parameter data Documentation

Engineering system

Parameterizing Documentation


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSINAUT LSA – Distributed Structure

Central control unit 6MB51

Busbar andbreaker failureprotection 7SS5

Stationlevel

Serial interface

Station control centerHigher-levelcontrol system

Central evaluationstation (PC)

Telecontrol channel

Normal time

Telephone channel

1 n

Baylevel

Bay control unit6MB524

Protection relays7S/7U

Substation

Parallel interface

In the SINAUT LSA substation control sys-tem the functions can be distributed be-tween station and bay control levels.The input/output devices have thefollowing tasks on the bay control level: Signal acquisition Acquisition of measured values and

metering data Monitoring the execution of control

commands, e.g. for– Control of switchgear– Transformer tap changing– Setting of Peterson coilsData processing, such as– Limit monitoring of measured values,

including initiation of responses tolimit violations

– Calculation of derived operationalmeasured values (e.g. P, Q, cos ϕ )and/or operational parameters (for ex-ample r.m.s. values, slave pointer)from the logged instantaneous valuesfor current and voltage

– Deciding how much information totransmit to the control master unit ineach polling cycle

– Generation of group signals and deriv-ing of signals internally, e.g. fromself-monitoring

Switchgear-related automation tasks– Switching sequences in response to

switching commands or to processevents

– Synchronization Local control and operation

(only bay control unit 6MB524):– Display of actual bay status (single

line diagram)– Local control of circuit-breaker and

disconnectors– Display of measurement values and

event recording Transmission of data from numerical pro-

tection relays to the control master unit Local display of status and measured

values.

Input/output devices

A complete range of devices is available tomeet the particular demands concerningprocess signal capacity and functionality(see Fig. 149). All units are built up in mod-ern 7XP20 housings and can be directlyinstalled in the low-voltage compartmentsof the switchgear or in separate cubicles.The smallest device 6MB525 is designedas a low-cost version and contains onlycontrol functions. It is provided with anRS485-wired serial interface and is normal-ly used for simple distribution-type sub-

Fig. 143: SINAUT LSA protection and substation control system system

stations together with overcurrent/overloadrelays 7SJ60 and digital measuring trans-ducers 7KG60. (see application example,Fig. 165).All further bay control devices contain anoptic serial interface for connection to thecentral control unit, and an RS232 serialinterface on the front side for connectionof an operating PC. Further, integral dis-plays for measuring values and LEDs forstatus indication are provided.

Minicompact device 6MB525

It contains signal inputs and command out-puts for substation control. Analog measur-ing inputs, where needed, have to be pro-vided by additional measuring transducers,type 7KG60. Alternatively, the measuring

functions of the numerical protection re-lays can be used. These can also providelocal indication of measuring values.The local bay control is intended to be per-formed by the existing, switchgear-integratedmechanical control.

Compact devices 6MB522/523

They provide a higher number of signalinputs and outputs, and contain additionalmeasuring functions. One measuring valueor other preprocessed information can bedisplayed on the 2-row, 16-character alpha-numeric display.If local control is required, the bay controlunit 6MB524 is the right choice.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Bay control unit 6MB524

This bay control device can be delivered infive versions, depending on the peripheralrequirements.It provides all control and measuring func-tions needed for switchgear bays up to theEHV level.Switching status, measuring values andalarms are indicated on a large graphic dis-play. Measuring instruments can thereforebe widely dispensed with.Bay control is, in this case, performed bythe integrated keypad. The synchronizingfunction is included in the software.

Combined protectionand control device 7SJ531

This fully integrated device provides all pro-tection, control and measuring functionsfor simple line/cable, motor or transformerfeeders. Protection includes overcurrent,overload and ground-fault protection, aswell as breaker-failure protection, auto-reclosure and motor supervision functions(see page 6/27).Only one unit is needed per feeder. Space,assembly and wiring costs can thereforebe considerably reduced.Measured value display and local bay con-trol is performed in the same way as withthe bay control unit 6MB524 with a largedisplay and a keypad.

Combined protection and control devices7SJ61, 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and bay control unit6MD63 (SIPROTEC 4 series)

These new SIPROTEC 4 devices have beenavailable since December 1998. With alarge graphical display and ergonomicallydesigned keypad, they offer new possibili-ties for bay control and protection. Via theIEC 60870-5-103 interface, connection tothe substation control system SINAUT LSAis handled. The protection devices includeovercurrent, over/undervoltage and motorprotection functions (see page 6/27).The smaller 7SJ61 and 7SJ62 devices aredelivered with an alphanumerical displaywith 4 lines of text for displaying of meas-urement values, alarms, metering valuesand status of switching devices.The 7SJ63 and 6MD63 units include alarge illuminated graphic display for a clearlyvisible single-line diagram of the switchgear,alarm lists, measured and metered valuesas well as status messages. With the inte-grated key switches, the user authorizationis regulated.For complete description of the newSIPROTEC 4 devices, refer to the protectionchapter (page 6/8).

Fig. 144: MinicompactI/O device 6MB525

Fig. 145: Compact I/O device6MD62

Fig. 147: Compact I/O unit withlocal (bay) control 6MB5240-0

Fig. 148: Combined protection andcontrol device 7SJ531

Fig. 146: Combined protection and control device7SJ63


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

101) Local (bay) control has to be provided separately if desired. In distribution-

type substations, mechanical local control of the switchgear may be sufficient.2) Control of switching devices: 11/2 -pole; 2-pole control possible3) Second figure is number of heavy duty relays

Compact1)

Minicompact1) 6MB525 2 – 6 – – – Double commands and alarmsconfigurable also as ”single“

Type Components

6MB5236MB522-06MB522-16MB522-2

Design CommandsDouble Single

Signal inputsDouble Single

Analog inputsDirectconnectionto transformer

Connection tomeasuretransducer

1366

–122

3366

55

1010

1 x I2 x U, 1 x I3 x U, 3 x I4 x U, 2 x I

–2–2

For simple switchgear cubicleswith one switching device

with P, Q calculation

6MB5240-0-1-2-3-4

468

2012

11253

812164024

–––––

2 x U, 1 x I3 x U, 3 x I3 x U, 3 x I9 x U, 6 x I6 x U, 3 x I

12252

High-end bay control forHV and EHVDouble commands and alarmsalso usable as ”single“

Compact withlocal (bay) controland large display

7SJ531 1 – – – 3 x U, 3 x I Double commands and alarmsalso usable as ”single“

Combined controland protectiondevice withlocal (bay) control

6MD6316MD632

6MD633

6MD634

6MD635

6MD636

6MD637

–1

1

–

–

–

1

512

10

10

18

16

16

1–

–

–

1

1

1

4 x I, 3 x U4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

–

4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

–

Bay control units in newdesign, optimized for medium-voltage switchgear with11/2-pole control(max. 7 switching devices).2-pole control also possible(max. 4 switching devices).

Double commands and alarmsalso usable as ”single“

Compact with localbay control(SIPROTEC 4 designwith large graphicdisplay) 2)

––

2

–

–

2

–

7SJ6107SJ6127SJ6217SJ6227SJ6317SJ632

7SJ633

7SJ635

7SJ636

––––45 + 43)

5 + 43)

7 + 83)

7 + 83)

4687–1

1

–

–

––––5

12

10

18

16

4 x I4 x I4 x I, 3 x U4 x I, 3 x U4 x I, 3 x U4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

Combined control and protec-tion devices. 7SJ61 and 7SJ62with 4 line text display, 7SJ63with graphic display. Optimizedfor 11/2-pole control(max. 7 switching devices).2-pole switching is also poss-ible (max. 4 switching devices).


Combined controland protectiondevice with localbay control(SIPROTEC 4design with largegraphic display) 2)

––––––

2

–

2

3117

111–

–

1

1

45 + 43)

5 + 43)

3 + 43)

7 + 83)

7 + 83)

4 + 83)


Fig. 149: Standardized input/output devices with serial interfaces


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


The 6MB51 control master unit

This unit lies at the heart of the 6MB sub-station control system and, with its 32-bit80486 processor, satisfies the most de-manding requirements.It is a compact unit inside the standardhousing used in Siemens substation sec-ondary equipment.The 6MB51 control master unit managesthe input/output devices, controls the inter-action between the control centers in thesubstation and the higher control levels,processes information for the entire stationand archives data in accordance with theparameterized requirements of the user.Specifically, the control master unit coordi-nates communication to the higher network control levels to the substation control center to an analysis center located either in

the station or connected remotely viaa telephone line using a modem

to the input/output devices and/or thenumerical protection units (bay controlunits)

to lower-level stations.This is for the purpose of controlling andmonitoring activities at the substation andnetwork control levels as well as providingdata for use by engineers.Other tasks of the control master unit are Event logging with a time resolution of

1 or 10 ms Archiving of events, variations in meas-

ured values and fault records on mass-storage units

Time synchronization using radio clock(GPS, DCF77 or Rugby) or using a signalfrom a higher-level control station

Automation tasks affecting more thanone bay:– Parallel control of transformers– Synchronizing

(measured value selection)– Switching sequences– Busbar voltage simulation– Switchgear interlocking

Parameter management to meet therelevant requirements specification

Self-monitoring and system monitoring.

System monitoring primarily involves eval-uating the self-monitoring results of thedevices and serial interfaces which arecoordinated by the control master unit.In particular, in important EHV substations,some users require redundancy of the con-trol master unit. In these cases, two con-trol master units are connected to eachother via a serial interface. System moni-toring then consists of mutual error recog-nition and, if necessary, automatic transferof control of the process to the redundantcontrol master unit.

The SINAUT LSA station control center

The standard equipment of the station con-trol center includes The PC with color monitor and LSAVIEW

software package for displaying– Station overview– Detailed pictures– Event and alarm lists– Alarm information

A printer for the output reportsThe operator can access the required infor-mation or initiate the desired operationquickly and safely with just a few keystrokes.

Fig. 151: SINAUT LSA PC station control center with function keyboard

Fig. 150: Compact control master unit 6MB513 for amaximum of 32 serial interfaces to bay control units.Extended version 6MB514 for 64 serial interfaces tobay control units (double width) additionally available


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSINAUT LSA – Local Control Functions

Local control functions

Tasks of local control

The Siemens SINAUT LSA station controlsystem performs at first all tasks for con-ventional local control: Local control of and checkback indica-

tions from the switching devices Acquisition, display and registration of

analog values Acquisition, display and registration of

alarms and fault indications in real time Measurement data acquisition and pro-

cessing Fault recording Transformer open-loop and closed-loop

control Synchronizing/parallelingUnlike the previous conventional technolo-gy with completely centralized processingof these tasks and complicated parallelwiring and marshalling of process data, thenew microprocessor-controlled technologybenefits from the distribution of tasks tothe central control master unit and the dis-tributed input/output units, and from theserial data exchange in telegrams betweenthese units.

Tasks of the input/output unit

The input/output unit performs the follow-ing bay-related tasks: Fast distributed acquisition of process

data such as indications, analog valuesand switching device positions and theirpreprocessing and buffering

Command output and monitoring Assignment of the time for each event

(time tag) Isolation from the switchyard via heavy-

duty relay contacts Run-time monitoring Limit value supervision Paralleling/synchronizing Local control and monitoringAnalog values can be input to the bay con-trol unit both via analog value transducersand by direct connection to CTs and VTs.The required r.m.s. values for current andvoltage are digitized and calculated as wellas active and reactive power. The advan-tage is that separate measuring cores andanalog value transducers for operationalmeasurement are eliminated.

Control master unit

The process data acquired in the input/out-put unit are scanned cyclically by the con-trol master unit. The control master unitperforms further information processingof all data called from the feeders for sta-tion tasks ”local control and telecontrol“with the associated event logging and faultrecording and therefore replaces the com-plicated conventional marshalling distribu-tor racks. Marshalling is implemented un-der microprocessor control in the controlmaster unit.

Serial protection interface

All protection indications and fault record-ing data acquired for fault analysis in pro-tection relays are called by the controlmaster unit via the serial interface.These include instantaneous values forfault current and voltage of all phases andground, sampled with a resolution of 1 ms,as well as distance-to-fault location.

Serial data exchange

The serial data exchange between the baycomponents and the control master unithas important economic advantages. Thisis especially true when one considers thepreparation and forwarding of the informa-tion via serial data link to the control centercommunication module which is a compo-nent of the control master unit. This mod-ule is a single, system-compatible micro-processor module on which both thetelecontrol tasks and telegram adaptationto telegram structures of existing remotetransmission systems are implemented.This makes the station control independentof the telecontrol technology and the asso-ciated telegram structure used in the net-work control center at a higher level of thehierarchy.

Station control center

The peripheral devices for operating andvisualization (station control center) arealso connected to the control master unit.The following devices are part of the sta-tion control center: A color VDU with a function keyboard

or mouse for display, control, event andalarm indication,

A printer for on-line logging (event list), Mass storage.

Switchyard overview diagram

A switchyard single-line diagram can beconfigured to show an overview of thesubstation. This diagram is used to givethe operator a quick overview of the entireswitchyard status and shows, for example,which feeders are connected or discon-nected. Current and other analog valuescan also be displayed.Information about raised or cleared opera-tional and alarm indications is also dis-played along the top edge of the screen.It is not possible to perform control actionsfrom the switchyard overview. If the opera-tor wants to switch a device, he has toselect a detailed diagram, say ”110 kVdetailed diagram“. If the appropriate func-tion key is pressed, the 110 kV detaileddiagram (Fig. 153) appears. This displayshows the switching state of all switchingdevices of the feeders.

Function field control

In the menu of the function fields, it is pos-sible, for example, to select between con-trol switching devices and tap changing.The control diagram shows details of sta-tion components and allows control anddefining of display properties or functions(e.g. change in color/flashing). Further-more, the popup diagram window can beopened from here, where switching opera-tions with control elements are performed.The configured switching operation worksas follows: Selecting the switch: A click with the

left mouse button on the switch symbolopens the popup window for commandoutput

Output of the command. On clicking theoperate button in the popup window thecommand is output

The color of the switch symbol dependson the state. If the command is found tobe safe after a check has been made forviolations of interlock conditions, theswitching device in question is operated.In the case where a mouse is available,the appropriate device is selected by theusual mouse operation.Once the switching command has beenexecuted and a checkback signal has beenreceived, the blinking symbol changes tothe new actual state on the VDU.In this way, switching operations can beperformed very simply and absolutely with-out error. If commands violate the interlockconditions or if the switch position is notadopted by a switching device, for exam-ple, because of a drive fault, the relevantfault indications or notes are displayed onthe screen.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Event list

All events are logged in chronological or-der. The event list can be displayed on theVDU whenever called or printed out ona printer or stored on a mass-storage me-dium. Fig. 153 shows a section of thisevent list as it appears on the VDU.The event list can also be incorporated inthe detailed displays. The bay-relatedevents can therefore also be shown in thedetailed displays.

Example event list (Fig. 154)

The date can be seen in the left-hand areaand the events are shown in order of prior-ity. Switching commands and fault indi-cations are displayed with a precision of upto 1 ms and events with high priority andprotection indications after a fault-detec-tion are shown with millisecond resolution.A command that is accepted by the controlsystem is also displayed. This can be seenby the index ”+“ of the command (OP),otherwise ”OP–“ would appear.If the switchgear device itself does notexecute the command, ”FB–“ (checkbacknegative) indicates this. ”FB+“ resultsafter successful command execution. Thetexts chosen are suggestions and can beparameterized differently.The event list shows that a protectionfault-detection (general start GS) has oc-curred with all the associated details. Thereal time is shown in the left-hand columnand the relative time with millisecond pre-cision in the right-hand column, permittingclear and fast fault analysis. The fault loca-tion, 17 km in this case, is also displayed.The lower section of the event list showsexamples of raised (RAI) and cleared (CLE)alarm indications, such as ”voltage trans-former miniature-circuit-breaker tripped“.This fault has been remedied as can beseen from the corresponding cleared indi-cation. The letter S in the top line, calledthe indication bar, indicates that a fault indi-cation has been received that is stored ina separate ”warning list“.

Example alarm list (Fig. 155)

When the alarm list is selected, it is dis-played on the VDU. In this danger alarmconcept a distinction is made betweencleared and raised and between acknowl-edged and unacknowledged indications.Raised indications are shown in red,cleared indications are green (similar tothe fast/slow blinking lamp principle).The letter Q is placed in front of an indica-tion that has not yet been acknowledged.Indications that are raised and cleared andacknowledged are displayed in white inthe list.

This system with representation in thealarm list therefore supersedes dangeralarm equipment with two-frequency blink-ing lamps traditionally used with conven-tional equipment.As stated above, all events can also becontinuously logged in chronological orderon the associated printer, too. The appear-ance of this event list is identical to that onthe VDU. The alarm list can also be incor-porated in the detailed displays. The bay-related alarms can therefore also beshown in the detailed displays.

Mass storage

It is also possible to store historic faultdata, i.e. fault recording data and events onmass-storage medium.It can accept data from the control masterunits and stores it on Flash EPROMs. Thisstatic memory is completely maintenance-free when compared to floppy or hard discsystems. 8Mbyte of recorded data can bestored. The locally or remotely readablememory permits evaluation of the data us-ing a PC. This personal computer can beset up separately from the control equip-ment, e.g. in an office. Communicationthen takes place via a telephone-modemconnection.In addition to fault recording data, opera-tional data, such as load-monitoring values(current, voltage, power, etc.) and eventscan be stored.

Local bay control (Fig.152a, Fig. 152b)

With the 6MB524 bay control units, localcontrol and monitoring directly in the bay ispossible. The large graphic display canshow customer-specific single-line dia-grams. A convenient menu-guided opera-

tion leads the user to the display of meas-urands, metering values, alarm lists andstatus messages. The keypad design with6 colors supports the operator for quickand secure operation. User authorization ishandled via password, for example un-locked switching.The new SIPROTEC4 devices also allowlocal bay control. At the 7SJ63 and 6MD63devices, a large graphic display and an er-gonomic keypad assist the operator in con-trol of the switching devices and read outmessages, measurements and meteringvalues. In the 7SJ61 and 7SJ62 protectionunits, the user interface consists of a 4-linetext display. These smaller units also makeit possible to control the feeder circuit-breaker.All SIPROTEC4 devices are parameterizedwith the operating program DIGSI4.

Fig. 152a: Compact I/O unit with local (bay) control, extended version 6MB5240-3

Fig. 152b: 6MD63 bay control unit


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 156: 6MB substation control system, example: fault recording

Example fault recording (Fig. 156)

After a fault, the millisecond-precision val-ues for the phase currents and voltagesand the ground current and ground voltageare buffered in the feeder protection.These values are called from the numericalfeeder protection by the control masterunit and can be output as curves with theprogram LSAPROCESS (Fig. 156).The time marking 0 indicates the time offault detection, i.e. the relay general start(GS). Approx. 5 ms before the generalstart, a three-phase fault to ground oc-curred, which can be seen by the rise inphase currents and the ground current.

12 ms after the general start, the circuitbreaker was tripped (OFF) and after further80 ms, the fault was cleared.After approx. 120 ms the protection reset.Voltage recovery after disconnection wasrecorded up to 600 ms after the generalstart.This format permits quick and clear analy-sis of a fault. The correct operation of theprotection and the circuit breaker can beseen in the fault recording (Fig. 156).The high-voltage feeder protection present-ly includes a time range of at least 5 sec-onds for the fault recording.

Fig. 153: SINAUT LSA substation control, example: overview picture

The important point is that this fault re-cording is possible in all feeders that areequipped with the microprocessor-control-led protection having a serial interfaceaccording to IEC 60870-5-103.

Fig. 154: SINAUT LSA substation control, example: event list

Fig. 155: SINAUT LSA substation control, example: alarm list


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

FPRBCU

FPRBCU

FPRBCU

FPRBCU

CCU withCCC and MS

VDU

Key:

CCUCCCMS

VDUFPRBCU

Modem

Bay 1 2 n Bus coupler

Relaykiosks

To the networkcontrol center

To the operationsand maintenanceoffice

Controlbuilding

Parallel

Serial

Central control unitControl center couplingMass storage

Visual display unitFeeder protection relaysBay control unit

Local and Remote ControlSINAUT LSA – Application Examples

Application examples

The flexible use of the components of theCoordinated Protection and SubstationControl System SINAUT LSA is demon-strated in the following for some typicalapplication examples.

Application in high-voltage substationswith relay kiosks

Fig. 157 shows the arrangement of thelocal components. Each two bays (line ortransformer) are assigned to one kiosk.Each bay has at least one input/output unitfor control (bay control unit) and one pro-tection unit. In extra-high voltage, the pro-tection is normally doubled (main and back-up protection).Local control is performed at the bay units(6MB524) using the integrated graphic dis-play and keypad.Switchgear interlocking is included in thebay control units and in the central controlunit.The protection relays are serially connect-ed to the bay control unit by optical-fiberlinks.

Fig. 157: Application example of outdoor HV or EHV substations with relay kiosks


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


In extremely important substations, mainlyextra-high voltage, there exists a doublingphilosophy. In these substations, the feed-er protection, the DC supply, the operatingcoils and the telecontrol interface are dou-bled. In such cases, the station control sys-tem with its serial connections, and themaster unit with the control center cou-pling can also be doubled.Both master units are brought up-to-datein signal direction. The operation manage-ment can be switched over between thetwo master units (Fig. 158).

Control systemmaster unit 1with massstorage 1

Control systemmaster unit 2with massstorage 2

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Network control center

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

• • • • • • • • • •

Serial

Switchover andmonitoring*

Localcontrollevel

Printer

Control/annunciation

Controlcentercoupling

Control/annunciation

Controlcentercoupling

Baycontrol level

Protec-tion relay

BayControlunit

Protec-tion relay

BayControlunit

Switchgear

Parallel

Printer

*only principle shown

Feeder 1 Feeder n

Fig. 158: System concept with double central control


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 159: Typical example of indoor substations with switchgear interlocking system

Fig. 160: Protection and substation control system SINAUT LSA for a distribution-type substation

Key:

CCU

VDU

FPRBCU

VDU

BCUFPRBCUCCU

Modem

To the net-work controlcenter

To the office

Parallel Serial

Central control unit with controlcenter coupling and mass storageMonitor

Feeder protection relaysBay control unit

Control room Switchgear room

BCU

FPR

BCU

FPR

BCU

Controlandpro-tectioncubicles

Switchgear Buscoupler

BCU

bay 1 bay 2 …

Network controlcenter

Operation place

Feeder protection unit(e.g. 7UT51 transformer protection)

Feeder I/O contol unit (e.g. 6MB524)

Combined control andprotection feeder unit 7SJ53

Miniature I/O unit 6MB525

Feeder protection(e.g. 7SD5 line differential protection)

1

2

3

45

Central controlunit with optical-fiber link

VDU with keyboard Printer

1 2 3 4 5

Protection and substation control SINAUT LSA with input/output units and numericalprotection installed in low-voltage compartments of the switchgear

Application in indoor high-voltagesubstations

The following example (Fig. 159) shows anindoor high-voltage substation. All decen-tralized control system components, suchas bay control unit and feeder protectionare also grouped per bay and installedclose to the switchgear. They are connect-ed to the central control unit in the sameway as described in the outdoor versionvia fiber-optic cables.

Application in medium-voltagesubstations

The same basic arrangement is also appli-cable to medium-voltage (distribution-type)substations (Fig. 160 and 161).The feeder protection and the compact in-put/output units are, however, preferablyinstalled in the low-voltage compartmentof the feeders (Fig. 160) to save costs.There is now a trend to apply combinedcontrol and protection units. The relay7SJ63, for example, provides protectionand measurement, and has integratedgraphic display and keypad for bay control.Thus, only one device is needed per cable,motor or O H line feeder.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 162: Principle wiring diagram of the medium-voltage feeder components

Fig. 162 shows an example for the mostsimple wiring of the feeder units.The voltages between the bay control unitand the protection can be paralleled at thebay control unit because the plug-in mod-ules have a double connection facility.The current is connected in series be-tween the devices. The current input atthe bay control unit is dimensioned for100xIN, 1 s (protection dimensioning).The plug-in modules have a short-circuitingfacility to avoid opening of CT circuits.The accuracy of the operational measure-ments depends on the protection charac-teristics. Normally, it is approx. 2% of IN.If more exact values are required, a sepa-rate measuring core must be provided.The serial interface of the protection isconnected to the bay control unit.The protection data is transferred to thecontrol central unit via the connection be-tween the bay control unit and the centralunit. Thus, only one serial connection to thecentral unit is required per feeder.

To the office

Parallel Serial

Key:

VDU

To the network control center

Buscoupler

BCUFPR BCU FPR CCU BCUFPR

Central control unitwith mass storage andcontrol center couplingMonitor

Feeder protectionrelayBay Control Unit

For o/c feeder ormotor protection alsoavailable as one com-bined unit (e.g. 7SJ63)

Control room Switchgear room

Switchgear

CCU

VDU

FPR

BCU

Modem

Bay Control Unit 1) Numerical 1)

For o/c feeder protection or motor protectionalso available as combined controland protection unit 7SJ63

Switching status

6MB52 ProtectionPlug-in module

CB ON/OFF 2)

Short-circuitingfacility

Protectioncore

U

I

2)closeoropen

closeortrip

1)

2) Only one circuit shown

Serial data connection

2)

Fig. 161: Application example of medium-voltage switchgear


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5 feeders

Typical distribution-type substation

115 kV

13.8 kV

115 kV

13.8 kV

5 feeders


System configuration

The system arrangement depends on thetype of substation, the number of feedersand the required control and protectionfunctions. The basic equipment can bechosen according to the following criteria:

Central control master unithas to be chosen according to thenumber of bay control units to be seriallyconnected: 6MB513 for a maximum of 32 serial

interfaces 6MB514 for a maximum of 64 serial

interfacesAt the most 9 more serial interfaces areavailable for connection of data channels toload dispatch centers, local substation con-trol PCs, printers, etc.

Substation control centerIt normally consists of a PC with keyboardand a mouse, color monitor, LSAVIEW soft-ware and a printer for the output of reports.For exact time synchronization of 1 milli-second accuracy, a GPS or DCF77 receiverwith antenna may be used.

Bay control unitsNormally, a separate bay control unit is as-signed to every substation bay. The typehas to be selected according to the follow-ing requirements: Number of command outputs:

that means the sum of circuit breakers,isolators and other equipment to be cen-trally or remotely controlled. The stateddouble commands are normally providedfor double-pole (”+“ and ”–“) control oftrip or closing coils.Each double-pole command can be sep-arated into two single-pole commandswhere stated (Fig. 149, page 6/80).

Number of digital signal inputs:as the sum of alarms, breaker and iso-lator positions, tap changer positions,binary coded meter values, etc, to beacquired, processed or monitored.Position monitoring requires doublesignal inputs while single inputs aresufficient for normal alarms.

Number of analog inputs:depends on the number of voltages,currents and other analog values(e.g. temperatures) to be monitored.Currents (rated 1 A or 5 A ) or voltages(normally rated 100 to 110 V) can bedirectly connected to the bay controlunits. No transducers are required.Numerical protection relays also acquireand process currents and voltages.

Fig. 163: Typical distribution-type substation Fig. 164: Typical I/O signal requirements for a trans-former bay

They can also be used for load monitor-ing and indication (accuracy about 2% ofrated value). In this way, the number ofanalog inputs of the bay control unitscan be reduced. This is often practisedin distribution-type substations.

The device selection is discussed in thefollowing example.

Example:Substation control configuration

Fig. 163 shows the arrangement of atypical distribution-type substation withtwo incoming transformers, 10 outgoingfeeders and a bus tie.The required inputs and outputs at baylevel are listed in Fig. 164 for the incomingtransformer feeders and in Fig. 165 for theoutgoing line feeders, the bus tie and theVT bay.Each bay control unit is connected to thecentral control unit via fiber-optic cables(graded index fibers).The o/c relays 7SJ60, the minicompactI/O units 6MB5250 and the measuringtransducers 7KG60 each have RS 485communication interfaces and are connect-ed to a bus of a twisted pair of wires.An RS485 converter to fiber-optic is there-fore additionally provided to adapt the seri-al wire link to the fiber-optic inputs of thecentral unit.Recommendations for the selection ofthe protection relays are given in the sec-tion System Protection (6/8 and followingpages).The selection of the combined control/pro-tection units 7SJ531 or 7SJ63 is recom-mended when local control at bay level isto be provided by the bay control unit. Thelow-cost solution 7SJ60 + 6MB5250should be selected where switchgear inte-grated mechanical local control is acceptable.

Control

Isolator HV sideCircuit-breaker HV sideIsolator MV sideCircuit-breaker MV sideTap changer, higher, lowerEmergency trip

SSIDSIDCOSCO

Single signal inputDouble signal inputDouble commandSingle command

2 x DCO2 x DCO2 x DCO2 x DCO2 x SCO1 x SCO

M

I

V

50/51

87T

M

M

HV

RTD's

6MB5240-2 7SJ61 7UT512

To the centralcontrol unitOF

OFOF

M

MV

63

Incoming transformer bays

Data acqusition

1 x DSI1 x DSI1 x DSI1 x DSI8 x DSI

1 x SSI1 x SSI3 x V, 3 x J, 8 xϑ

Isolator HV sideCircuit-breaker HV sideIsolator MV sideCircuit-breaker MV sideTransformertap-changer positionsAlarm Buchholz 1Alarm Buchholz 2Measuring values


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

51

M

51

M

51

M

51

M

51

To load dispatchcenter

Centralcontrolunit

To transformerfeeders

7KG60 6MB5250

7SJ60 6MB5250

6MB5250

7SJ60 7SJ531or 7SJ63

7SJ531or 7SJ63

6MB513

RS485/O F

RS485

1 x DSI

1 x DSI

1 x DSI

5 x SSI

Isolator

Grounding switch

Circuit-breaker

5 alarms

Load currents are taken from the protection relays

Bus tie

1 x DSI

9 x SSI

Circuit-breaker

9 alarms

Control

2 x DCO Circuit-breaker

Per feeder

1 x DSI

1 x DSI

1 x DSI

5 x SSI

Isolator

Grounding switch

Circuit-breaker

5 alarms

Measuring values(3 x V, 3 x I) from protection

2 x DCO Circuit-breaker 2 x DCO Circuit-breaker

OFOF

OF

Per feederVoltage transformer-bay

1 x 7KG60

GPS

VDU Printer(option)

Massstorage

7SJ60


Fig. 165: Typical I/O signal requirements for feeders of a distribution-type substation


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSINAUT LSA – Centralized (RTU) Structure

Enhanced remoteterminal units 6MB551

The 6MB55 telecontrol system is based onthe same hardware and software modulesas the 6MB51 substation control system.The functions of the inupt/output deviceshave been taken away from the bays andrelocated to the central unit at station con-trol level. The result is the 6MB551 en-hanced remote terminal unit (ERTU).Special plug-in modules for control andacquisition of process signals are usedinstead of the bay dedicated input/outputdevices: Digital input (32 DI) Analog input (32 AI grouped,

16 AI isolated) Command output (32 CO) and Command enablingThese modules communicate with thecentral modules in the same frame via theinternal standard LSA bus. The bus can beextended to further frames by parallel in-terfaces.The 6MB551 station control unit thereforehas the basic structure of a remote termi-nal unit but offers all the functions of the6MB51 substation control system such as:

Communication

to the higher network control levels to an analysis center located either in

the station or connected remotely viaa telephone line using a modem

to the bay control unit and/or the numer-ical protection units (bay control units)

to lower-level stations (node function).This is for the purpose of controlling andmonitoring activities at the substation andnetwork control levels as well as providingdata for system planning and analysis.

Enhanced terminal unit 6MB551

Station protection7SS5

… …

Bay Control Unit6MB52*

Extension to substation

Serial interface

Station control center (option)Systemcontrol center

Central evaluationstation (PC)

Remote controlchannel

Radio time(option)

Telephone channel

1 n

Protection relay7S/7U

Parallel interface

Marshalling rackTransducers andinterposing relays

(option) (option)

Substation

Fig. 166: Protection and substation control system LSA 678 for a distribution-type substation


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSINAUT LSA – Centralized (RTU) Structure

Other tasks of the enhanced RTU are Event logging with a time resolution of

1 or 10 ms Archiving of events, variations in meas-

ured values and fault records on massstorage units

Time synchronization using radio clock(GPS, DCF77 or Rugby) or using a signalfrom a higher-level control station

Automation tasks affecting more thanone bay:– Parallel control of transformers– Synchronizing

(measured value selection)– Switching sequences– Busbar voltage simulation– Switchgear interlocking

Parameter management to meet therelevant requirements specification

Self-monitoring and system monitoring. Up to 96 serial fiber-optic interfaces to

distributed bay control units Up to 5 expansion frames.Configuration including signal I/O modulescan be parameterized as desired.Up to 121 signal I/O modules can be used(21 per frame minus one in the baseframefor each expansion frame, i.e. totally6 x 21 – 5 = 121).The 6MB551 station control unit cantherefore be expanded from having simpletelecontrol data processing functions toassuming the complex functionality of asubstation control system.The same applies to the process signalcapacity. In one unit, more than 4 000 datapoints can be addressed and, by means ofserial interfacing of subsystems, this figurecan be increased even further.The 6MB551 station control unit simplifiesthe incorporation of extensions to the sub-station by using the decentralized 6MB52*bay control units for the additional substa-tion bays.

Fig. 167: 6MB551 enhanced remote terminal unit, in-stalled in an 8MC standard cubicle with baseframeand expansion frame

These distributed input/output devicescan then be connected via serial interfaceto the telecontrol equipment. Additionalparameterization takes care of their actualintegration in the operational hierarchy.The 6MB551 RTU system is also availableas standard cubicle version SINAUT LSACOMPACT 6MB5540. The modules andthe bus system have been kept; the rackdesign and the connection technology,however, have been cost-optimized (fixedrack only and plug connectors).This version is limited to a baseframeplus one extension frame with altogether33 I/O modules, and a maximum of 5 seri-al interfaces for telecontrol connectionwithout communication to bay controlunits or numerical protection units.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MinicompactRTU*

Compact RTU

* Further 3 minicompact RTUs can be serially connected in cascadefor extension (maximum distance 100 m)With switching-current checkPotential-free

6MB552-0A6MB552-0B6MB552-0C6MB552-0D

Type Serial portsto controlcenters

6MB5530-0A6MB5530-0B6MB5530-0C

Design Singlecommands

Alarminputs

Analoginputs

888

Remote ter-minal unit withcable shieldcommunication(RTC)

Serial portsto bay units

6MB5530-1A6MB5530-1C

88

321)/8321)/8321)/8

8

82432

832

7240

104136

–8–

––

32162)

––

1Option 2

1

1additionalgateway

7

–

–

2)

1)

Local and Remote ControlSINAUT LSA – Remote Terminal Units

Remote terminal units (RTUs)

The following range of intelligent RTUs aredesigned for high-performance data acqui-sition, data processing and remote controlof substations. The compact versions6MB552/553 of SINAUT LSA are intendedfor use in smaller substations.

Fig. 171: 6MB5530-1 remote terminal unit (RTC) withcable-shield communication

Fig. 172: Remote terminal units, process signal volumes

Fig. 168: 6MB552 compact RTU for medium processsignal capacity

Fig. 169: SINAUT LSA COMPACT 6MB5540 remoteterminal unit installed in a cubicle

Fig. 170: 6MB5530-0 minicompact RTU for smallprocess signal capacity


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


RTU interfaces

The described RTUs are connected to theswitchgear via interposing relays and meas-uring transducers (± 2.5 to ± 20 mA DC)(Fig. 173). Serial connection of numericalprotection relays and control I/O units ispossible with the compact RTU type6MB552.The communication protocols for the serialconnection to system control centers canbe IEC standard 870-5-101 or the Siemensproprietary protocols 8FW.For the communication with protectionrelays, the IEC standard 870-5-103 is im-plemented.Besides these standard protocols, morethan 100 legacy protocols including deriva-tives are implemented for remote controllinks up to system control centers anddown to remote substations (see tableoverleaf).

Fig. 173: RTU interfaces

Fig. 174: VF coupler with ferrite core 35 mm

Modem

Modem

Point to point con. 1)

Line connection 1)

1)

1)

Interposing relays, transducers

……

Modem

Controlcenter

1…

Bay level

Extended switchgear

2) 2) 2)

Optical fiber

Protectionrelays andI/O units

1) Telecontrol channel2) Only with compact RTU 6MB552

Telecontrol channel

M

MM

MRTU M

MMMM

Substationlevel

RTU RTU RTU

RTU M

M

M

RTU

M

RTU

Loop configuration

Marshalling rack

Existing switchgear

Controlcenter

…n

M = Modem


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Higher telecontrol level


ModemChannel 1 Channel 2

Mini RTU6MB5530-1 (RTC)

Substation



Power cable (typically 5 km)

Signalloop

Signalloop

VF couplers VF couplers VF couplers

VF couplers VF couplersVF couplers

Power cable (typically 5 km)

Modem(optional)

Multiplexer(optional)Modem

Channel 1 Channel 2

Communicationcontrol unit

6MB5530-1 (CCU)

1st station of branch 8

1st station of branch 1

VF couplers




16th station of branch 1

Substation



16th station of branch 8

VF couplers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

…

…

…… Branch 2

Branch 1

Fig. 175: Remote control network based on remote terminal units with cable-shield communication

List of implemented legacy protocols: ADLP 180 ANSI X3.28 CETT 20 CETT 50 DNP3.0 DUST 3964R

(SINAUT 8-FW-data structure) EFD 300 EFD 400 F4F FW 535 FW 537 Geadat 90 Geadat 81GT GI74 Granit Harris 5000 IDS IEC 60870-5-101

IEC 870-5-BAG IEC 870-5-VEAG Indactic 21 Indactic 23 Indactic 33 Indactic ZM20 LMU Modbus Netcon 8830 RP570 SAT 1703 SEAB 1F SINAUT 8-FW SINAUT HSL SINAUT ST1 Telegyr 709E Telegyr 809 Tracec 130 Ursatron 8000 Wisp+

Cable-shield communication

The minicompact RTU can be deliveredin a special version for communication viacable shield (Type 6MB5530-1).It does not need a separate signaling link.The coded voice frequency (9.4 and9.9 kHz) is coupled to the cable shield witha special ferrite core (35 mm or 100 mmwindow diameter) as shown in Fig. 174.The special modem for cable-shield com-munication is integrated in the RTU.Fig. 175 shows as an example the struc-ture of a remote control network formonitoring and control of a local supplynetwork.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM – Overview

SICAM is an equipment family consistingof products for digital power automation.The system is continuous, from the sys-tem control center, through the informationtechnology, to the bay protection and con-trol units.The SICAM System is based on SIMATIC*)

and PC standard modules. SICAM is thusan open system with standardized inter-faces, readily lending itself to further de-velopment.The SICAM family consists of the follow-ing individual systems (see Fig. 176): SICAM RTU, the telecontrol system with

the following features– Principal function: information transfer– Central process connection– PLC functions– Communication with control center

SICAM SAS, the decentralized automa-tion system– Principal function: substation automa-

tion– Decentralized and centralized process

connection– Local operation and monitoring with

archiving functions– Communication with the control

center SICAM PCC, the PC-based Station Con-

trol System with the following features– Principal function:

Substation supervision and control– Decentralized process connection– LAN/WAN communication with

IEC 60870-6 TASE.2– Flexible communication– Linkage to Office® products

Fig. 176: The SICAM family

IEC 60 870-5-103

SICAM RTU

SICAM SAS

SICAM PCC

Othernetworks

IEC 60870-5-101SINAUT 8-FWPROFIBUSIndustrial Ethernet

PROFIBUS

SICAMWinCC

IEC 60870-5-101

SIPROTEC 4Protection andcontrol devices

Processcontrol unit

OtherIEDs

SIPROTEC 3Protection relays

PROFIBUS

Corporate infor-mation system

PROFIBUS

SIPROTEC 4Protection andcontrol devices

Other IEDs

IEC 60870-5-103

WANe.g. ICCP

SystemControl center

Switchgear

System Control center

...

Protection relays

IEC 60870-5-103

Interposing relays, transducers

Marshalling rack

SIMEASQ or T Trans-ducers

...IEDs(Relays, etc.)

*) Siemens PLCs and Industrial AutomationSystems (see Catalog ST70)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM RTU – Design

SICAM RTU 6MD201Enhanced Remote Terminal Unit

Overview

The SICAM RTU Remote Terminal Unit isbased on the SIMATIC S7-400, a powerfulPLC version of the Siemens product rangefor industrial automation. The SIMATIC S7-400 has been supplemented by the addi-tion of modules and functions so as to pro-vide a flexible, efficient remote terminalunit. Based on worldwide used SIMATICS7-400, it is possible to add project-specif-ic automation functions to the existing tel-econtrol functions.The SIMATIC S7-400 System has been ex-panded to include the following properties: All-round isolation of all connections with

2.5 kV electric strength Heavy duty output contacts (10 A,

150 VDC, 240 AC) on external relay mo-dule (type LR with up to 16 commandrelays)

System control center

Communication

Central processconnection

SICAMRTU

Fig. 178: SICAM RTU remote terminal unit

CT and VT graded measuring value ac-quisition via serially connected numericaltransducers SIMEAS Q or T(see page 6/132)

Acquisition of short-time event signalswith 1 ms resolution and real-timestamping

Preprocessing of information acquired(e.g. double indications, metered values)

Fail-safe process control (e.g., 1-out-of-ncheck, switching current check)

Secure long-distance data transmissionusing the IEC 60870-5-101 or SINAUT8-FW protocol

Remote diagnostic capabilityThe open and uniform system structure isillustrated in Fig. 177, showing the essen-tial modules.A variety of SICAM equipment family prod-ucts are available depending on the differ-ent requirements and applications.The individual system modules are de-scribed in detail in the sections below.

Fig.177: SICAM system structure

SICAM: Open system structure

SIPROTEC

SICAM

Database

SICAM WinCC

DIGSI

SICAM plusTOOLS

Bay control devices

Communication

SCADA

CPU

Central I/O

Protective devices

Datarecording

Software Communi-cation


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 179: SICAM mounting rack

System architecture

The SICAM RTU is a modular system. It issuitable for substation sizes from approxi-mately 300 up to 2048 data points.The SICAM RTU consists of the: SICAM S7-400 basic rack with its exten-

sion facilities and Any S7-400 CPU (412 to 477, with/with-

out PROFIBUS connection). As standardCPU, the CPU 412 or CPU 413 is used.

To supplement the SIMATIC S7-400 mod-ules, telecontrol-specific modules havebeen developed in order to fulfill the re-quired properties and functions, such asfor example electric insulation strength andtime resolution.These are the following modules: Power supply

– Voltage range from 19 V–72 V DC– 88 V–288 V AC/DC

Process input and output modules– Digital input DI (32 inputs) for status

indications, counting pulses, bit pat-terns and transformer tap settings• voltage ranges:24–60 V DC110–125 V DC

– Analog input AI (32 analog inputsgrouped, 16 AIR (analog inputs iso-lated) for currents (0.5 mA–24 mA)and voltages (0.5 V–10 V)

– Command output (32 CO) forcommands and digital setpoints• voltage range: 24–125 V DC

– Command release (8 DI, 8 DO) forlocal inputs and outputs and monitor-ing of command output circuits• voltage ranges:24–60 V DC110–125 V DC

Communication module– Telecontrol processor TP1 for commu-

nication with the system control cen-ter with protocols IEC 60870-5-101and SINAUT 8-FW and as time signalreceivers for DCF77 or GPS reception.

The Power Supply and the I/O modulescan also be used in SICAM SAS.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Construction

The SICAM RTU is based on the SIMATICS7-400. The construction of the SICAMRTU is therefore, as is the case withSIMATIC, highly compact, straightforwardand simple to operate: All connections are accessible from the

front. Therefore, no swivel frame is nec-essary.

The modules are enclosed and thereforeextremely rugged.

Plugging and unplugging of modules ispossible while in operation; thereforemaintenance work can be carried out ina minimum of time (reduced MTTR).

Direct process connection is effected bymeans of self-coding front plug connec-tors of screw-in or crimp design.

During configuration, no module slotrules have to be observed; the SICAMRTU permits free module fitting.

No forms of setting are necessary onthe modules; replacement can be carriedout in a minimum of time.

Dependent on configuration level and cus-tomer requirements, there are two housingvariants: a floor-mounting cabinet and a wall-mounting cabinet.Both housing variants are optimized for theSICAM RTU; they are of flexible modularconstruction. Thus, for example, provisionis made for installation of accessories toprovide a cost-effective rack system.

Fig. 180a: SICAM RTU wall-mounting cabinet

Fig. 180b: SICAM RTU floor-mounting cabinet


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


SICAM Modules

SICAM RTU modules have been developedto be SIMATIC-compatible and can there-fore be used in a standard SIMATIC S7-400,for example for the following applications: Acquisition of status indications with a

resolution of 1 ms and an accuracy of± 2 ms

Time synchronization of the SIMATICCPU to within an accuracy of ± 2 ms

An analog input module with 32 channelswith current or voltage inputs

Use of modules with 2.5 kV electric insu-lation strength in order to save interpos-ing relays

The modules are used for example in hydro-power plants for acquisition of fault eventsvia digital input with a resolution of 1 msand relaying them to a power station sys-tem, for example via an Industrial Ethernet.The other application is the use of the com-munication module TP1 in a SIMATIC NET -IEC 60870-5-101 gateway. Fig. 182 showsan example of a PROFIBUS gateway.

Fig. 181: SICAM module

Fig. 182: Gateway: PROFIBUS – IEC 60870-5-101

SICAM RTU

Switchgear

IEC 60870-5-101SINAUT 8-FWPROFIBUSIndustrial Ethernet

IEDs

Profibus

Gateway


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM RTU – Functions

SICAM RTU functions

SICAM RTU possesses telecontrol func-tions, such as: Alarm acquisition and processing, includ-

ing:– Single point information– Double point information– Bit patterns– Transformer taps– Metering pulses

Measured value acquisition and process-ing, including:– parameterizable current inputs in

ranges from0.5 mA–24 mA

– parameterizable voltage inputs inranges from 0.5 V–10 V

Fail-safe command output, including:– Single commands– Double commands– Bit pattern outputs– Transformer tap change control– Pulse commands– Continuous commands

Telecontrol communication with a maxi-mum of two system control centerswith different telecontrol messages,with the standardized IEC 60870-5-101and/or with the worldwide provenSINAUT 8-FW protocol.

In addition to the standard RTU functions,the SICAM RTU provides additional func-tions, such as: Efficient operation mode control with 15

priorities and various send lists,such as:– Spontaneous lists with/without time– Scan lists for measured values, me-

tered values or status indications– Cyclic lists– Time-controlled lists

With the aid of this mode control system,it is possible to optimize the data flow be-tween remote terminal unit and systemcontrol center.

Time synchronization via DCF or GPS re-ceiver on the TP1 module.The SIMATIC CPU is synchronized towithin an accuracy of 1 ms.

Serial interface to a maximum of twocontrol centers.In addition to selection of the telecontrolprotocols IEC 60870-5-101 and SINAUT8-FW, the scope of status indications,measured values and commands percontrol center per interface can be con-figured, with separate telecontrol proto-cols, different process data, differentmessage addresses and different modes.

Can be extended up to 4096 informationpoints

Comprehensive remote diagnostic facili-ties locally or in remote form with the aidof the SIMATIC TeleService.

Output of analog setpoints via theS7-400 AO module (1500 kV insulated)

SICAM RTU is maintenance-free andrequires no fan cooling

The variety of available module typeswith wide-range inputs is kept to a mini-mum; the value ranges are parameterizble.

Fig. 183: plusTOOLS for SICAM RTU, hardware configuration

Engineering

The SICAM RTU is designed such that alltelecontrol functions are parameterizable.Comprehensive Help texts assist the oper-ator during configuration. The followingconfiguration steps are carried out with theaid of the intuitive-operation program plus-TOOLS for SICAM RTU: Creation of hardware configuration,

SIMATIC modules and SICAM modules Setting of module parameters on the

SIMATIC modules and SICAM modules Assignment of process data to the mes-

sage addresses Assignment of message addresses to

the message lists in the mode controlsystem, stipulation of send priorities.

Checking of all parameters for plausibil-ity.

Loading of parameters into a non-volatileflash EPROM of the CPU.

Fig. 183 shows as an example the maskfor hardware configuration.

1. Select a module from the Hardware Catalog and2. Drag it to the desired module location –

automatic plausibility checking and addressing


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM RTU – Functions

Fig. 184a: Operator Panel

Fig. 184b: Operator Panel mounted in a cubicle door

Automation functions

The SICAM RTU is based on the SIMATICS7-400. Therefore, all modules of theSIMATIC S7-400 System can be used in aSICAM RTU: For example, a CPU 413-DPwith PROFIBUS connection or the com-munication processor CP 441, e.g. for con-nection of a Modbus device.If additional functions are to be introducedproject-specifically by S7 PLC means,these can be integrated with the aid of theinternal API Interface (Application ProgramInterface). Thus, for example, the data re-ceived via the CP 441 can be processedinternally and sent via the TP1 to the sys-tem control center.The following functions can for examplebe implemented: Initiate functions by commands from

the system control center Derive commands as a function of

measured value changes (e.g. loadshedding when a frequency drop hasbeen measured)

Connection of an operator panel to theserial system interface (Fig. 184a/b)

Connection of decentralized peripheralsvia the PROFIBUS DP


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM MRTU/microRTU

SICAM MRTU 6MD202/6MD203Small Remote Terminal Unit

Overview

Supplementary to the SICAM RTU, thefollowing small remote terminal units areavailable for low-level upgrades: SICAM microRTU 6MD203 up to

50 process inputs/outputs SICAM miniRTU 6MD202 up to

300 process inputs/outputsThe two remote terminal units are basedon the SIMATIC S7-200.Supplementary to the SIMATIC modules, a“SICAM TCM” communication module hasbeen developed for the SICAM miniRTU.The TCM module is installed in a S7-214housing.The SICAM micro and miniRTUs providesmall remote terminal units which handlethe process data and communicate bymeans of an assured IEC 60870-5-101 tel-econtrol protocol with the system controlcenter. The SICAM miniRTU makes it pos-sible to supplement project-specific func-tions.Both units possess the following advantag-es of the SIMATIC S7-200 System in termsof construction: Compact design Quick mounting by snapping onto a hat

rail Low power consumption Extensive range of expansion modules

– Digital inputs– Relay outputs– Electronic outputs– Analog inputs– Analog outputs

Connection of expansion modules bymeans of plug-in system

Connection of process signals by meansof screw terminals

Automatic recognition of upgrade level

Fig. 185: SICAM microRTU

SICAM microRTU 6MD203

For the SICAM microRTU, it is possible touse an S7-214 or an S8-216 CPU. The PPIinterface is used for loading the programsand the parameters and also for communi-cation with the system control center.The standardized transmission protocol IEC60870-5-101 has been implemented. Un-balanced mode has been chosen as trafficmode because small remote terminal unitsare generally operated in partyline (that isto say polling) mode.The SICAM microRTU performs the follow-ing functions: Acquisition and processing of a maxi-

mum of 24 single point items of infor-mation

Acquisition and processing of meteringpulses (maximum 20 Hz) for a maximumof 4 metered values

Acquisition of a maximum of 12 meas-ured values

Command output as pulse or persistentcommand for a maximum of 14 digitaloutputs

Transmission of data (priority-controlled)spontaneously or on demand in half du-plex mode

Transmission rate: 300–9600 bit/secParameterizing takes place with STEP7MicroWIN. All parameters are preset; theyonly have to be adapted slightly. The pa-rameters are loaded locally from the PC.For transmission, there is a gradable V.23hat-rail-mounted modem with an RS-485interface. The transmission rate is 1200bit/sec.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM miniRTU

Functions

The SICAM miniRTU performs the follow-ing functions or incorporates the followingfeatures: Acquisition and processing of single

point and double point information.Transmission with or without time inmessage.

Acquisition and processing of meteringpulses (maximum 20 Hz). Re-storing bymeans of internal timer or by means ofmessage from the system control center.Transmission with or without time inmessage.

Fig. 186: SICAM miniRTU with TCM and S7-214 CPU

SICAM miniRTU 6MD2020

Overview

The SICAM miniRTU differs from a SICAMmicroRTU in the following respects: Volume of data: 300 instead of 50 infor-

mation points Clock control: messages with time

stamp are possible An integrated V.21 modem is available Project-specific additions can be intro-

duced via the API interfaceThe SICAM miniRTU is a small, efficientmodular remote terminal unit with a widerange of functions. The SICAM miniRTUcan be upgraded from a configuration levelof 14 digital inputs up to a medium-sizedterminal with a maximum of 300 processpoints.For the SICAM miniRTU, it is possible touse the S7-200 CPUs 27-214 or S7-216. Inaddition, the TCM (telecontrol module)communication module is required. TheTCM incorporates an RS-232 interface forcommunication with the system controlcenter; this implements the entire mes-sage interchange. The standard transmis-sion protocol is implemented: IEC 60870-5-101, unbalanced mode. IEC 60870-5-101balanced mode and SINAUT 8-FW point-to-point traffic are in preparation.Fig. 186 illustrates a minimum configura-tion level of a SICAM miniRTU with anS7-214 CPU. Fig. 187 shows in diagram-matic form a maximum configuration levelwith 3 S7-200 CPUs.

Acquisition and processing of measuredvalues, threshold processing, thresholdmatchable by means of message.Transmission with or without time inmessage.

Command output as pulse commandswith 1-out-of-n monitoring and commandrelease. Persistent command output ispossible.

Analog setpoint output. Bit-by-bit assignment of process infor-

mation to processing functions Clock control with synchronization by

message from system control center

Fig. 187: SICAM miniRTU with TCM and three S7-214 CPUs

2-wire, partyline traffic, transmission on demand

IEC 60870-5-101unbalanced mode


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

To control centerPoint-to-point traffic

SINAUT LSAdata concentrator

2-wire, polling mode


Communication

Communication with the system controlcenter is carried out by the SICAM miniRTUwith the TCM communicaton module.A gradable V.21 modem is already integrat-ed in the TCM, so that the SICAM miniRTUcan be used directly.Other communication characteristics are: Transmission speed of 300–9600 bit/

sec. adjustable Mode control with 15 priorities which

can be freely assigned Different send lists for:

– Spontaneous mode– Polling mode– Cyclic mode

Linkage of small remote transmission unitsgenerally takes place by means of trans-mission on demand. The lines with the re-mote transmission units are compressedwith the aid of a data concentrator and arerelayed to the system control center.Fig. 188 shows an example of configura-tion.Rail-mounted modems with RS-232 inter-face are available for transmission with anexternal modem: Gradable V.23 modem with 1200 bit/sec

transmission speed Dedicated line modem – V.32 modem –

with a transmission speed of 9600 bit/sec.

Fig. 188: SICAM miniRTU, typical configuration

Project-specific expansion options

In the SICAM miniRTU, an API interface(Application Program Interface) is availa-ble. Project-specific programs can thus beupgraded. Access by the API interface tocommunication is supported by the sys-tem. That is to say, the information fromthe control center can be processed in theuser program; information derived in theuser program can be remotely controlled.Examples of this are: Formation of group alarms, Transmitting internally formed meas-

ured values or metered values to thecontrol center,

Initiating functions by means of com-mands from the control center,

Influencing of alarm processing,for example filtering, relaying via API,

Activating PROFIBUS link on an S7-215.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SICAM RTU

SICAMmicroRTU

1) Processing of double point information and double commands is also possible. The table is intended solely to represent the numberof connection points.

2) Maximum values; note combination options!

RTU Type Serial portsto CC

6MD201

Design Singlecommands 1)

Analoginputs

Analogoutputs

typical up to 2048maximum: 4096

SICAMminiRTU

2

Single pointinformation 1)

6MD202 192 2) 192 2) 36 2) 12 2) 1

6MD203 24 16 12 4 1


Engineering

Parameterizing is effected with the plus-TOOLS program for miniRTU. The programcan be run on Windows 95, 98 or NT 4.Parameterizing takes place operator-guidedby means of menus. Extensive help textsfacilitate operation. Figs. 190 and 191 illus-trate as examples the mask for hardwareconfiguration and the mask for assignmentof message addresses.The parameters are checked for plausibilityprior to loading. They are loaded in non-volatile form from the PC into the flashEPROM of the TCM. All parameters of aSICAM miniRTU can be read locally withthe PC. For this purpose, the parameterset of the station to be read out does nothave to be present on the PC. Modificationand reloading is possible.

Fig. 190: plusTOOLS, generation of hardware configuration Fig. 191: plusTOOLS, parameterizing of communication

Fig. 189: Remote terminal units, process signal volumes


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM SAS – Overview

SICAM SAS Overview

In order to assure security of supply, thesubstation automation system must be ca-pable in normal operation of real-time ac-quisition and evaluation of a large volumeof individual items of information.In the event of a fault, additional informa-tion is required to assist rapid fault diagno-sis. Graphic display functions, logs andcurve evaluations are aids suitable for thispurpose. The SICAM SAS substation con-trol and protection system provides a sys-tem solution for efficient implementationof these functions.SICAM SAS is designed as an open-typesystem which, based on internationalstandards, provides simple interfaces forintegration of additional bay control units ornew transmission protocols, as well as in-terfaces for implementation of project-spe-cific automation functions.

Field of application

SICAM SAS is used in power transmissionand distribution for automation of medium-voltage and high-voltage substations.It is used wherever: Distributed processes are to be moni-

tored and controlled. Functions previously available on a high-

er control level are being decentralizedand implemented locally.

High standards of electric insulationstrength and electromagnetic compatibil-ity are demanded.

A real-time capability system is required. Reliability is very important. Communication with other control sys-

tems must be possible.

Fig.192: SICAM SAS components: SICAM SC Substation Controller,SIPROTEC 4 relays and 6MB525 bay control units

Functions

SAS assumes the following functions in asubstation: Monitoring Data exchange with and operation of se-

rially connected protection devices andother IEDs

Local and remote control with interlock Teleindication Automation Local processing and display Archiving and logging


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM SAS – Structure

System architecture

The typical configuration of a SICAM SASconsists of: SICAM SC Substation Controller Connection to higher-level system con-

trol centers Connection to bay level Bay control units, protection relays or

combined control and protection bayunits.

Configuration PC with SICAM plusTOOLS Operation and monitoring with SICAM

WinCCThe modular construction of the systempermits a wide range of combination op-tions within the scope of the system limits.In the SICAM SC substation controller, theSICAM I/O modules can be used for alter-native central connection of process inputsand outputs (see description of the SICAMRTU).

Fig. 193: Typical configuration of a SICAM SAS

System control center(s) or telecontrol node(s)

IEC 60870-5-101SINAUT 8-FW

SICAM SCSubstationController

SIMATIC NET

SICAM plusTOOLSConfiguration

SICAM WinCCOperator control,monitoring,and archiving

SIPROTEC 4 protectionand control devices

6MB525 baycontrol unitsand 7**6relays

SIPROTEC 3protection relays

GPS

PROFIBUS FMS wireRS485 O.F. O.F.

IEC 60870-5-103


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM SAS – SC Substation Controller

SICAM SC Substation Controller

The SICAM SC is an open-type, modularconstruction telecontrol and substationcontroller. The specific functions of a tele-control system are combined with those ofa programmable automation system (PLC).Standard functions of the automation sys-tem and control and protection-specificapplications, such as real-time processing,fail-safe command output or telecontrolfunctions, combine to form a rugged,future-oriented hardware system.The basis of the SICAM SC is formed bythe SIMATIC M7-400 family of systems. Inorder to meet the increased requirementsof telecontrol and substation control tech-nology for electric insulation strength, younow have at your disposal a wide range ofmodules and devices to supplement theSIMATIC standard modules. The communi-cation processors of the system supportthe IEC 60870-5-101, SINAUT 8FW,IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS FMS, PROFI-BUS DP and Industrial Ethernet communi-cation protocols.

Hardware

The hardware of the SICAM SubstationController is based on the standard mod-ules of the SIMATIC S7/M7-400 automa-tion system and on additional moduleswhich have been developed for the specialrequirements of control and protection.The following modules form the basic com-plement of the SICAM SC: Power Supply SIMATIC M7-400 CPU

(Pentium processor) MCP (Modular Communication

Processor)The MCP module is the function modulewhich supports the communication func-tions, such as telecontrol connection tohigher-level system control centers, e.g.with the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, andserial connection of bay control units bymeans of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. Inaddition, it is in SICAM SAS the time mas-ter, to which can be connected time signalreceivers for DCF77 or GPS.Additionally available for the MCP are theXC2 (eXtension Copper 2 interfaces) andXF6 (eXtension Fiber optic 6 interfaces)extension modules for additional communi-cation interfaces to higher-level systemcontrol centers and bay control units (IEC 60870-5-103).In addition, the following modules can beused for supplementary functions in theSICAM SC: For central process connection:

SICAM I/O modules (see description ofthe SICAM RTU) and SIMATIC 400Standard I/O modules (see Siemens Cat-alog ST 70)

For connection of bay control units viaProfibus DP and FMS:SIMATIC 400 communication processormodules

For connection to SICAM WinCC:SIMATIC 400 modules for Profibus FMSand Industrial Ethernet

Construction

Like the SICAM RTU, the SICAM SC isbased on the SIMATIC 400. Consequently,the statements on construction of theSICAM RTU are also applicable to theSICAM SC.

Software

The bases of the run-time system (SICAMRTC for SAS) in the SICAM SC are to befound both on the M7-CPU and on theMCP module real-time operating systemsfor event-controlled program execution.Among other things, this assures an es-sential requirement for control applications:State change of information may not belost or remain unnoticed in critical situa-tions (→ alarm surge).


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


System security

SICAM SAS fulfills to a very considerableextent the reliability and security require-ments imposed on a substation controland protection system. In the case of allelectronic devices incorporated in theSAS SICAM System, special attention hasbeen paid to electromagnetic compatibility.

Interruption of power supply

The SICAM SAS System is designed to bemaintenance-free, that is to say no backupbatteries are required for restart aftermains failure.

Safety functions

Hardware self-test: On startup and cyclical-ly in the background.General check: At start of the transfer timesystem and creep mode in background.

Communication

Errors in data transmission due to electro-magnetic effects, earth potential differenc-es, ageing of components and other sourc-es of interference and noise on the trans-mission channels are reliably detected.The safety measures of the protocols pro-vide protection from: Bit and message errors Information loss Unwanted information Separation or interference of assembled

items of information

Priority-controlled message initialization

Messages initiated by events are initializedquickly (priority-controlled).

Failure indication

The failure status is derived in case of: Contact chatter Signalling-circuit voltage failure Module out of orderA telecontrol malfunction group alarm canbe parameterized from individual pieces ofinformation, for example: MCB trip Voice-frequency telegraphy error Channel error No signalling-circuit voltage Module out of order Buffer overflow

System capacity

The maximum configuration of theSICAM SC substation controller consistsof: 1 baseframe with 7 to 11 free module

locations, dependent on choice of MCPcommunication link and

Maximum of 6 expansion racks,each with 14 free module locations

Thus, you have available a maximum of95 free module locations which you canequip for example with 95 I/O modules ora further 4 MCP(4) communication assem-blies and 75 I/O modules. For connectionof bay control units via PROFIBUS FMS, upto 4 CP443-5 base communication proces-sors can be plugged into the baseframe.Each CP443-5 requires one module loca-tion. For connection of PROFIBUS DP de-vices, an interface module is used which isplugged into a module shaft of the CPUmodule. Connection to Industrial Ethernetcan be implemented via the CP443-1 com-munication processor and will then requireone module location. Alternatively, you canalso however use the CP1401 interfacemodule which is plugged into a moduleshaft of the CPU module.Under these conditions, it is possible to im-plement up to a maximum of 3040 itemsof information to a SICAM SC via central-ized process connection. With the use ofbay control units – linked to the SICAM SCvia MCP communication assemblies orPROFIBUS – it is possible for up to 10,000items of information to be managed, fordecentralized process connection.

Interfaces

The variability and expansion capability ofa substation control and protection systemdepends primarily on its outward interfac-es. SICAM SAS supports internationalstandards, such as PROFIBUS, theIEC 60870 5-101 telecontrol protocol orthe IEC 60870-5-103 relay communicationprotocol and thus assures optimum flexibili-ty of substation planning.The SICAM communication modules of theSICAM SC are equipped with serial inter-faces (parameterizable as RS232 or asRS422/485) and with optical fiber links.They are combined, according to applica-tion, to form MCP communication assem-blies which consist of the MCP communi-cation processor and XC2 and/or XF expan-sion modules.

Measured value capturing

Live zero monitoring (4–20 mA)

Command output

Safe command output, i.e. Destination monitoring (1-out-of-n) Switching current check Interference voltage monitoring Determination of the coil resistanceThe SICAM SC system provides the follow-ing five operating modes, thus allowing theuser to take into account different safetyrequirements for process output: 1-pole command output 11/2-pole command output 2-pole command output 11/2-pole command output with separate

command release through CR module 2-pole command output with separate

command release through CR moduleBy combining the CO module with theCR module, a single error (in case of 11/2-pole command output) in the commandoutput circuit results in the command notbeing executed.Through the test and monitoring measuresprovided by the CR module, which make itpossible to distribute the command outputcircuit to two independent modules, highrequirements are met.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

– IEC 60870-5-103protection relays andbay unitsModule MCP (XC2, XF6)

IED-communication

– IEC 60870-5-103SINAUT 8FWModule MCP (XC2, XF6)

– PROFIBUS FMSConnection to SIPROTECModule CP443-5

– PROFIBUS DPDP-“devices“Module IF964

– Industrial Ethernet– PPROFIBUS FMS

Connection to SICAMWinCCModule CP443-1or -5

Substation bus

Field bus

Telecommunication


Telecontrol interfaces

Via the serial interfaces of the MCP com-munication processor and the XC2 expan-sion modules, one can connect the SICAMSC to a maximum of three higher-level sys-tem control centers.The telecontrol interfaces are operatedwith the IEC 60870-5-101 or SINAUT 8FWtransmission protocols and are parameter-izable as RS232, RS422/RS485 or opticalfiber interfaces.

Bay control unit interfaces

For connection of decentralized items ofinformation via bay control interfaces, vari-ous options are available: A maximum of 4 CP 443-5 base mod-

ules for connection of bay control unitswith PROFIBUS FMS interface. Onecan connect a maximum of 48 devices(SIPROTEC 4, 6MB525) per module; thetotal number in the design may nothowever exceed 96 devices.

One IF964-DP interface module for con-nection of a maximum of 20 SU200 baycontrol units and/or SIMEAS measuringtransducers via PROFIBUS DP. For allother bay control units with PROFIBUSDP interface, the upper limit of 127 de-vices will apply.

A maximum of 4 MCP(4) communicationassemblies, each consisting of one MCPcommunication processor and 4 XF6 ex-pansion modules with optical fiber inter-faces for a maximum of 96 bay controlunits (IEC 60870-5-103).

A maximum of 1 MCP (1) communica-tion assembly (consisting of 1 MCPcommunication processor and 1 XC2 ex-pansion module) and 1 MCP communi-cation assembly (consisting of 1 MCPcommunication processor) for a maxi-mum of 186 bay control units via a maxi-mum of 6 RS485 lines (IEC 60870-5-103).

Combinations of the above examples arepossible, but the quantity of 10,000 infor-mation points should not be exceeded.

MPI interface

On the CPU module is located 1 MPI inter-face (token ring multipoint-capability busstructure) for design, parameterizing, diag-nostics.

Time signal reception

The MCP communication processor pos-sesses an interface for receipt of an exter-nal time signal. Time synchronization iseffected by means of DCF77 or GPS.

Fig. 194: SICAM SC communication interfaces

Design tools

Design of the SICAM SC is carried out withSICAM plusTOOLS which is based on theSIMATIC basic modules: STEP7, SIMATICCFC and Borland C/C++.

Process visualization

For visualization and control of the process,SICAM WinCC is used; this is based onSIMATIC WinCC.

Expandability

SICAM has been designed for a new gen-eration of devices and function modules forthe automation of substations in powersupply.SICAM integrates complementary andcompatible product lines and is the logicalcontinuation of proven, available modules.By virtue of its open system concept,SICAM SAS is adaptable to the growingdemands of the future. System expansionand further development are readily possible.

Bay control units

In the design and parameterizing of sub-device connections, SICAM plusTOOLSaccesses databases which describe theinterface complement of the devices.Creation of a new protection unit type withIEC 60870-5-103 transmission protocol ismade possible by the parameterizer inSICAM plusTOOLS.

Protocols

Telecontrol and field bus protocols will infuture be incorporated in modular fashionby means of an expansion interface.

SIMATIC modules

Within SICAM SAS, it is possible to usethe SIMATIC Standard I/O modules (seeSiemens Catalog ST70, Siemens Compo-nents for Totally Integrated Automation.)


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM SAS – Bay Control Units

Bay control units

Serial connection of distributed bay controlunits allows access to extensive detailedinformation about your switchgear in thesubstation control and protection system.For this purpose, SICAM SAS offers baycontrol units with differing scope of infor-mation and function. The range extends,according to requirements, from pure baycontrol units and protection relays on theone hand, to combined devices on the oth-er hand which provide the bay protectionand control functions in a single unit.SICAM SAS supports bay control unitswith IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS FMSand PROFIBUS DP interface.

6MB525 Mini Bay Unit

(see description of SINAUT LSA)This low-end unit with its limited range ofinformation is preferably used in single-busbar substations. It can be connectedvia RS485 with IEC 60870-5-103 or viaPROFIBUS FMS to the SICAM SC.

7SJ531 CombinedBay Control and Protection Unit

(see description of SINAUT LSA and Pow-er System Protection)The 7SJ531 possesses, in addition to pro-tection functions, the facility for controllinga switching device (also remotely). It canbe integrated in the SICAM SAS withIEC 60870-5-103 via optical fiber link.

Type ComponentsDesign CommandsDouble Single

Signal inputsDouble Single

Analog inputsDirectconnectionto transformer

Connectionto measuretransducer

6MD6316MD632

6MD633

6MD634

6MD635

6MD636

6MD637

45 + 4 2)

5 + 4 2)

3 + 4 2)

7 + 8 2)

7 + 8 2)

4 + 8 2)

–1

1

–

–

–

1

Bay control units in newdesign, optimized for mediumvoltage switchgear with11/2-pole control (max. 7switching devices). 2-polecontrol is also possible (withmax. 4 switching devices).


Compact baycontrol unit(SIPROTEC 4design with largegraphic display) 1)

512

10

10

18

16

16

1–

–

–

1

1

1

4 x I, 3 x U4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

–

4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

–

––

2

–

–

2

–

Combined controland protectiondevice with localbay control 1)

7SJ6107SJ6127SJ6217SJ6227SJ6317SJ632

7SJ633

7SJ635

7SJ636

––––45 + 4 2)

5 + 4 2)

7 + 8 2)

7 + 8 2)

Combined control and protectiondevices. 7SJ61 and 7SJ62 with4 line text display, 7SJ63 withgraphic display. Optimized for11/2 pole control (max.7switching devices). 2-polecontrol is also possible(with max. 4 switching devices).


4687–1

1

–

–

––––5

12

10

18

16

3117

111–

–

1

1

4 x I4 x I4 x I, 3 x U4 x I, 3 x U4 x I, 3 x U4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

4 x I, 3 x U

––––––

2

–

2

1) 11/2-pole control; 2-pole control possible2) Second figure is number of heavy duty relays

Fig. 195: Survey of bay units


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM SAS – Bay Control Units

SIPROTEC 4

(see description of Power SystemProtection)The 7SJ63 and the 6MD63 are designedfor larger volumes of information and thusare also suitable for use in duplicate-busbarsubstations.SIPROTEC 4 units are preferably connect-ed to the SICAM SAS via PROFIBUS FMS.Connection via IEC 60870-5-103 with re-duced functionality (compared to the useof PROFIBUS FM) is also possible.The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ61 and 7SJ62 relayscan also be used via Profibus FMS andIEC 60870-5-103 in SICAM SAS. Thesetwo units support control of the feeder cir-cuit-breaker.

Protective relays (V3 type)

By means of IEC 60870-5-103, allSIPROTEC 3 protective relays (see PowerSystem Protection, page 6/8), and also pro-tection relays of other manufacturers supp-orting IEC 60870-5-103 can be connectedto the SICAM SC substation controller.

Other bay control units

In addition, the following can be connectedto the SICAM SC: SIMEAS T transducer via

IEC 60870-5-103 SIMEAS Q Power Quality via

PROFIBUS DP Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen transform-

er tap voltage controllers (for exampleVC100, MK30E) via IEC 60870-5-103

Eberle transformer tap voltage controller(RegD) via IEC 60870-5-103

SU200 bay control unit for high-voltageuse via PROFIBUS DP

Decentralized peripherals via PROFIBUSDP (for example ET200)

Fig.196: SICAM SAS, connection of SIPROTEC 4 bay control units via PROFIBUS FMS and optical fiber

PROFIBUS FMS

System control center or telecontrol node

IEC 80870-5-101SINAUT 8-FW

SICAM SCSubstationController

MPI

SIMATIC plusTOOLSConfiguration

SICAM WinCCOperator controland monitoring,archiving

Fiber opticcables

GPS

OLM(Optical Link Module)

Fiber opticcables

SIPROTEC 4 devices via PROFIBUS FMS


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SICAM WinCC

In the SICAM SAS substation automationsystem, SICAM WinCC is the human-ma-chine interface HMI between the user andthe computer-assisted monitoring and con-trol system.For efficient system management, numer-ous single information items must be dis-played quickly and clearly.The state of the substation must be dis-played and logged correctly at all times.Important indications, along with measuredand metered values of past time periodsmust be archived in such a way that theyare available for specific evaluation in theform of curves or tables at any time.The SICAM WinCC human-machine inter-face meets these requirements for efficientsystem management and also provides theuser with numerous options for individualdesign of the system user interface andnumerous open interfaces for implement-ing operation-specific functions. The win-dowing technique of SICAM WinCC makesit easier to work with. In designing thegraphic displays, the user has every degreeof freedom and also has the support of apool of predefined substation automationsymbols such as switchgear, transformersor bay devices.SICAM WinCC consists of the WinCCprocess visualization system and SICAMsoftware components. WinCC

WinCC offers standard function modulesfor graphical display, for messaging, ar-chiving and reporting. Its powerful proc-ess interface, fast display refresh andreliable data archiving function assurehigh availability.S7-PMC serves as a basis for a chrono-logical messaging and archiving of data.

SICAM componentsThey consist of:– SICAM symbol library,– SICAM message management

expansion,– SICAM wizards,– SICAM processing functions and– SICAM Valpro, (Measured/ Metered

Value Processing Unit)

SICAM symbol library

The SICAM symbol library contains switch-gear, bay devices, transformers and otherobject templates for bay representationswhich are typical for substation control and

Local and Remote ControlSICAM SAS – Human-Machine Interface

Fig. 197: Overview diagram in Graphics Designer

Fig. 198: Selecting a circuit-breaker from the symbol library

protection systems. One can use them fordesigning detail images. The symbols areselected from the library and placed in adetail image using the Drag & Drop func-tion. The symbols are dynamized. Thus, forexample, there are several different viewsof a circuit-breaker which visualize the ON,OFF or fault position switching states.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SICAM message managementexpansion

The SICAM message management expan-sion ensures a chronological messagingand archiving of data. On the basis ofS7-PMC, the SICAM Format DLL evaluatesthe data and assigns the correspondingmessages to them. Based on this, a milli-second resolution of all events is given andfor every event not only the state of indica-tion itself is available, but also additionalinformation without the need for additionalparameterizing effort.For message assignment, the format DLLrecurs to the WinCC text libary. You canadapt the texts contained in the text libraryto meet your project-specific requirements.

SICAM wizards

The SICAM wizards assist the user in cre-ating a new WinCC project. The followingtasks are carried out with help of the wiz-ards: Creating SICAM structure types:

The Create SICAM tag structure typeswizard helps the user to generate thestructure types for structured tags whichare necessary in a SICAM system.Structure types are needed for importingtags from SICAM plusTOOLS.

Taking over tags from SICAM plusTOOLS:The Import SICAM tags wizard helps toimport tags from SICAM plusTOOLSinto SICAM WinCC.This function allows the user to visualizeinformation, i.e. to represent it in proc-ess diagrams, configured and parameter-ized with SICAM plusTOOLS.

Creating the SICAM message manage-ment:The SICAM message management wiz-ard helps the user to generate a mes-sage management system under WinCCwhich meets the specific requirementsof a substation automation system.In addition to a message archive, theSICAM message management includesthe following templates: event list, alarmlist and protection message list.Each of these lists always contains mes-sage blocks, message window tem-plates, message line formats, messageclasses, message sequence reports, lay-outs and texts.

Local and Remote ControlSICAM SAS – Human-Machine Interface

Taking over messages from SICAMplusTOOLS:The Import SICAM messages wizardhelps the user to import messages fromSICAM plusTOOLS into WinCC.This function allows the user to reportinformation in the message managementsystem which was configured and param-eterized with SICAM plusTOOLS. Thisfunction allows the user to visualizeinformation from SICAM plusTOOLSunder WinCC, i.e. to use it in processdiagrams.

Creating the SICAM archiving system:The Create SICAM archives wizard helpsgeneration of an archiving system underWinCC. The SICAM WinCC archivingsystem consists of:– a sequence archive for measured

values and– a sequence archive for metered

values.One can import metered values und meas-ured values from SICAM plusTOOLS intothis archiving system. Integrating the SICAM symbol library:

The Import SICAM libary wizard helpsthe user to load the SICAM symbol li-brary into the current project. One canuse the symbol library for designing indi-vidual detail images.

Fig.199: SICAM WinCC event list


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SICAM Valpro

Curve and tabular display of archivedmeasured values and metered values iscarried out by means of the SICAM Valproprogram. Valpro provides the facility for us-ing archived values for various evaluationpurposes, without altering them in the ar-chive. The user decides at the time of eval-uation (in a dialog) which values should bedisplayed in which raster. In addition to thevariables to be displayed, he specifies thetime range, the color and if necessary themathematical function to be carried out.One can have totals, averages, maximums,minimums or the power factor formed anddisplayed. The calculation interval can beindividually specified. Stored presets canbe altered at any time.

Engineering System SICAM plus TOOLS

With SICAM plusTOOLS, a versatile andpowerful system solution is available,which supports the user efficiently in con-figuring and parameterizing the SICAMSAS (SICAM Substation Automation Sys-tem). SICAM plusTOOLS is based onWindows 95 and Windows NT. Thus theuser moves within a familiar system envi-ronment and can recur to the well-known,convenient functionality of the Windowstechnique.SICAM plusTOOLS allows a flexible proce-dure when configuring and parameterizinga station, while providing consequent userguidance at the same time.Plausibility checks allow only operationsand combinations which are permissible inthe respective context. Permissible input variables are displayed

in drop-down lists or scroll boxes. The Drag & Drop function makes it easy

to group, separate or move data. Context-sensitive help texts explain the

text boxes and the permissible input var-iables.

Copy functions on different levels opti-mize the configuration procedure.

Help texts which are organized accord-ing to topics explain the configuration.

The SICAM plusTOOLS SoftwarePackage

The SICAM plusTOOLS configuration sys-tem is divided into individual, function-spe-cific applications.

Local and Remote ControlSICAM SAS – Engineering Tools

SIMATIC Manager

The SIMATIC Manager is the platform ofSICAM plusTOOLS. With the help of theSIMATIC Manager, the user defines andmanages the project and calls the individ-ual applications.The project structure is created automati-cally in the course of the configuration pro-cedure. The data areas are organized inseparate containers.In the navigation window of the SIMATICManager, the project structure is repre-sented similar to a Windows 95 directorytree. Each container corresponds to afolder on the respective hierarchical level.

Hardware Configuration

The Hardware (HW) Configuration applica-tion serves for configuring the modulesand their parameters. The configuration isrepresented as a table on the screen. Theuser chooses the components from aHardware Catalog and places them intothe hardware configuration window usingDrag & Drop or double-clicks. The tabs forparameterizing the modules are alreadyfilled with the default values, which can bemodified by the user.

Fig. 200: Example of curve evaluation using Valpro

Fig. 201: Hardware Configuration of a demo station


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Local and Remote ControlSICAM SAS – Engineering Tools

COM IED

The COM IED application (Communicationto Intelligent Electronic Devices) serves forconfiguring the connection of bay devicesin control and monitoring direction.The bay devices are imported into COMIED with their maximum information vol-ume from an IED Catalog using Drag &Drop. The information volume can be re-duced later. If SIPROTEC 4 bay units withProfibus FMS communication are used,then the information parameterized withDIGSI 4 will be taken over automatically.

COM TC

The COM TC application manages all pa-rameters which are related to the informa-tion exchange with higher-level controlcenters. The telegrams are configured sep-arately for control and monitoring direction.For the transmission of the telegrams inmonitoring direction, these are assigned topriority-specific and type-specific lists. Thelist types are provided in a Telecontrol ListCatalog and are copied into COM TC usingDrag & Drop.

Fig. 204: CFC with Component Library

Fig. 202: MCP Parameterizing

CFC

In the SICAM SAS System, automationfunctions, such as: Bay-related and cross-bay interlocks Switching sequences (busbar changes,

etc.) Status indication and command deriva-

tives (group indications, load shedding,etc.)

Measured value and metered valueprocessing (limit value processing, com-parative functions, etc.)

are projected graphically with the CFC(Continuous Function Chart).The scope of supply of SICAM plusTOOLSincludes a comprehensive library of SICAMSAS components. The designer makes hisselection from this library, positions the se-lected component by Drag and Drop on hisworksheet and interconnects the compo-nents required for its function to one an-other and to the process signals.

Fig. 203: COM IED and bay units catalog

6/118

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


(Legacy)IEDs

(LAN-Enabled IEDs)

SubstationLAN “A”

Router

SubstationLAN “B”

SICAMPCC

SICAMSubstationController

Legacy Protocol(e.g., DNP, IEC 870-5)Link To Control Center

ICCP(ISO/IEC 870-6TASE.2)Link To ControlCenter(Optional)

One or more legacy IEDs, connected tothe PCC in a star configuration.

One or more RTUs. ICCP communications to a Control Center

(optional). Siemens’ SICAM WinCC Human Machine

Interface (HMI) (optional component ofSICAM PCC).

Introduction

Changing requirements

The ongoing deregulation of the powersupply industry has been creating a com-petitive environment with new challengesfor the utilities: The liberalized production, transmission

and distribution of electrical power callfor more flexible operation of the powersystem resulting in more complex con-trol, metering and accounting procedures.

The deregulated system structure re-quires the extension of load and qualityof supply monitoring, as well as eventand disturbance recording, to control thebusiness processes and to care for liabil-ity cases.

Operation data that has traditionallybeen used only within a given utilitymust now be shared by a number ofplayers in various locations, such as utili-ties, independent power producers, sys-tem operators and metering or billingcompanies. More effective data acquisi-tion, archiving and communication istherefore needed.

Competition requires that costs have tobe reduced wherever possible. The opti-mization of processes has consequentlybeen given high priority. System automa-tion and in particular distribution automa-tion including automatic meter readingand customer load control can thereforebe observed as the future trend.

The SICAM PCC meets these require-ments by integrating modern PC-technolo-gy and open communication.

Some Typical Configurations

PC-Based Substation Automation

Fig. 203 illustrates a typical configurationemploying the SICAM PCC. The compo-nents of such a configuration include: SICAM PCC. Substation LAN. One or more LAN Enabled Intelligent

Electronic Devices (IEDs).

Fig. 205: Sample Substation with SICAM PCC

Local and Remote ControlSICAM PCC – System Design

SICAM PCC

LAN-Enabled IEDs (Legacy) IEDs

Substation LAN

Router

ICCP (ISO/IEC 870-6 TASE.2)Link To Control Center(Optional)

Fig. 206: Sample Substation with SICAM PCC and SICAM SC

6/119

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



A PLC can be added

This, of course, is not the only way in whichthe SICAM PCC may be used in a substa-tion configuration. Fig. 206 illustrates aslightly more complex substation configu-ration which includes both the SICAM PCCand the SICAM Substation Controller (SC)1).The SICAM Substation Controller is anadvanced Programmable Logic Controller(PLC) (see 6/109 and following pages).

Open-ness

A product is not ”open“ just because itsmanufacturer decides to publish the speci-fications of a proprietary communicationsprotocol. A product is really open if it sup-ports standard and de facto industry stand-ard communications.There was a time, not so very long ago,when vendors of substation and controlcenter equipment offered only proprietarysolutions. The designer and maintainer ofsubstations was forced to choose among anumber of options, many – in fact almostall-of which would force the designer touse a proprietary communications protocol.After the choice, either the future optionsbecame very limited or one was forced todeal with the problem of installing protocolgateways. With SICAM, those days areover. SICAM, and specifically the SICAMPCC, are designed with ”open-ness“ as aprimary design consideration. Siemens’goal in designing this product line is to pro-vide the tools and features which enablethe user to design and upgrade the substa-tions the way he wants.The sample configuration diagrams shownare not meant to illustrate all the possibleconfigurations using the PCC and othercomponents of the SICAM product line.Rather, they show that the components ofthe SICAM product line are designed sothat users may take a ”building block” ap-proach to designing or upgrading their sub-stations.

Fig. 207: DSI with RDBMS

PCC At A Glance

Platform

The SICAM PCC executes on Intel-basedhardware running the Microsoft WindowsNT operating system (Version 4.0 andabove). Siemens chose this platform be-cause it offers an effective combination oflow hardware and software cost, ease ofuse, scalability, flexibility, and easy accessto support.

Distributed Architecture & Database

The SICAM PCC uses a high-performancedata distribution subsystem for distributionof real-time data among system compo-nents. The data distribution subsystempermits distribution of applications acrossmultiple computers to address perform-ance, physical connectivity and redundan-cy requirements. This means that if a con-figuration contains more devices than canphysically be connected to a single compu-ter, one can distribute the system acrossmultiple computers. Or, if the applicationsrequire more processing power than canbe provided by a single computer, one cansolve the problem by adding additionalcomputers to the system and distributingthe processing load.In designing the PCC, the data distributionsubsystem was combined with a standardthird-party RDBMS. The PCC architectureuses the RDBMS to do what an RDBMSdoes best – organize and store data.

The architecture uses the data distributionsubsystem to augment the RDBMS tomeet those data distribution performancerequirements which the RDBMS cannotaddress.The presence of both the data distributionsubsystem and the RDBMS is largelytransparent to the average user. However,for designers and programmers who wishto interface to the PCC infrastructure,Siemens publishes full details of the Appli-cations Programming Interface (API) pro-vided by the data distribution system, in-cluding all details of the RDBMS datamodel used by SICAM PCC.DSI (Distributed System Infrastructure) is asimple data distribution switch which oper-ates in conjunction with a standard RDBMS.While DSI does have some characteristicsof a database, it lacks certain others, so itis not referred to as a database.DSI allows distributed applications to sharedata in a consistent, efficient (i.e. high-per-formance) manner.There are three basic components whichmake up DSI: A central application called the DSI cen-

tral server. A collection of interface functions which

make up the DSI API. A data model which describes the

RDBMS tables used to store the configu-ration and status information used by DSIand applications which interface to DSI.

1) In PCC version 2.0, WinCC is required for configura-tions in which there is communication between PCC andthe SICAM Substation Controller.

User InterfaceFor Configuration

ODBC

ConfigurationData

Configuration Data

Status Data

Configuration Data

Status DataDSI CentralServer

ODBC

Real-TimeData

“DSI”Application

ODBC

DSIAPI

RDBMS

6/120

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Interfacing to Other Systems

The PCC is designed to be an effective in-tegration platform by including support forboth modern and legacy communicationsprotocols.The SICAM PCC does several things tosimplify the task of interfacing to othersystems: The interface to PCC’s data distribution

subsystem is fully externalized and doc-umented. All interfaces are available foruse by customers or third parties in de-veloping software (including gateways)to interface to the PCC. Siemens pro-vides a Software Development Kit whichcan automatically generate the basis fora working application, as well as theuser interface windows to configure it.PCC’s DB Gateway feature allows youto use familiar RDBMS tools and tech-niques to exchange data with the PCC.DB Gateway provides a bidirectionalmechanism which may be used to insertdata into the real-time data distributionsystem via the RDBMS. That is, one canwrite an object into the RDBMS using,for example, SQL statements. DB Gate-way will retrieve that object from theRDBMS and enter it into the real-timedata distribution stream for distributionto other components of the system.Similarly, one can configure DB Gatewayto accept data objects from the real-timedata distribution stream and write theminto the RDBMS. The user can then readthem using RDBMS tools and techniques.All of this can be done with almost noknowledge of the internals of the PCCarchitecture – all one needs to know iswhich RDBMS table to read and/orwhich to write.Fig. 208 illustrates the position of DeviceMaster in the architecture. In this picture,it is easy to visualize a protocol modulewhich is isolated from other systemcomponents while at the same time hasfull access to all system services required.

Version 2.0 of PCC makes available aset of ActiveX controls which can beembedded into an ActiveX containerapplication. This feature is included as a“proof of concept“ feature to explorethe scope of the ability to embed a real-time value from PCC’s data distributionsubsystem into a “web” document.

”Enterprise” Protocols

Siemens is the acknowledged leader indelivering ICCP solutions. The PCC’s full-featured ICCP implementation allows com-munication with any system which sup-ports this popular protocol. PCC’s ICCPcurrently supports Conformance Blocks1, 2, 5, and 8.Whenever a power system disturbanceoccurs or even during normal operations,it is very useful to be able to collect a logof changes in one or more data objects.Many modern field devices (e.g. relays,meters, etc.) allow collection of this typeof data within the device itself. However,many others do not. PCC’s Sequence ofEvents Logger option allows collection andstorage to the RDBMS of any data objectsprocessed by PCC’s data distribution sub-system. Data may be collected either peri-odically or ”on event“. Since data arestored into the RDBMS, they may be re-trieved for analysis using standard RDBMStools and techniques.

”Legacy“ Protocols

Perhaps the largest problem the user willtackle in attempting to upgrade and auto-mate existing substations arises from thelarge number of communications protocolsused by existing equipment in those sub-stations. Many of these devices simply willnot talk to each other. Many of them willnot talk to the control center. Even if a com-pletely new substation is built, one mayface this problem because the choice ofdevices may be limited by the suite of pro-tocols which are supported by the existingSCADA or EMS system.A primary design consideration in the PCCis the ability to support legacy1) protocols.The ability to support these protocols hasbeen enhanced by a PCC feature calledDevice Master. It allows Siemens (andthird parties) to develop protocol modulesin much less time than would be requiredfor a traditional system. This means thatmore protocols can be made availablemore quickly and at reduced cost.

Fig. 208: Device Master

DSI CentralServer

ConfigurationData

DSI API

RDBMS

Device Master

Device Master API

Protocol Module

Real-TimeData

ODBC


1 ”Legacy“, when used to refer to communicationsprotocols, is an euphemism for ”old and proprietary”.

6/121

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Data Conditioning

The SICAM PCC includes the feature DataNormalization (or simply Normalization)which provides a simplified method bywhich normalize procedures may be as-sociated with data objects. These normal-ize procedures perform transformations ondata objects as they enter and leave PCC’sdata distribution subsystem. The types oftransformation which may be performedinclude (but are not limited to): jitter sup-pression, deadband calculations, lineartransformation, and curve-based transfor-mation. In addition, custom procedures canbe developed and added to the system toperform any type of calculation and datatransformation. Up to 16 normalization pro-cedures may be concatenated and appliedto a single data object. PCC’s user inter-face provides a simple, intuitive way tocreate custom normalization proceduresand associate normalization procedureswith individual data objects or groups ofdata objects.


Human-Machine Interface.

Frequently, it is desirable for personnelworking in a substation to have access toHMI displays. If an HMI is available in thesubstation, costs can be reduced by elimi-nating or reducing the size of local controlpanels and the wiring associated with them.Additionally, well-designed HMI displayscan reduce the risk of error by presentingdata and controls in a logical schematic rep-resentation – interlocks can be included toprevent certain operations or to ”remind”personnel to follow certain procedures.If an HMI is used in a substation automa-tion and integration system like the PCC,it is important to ensure that the HMI inte-grates well into the system. The HMI mustbe integrated in such a way that it doesnot become a performance ”bottleneck”.The HMI must not be the ”center” of thesubstation automation architecture. NoHMI offers a sufficient level of data distri-bution performance to allow it to be usedas the “center” of the architecture. Anoth-er strong consideration in integrating anHMI is to ensure that whoever has the jobof configuring the system is not requiredto enter data a number of times. Nor shouldthe HMI require the user to become a com-puter programmer.The PCC’s optional HMI Gateway providesa pathway through which data are ex-changed between PCC’s data distributionsubsystem and the HMI. Point and clickmethods are used to select data objectswhich are to be exchanged with the HMI.If one adds, for example, a new meter tothe substation and one wants to placesome data from that meter on an HMIone-line display, only a few mouse clicksare required to perform the task. Typingthe name of a data object is at no time re-quired. Definition of data objects may beperformed either via PCC’s user interfaceor from within the HMI.The recommended HMI is the WinCCproduct from Siemens. While WinCC is asuperior product, it is recognized thatsome customers have ”standardized” onanother product. The Siemens HMI Gate-way however is designed to simplify cus-tomization to meet these requirements.

6/122

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


User Interface

The user interface used to configure andoperate the PCC is very much influencedby de facto industry standards. Specifically,the user interface has a ”look and feel”established by Microsoft’s Windows 95.The great popularity of Windows 95 madethis an easy decision. The choice of a Win-dows 95 ”look and feel” means that theuser interface is familiar to anyone who hasused Windows 95 software. The PCC de-velopment team has worked with Siemenshuman factors engineers to make the userinterface as intuitive as possible.The PCC’s user interface is divided intotwo parts: User Interface for Configuration, also

called the PCC Configuration Manager. User Interface for Operation, also called

the PCC Operations Manager.

User Interface for Configuration

The PCC user interface is started just likeany other Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0program:1. Click on the Start button of the taskbar.2. Select Programs from the menu which

appears.3. Select the SICAM PCC folder from the

menu which then appears.4. Double-click on SICAM PCC.Now a window appears like shown inFig. 209.It looks like the Windows Explorer ofWindows 95 and Windows NT 4.0. Onthe left is a navigation window. At the topis a menu bar and a tool bar. The naviga-tion window can be undocked and thenresized or moved around on your screen.

The navigation window has four elements: A Systems folder: By opening this fold-

er, one sees an icon for each computerin the PCC configuration.

An Interfaces folder: By opening thisfolder, one sees the interfaces which areconfigured on the PCC.

A Normalization folder: By opening thisfolder, one is able to create custom nor-malize procedures.

A Tools icon: By opening this, one seesa number of tools which may be used inconfiguration mode.

Fig. 210 illustrates the PCC main window(configuration mode) with several foldersopen. In this case, the system is a distrib-uted configuration with two computers.

Local and Remote ControlSICAM PCC – User Interface

Fig. 209: PCC Main Configuration Window

Fig. 210: PCC Configuration Window – Distributed System

6/123

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


When the user wishes to work with an in-terface or device, it is done by double-click-ing on the device he wishes to work with.For example, Fig. 211 shows the PCC userinterface after double-clicking on Meter1(a relay which speaks the DNP 3.0 proto-col). As one can see in this illustration, anew window has appeared on the right-hand side of the PCC main window. In thiscase, the new window contains a tabbeddisplay which may be used to select andrename data objects from Meter1.

If a mistake is made…

The user can change interface and deviceparameters by double-clicking on the ap-propriate folders and / or icons. For exam-ple, by a double-click on the icon for a de-vice, windows appear which are almostidentical to those used to initially configurethe device. By working with these win-dows, one can make any necessary chang-es to the PCC configuration.

User Interface for Operation

The user interface for operation is verymuch like what has already been shown.One can switch between two modes byclicking on toolbar buttons:

selects configuration mode.

selects operational mode.

The user interface in operational modelooks like the illustration in Fig. 212.Navigation in operational mode is just likeconfiguration mode. The items displayedon the navigation tree are very similar. Operations Manager: By double-clicking

on this, the Operations Manager is openedwhich allows the user to view and con-trol the status of the software and de-vices which make up the PCC system.

Event Log: This is a tool which opensthe Windows NT event log viewer. It isused to examine messages which PCCsoftware places in the event log.

SCADA Value Viewer: This is a toolwhich allows the user to examine datawhich is being distributed by PCC’s datadistribution subsystem. Using this tool,one can verify that changes which occurin a device are being correctly communi-cated throughout the system.

Local and Remote ControlSICAM PCC – User Interface

Fig. 211: Working with an Existing Device

Fig. 212: User Interface (Operation Mode)

Generic Value Viewer: This is a toolwhich allows the user to view details ofcomplex data types used within PCC.Like the SCADA Value Viewer, it canalso be used to view data being distrib-uted by PCC’s data distribution subsys-tem. It can also be used to introducemanual changes in data for debugging,testing, and checkout.

The PCC’s Operations Manager displaysare built automatically during system con-figuration. The configuration mode to add anew interface or device will appear on theOperations Manager display the next timethe Operations Manager is started.For those who want to customize their dis-play, the PCC user interface provides aninteractive tool for customizing colors andtext on status indicators.

6/124

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


…

…

CU/RS 485

CU/RS 485

…

SICAMPCC

FO-ETHERNET ICCP

Distributed SICAM PCC Substation control system

CU/RS 485(IEC 970-5-103)

SICAM PCCWin CC

2 incoming feeders

8 outgoing feeders

2 incoming feeders

8 outgoing feeders

Substation 1Substation 2

Application example for Sicam PCC

The example shows the application ofSICAM PCC to a large industrial powersupply system with distributed substa-tions. (Fig. 213)Remote substation 1 has been built com-pletely new. In the existing substation 2only the secondary equipment has beenrefurbished. Control of both substationstakes place at the operator workstation insubstation 2. The operator workstation insubstation 2 is only used in special casesfor local control (maintenance, emergencycontrol).

Substation 1:

Consists of two half-bars, each with 2 in-coming cable bays and 8 outgoing feederbays.The incoming feeder bays are all equippedwith a bay control unit 6MD63 for com-mand output, data acquisition and local baycontrol. In addition, cable differential pro-tection 7SD600 and overcurrent protectionrelays 7SJ600 are also provided.The outgoing feeders each have a com-bined protection and control relay 7SJ63,providing overcurrent protection and bay-related measuring, data acquisition andcontrol functions.The SICAM PCC station serves in this sub-station predominantly as data concentratorand communication node for the distribut-ed bay units. The connection of the bayunits is established by a copper-based mul-ti-drop link (RS 485 bus) according to theIEC 870-5-103 standard.

Substation 2:

Combined protection and control relays7SJ63 are used in this substation in allfeeder bays. Connection to the substationcontrol system SICAM PCC is again estab-lished with the wired RS485-bus as in sub-station 1.The SICAM PCC, located in the controlroom of this substation, is designed as afull server and uses WinCC as operatingand monitoring tool. The data concentratorSICAM PCC of substation 1 is connectedto this common SICAM PCC control sta-tion in substation 2 via an optical fiber net-work using the network-capable protocolIEC 60870-6 TASE.2.

Fig. 213: System Configuration

Local and Remote ControlSICAM PCC – Application Example

This configuration provides numerous facil-ities for expansion. Thus, for example, itis possible to expand bays in each of theremote stations and to link the devices onthe bay level necessary for protection andcontrol via Profibus or IEC 60 870-5-103 tothe existing PCC. Additional devices canalso be connected to the control roomPCC. For expansion of a complete remotestation, it is possible for example to usea further Device Interface Processor asSICAM PCC, to which in turn devices onthe bay level are connected. For expansionof the operating and monitoring function,it is possible, instead of the Single-UserWinCC System, to use for example aWinCC Client Server System with severaloperator terminals. This system offers re-dundancy as an option.

6/125

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


482.6

84 TE = 426.72

7

57.1

5

133.

3557

.15

37.4

FPI

RK

AE

AR

SV

BA

BA

3 U

m =

266

.87

……

11

456.1

471.

2

90

45

217182


6MB5540

Rear view

One screw terminal block at top, one at bottom,per transducer module (two of each per module BF)

Front view

Connectionboard

Subrack

Side view

6MB5515


482.684 E = 426.72

465.111

7

57.1

5

133.

3557

.15

37.4

FP/L

PII

RK

RK

SC

AE

AR

DE

DE

BA

BA

BF SV

6 U

= 2

66.7

…

182251

30

Rear viewFront view Side view

Local and Remote ControlDevice Dimensions

Fig. 214: Enhanced RTU 6MB551

Fig. 215: SINAULT LSA COMPACT 6MB5540, basic frame

6/126

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



6MB5130

Side view Rear view Panel cutout

17229.5

266

37 39

277.5

244

2257.313.2 220 13.2

7.3

5.4

ø 6

ø 5 or M4

255.8

206.5

180

221

245


6MB5140


7.3

5.4

ø 6

ø 5

255.8

431.5405

446

245

13.2

266

17229.5 37 39

277.5

4507.313.2 445


Fig. 216: Compact central control unit 6MB513

Fig. 217: Compact central control unit 6MB514

6/127

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


6MB523 Front view Side view Panel cutout

244

231.5

30 29.5145

160

7.3

5.4

ø 6ø 5

255.8

105

245

131.5

146All dimensions in mm.

6MB522 Side view Rear view Panel cutout

FSMAoptical-fiberconnector

7.3

5.4

ø 6

ø 5 or M4

255.8

180

245

206.5

221

220

225

244

30 29.5

231.5277

266

4


6MB524-0, 1, 2 Side view Rear view Panel cutout

255.8±0.3

Terminalblocks

7.35.4

ø 6

ø 5 or M4

206.5±0.3

180±0.5

221+2

245+1

13.2225220

F E CD B A

1234

5678

Optical-fibersocketsAll dimensions in mm.

3017229.5

266

9

244

Terminalblocks


Fig. 218: Compact input/output device 6MB522

Fig. 220: Compact I/0 unit with local (bay) control 6MB524-0,1,2

Fig. 219: Compact input/output device 6MB523

6/128

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10



6MB5240-3, -4

17229.5

266

30 7.3

5.4

ø 6ø 5


431±0.3

405±0.5

446+2

244 245+1

13.2450

445

F E CD B A

1234

5678

255.8±0.3H GK JML

Optical-fibersockets

Terminalblock


9

Terminalblock

17229.5

266

37

244

Terminalblock

7570 7.3

ø 6

ø 5or

M4

71+2

56.5±0.3

245+1 255.8±0.3

6MB525

Side view Panel cutoutRear view


Fig. 221: Compact I/0 unit with local (bay) control, extended version 6MB5240-3

Fig. 222: Minicompact I/0 device 6MB525

6/129

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


1) applicable to 6MD631/632/633/634/6371) applicable to 6MD635/636

Case for 6MD63

Side view

Mounting plate

FO

202.5/7.9729

1.1430

1.18

312/12.28 244/9.61266/10.47

SUB-DConnector

Rear view

225/8.85220/8.66

1/2 case1)

450/17.71445/17.51

Rear view

1M case

Connection cable68 poles to basicunit length 2.5 m/8 ft., 2.4 in

Side view

Mountingplate

29.51.16

27.11.06

20.07

RS232-port

266/10.47

246.2/9.69

Detachedoperator panel

Panel cutout

Case for 6MD631/632/633/634/637

Side view

SUB-DConnector

FO

172/6.77 341.33

266/10.47 244/9.61

29.51.16

Mounting plate

20.07

RS232-port

225/8.85220/8.66

Rear view

ø 6/0.24 diameter

ø 5 or M4/0.2 diameter

255.8/10.07

221/8.70

206.5/8.12

245/9.64

180/7.08


Fig. 223: 6MD63 in 1/2 flush-mounting case for surface mounting with detachable operator panel

Fig. 224: 6MD63 in 1/2 and 1/1 surface mounting case (only with detached operator panel, see Fig. 42, page 6/21)

6/130

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


6MB552

17229.5

266

39

225

244

7.3

5.4

ø 6

ø 5 or M4


220

8

1) 2)

13.2206.5 ±0.3

180 ±0.5

255.8 ±0.3

221+2

245+1

Bus cover

BNC socket forantenna

Optical-fiber socketFSMA for connectionof bay units



6MB5530-0 and -1

Front view Side view Rear view

300

22515

400

1.5

35

45

Cable bushing

200

20

20 18

20

20 10

25

A

A

8

8.2

Section A-A

Wall mount


Fig. 225: Compact RTU 6MB552 in 7XP20 housing

Fig. 226: Minicompact RTU 6MB5530


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Introduction

For more than 100 years, electrical energyhas been a product, measured, for exam-ple, in kilowatt-hours, and its value wasdetermined by the amount of energy sup-plied. In addition, the time of day could beconsidered in the price calculation (cheapnight current, expensive peak time tariffs)and agreements could be made on themaximum and minimum power consump-tion within defined periods. The latest de-velopment shows an increased tendencyto include the aspect of voltage quality intothe purchase orders and cost calculations.Previously, the term “quality” was associ-ated mainly with the reliable availability ofenergy and the prevention of major devia-tions from the rated voltage. Over the lastfew years, however, the term of voltagequality has gained a completely new sig-nificance. On the one hand, devices havebecome more and more sensitive and de-pend on the adherence to certain limit val-ues in voltage, frequency and waveshape;on the other hand, these quantities are in-creasingly affected by extreme load varia-tions (e.g. in steelworks) and non-linearconsumers (electronic devices, fluorescentlamps).

Power Quality standards

The specific characteristics of supply volt-age have been defined in standards whichare used to determine the level of qualitywith reference to frequency voltage level waveshape symmetry of the three phase voltages.These characteristics are permanently in-fluenced by accidental changes resultingfrom load variations, disturbances fromother machines and by the occurrence ofinsulation faults. In contrast to usual com-modity trade, the quality of voltage de-pends not only on the individual supplierbut, to an even larger degree, on the cus-tomers.

The IEC series 1000 and the standardsIEEE 519 and EN 50160 describe the com-patibility level required by equipment con-nected to the network, as well as the lim-its of emissions from these devices. Thisrequires the use of suitable measuring in-struments in order to verify compliancewith the limits defined for the individualcharacteristics as laid down in the relevantstandards.If these limit values are exceeded, the pol-luter may be requested to provide for cor-rective action.

Competitive advantage thoughpower quality

In addition to the requirements stated instandards, the liberalization of the energymarkets forces the utilities to make them-selves stand out against their competitors,to offer energy at lower prices and to takecost-saving measures. These demands re-sult in the following consequences for thesupplier: The energy tariffs will have to reflect the

quality supplied. Customers polluting the network with

negative effects on power quality willhave to expect higher power rates –“polluter-must-pay” principle.

Cost saving through network planningand distribution is different from today’spractice in network systems, which isoriented towards the customers withthe highest power requirements.

The significant aspect for the customer isthat non-satisfying quality and availability ofpower supply may cause production lossesresulting in high costs or leading to poorproduct quality.Examples are in particular Semiconductor industry Paper industry Automotive industry (welding processes) Industries with high energy requirementsSiemens offers a wide range of productsincluding different types of recording equip-ment, as well as systems for active qualityimprovement.

Power QualityMeasuring, Recording, Compensation


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Power QualityMeasuring and Recording

The SIMEAS T MeasuringTransducer

SIMEAS T is a new generation of measur-ing transducers for quantities present inelectrical power supply systems. The com-pact housings are mounted to a standardrail with the help of a snap-on mechanism.Depending on the specific application, thedevices are available with or without auxil-iary power supply or can be provided witha multi-purpose measuring transducer whichcan be configured according to individualrequirements.

Applications

Electrical isolation and conditioningof electrical measurands for furtherprocessing.

Industrial plants, power plants andsubstations.

Easy-to-instal, space-saving device.Fig. 227: Measuring transducer 7KG60, block diagram

Fig. 229: Measuring transducer 7KG60, dimensions

Digital output

Analog output 1

Analog output 2

Analog output 3

Serial interface

UH

IL1

IL2

IL3

UL2

UL3

UL1

N

Block diagram

RS 232RS 485

AC

75

90

Front view

Side view

Connection terminals


90105

Fig. 228: Measuring transducer 7KG60


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Functions

Conversion of the measured values intoanalog or digital values suitable for systemsin the fields of automatic control, energyoptimization and operational control.

Special features

Minimum dimensions, Short delivery time, standard types

delivered ex-warehouse, Complies with all relevant standards, High-capacity output signals, Electrical isolation at high test voltage, Suitable to extend the beginning and end

of the measuring range, Design variants for true r.m.s measure-

ment.Additional features of the multi-purposemeasuring transducers: Acquisition of up to 16 measurands, Connection to any type of single-phase

or three-phase systems, 16 2/3, 50,60 Hz,

3 electrically isolated outputs, ±10 V and± 20 mA,

1 binary output, Type of network, measurand, measuring

range, etc. can be freely programmed, V.28 or RS 485 serial interface for con-

figuration and output of the measuredvalues.

Measurands

AC voltage, AC current, Extension of the measuring range is

possible.Additional features of the multi-purposemeasuring transducer: AC voltage and current, Active, reactive and apparent power,

power factor, phase angle, System frequency, Energy pulses, Limit-value monitoring.

Special features of the parameterizablemulti-purpose measuring transducer

Input quantities

3 voltage inputs for 0 –346 V, up to 600 Vline-to-line voltage in the three-phasesystem,

3 current inputs for 0–10 A.

Outputs

3 isolated outputs for ± 20 mA or ±10 Vand smaller values,

1 contact, definable for error or limit indi-cation or as energy pulse,

1 serial interface type RS 232C (V.28) or,as an option, type RS 485 for connectionto a personal computer for configurationand data transmission.

Types of connection

Single-phase, Three-wire three-phase current with

constant/balanced load, Three-wire three-phase current with

any load, Four-wire three-phase current with

constant/balanced load, Four-wire three-phase current with

any load, Connected either directly or via external

transformer.

Measured and calculated quantities

R.m.s. values of the line-to-line and starvoltages,

R.m.s. value of the zero sequence voltage, R.m.s. value of the line-to-line currents, R.m.s. value of the zero sequence current, Active and reactive power of the single

phases and the sum thereof, Power factors of the single phases and

the sum thereof, Total apparent power, Active energy, incoming supply at the

single phases and the sum thereof(pulses),

Active energy, exported supply at thesingle phases and the sum thereof(pulses),

Reactive energy, inductive, at the singlephases and the sum thereof (pulses),

Reactive energy, capacitive, at the singlephases and the sum thereof (pulses),Line frequency.

Alarm contact

Violation of the min./max. limits forvoltage, current, active power, reactivepower, frequency,

Violation of the min. limit for powerfactor,

Functional error.

Serial interface

Standard-type RS 232 C (V.28) interface forconnection to a personal computer for con-figuration, calibration and transfer of themeasured values; an RS 485-type serial in-terface is available with an additional busfunction according to IEC 60 870-5-103.

Auxiliary power

Two versions: 24 to 60 V DC and 110 to250 V DC, as well as 100 to 230 V AC.

Characteristic line with breakpoint

The start and end periods of the analogoutputs can be extended according to re-quirements. This enables enlarging of thedisplay of the operating range of voltages,while the less interesting overcurrentrange can be compressed.

Configuration and adjustment

With the help of a personal computer con-nected to the serial interface, the type ofnetwork, the measurands and the outputsignals can be configured to suit the indi-vidual situation. The SIMEAS PAR softwareprogram enables easy adjustment of thedevices to different requirements. Sinceonly one type needs to be kept on stock,the user can benefit from the advantagesof reduced storage costs and easier projectplanning and ordering procedures. The soft-ware also supports and facilitates the ad-justment of the transducers.

Data output with SIMEAS T PAR

SIMEAS T PAR can also be used to contin-uously collect the data of 12 measurandsfrom the transducer and to display themboth graphically and numerically on thescreen. These data can then be saved orprinted.

Bus operation with IEC protocol

The transducer is suitable for the acquisi-tion of up to 43 measurands and for themonitoring of up to 39 measurands. Withthree analog outputs and one contact out-put only part of these data can be trans-ferred. With the help of the RS 485 serialinterface which uses the IEC 60870-5-103protocol, however, any number of meas-ured data can be transmitted to a centralunit (e.g. LSA or PC). As this protocol re-stricts the number of data units to 9 or 16measuring points, the function parametersfor file transfer can be assigned in such away as to bypass this restriction and toload any desired number of data.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


SIMEAS T PAR parameterizationsoftware

Description

By means of the SIMEAS T PAR software,SIMEAS T transducers with an RS232 oran RS485 interface can be parameterizedor calibrated swiftly and easily. Measuredquantities can be displayed on the PC on-line via a graphical meter or can be record-ed and stored over a period of up to oneweek.SIMEAS T PAR was designed for installa-tion on a commercially available PC or lap-top with the MS-DOS operating system. Itis operated via the MS-Windows V3.1 orWindows 95 graphical user interface by PCmouse and keyboard. Operating instructionscan be created by printing the ”Help“ file.Communication with the transducer is a-chieved by means of a cable (optionallyavailable) connected via the interface thatis available on every PC or laptop. For unitsfeaturing an RS232 interface, use the con-necting cable 7KG6051-8BA or, for unitsfeaturing an RS485 interface, use the con-verter 7KG6051-8EB/EC. Three mutuallyindependent program sections can becalled up.

Parameterization

Parameterization serves to set the trans-ducer to the required measured quantities,measuring ranges and output signals etc.Users are able to parameterize the trans-ducer themselves in only a few steps.Entry of the data in the windows providedis clear and simple, supported with ”Help“windows.Parameterization is also possible withoutthe transducer. After storage of the dataunder a separate name, the transducerscan be adjusted with the ”Send file“ com-mand. They can also be reparameterizedonline during operation.

Features

Extremely simple and straightforwardoperation

Storage of parameterization data undera user-defined name even without thetransducer

Parameters are sent to transducers evenafter installation on the site

When ”Receive“ is selected, the trans-ducer‘s parameters are read into the”Parameterization window“, can bemodified and can be sent back by select-ing ”Send“

Entered data is subjected to an exten-sive plausibility check and a messageand ”Help“ are displayed in the event ofinvalid inputs

A parameterization list with the specificconnection diagram of the transducercan be printed

A self-adhesive data plate can be printedand affixed to the transducer, including apossibility of entering three lines of textcontaining the name and location etc.

When units featuring an RS485 interfaceare chosen, an additional window isavailable for entry of the bus parameters

Calibration

As the transducer features neither settingpotentiometers nor other hardware con-trols, it is calibrated easily by means of theSIMEAS T PARA software, by selection ofthe ”Calibrate“ function.Generally, all the transducers are alreadycalibrated and factory-set when delivered.Recalibration of the transducers is normallyonly necessary after repairs or in the eventof readjustment.It goes without saying that the windowsand graphical characteristics displayed inthe ”Calibrate“ program can be operatedwith ease.Here also, the test setup and explanationsof how to operate the programm are pro-vided in ”Help“ windows.

Features

Sealed for life design Calibration without tools or special

devices No test field environment is neededCurrent inputs, voltage inputs and the indi-vidual analog outputs can be calibrated in-dependently of one another.

Fig. 230: Parameterization of the basic parameters

Fig. 232: Parameterization of an analog output

Fig. 231: Parameterization of the binary output

Fig. 233: Calibrating an analog output


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Reading out data

With graphical instruments, all measuredquantities calculated in the transducer andpower quantities can be displayed onlineon a PC or laptop, and either in analogform or digitally.To improve the resolution of the graphics,users can freely choose the number of in-struments on the screen and can freely as-sign the measured quantity and measuringrange.These are selected and assigned independ-ently of the unit’s analog outputs.Displayed measured values can be stored,printed or recorded for the EVAL evaluationsoftware.

Features

Online measurements in the systemwith high accuracy

The meters for the 3 analog outputswith the appropiate measuring range ap-pear automatically when the programpart is called up

Easy addition or modification of meterswith measured quantity and measuringrange

Selection of measured quantities inde-pendently of the analog outputs

Storage of the layout under a file name Printing of the instantaneous values of

the displayed measured quantities Recording and storage of measured val-

ues for the EVAL evaluation software

SIMEAS EVAL evaluation software

Description

With a PC or a notebook with the SIMEAS TPAR software installed on it, up to 25 meas-ured quantities can be displayed and re-corded online with the SIMEAS T digitaltransducer. A maximum of one week canbe recorded. Every second, one completeset of measured values is recorded withtime information. The complete recordingcan then be saved under a chosen name.Using the SIMEAS EVAL evaluation soft-ware, the stored values can then be edit-ed, evaluated and printed in the form ofa graphic or a table (Figs. 236 to 238).

Fig. 234: Measured value display with 3 measuredquantities

Fig. 235: Measured value display with 6 measuredquantities

Fig. 236: SIMEAS EVAL, overview recorded values

Fig. 237: After setting cursors in the overview, the affiliated measurements and times are displayed in the table



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 238: When a cursor is moved by the mouse,the measured values and times in the table are adapted automatically

SIMEAS EVAL is a typical Windows pro-gram, i.e. it is completely Windows-orient-ed and all functions can be operated withthe mouse or keyboard.SIMEAS EVAL is installed together withSIMEAS T PAR and is started by doubleclicking on the EVAL icon. A window con-taining the series of measurements record-ed by SIMEAS T PAR is displayed for se-lection.

Features

Automatic diagram marking Graphic or tabular representation Sampling frequency: 1 s A measured value from the table can

be dragged to the graphic by simplyright-clicking it

Add your own text to graphics Select measured quantities and the

measuring range Easy zooming with automatic adaption

of the diagram captions on the X and Yaxes

Up to 8 cursors can be set or movedanywhere

Tabular online display of the chosencursor positions with values and times

Characteristics can be placed over oneanother for improved analysis

The sequence of displayed measuredquantities can be selected and modified

The complete recording or editedgraphic can be printed, including a possi-bility of selecting the number of curveson each sheet

The table can be printed with measuredvalues and times pertaining to the cursorpositions.

Information for SIMEAS T ProjectPlanning

The transducer is suitable for low-voltageapplications, 400 V three-phase and 230 Vsingle-phase voltages, (max. measuring600 L-L) and currents of 1, 5, 10 A (max.measurement 12 Ar.m.s), either directly orvia current transformers, as well as forconnection to voltage transformers of

1000√—3, 110√

—3, 200√

—3. The devices can

be pre-configured at the factory accordingto customer requirements or configurationcan be performed by the customer himself.The latter possibility facilitates and consid-erably reduces the customer’s expense forstorage and spare parts service. All usualvariants of connection (two, three or four-wire systems, constant/balanced or any/unbalanced load 16 2/3, 50, 60 Hz) can beconfigured according to individual require-ments.Please note that two different types areavailable which differ in their types of inter-face: V.28 (RS 232C) and RS 458. The stand-ard interface (V.28) is used for configuration.It enables loading of the measured valuesto a personal computer, whereby only onetransducer can be connected to a com-puter. Both versions are operated withthe SIMEAS PAR software. The RS 485enables connection to a bus, i.e. up to31 transducers can be connected to a cen-tral device (e.g. PC) simultaneously. Datatransmission is based on IEC 60 870-5-103protocol.The type of power supply is to be speci-fied when ordering, either 24..60 V DC or100..230 V AC/DC. Please note that analogoutput 1 and the serial interface use thesame potential and can be operated simul-taneously only under certain conditions.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


162.2 (6.39")

86 (3.39")

96 (3.78")

96 (3.78")

SIMEAS P

SIMEAS P

Side view

Front view

Fig. 239: Power Meter SIMEAS P, views and dimensions

Power Meter SIMEAS P

The SIMEAS P power meter is suitable forpanel mounting. The digital multi-functiondisplay can replace any measuring devicesusually required for a three-phase feeder.Furthermore, it offers a variety of addition-al functions. The optional equipment with aPROFIBUS enables centralized access tothe measured values.

Application

All systems used for the generation anddistribution of electrical power. The devicecan be easily installed for stationary use.

Functions

Measuring instrument for all relevantmeasurands of a feeder. Combination ofseveral measuring instruments in one unit.

Special features

Dimensions for panel mounting accordingto DIN (front frame 96 x 96 mm). IntegratedPROFIBUS as optional equipment. Dataoutput is effected via the Profibus.

Measuring inputs

3 voltage inputs up to 347 V (L-E), 600 V(L-L),

3 current inputs for 5 A rated current,measuring range up to 10 A with anoverload of 25%.

Communication

LCD display with background illumina-tion,

Simultaneous display of four measuringvalues,

Parameter assignment by using the keyson the front panel,

1 serial interface type RS 485 for con-nection to the Profibus (option).


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Auxiliary power

Two versions: 24 to 60 V DC and 85 to240 V AC/DC.


R.m.s. values of the line-to-ground orline-to-line voltages and the mean value,

R.m.s. values of the line-to-line currentsand the mean value,

Line frequency, Power factor (incl. sign), Active, reactive and apparent power,

separately for each phase and as awhole, imported supply,

Total harmonic distortion (THD) for volt-age and currents, separately for eachphase, up to the 15th harmonic order,

Unbalanced voltage and current,Active and reactive power (import,export), total sum, difference,

Apparent power, total sum, Minimum and maximum values of most

quantities.

Basic Function

Display of the measured quantities andtransfer to the Profibus.

Information for Project Planning

The SIMEAS P can be delivered in differ-ent designs varying with regard to themeasuring voltage, auxiliary voltage, linefrequency and type of terminals. It is alwaysdesigned for four-wire connection at anyload. The measuring voltages are: 120 V, 277 V, 347 V L-N for screw

clamps, up to max. 277 V for self-clamping contacts.

The basic rated current value is 5 A;fully controlled it is 10 A.

Two variants are to be considered forthe auxiliary voltage: standard versionand 85–240 V AC/DC and, as an option20–60 V DC.The standard version of the device can beused only for the display of the differentmeasurands. Communication with a cen-tralized system is possible only in connec-tion with the Profibus which can be or-dered as optional equipment.

Fig. 240: Power Meter SIMEAS P, back panel diagram

N – L + G Captured-wireterminals

Barrier-typeterminals(ring or spadeconnectors)

Thumbscrew

Chassis groundAWG 14(2.5 mm)

PROFIBUSDEPWR

VVVV

Fuses 2 Amp

Power supply connections,phase voltage and currentconnections, and fuse,CT and PT details dependon the configuration of thepower system.

Phase voltage andpower supply connections:AWG 12 to AWG 14(2.5 mm to 4.0 mm)

SHORTING BLOCK or TEST BLOCK

SIMEAS P


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Communication

2 optorelays as signaling output, availa-ble either for– device in operation,– energy pulse,– signaling the direction of energy flow (import, export),– value below min. limit for cos ϕ,– pulse indicating a voltage dip,

3 LEDs indicating the operating statusand PROFIBUS activity,

1 RS 485 serial interface for connectionto the PROFIBUS.

Auxiliary power

Two versions: 24 to 60 V DC and 110 to250 V DC, as well as 100 to 230 V AC.


R.m.s. values of the line-to-ground orline-to-line voltages,

R.m.s. values of the line-to-line currents, Line frequency (from the first voltage

input), Active, reactive and apparent power,

separately for each phase and as awhole,

Harmonics for voltages and currents upto the 40th order,

Total harmonic distortion (THD), voltagesand currents of each phase,

Unbalanced voltage and current in thethree-phase system,

Flicker irritability factor.

Averaging intervals

Voltages and currents from 10 ms to60 min.,

Other quantities from 1s to 60 min.

The SIMEAS Q Quality Recorder

SIMEAS Q is a measuring and recordingdevice which enables monitoring of allcharacteristics related to the voltage quali-ty in three-phase systems according tothe specifications defined in the standardsEN 50160 and IEC 61000. It is mounted ona standard rail with the help of a snap-onmechanism.

Application

Medium and low-voltage systems.The device requires only little space andcan be easily installed for stationary use.

Functions

Instrument for network quality measure-ment. All relevant measurands and operandsare continuously recorded at freely defina-ble intervals or, if a limit value is violated,the values are averaged. This enables theregistration of all characteristics of voltagequality according to the relevant standards.The measured values can be automaticallytransferred to a central computer systemat freely definable intervals via a standard-ized PROFIBUS DP interface and at atransmission rate of up to 1.5 Mbit/s.

Special features

Cost-effective solution. Comprehensive measuring functions

which can also be used in the field ofautomatic control engineering.

Minimum dimensions. Integrated PROFIBUS DP. The integrated clock can be synchro-

nized via the PROFIBUS. Configurationand data output via PROFIBUS DP.

Measuring inputs

3 voltage inputs, 0 – 280 V,3 current inputs, 0 – 6 A.

Fig. 241: The SIMEAS Q quality recorder

Front view

Side view

Connection terminals

Terminal block


SIMEAS Q7KG-8000-8AB/BB

PROFIBUS-DPPROFIBUS-DP Aux. Volt.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Input: Current AC Input: Volt. AC

20 21 22 23 24 25

UL1 UL2 UL3IL3IL3IL2IL2IL1IL1 ULN

90105

75

90

SIMEAS Q7KG-8000-8AB/BB

PROFIBUS-DPPROFIBUS-DP 20 21 22 23 24 25

RUN BF DIA

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Fig. 242: The SIMEAS Q quality recorder,dimension drawings


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Operating modes

Continuous measurement with definableaveraging intervals,

Event-controlled measurement withdefinable averaging intervals.

Storage capacity

Up to 20,000 measured and calculated val-ues. Parameters for the measuring pointscan be freely defined. The PROFIBUS DPenables quick loading of the measured val-ues, so that the apparently small storagecapacity is absolutely sufficient. Assuminga usual parameter setting with regard tothe measuring points and averaging inter-vals for quality monitoring, the storagecapacity will last for seven days in caseof a PROFIBUS failure.

Basic Functions

In the course of continuous measurement,the selected measuring data are stored inthe memory or transferred directly via thePROFIBUS. The averaging interval can beselected separately for the different meas-urands.In the event-controlled mode of operation,the data will be stored only if a limit valuehas been violated within an averaging inter-val.Apart from the mean values, the maximumand minimum values within an averaginginterval can be stored, with the exceptionof flicker irritability factors and the valuesfrom energy measurement.Parameter assignment and adjustment ofthe device are performed via the Profibusinterface.

Information for SIMEAS Q ProjectPlanning

Up to 400 V (L-L), the device is connecteddirectly, or, if higher voltages are applied,via a external transformer. The rated cur-rent values are 1 and 5 A (max. 6 A canbe measured) without switchover. Commu-nication with the device is effected viaPROFIBUS DP or, as an option, via modem(telephone network).Auxiliary voltage is available in two vari-ants: 24 to 60 V DC and 110 to 250 V DCor 100 to 230 V AC.

Fig. 243: SIMEAS Q connection terminals

L

Connection terminals SIMEAS Q7 8 9 10

k l

K L

k l

K L

1 2 3 4

k l

K L

5 6

L1L2L3N

U

u

U U

u u

X X X


k l

K L

1 2 3 4

k l

K

5 6

L1L2L3

VV UU

u uv v


k l

K L

k l

K L

1 2 3 4

k l

K L

5 6

L1L2L3N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10Connection terminals SIMEAS Q

k l

K LL1N

4-wire – 3-phase with any load (low voltage network)

3-wires – 3-phase with any load

4-wire – 3-phase with any load (high voltage network)

Single phase – alternating current



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 244: SIMEAS N Quality Recorder

The SIMEAS N Quality Recorder

SIMEAS N is a measuring and recordingdevice which is used to monitor all charac-teristics referring to the voltage quality inthree-phase systems in compliance withthe requirements stated in the EN 50160and IEC 1000 Standards.

Application

Medium and low-voltage systems, laborato-ries, test bays. Portable device for mobile use.

Functions

Device for network quality measurement.The measurands and operands are continu-ously recorded over definable intervals; incase of limit violations, the values will beaveraged. This enables the recording of allcharacteristics relevant to voltage quality.In addition, this multi-purpose device canbe used for general measurement tasks inthe field of AC power engineering.

Special features

Comprehensive measuring functions. A lock-able cover protects the terminals againstaccidental contact. The operator access canbe password-protected. Clamp-on probeswith an error correction function facilitateconnection. A back-up battery stores themeasured data in case of voltage failure.The integrated battery-backed real-time clockwill be usable until the year 2097.Output of the measured values via inte-grated thermal printer, floppy disk or serialinterface.

Measuring inputs

4 voltage inputs, 0–460 V, 3 of these inputs with additional transient

acquisition ±2650 Vpeak at a samplingrate of 2 MHz,

4 voltage/current inputs, voltage0–460 V/clamp-on probe or transducer.

Communication

1 input for trigger signal, 1 contact as alarm output, 1 integrated thermal printer, 1 3.5" floppy disk drive, 1.44 MB for

parameters and data storage, 1 serial interface type RS 232C (V.24) for

connection to a personal computer forconfiguration and data transmission.


R.m.s. values of voltages, AC, AC+DC,DC,

Peak voltage values during transientmeasurement,

R.m.s values of currents, AC, AC+DC,DC (depending on transducer or clamp-on probes),

Voltage dips and voltage cutoffs, Overvoltages, System frequency, Active, reactive and apparent power,

1- to 3 phases, Phase angle, Harmonics of voltages and currents up

to the 50th order, Total harmonic distortion (THD), voltages

and currents, unweighted or weightedinductively or capacitively,

Unbalanced voltage and current in thethree-phase system.

Connection types

Single phase, Four-wire three-phase current.

Measurands and operands,available as an option

Direction of harmonics, Flicker measurement, Digital storage oscilloscope.

Operating modes

Continuous measurement with displayat one-second intervals,

Continuous measurement with data stor-age,

Event-controlled measurement with datastorage.

Storage capacity

Up to 500,000 measured and calculatedvalues; various options for defining themeasuring points.

Function

Continuous measurement without storageroughly corresponds to the function of amultimeter. The selected values to bemeasured are continuously displayed andthe whole screen content including thegraphic illustrations can be printed on theintegrated thermal printer by key command.This operating mode is used to check cor-rect connection of the device and is suitablefor general measurement tasks. Monitoringof the network quality is effected by contin-uously calculating and storing the mean val-ues of the measured quantities. In the stor-age mode, the averaging interval can beconfigured individually from one period ofthe system voltage up to several months.Two types of storage modes can be select-ed, either linear mode (stops when thememory is full) or overwrite mode (the old-est data will be overwritten by the new in-formation).With the help of the OSCOP Q program, themeasuring data can be transmitted toa personal computer for detailed analysis.


The basic version of the device is fullycapable of simultaneous acquisition of up to55 measurands.The voltage range of 400 V +15% is suita-ble for connection to 400 V three-phase sys-tems. Clamp-on probes (10, 100 and 1000A) for current measurement are available.The connection of a transducer is possible,if a resistor provides a voltage drop of 1 Vnominal value.The device can also be delivered for high-speed processing which enables simultane-ous acquisition of up to 186 different meas-urands.Optional functions which can be added at alater date by software installation: Power measurement of individual har-

monics and their direction in order toidentify the cause.

Extension of the device functions for useas an additional three-channel digital oscil-loscope.

Flicker measurement according toIEC 60 868.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 247: Fault record

Fig. 246: … and to monitor transmission lines

Fig. 245: SIMEAS R Systemsare used in power plants …

Recording Equipment

The SIMEAS R Fault and Digital Recorder

Application

Stand-alone stationary recorder for extra-high, high and medium-voltage systems.

Component of secondary equipment ofpower stations and substations or indus-trial plants.

Functions

Fault recorder, digital recorder, frequency/power fault recorder, power quality record-er, event recorder.All functions can be performed simultane-ously and are combined in one unit with noneed for additional devices to carry out thedifferent tasks.

Special features

The modular design enables the realiza-tion of different variants starting fromsystems with 8 analog and 16 binary in-puts up to the acquisition of data fromany number of analog and binary chan-nels.

Clock with time synchronization usingGPS or DCF77.

Data output via postscript printer, re-mote data transmission with a modemvia the telephone line, connection toLAN and WAN.

Fault Recording (DFR)

This function is used for the continuousmonitoring of the AC voltages and cur-rents, binary signals and direct voltages orcurrents with a high time resolution. If afault event, e.g. a short-circuit, occurs, thespecific fault will be registered includingits history. The recorded data are then ar-chived and can either be printed directly inthe form of graphics or be transferred to adiagnosis system which can, for example,be used to identify the fault location.

Fault detection is effected with the help oftrigger functions. With analog quantitiesthis refers to exceeding the limit values for voltage,

current and unbalanced load (positiveand negative phase sequence system).

falling below the limit values for voltage,current and unbalanced load (positiveand negative phase sequence system).

limit values for sudden changes in up ordownward direction.

Monitoring of the binary signals includes signal status (high, low) status changes


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Logical triggers

Logical triggers can be defined by combin-ing any types of trigger event (analog orbinary). They are used to avoid undesiredrecording by increasing the selectivity ofthe trigger function. The device can distin-guish between different causes of a fault,e.g. between a voltage dip caused by ashort-circuit (low voltage, high current)which needs to be recorded, and the dis-connection of a feeder (voltage low, cur-rent low) which does not need to be re-corded.

Sequential control

An intelligent logic operation is used tomake sure that each record refers to theactual duration of the fault event. This is toprevent continuous violation of a limit value(e.g. undervoltage) from causing perma-nent recording and blocking of the device.

Analog measurands

16-bit resolution for voltages and DC quan-tities and 2 x 16-bit resolution for AC volt-ages.The sampling frequency is 256 times theperiod length, i.e. 12.8 kHz at 50 Hz and15.36 kHz at 60 Hz for each channel.A new current transformer concept ena-bles a measuring range between 0.5 mAand 400 Ar.m.s. with tolerances of <0.2%at <7 Ar.m.s. and <1% at >7 Ar.m.s. Further-more, direct current is registered in therange above 7 A; this enables a true imageof the transient DC component in theshort-circuit current.

Binary signals

The sampling frequency at the binary in-puts is 2 kHz.

Data compression

For best utilization of the memory spaceand for high-speed remote transmissionthe data can be compressed to as little as2% of their original size.

Fault diagnosis

Performed with the OSCOP P softwarepackage.

Digital Recording (DR)

This function is used for the continuousregistration of the mean values of themeasurands at intervals which can be free-ly defined (min. interval is one period). Themain function of this device is the continu-ous recording of quantities at the feedersand to make these values available for theanalysis of the network quality.

In single-phase and three-phase systems,the following measurands are recorded: R.m.s. values of voltages and currents Active power, phase-segregated and

overall Reactive power, phase-segregated and

overall (displacement or total reactivepower)

Power factor, phase-segregated andoverall

Frequency Positive and negative sequence voltage

and current Weighted and unweighted total harmon-

ic distortion (THD) 5 th to 50 th harmonics (depending on

the averaging time) DC signals, e.g. from transducersDepending on the individual network con-figuration, a three or four-wire connectionis used.

Frequency/Power Recording (FPR)

This function uses the same principle as afault recorder. It continuously monitors thegradient of the frequency and/or power ofone or more three-phase feeders. If majordeviations are detected, e.g. caused by theoutage of a power plant or when great loadsare applied, the profile of the measurandswill be recorded including their history. Therecorder is also used for the registration ofpower swings.

Measurands

Frequency of one of the voltages,(limit of error ±1 mHz)

Active power, reactive power(reactive displacement power),(limit of error ≤ 0.2%)

Power factor

Averaging interval

A value between 1 and 250 periods of thenetwork frequency can be selected.

History

Depends on the averaging interval;10 s times the averaging periods.

Automatic power analysis

With the help of the OSCOP software pack-age (see The OSCOP P) a power analysisof a station can be created automatically.

Fig. 248: SIMEAS R for 8 analog and 16 binary inputs,1/2 19'' design

Sequence of Event (SOE) Recording

Each status change occurring at the binaryinputs is registered with a resolution of0.5 ms and is then provided with a timestamp indicating the time information fromthe year down to the millisecond.200 status changes per second can bestored for each group of 32 inputs. Themass memory of the device can be config-ured according to requirements (a 5 MBmemory, for example, enables the storageof approx. 120,000 status changes). Mod-ules for signal voltages between 24 and250 V are available.The time-synchronous output enablesthe combined representation with analogcurves, e.g. of alarm and command signalstogether with the course of relay voltagesand currents. With the help of the OSCOP Pprogram, the event signals can howeveralso be displayed in the form of a text listin chronological order. The use of a sepa-rate sequence of event recorder will nolonger be required.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


The individual diagrams can, of course, beadjusted to individual requirements withthe help of variable scaling and zoom func-tions. Records from different devices canbe combined in one diagram. The differentquantities measured can be immediatelycalculated by marking a specific point in adiagram with the cursor (impedance, reac-tance, active and reactive power, harmon-ics, peak value, r.m.s. value, symmetry, etc.).Additional diagnosis modules can be usedto perform an automatic analysis of faultevents and to identify the fault location.The program also supports server/clientstructures.

Configuration Evaluation

WANISDNX.25

Telephone

OfficeLAN

ContainerizedData Base

Spontaneousprint

Spontaneousprint

RMS values+ diagnostic

Data compression

Diagnostic system

Decentralized Data Base

Remote control, automatic mode

StationsLAN

SIMEAS R8 analog/16 binary inputs

Evaluation

Configuration

Printer

DAKON

Load Dispatch Center

Station Level

Bay Level

Office

The OSCOP P Evaluation Program

The OSCOP P software package is suitablefor use in personal computers provided withthe operating systems MS WINDOWS 95/98or WINDOWS NT. It is used for remotetransmission, evaluation and archiving (da-tabase system) of the data received froma SIMEAS R or OSCILLOSTORE and fromdigital protection devices. The programincludes a parameterization function forremote configuration of SIMEAS R andOSCILLOSTORE units.The program enables fully-automated datatransmission of all recorded events fromthe acquisition units to one or more evalua-tion stations via dedicated line, switchedline or a network; the received data canthen be immediately displayed on a moni-tor and/or printed (Fig. 249).The OSCOP P program is provided witha very convenient graphical evaluation pro-gram for the creation of a time diagramwith the curve profiles, diagrams of ther.m.s. values or vector diagrams (Fig. 252).

Fig. 249: Example of a distributed recording system realized with SIMEAS R recorders and data central unit DAKON

Information for Project Planningwith SIMEAS R

The secondary components of high ormedium-voltage systems can either beaccommodated in a central relay room orin the feeder dedicated low-voltage com-partments of switchgear panels. For thisreason, the SIMEAS R system has beendesigned in such a way as to allow bothcentralized or decentralized installation.The acquisition unit can be delivered intwo different widths, either 1/2 19" or 19"(full width). The first version is favorableif measurands of only one feeder are to beconsidered (8 analog and 16 binary signals).This often applies to high-voltage plantswhere each feeder is provided with an ex-tra relay kiosk for the secondary equipment.In all other cases, the full-width version of19" is more economical, since it enables theprocessing of up to 32 analog and 64 bina-ry signals. The modular structure with avariety of interface modules (DAUs) providesa maximum of flexibility. The number ofDAUs which can be integrated in the ac-quisition system is unlimited.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MeasurandsDAU Type

4 AC voltages,4 AC currents,16 binary signals

8 AC voltages,16 binary signals

8 AC currents,16 binary signals

8 DC currents or16 binary signals

16 binary signals

Use of the interface modules

VCDAU

VDAU

CDAU

DDAU

BDAU

Application

Monitoring of voltages and currents ofthree-phase feeders or transformers includingthe signals from protective equipment.All recorder functions can be run simultaneously.

Monitoring of busbar voltages

Monitoring of feeder and transformer currentsor currents at the infeeds and couplings of busbars

For monitoring of quantities received frommeasuring transducers and telecontrol units,20 mA or 1 and 10 V.

Event recording of alarm signals, disconnectorstatus signals, circuit-breaker monitoring


Fig. 251: Use of the data acquisition units

Fig. 252: OSCOP P Program, evaluation of a fault record

Fig. 250: Rear view of a SIMEAS R unit with terminalsfor the signals and interfaces for data transmission

With the help of a DAKON, several devicescan be interlinked and automatically con-trolled. In addition, digital protection devic-es of different make can be connected tothe DAKON.The voltage inputs are designed for directconnection to low-voltage networks or tolow-voltage transformers. Current inputsare suitable for direct connection to currenttransformers (IN = 1 or 5 A). All inputscomply with the relevant requirements forprotection devices acc. to IEC 60 255.The binary inputs are connected to floatingcontacts.Data transmission is preferably effectedvia telephone network or WAN (Wide AreaNetwork). If more than one SIMEAS R isinstalled, we recommend the use of aDAKON (data concentrator). The DAKONcreates connection with the OSCOP Pevaluation program, e.g. via the telephonenetwork. Moreover, the DAKON automati-cally collects all information registered bythe devices connected and stores thesedata on a decentralized basis, e.g. in thesubstation. The DAKON performs a greatvariety of different functions, e.g. it sup-ports the automatic fax transmission ofthe data. A database management systemdistributes the recorded data to differentstations either automatically or on specialcommand.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Compensation – Introduction Power Quality

Compensations Systems

Many consumers of electrical energy (trans-formers, engines, fluorescent lamps) maycause a number of different problems:reactive displacement power, non-linearloads (rectifiers, transformers), resulting indistorted waveshapes. Harmonics are gen-erated and, finally, an unbalanced load atthe three phases leads to increased appar-ent power and thus to increased powerconsumption. This is accompanied by high-er conduction losses, which require theinstallation of lines and operating equipmentsuitable for higher capacities and at highercosts than actually necessary. The cost forpower rates in relation to the apparent pow-er and distortion should also be considered.In many cases it is favorable to performcompensation of the undesired components.Siemens offers two different systems forthe compensation of reactive power and ofharmonics – SIPCON T and SIPCON DVR/DSTATCOM – both suitable for three-phaseLV systems up to a rated voltage of 690 V.The latter system is available in designsalso capable of compensating short-termvoltage dips and surges, as well as loadunbalances. SIPCON T

Passive systems using switchedcapacitors or capacitors with permanentwiring.

SIPCON DVR / DSTATCOMActive systems using IGBT convertersfor quick and continuous operation.

The use of SIPCON can enable energysuppliers worldwide to provide the endconsumer with distinctive quality of supply.As it is now possible with this technologyto supply ”Premium Energy“, an energysupplier can formulate differing tariffs forhis product – electrical energy – so that hewill stand out from his competitors.

30.00

25.00

20.00

15.00

10.00

5.00

0.0010 ms

to 100 ms100 ms

to 500 ms 500 ms

to 1 s1 s

to 3 s20 s

to 60 s3 s

to 20 s

interruption 10060 to 100

30 to 6010 to 30

Duration of voltage dips

Magnitudeof voltagedip [%]

Frequency ofvoltage dips [%]

Fig. 253: Frequency and duration of voltage dips

Fig. 254: Active compensation system(Power Conditioner DSTATCOM)

For industry, especially in the case of com-plex manufacturing processes (such as forexample in the semiconductor industry)”Premium Energy“ is an absolute necessity.SIPCON is capable of effectively suppress-ing system perturbation, such as for exam-ple harmonics. Here as well, tariff changesare to be expected worldwide in the fu-ture. Investigations in Europe have shownthat the increase in harmonics is imposinga particular strain on systems. Such har-monics occur through the operation of vari-able speed drives, of rectifiers – for exam-ple in electroplating – and of inductionfurnaces or wind power plants. In privatehouses, the principal loads are single-phase, such as TV sets and personal com-puters. With the aid of selective recordingof weaknesses in the electrical system andsubsequent use of the SIPCON PowerConditioner, it will be possible to improvesystem loading and to significantly rational-ize the high capital investment necessaryfor system expansion.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MMM

Group correction

M M

MMM

M

Centralized correction

Controller

Fig. 256: Group correction

Fig. 257: Centralized correction

Fig. 255: Individual correction

M

Individual correction

Power QualityPassive Compensation – Power Factor Correction

The SIPCON T Passive Filtersand Compensation Systems

All consumers based on an electromagnet-ic operation principle (e.g. motors, trans-formers, fluorescent lamps with series re-actors) require a lagging reactive power.This leads to an increase in the amount ofapparent power and consequently in current.The supply of reactive power from the mainsleads to additional load applied to the oper-ating equipment which, as a result, needsto be configured for higher capacities thanactually required. The higher current is ac-companied by an increased power loss.However, the required reactive power canalso be generated close to the consumerwith the help of capacitors which preventthe above mentioned disadvantages. Whenselecting the capacity it is general practiceto calculate with a power factor of 0.9 orhigher.Compensation can be effected according tothree different principles: individual correc-tion, group correction and centralized cor-rection.

Individual Correction

This type of compensation is reasonablefor consumers with high capacities,constant load and long operating times.(Fig. 255). The capacitor is installed close to the op-

erating equipment. The lower currentflows already in the line from the busbarto the consumer.

The capacitor and the consumer areturned on and off together; an additionalswitch is not required.

When selecting the type of capacitorsplease note that in the case of inductionmotors, the reactive power supplied by thecapacitor must not exceed approx. 90% ofthe motor reactive power in idle operation.Otherwise, disconnection might cause self-excitation by the resonance frequency,since the motor and the capacitor form aresonant circuit. This effect may lead tohigh overvoltages at the terminals and af-fect the insulation of the operating equip-ment. As a general rule, the following val-ues should be considered for the capacitor: Approx. 35% of the motor power

at ≥ 40 kW, Approx. 40% of the motor power from

20 to 39 kW, Approx. 50% of the motor power

at < 20 kW.

Under unfavorable conditions, adherenceto this rule may lead to a power factorsmaller than 0.9. In this case, centralizedcorrection should be performed additionally.

Group Correction

A group of consumers, e.g. motors or fluo-rescent lamps, operated by one commonswitch, can be compensated with one sin-gle capacitor (Fig. 256).

Centralized Correction

The solution for correcting the power fac-tor for a great number of small consumerswith varying power consumption is a cen-tralized compensation principle (Fig. 257)using switched capacitor modules and acontroller. The low losses of the capacitorsallows them to be integrated directly in theswitchboards or distributors.A programmable controller is used to mon-itor the power factor and to switch the ca-pacitors according to the reactive-powerflow.The devices for group correction differ intheir power and in their number of switch-ing steps. For example, a unit with 250 kVAcan be switched in steps of 50 kVA.We recommend the use of units suitablefor switching between five and twelvesteps.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 258: SIMEAS C Power Factor Controller

Active power Pa 550 kWPower factor cos ϕ1 0.6Apparent power S1 920 kVACurrent I1 1330 A

cos ϕ1

S1

=P

a

Two examples

Uncompensated system, rated voltage 400 V

Compensated system, rated voltage 400 V

√3 • UI1

=S

1

√3 • 400 V=

920 kVA= 1330 A

0.6=

550 kW= 920 kVA

Power factor cos ϕ2 0.9Capacitor power QC 470 kvarApparent power S2 610 kVACurrent I2 880 A

cos ϕ2

S2

=P

a

√3 • UI2

=S

2

√3 • 400 V=

610 kVA= 880 A

=550 kW

= 610 kVA

QC

= Pa

(tan ϕ1– tan ϕ

2)

The correction of the power factor fromcos ϕ1 = 0.6 to cos ϕ2 = 0.9, results in a34% reduction in apparent power trans-mitted. Line losses can be reduced by56%.

S1

S1

– S

2 = 0.34

I12

I12 –

I22

= 0.56

1

2

0.9

Q2

ϕ1ϕ2

QC

Q1

S1

S2

P

Fig. 259: Effect of compensation

Fig. 260: Examples of power factor control

Power QualityPassive Compensation – Power Factor Control

The SIMEAS C Power FactorController

The centralized correction principle is ef-fected with the help of a controller. Thisunit is designed for panel mounting (frontframe dimensions 144 x 144 mm accord-ing to DIN) in the door of the compensa-tion equipment. It is connected to L1, L2and L3 of the mains voltage; the current istaken from a current transformer in L1 rated1 A or 5 A.All capacitor modules connected areswitched stepwise in such a way as toenable best approximation to the setpointvalue of the power factor. Defined waitingperiods prevent excessive switching opera-tions and ensure that the capacitor will bedischarged properly before the next con-nection. Two setpoints (cos ϕ1 and cos ϕ2)can be specified separately to enable dif-ferent modes for day and night time.Each capacitor module is operated by con-tactors which are controlled by means ofsix contacts. A further contact is used forerror indication. One input for a floatingcontact is used to select one of the twosetpoints for the power factor. Apart fromthe control function, the device also offersa great amount of information on the sta-tus of the supply system. It shows: Setpoint cos ϕ1, Setpoint cos ϕ2 (e.g. night operation), Line current, Voltages, Active power in kW, Apparent power in kVA, Actual reactive power in kvar, Deviation of the reactive power from

the setpoint value, Reactive power of the activated

capacitors, Harmonics of voltage U5, Harmonics of voltage U7, Harmonics of voltage U11, Harmonics of current U5, Harmonics of current U7, Harmonics of current U11.A fiber-optic interface is accessible at therear of the device. On request, a cablesuitable for the conversion of optical puls-es into RS 232C (V.2) signals can be sup-plied. This cable enables connection to apersonal computer which can be used toprogram the controller and to read out pa-rameters, as well as the measured values.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Ripple controlfrequencies

< 250 Hz

> 250 Hz

> 350 Hz

Reactor/capacitorratio p

14%

≥ 7%

≥ 5%QC

= Pa·(tan ϕ1– tan ϕ2)

Er = reactive energy (kvarh)Ea = active energy (kWh)t = operating time in hours over

the accounting periodtan ϕ2= calculated from the setpoint

value for cos ϕ2

tQ

C=

Er– (Ea • tan ϕ2)

Fig. 261

Fig. 262

Fig. 263: Types of compensation for different ripplecontrol frequencies

Power QualityPassive Compensation – Power Factor Control

Selecting the Capacitor Power

When defining the capacitor power for asystem, the active power P and the powerfactor cos ϕ1 of the system have to beconsidered. In order to upgrade cos ϕ1 tocos ϕ2, the following applies to the powerQC of the capacitor:

The diagram in Fig. 259 shows how theapparent power S1 – caused by activepower Pa and reactive power Q1 – is re-duced to the value S2 by the capacitorpower QC. When taking into account thatthe current is proportional to the apparentpower, whereby the loss caused by thecurrent increases by the power of two, thesaving is remarkable. This result is possiblysupported by a lower energy tariff to bepaid.With systems in the planning stage we canassume that the reactive load is causedmainly by induction motors. These motorsoperate with an average power factor of≥ 0.7. Increasing the power factor to 0.9requires a capacitor power of approx. 50%of the active power.In present industrial plants, the requiredcapacitor power can be determined on thebasis of the energy bill, provided the plantis equipped with an active and reactive en-ergy meter.

If no reactive energy meters are installed,the required data can be determined withthe help of a reactive power recorder.

Correction of the Power Factor inNetworks with Harmonics

Consumers with non-linear resistors, i.e.with non-sinusoidal power consumption,cause a distorted voltage waveshape.However, all waveshapes are made up ofsine curves the frequencies of which areinteger multiples of the system frequency– the harmonics. When using capacitorsfor power factor correction, the capacity ofthese capacitors and the inductivity of thenetwork (supplying transformer) form a se-ries resonant circuit.The two impedances of the resonance fre-quency are the same and cancel each oth-er out; the relatively low active resistance,however, causes current peaks which maypossibly lead to the tripping of protectiondevices. This may occur if the resonancefrequency equals or is close to the fre-quency of a present harmonic.This effect can be corrected by the use ofcapacitor units equipped with an inductor.These inductors are designed in such away that the resonance frequency in com-bination with the network inductivity fallsbelow the fifth harmonic. With all higherharmonics, the capacitor unit is then induc-tive which excludes the generation of reso-nances.We recommend use of these inductor-ca-pacitor units in all cases where more than20% of the power is caused by harmonics-generating equipment.

Compensation in Networks withRipple Control

Ripple control is effected by superimpos-ing the network voltage with signals of afrequency between 160 and 1350 Hz.Since the capacitor conductance is rising ina linear manner in relation to the frequen-cy, these signals can be practically short-circuited. For this reason, the influence ofthe compensation measures should beconsidered and, if inadmissible, it shouldbe corrected. VDEW (German Utility Board)has issued a recommendation on this sub-ject, where the impedance factor α hasbeen defined as the ratio of the networkimpedance to that of the compensationequipment at the frequency of the ripplecontrol signal.The practical consequence is that in net-works without harmonics and with ripplecontrol frequencies of less than 250 Hz,capacitors without inductors can be usedto correct the power factor at a capacity ofup to 35% of the apparent transformerpower. In this case, follow-up measure-ments can be omitted.

Only in cases with a higher capacitor pow-er should the power supply companies beconsulted for an agreement on the use ofaudio frequency hold-offs. With frequen-cies greater than 250 Hz, capacitor powerswithout audio frequency hold-off are ad-missible only up to 10 kvar. If the capacitorpower exceeds this value, audio frequencyhold-offs are to be integrated. This refersmainly to parallel resonant circuits whichare connected to the capacitors in seriesand which show a high impedance in theirresonance frequency.In networks where harmonics are clearlypresent, inductor-capacitor units should beused for compensation in any case. Thespecific type of compensation equipmentis to be selected with consideration of theripple control frequency. Fig. 263 showssome guide values for this procedure.

Compensation of Harmonics

The continuous progress in power semi-conductor technology has resulted in anincreased use of controlled rectifiers andfrequency converters, e.g. for variable-speed drives. The common and character-istic feature of these devices is their non-sinusoidal power consumption. This leadsto distortion of the network voltage, i.e. itcontains harmonics. This distortion is thenforced upon other consumers connectedto the same network and will also have aneffect on higher voltage levels. This disad-vantage may lead to operational failuresand cause a higher apparent power in thenetwork. In order to keep to the limit val-ues as specified in the EN 50160 standard,filtering may become necessary.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

M

M

ν = 5 ν = 7 ν =11…

Drive Low-voltage

Transformer

Primary distribution network

Filter

Active power

Reactive power

ν = 6 · k ± 1, k = 1, 2, 3, …

Iν = 1ν

· I1

Fig. 264: Three-phase bridge circuit

Fig. 265: Correction of the power factor with the help of filters

Fig. 266

Fig. 267

Power QualityPassive Compensation – Harmonics Filter

The following example shows the harmon-ics present in a typical three-phase, fully-controlled, bridge-circuit rectifier (Fig. 264).

The amplitude of the currents decreasesinversely to the increase of the ordernumber, ideally, in a linear manner in rela-tion to the frequency:

Actually, the values are often slightly high-er, since the DC current is not completelysmoothed. Harmonics of the fifth, seventh,eleventh and thirteenth order may showamplitudes which need to be reduced;harmonics of a higher order can usuallybe neglected.The effect of harmonic currents on thesystem can be reduced considerably by theuse of filters. This is effected by generat-ing a series resonant circuit from a capaci-tor and an inductor which is then adjustedexactly to the corresponding frequency foreach harmonic to be absorbed. The twoimpedances cancel each other out, so thatthe remaining ohmic resistance is reducedto a negligible amount, compared to thenetwork impedance. The harmonic currentsare absorbed to a large extent; the restremains present in the supply network.This results in a lower voltage distortionand a considerable increase in voltagequality.Referring to the fundamental component,the filters form a capacitive load. This sup-ports the general reactive power compen-sation. This measure enables the corre-sponding equipment to be designed forlower capacities (Fig. 265).


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Help for Selection

Siemens offers capacitors with and with-out reactors, suitable for single-phase andthree-phase systems for reactive powersbetween 5 and 100 kvar and for nominalvoltages between 230 and 690 V. Thesecapacitors are suitable for the compensa-tion of constant reactive power.

Type Series 4RB

MKK Power Capacitors for fixed compen-sation without reactors, ratings 5 to 25 kvar.The three-phase capacitors can be directlyconnected at the load. Discharge resistor4RX92 are to be connected in parallel.

Type Series 4RD

MKK power capacitors for fixed compen-sation without reactors, mounted in a pro-tective housing or on a plate. Ratings 5 to100 kvar. Discharge resistors included.

Type Series 4RY

Complete small systems without reactorsfor the automatic stepwise control of thepower factor with and without integratedaudio frequency hold-off in different hous-ings and at different ratings. The units areequipped with a BLR-CC controller suitablefor 8 switching steps. Without audio fre-quency hold-off, the capacity ranges from10 to 100 kvar, with hold-off from 12 to50 kvar. The nominal voltage for both ver-sions is 400 V, the frequency is 50 Hz.Larger, fully-equipped systems withoutreactors are delivered in cabinets. Theratings of these systems range from 37.5up to 500 kvar for nominal values between230 V and 690 V and frequencies between50 and 60 Hz. With these systems theSIMEAS C controller for operation in sixswitching steps is used. This controlleroptimizes the switching sequence for con-stant use of the capacitors. For voltagesof 400 V, systems with ratings between75 and 300 kvar and with an integratedaudio frequency hold-off are available.

Type Series 4RY56

Capacitor modules without reactors be-tween 20 and 100 kvar for installation inracks of 600 or 800 mm in width.

Type Series 4RF56

Reactor-capacitor modules from 5 to100 kvar for installation in racks of 600 or800 mm in width.

Type Series 4RF6

Fixed reactor-capacitor units for stationarycompensation in networks with a non-line-ar load percentage of more than 20% re-lated to the supply transformer apparentpower rating. Voltages between 400 and690 V, rating from 5 to 50 kvar. Reactor/capacitor ratios: 5.67%, 7% or 14%.

Type Series 4RF14

Passive, adjusted filter circuits for the ab-sorption of harmonics. Voltages from 400to 690 V, rating from 29 to 195 kvar. In thecourse of project planning, the customerwill be requested to specify the currents ofthe generated harmonics, the harmoniccontent in the higher-level network and theshort-circuit reactance at the connectingpoint.

Type Series 4RF1

Fully-equipped compensation systems withreactor suitable for 400 to 690 V, with acapacitor rating up to 800 kvar and withadditional reactors for a total rating up to1000 kvar. The controller function is real-ized by SIMEAS C.

Type Series 4RF3

Fully-equipped compensation systems withreactors suitable for 400 to 525 V (and alsofor other voltages on request) for ratingsbetween 200 and 400 kvar. Special feature:audio frequency blocking and simultaneousfiltering of harmonics. The controller func-tion is realized by SIMEAS C.

Version

4RF16

4RF17

4RF18

4RF19

Reactor/capacitorratio

5.67%

7%

8%

14%

Fig. 268

Fig. 269: 4RY56 Capacitor module 100 kvar, switchableas 2 x 50 kvar module for cable connection

Fig. 270: 4RY19 power factor correction unit in sheet-steel wall cabinet, 50 kvar

Fig. 271: 4RF1 power factor correction unit250 kvar (5 x 50 kvar) in a cabinet 2275 x 625 mm

Power QualityPassive Compensation – Selection Guide

For technical data of SIPCON T Passive Filters and Com-pensation Systems see Power Quality Catalog SR 10.6


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Equipment forpower factorcorrection,type 4RF17,reactors (7%).Filtering of 5thharmonic upapprox. 30%

Capacitor type4RB, stationarycompensationequipm. type4RD. Equipmentfor power factorcorrection with-out reactors,type 4RY.

Special audiofrequency hold-off on request orcompensationunit with reactor(7%).

Capacitors andcompensationunits without4RY. Audio fre-quency hold-offon the supplyside.

Ripple control inthe network?

Audio frequency> 250 Hz

U5 < 3%U7 < 2%present in thenetwork?

Percentage ofnon-linear load inthe network< 20% of Sr*)

Must resonanceswith the higher-level network beavoided?

Ripple control inthe network?

Audio frequency> 250 Hz? 1

2

*) Sr is the apparent power of the upstream infeeding system (transformer)

Go toflowchart 2

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Fig. 272: Flowchart 1: Power factor correction for low, non-linear load

Flowcharts

The flowcharts can be used as a referencewhen selecting the suitable compensationequipment with regard to the individualpreconditions of the specific network.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

1

2

*) Sr is the apparent power of the upstream infeeding system (transformer)

Avoiding resonanceswith higher level network

Partial filtering of self-generated harmonics

Ripple controlpresent in the network?

Audio frequency> 350 Hz?

Audio frequency< 250 Hz?

Filtering a large amountof self-generatedharmonics.

Ripple control presentin the netwok?

Compensationequipment forpower factorcorrection, type4RF16, withreactors (5.67%).Filtering of self-generated 5thharmonic up toapprox. 50%.

4RF34 or 4RF36special reactorconnected powerfactor correctionunit, or powerfactor correctionunit, type 4RF19,with reactors(14%).

Requires specialversion, availableon request.

Passive, tunedfilter circuittype 4RF14 re-quired, availableon request.

Improving thepower factor

Percentage ofnon-linear loadin the network≥ 20% of Sr *)

No

No Yes

Yes

YesNo

No NoYes

Yes

Fig. 273: Flowchart 2: Power factor correction for large non-linear load



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SIPCON-DVR/SIPCON-DSTATCOMActive Filter and CompensationSystems

A great number of industrial processesbased on the supply of electrical energyrequire a high degree of reliability in powersupply, including the constancy of the volt-age applied and the waveshape. A short-time voltage failure or voltage dip may cau-se the destruction of a component presentlybeing processed in an NC machine or of awhole production lot in the semiconductor,chemical or steel industry. In the automo-tive and semiconductor industries, for ex-ample, the cost incurred by these lossesmay quickly accumulate to millions of dollars.In return, some production processes cau-se unacceptable perturbations in the supplynetwork resulting from voltage dips (rollingmills), flickers and asymmetries (steel mills).Correction is possible with the help ofactive compensation systems. These sys-tems are capable of absorbing harmonicsand of compensating voltage dips, reactivepower, imbalance in the three-phase sys-tem and flicker problems. Their characteris-tic features go far beyond the capabilitiesof passive systems (e.g. SIPCON T) andoffer great advantages when comparedwith other applications. The function princi-ple is based on a pulse-width modulated,three-phase bridge-circuit rectifier, as usedfor example in variable-speed drives. Theswitching elements – IGBTs (insulated gatebipolar transistors) – are controlled by meansof pulses of a certain length and phase an-gle. These pulses initiate charging and dis-charging of a capacitor, used as an energystore, at periodical intervals in order to achie-ve the desired effect of influencing the cur-rent flow direction. The control function isperformed by means of a microprocessor-based, programmable control unit.

Advantages of ActiveCompensation Equipment

No capacitance, in order to exclude thegeneration of undesired resonances.

Reactive power and harmonics aretreated independently of each other; thecompensation of harmonics has no ef-fect on the power factor and vice versa.

The audio frequency ripple control levelsremain unaffected.

Stepless control avoids sudden changesand enables compensation at any de-gree of accuracy.

Most rapid reaction to load changes witha minimum delay.

No overvoltages caused by switchingoperations.

The equipment protects itself againstoverload.

The functions will not be affected byageing of the power capacitors.

The user can re-configure the system atany time; this greatly enhances flexibility,even if the specific tasks have changed.

Net-work Load

IGBTConverter

Intermediate-circuit capacitor

Net-work Load

Fig. 275: DVR

Fig. 274: DSTATCOM

There are two systems available, the DVR(Dynamic Voltage Restorer) and the DSTAT-COM (Distributed Static Compensator)which differ in their specific design and ap-plication. DSTATCOM is designed for paral-lel and the DVR for serial connection.The DSTATCOM is connected to the net-work between the incoming supply lineand the consumer or a group of consum-ers as shown in Fig. 274. The compensa-tion unit functions as a current source andsink. Correction includes all network char-acteristics related to the reactive power.The DSTATCOM is used to compensateload reactions on the network.Connection of the DVR requires some moreeffort, since the system is to be loopedinto the line (Fig. 275) in series connection.In this connection, the DVR can influencethe line current flow which enables a com-plete compensation of voltage dips asoccurring, for example, in the event ofshort-circuits in the network. The DVR im-proves the voltage quality of the supplysystem.

Power QualityActive Compensation


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Function Principle

The DSTATCOM unit measures the currentapplied to the supply side and injects a cor-rective current which compensates loadperturbations in the supply system or re-duces them to the admissible amount.Since no capacitors are used for correc-tion, the risk of resonances, as with pas-sive systems, can be neglected. Inductorsare not required.The signals from the audio frequency rip-ple control systems are not affected. Theuse of audio frequency hold-offs can beomitted.The DSTATCOM is available in two controlvariants: control variant 1 for standard op-eration and variant 2 for flicker mode.

HarmonicsReactive power

ImbalanceFlickers

LoadNet-work

LoadNet-work

LCL filter

PWMIGBT converter

Intermediate-circuit capacitor

DSTATCOM

Fig. 276: Load perturbations are compensated

Fig. 277: Basic diagram of the DSTATCOM

The DSTATCOM CompensationEquipment

The DSTATCOM is used to compensatereactive power, harmonics, unbalancedload and flickers caused by a consumer.The current supplied from the network ismeasured and modified by injecting correc-tive current in such a way as to preventviolation of the limit values defined for re-active power and for specific harmonicsflowing to the supply system; flicker prob-lems can also be reduced. The power re-quired for this compensation is derivedfrom the intermediate-circuit capacitorwhich is simultaneously re-charged withline current. This line current is also usedto correct the network current. Apart fromthe comparatively low losses, no activepower flow occurs. The DSTATCOM reduc-es or fully compensates perturbations onthe network caused by the consumer.

Fig. 277 shows the basic diagram of thesystem. The IGBT rectifier bridge is con-nected to the network via an LCL filter.The impedance of the inductivity causesthe pulse-width modulated voltage to im-press a current into the network and ab-sorb components of higher frequency.With the help of capacitors, the filter effectwill be improved. DC voltage is applied tothe intermediate-circuit capacitor which isadjusted according to its specific function.The current is measured on the networkside with the result that the correctingfunctions improve the network current andreduce the load reactions on the system.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 278: Example: SIPCON DSTATCOM LV

Fig. 279: Steinmetz compensator

Application of Variant 1

This is the standard design used to fulfillthe tasks as described below. All functionscan be performed simultaneously; they arecarried out completely independently anddo not affect each other, as occurs whenusing solutions with passive components(capacitors).DSTATCOM protects itself against overloadby limiting the current. The individual taskscan be allocated to different priority levels.In case of overload, the tasks with the low-est priority will then be skipped and the de-vice will use its full capacity for the othertasks. The control functions with the high-est priority level will be the last ones re-maining active.In this operating mode the DSTATCOMshows excellent dynamic behavior. Withinonly a few network periods, the systemwill reach the setpoint value. Operating var-iant 1 is used for: Absorption of Harmonics

A maximum of 4 harmonics up to the13th order, e.g. 5, 7, 11 and 13, are com-pensated. The remaining residual currentcan be adjusted. This option avoids ex-cessive system load, since the increas-ing effect of correction causes a declinein the internal resistance for the corre-sponding frequency. In return, the load-caused current will considerably increaseand with it the losses, which might re-sult in a system overload. Therefore, it isreasonable to correct the harmonics onlyup to the limit specified by the supplier.

Reactive Power CompensationReactive power compensation, i.e. cor-rection of the power factor, is possiblefor both inductive and capacitive loads.The continuous control principle avoidsswitching peaks and deviations whichmight occur when switching from onestep to the next.

Correction of Unbalanced LoadLoads in single and two-phase connec-tion cause voltage imbalance in thethree-phase system which may alsohave negative effects on other consum-ers. Especially three-phase motors maythen be exposed to overheat.An active load can be symmetrized bymeans of a Steinmetz compensator.While this compensator can correct onlyconstant loads, the SIPCOM is capableof adjusting its correction dynamically tothe load, even if this load is changingquickly.

Three-phasesystem

L1

L2

L3

Activeload

Applications of Variant 2

Variable loads require an even quicker reac-tion than can be realized with variant 1.Therefore, variant 2 has been optimized insuch a way as to enable reactive powercompensation and load balancing withinthe shortest time. Possible applications ofthis variant are: Reduction of flickers

Heavy load surges as occurring, for ex-ample, in welding machines, presses orduring the startup of drives, may causevoltage line drops. Fluorescent lampsreact to these voltage drops with varia-tions in their brightness, called flickers.The reactive components of the loadcurrent have usually a greater effect inthis case. The DSTATCOM can be oper-ated in the flicker mode which providesan optimized reaction within the shortesttime in order to reduce these voltagevariations to a large extent. The delaytime of the system is only 1/60 of theperiod length and control is completedwithin one network period.

Correction of unbalanced load conditionsThe DSTATCOM is suitable to fully cor-rect unbalanced loads of the three phas-es. Until now, this was achieved withthe help of stepwise controlled inductorsand capacitors, but now correction canbe performed continuously and veryprecisely. The quick reaction of theDSTATCOM in the flicker mode enablescontrol within only one network period.Consumers in single or two-phase con-nection, such as welding devices, willno longer affect symmetry.



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

The whole nominal current of the DSTATCOM can beused for the filtering of harmonics.Reactive power compensation and load balancing canalso be performed.This function should be used if the device is mainly usedfor the filtering of harmonics

Only 50% of the DSTATCOM nominal current is usedfor the filtering of harmonics.The remaining current can be used for reactive powercompensation and load balancing.

Instead of harmonics filtering, the whole nominal currentis used to perform highly dynamic reactive powercompensation and load balancing.Compared with other control variants, the dynamicbehavior is many times better.

100% use for the filteringof harmonics

50% use for the filteringof harmonics

Flicker mode

Requirednominal current

The required nominal current for the DSTATCOM iscalculated as the geometrical sum of the required partialcurrents according to the following formula:

Control rangeDSTATCOM

Net-work

Load

SIPCONDSTATCOM

Permanentcompensation

Control rangeof a DSTATCOMwith permanentcompensation

2 x capacitive

capacitive

inductive

Fig. 280: Application modes of DSTATCOM

Fig. 281: Displaced control range


When selecting a DSTATCOM, three as-pects should be considered:1. The nominal voltage.

Nominal voltages of 400 V, 525 V, 690 Vand for medium-voltage applications upto 20 kV.

2. The supply current ISN required by theDSTATCOM.

3. The type of application.Application can be broken down intothree types of different tasks (Fig. 280).

I1 = Reactive component ofthe fundamental current component

I5…I13 = Current harmonics

ISN

= √ I12+ I

52+ I

72+ I

112+ I

132


SIPCON can be used for the generation ofeither capacitive or inductive reactive cur-rent. Since the latter can usually be neglect-ed as regards reactive power compensa-tion, the working point of the DSTATCOMcan be displaced by means of fixed com-pensation with the help of traditional com-pensation (SIPCON T). The power of theDSTATCOM can thus be almost doubled.(Fig. 281).


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

LoadNet-work

IGBT converter LCL filter

The DVR Compensation Equipment

The DVR unit is used to correct interferinginfluences from the supply network on theconsumer. Short-time and even longer volt-age dips, harmonics and unbalanced loadmay cause considerable damage to sensi-tive consumers. The DVR has been de-signed for the compensation of such faultsin order to improve the quality in powersupply and to prevent production loss anddamage.

Function Principle

The DVR is used as a voltage sourcewhich is integrated in the feeder line be-tween the supply system and the consum-er in series connection. The voltage ap-plied to the consumer is measured and if itdeviates from the ideal values, the missingcomponents will be injected, so that theconsumer voltage remains constant. Apartfrom the prevention of voltage dips, theDVR is also used to correct overvoltagesand unsymmetries. The highly dynamicsystem is capable of realizing the full com-pensation of voltage dips within a period of2 to 3 milliseconds.

Voltage dipsVoltage overshootsHarmonicsImbalance

LoadNet-work

Fig. 282: Improving the quality in power supply Fig. 283: Block diagram – DVR



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


In contrast to the principle of SIPCONDSTATCOM, which corrects the reactivepower only for the parallel-connected load,the whole load current flows through theDVR system. Therefore, all preconditionsand marginal conditions are to be consid-ered to enable correct configuration. Basi-cally, the following points should be takeninto account: Fault characteristics:

What kind of network faults are to becorrected (single, two or three-phase)and up to which residual voltage valueand fault duration shall correction be-come effective.

Load:Nominal value of the apparent power,type of load, e.g. what types of drive,resistance load, etc. are to be suppliedwith the help of the DVR.

Corrective behavior:What degree of accuracy is to be ob-served for the voltage on the load side.

It will often be sufficient if the DVR sup-plies only part of the nominal load. To en-sure correct project planning, a Siemensexpert should be consulted.

The signals from audio frequency ripplecontrol systems are not affected. An audiofrequency hold-off is not required.

Application

The DVR is basically used to improve thequality of the voltage supplied by the pow-er supply system. Correction of voltage variations

Remote short-circuits in the supply net-work occasionally result in voltage dipsof different strength and of a duration ofonly few tenths of a second. In weaknetworks it may also occur that the usu-al voltage limits cannot be held over along period of time or that sensitive con-sumers require smaller tolerances thanoffered by the power supply company.With the DVR, single, two and three-phase voltage dips up to a certain inten-sity can be compensated independentlyof their duration. Additional power is tak-en from the rectifier part from the net-work, even if the voltage is too low; thispower is then supplied to the seriestransformer on the load side via the con-verter. The value of the nominal powerof the DVR is reciprocal to the voltagesto be corrected. Statistics show thatmost of the short-time voltage dips havea residual voltage of at least 70 to 80%.The power to be generated by the DVRmust be sufficient to compensate themissing part.

Compensation of unbalanced loadThe DVR can be used to inject a positivephase-sequence voltage which enablesthe compensation of imbalance in thesupply voltage in order to avoid exces-sive temperatures of three-phase ma-chines.

Absorption of harmonicsThe quick-action control of the DVR ena-bles elimination of harmonics by correct-ing distortions of the voltage waveshape.Since the system can be configured fordifferent tasks, it can also be used toprocess harmonics of the fifth, seventh,eleventh and thirteenth order, either sep-arately or as a whole.

Further information:

www.powerquality.de



1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Contents Page

Energy Management Solutions

Introduction ....................................... 7/2

SINAUT Spectrum ........................... 7/2

EMS from Siemens –a key to success .............................. 7/3

Available Services ........................... 7/3

Integrated IT Solutionsfor Utilities ........................................ 7/4

Power Network Telecommunication

Introduction ....................................... 7/5

Power Line Carrier .......................... 7/6

Fibre Optic Communication ......... 7/13

7

Power Systems Control and

Energy Management

Power Systems Control and

Energy Management


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Introduction

Energy market liberalization is changing theworld of energy companies. Deregulationof the energy sector is going ahead through-out many countries. The focal point ofenergy company business used to be onthe technical side with emphasis on supplyreliability and cost minimization, but thebusiness side with competition and optimi-zation of earnings will be the most impor-tant aspect in future. More intensive andefficient use of information systems is themeans to the company’s success.Deregulation of the energy market placesnew demands on the network control cen-ters of energy companies. New tasks haveto be handled in addition to adapting suchtraditional activities as network supervisionand control, network analysis and optimiza-tion, generation control and scheduling anddistribution management.Siemens is in a position to deliver optimum,state-of-the-art solutions in close coopera-tion with the customers.As technological pacemaker Siemens in-vests considerable funds annually in thefurther development of its products.Planned for the long term, the user-orientedproduct lines have release compatibility toguarantee that the benefits of tomorrow’sR&D investments can still be adopted bysystems delivered today.Siemens furthers this strategy by partici-pating in a variety of IEC, IEEE, EPRI,CIGRE and CIRED committees and by en-listing support from active user groups.The quality management certified by DQSaccording ISO 9001 ensures quality prod-ucts and a smooth and reliable project im-plementation within contractual scheduleand budget.Siemens has a large support staff of dedi-cated experts with power industry experi-ence.With its broad range of products Siemensis able to supply the control systems, allnecessary components (communicationequipment, control room equipment, unin-terruptible power supplies, products forderegulated energy markets, etc.) from onesupplier on a turnkey basis.

The following is a short overview of oursystems and services.

Please find detailed information in theinternet under:

www.ev.siemens.de/en/powersystems-control

SINAUT Spectrum

General

SINAUT Spectrum® is the open, modularand distributed control system for electricalnetworks as well as for gas, water and re-mote heating networks. It reflects the ex-perience of more than 600 electricity net-work control systems installed worldwidesince the early sixties.Its extensive and modular functionality pro-vides scalable solutions tailored to theneeds and budgets of: Municipalities Large industries with their own networks Regional distribution companies National and regional generation and

transmission companies Traction power supply networks

Open architecture

SINAUT Spectrum is solidly based on in-dustry standards. Therefore the systemcan be upgraded to take advantage of therapidly moving technology in the IT market,without losing any of the software invest-ment built up over the years.

Modular and distributed architecture

Each SINAUT Spectrum system consistsof individual functional subsystems whichare distributed among an optimum numberof servers. Shortest reaction times areachieved by assigning time-critical applica-tions and applications requiring a lot ofcomputational power to dedicated servers.

Fig. 1: Network Control System SINAUT Spectrum at VEW Energie AG, Bochum, Germany

Expandability

SINAUT Spectrum consists of self-con-tained subsystems that intercommunicatevia defined interfaces. This modularitymakes it possible to combine subsystemsfor a specific application. Via a flexible sys-tem configuration control center functionscan be adapted to customer-specific re-quirements.The demands on network control systemskeep on growing as secure and economicenergy management is becoming evermore important.To expand or modify the system it is easyto replace modules or add further moduleswithout a time-consuming and high costredesign. Due to its modular and distribut-ed system architecture SINAUT Spectrumoffers unlimited horizontal and verticalgrowth opportunities, e.g. from a small en-try-level SCADA system up to a large EMSor combined SCADA/EMS/DMS.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Energy Management Solutionsfrom Siemens –a key to success

Network control centers have to operateeconomically and efficiently over long peri-ods. Therefore Siemens is committed to: Designing systems that can incorporate

new standards and technologies overtime to keep the system current

Avoiding dependence on proprietarytools and methods

Using accepted and de facto standards Meeting the growing need for informa-

tion management throughout an energycompany

The long-term commitments also include: A full product spectrum Complete turnkey projects Complete spectrum of services Active user groups Strong R&D

Fig. 2: Control Center of Stadtwerke Frankenthal, Germany

Available services

Siemens offers services for all importantareas: Consulting Studies Planning, engineering Project implementation Installation, supervision of installation Commissioning Training Hardware/software maintenance System upgrading System migration IT system integration Control center design

Functionality

The state-of-the-art functions of SINAUTSpectrum cover the entire performancerange of dispatch centers, district controlcenters, distribution network control cent-ers and combined control centers formunicipalities (for more than one type ofpower) and for suppliers on the deregulatedenergy market (GenCos, TransCos, DisCos).The functional packages inSINAUT Spectrum:

Flexible, fast and uncomplicatedSource Data Management

Clear and easy to use User Inter-face

Data acquisition and preprocessingby Telecontrol Interfaces with dis-tributed system architecture for flex-ible and redundant configurations

Full range of SCADA and enhancedSCADA functions

Storing, archiving and subsequentreconstruction of the process datawith the Historical InformationSystem

Communication applications fordata exchange with other systemsvia various interfaces

Multisite operation of control cent-ers for configuring flexible and dy-namic system management in multi-site systems

Optimum distribution of generatorpower and cost optimized control ofthe power plants on the networkwith Power applications

Optimization of operation withScheduling applications for fore-casting the system load and plan-ning

Fast and comprehensive analysisand optimization of the current net-work status with Network applica-tions

Training Simulator for practicalexercises with a realistic networkbehavior using set scenarios

Distribution Management applica-tions for efficient and economicaloperation of the distribution networks

Demand Side Management, e.g.energy demand control for optimalutilization of the energy supply con-tracts

Deregulation applications for opti-mizing productivity and profitabilityfor energy companies in deregulatedmarkets


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Fig. 3: Utilities in deregulated markets

Transmission DistributionGeneration Retail

Energy companies in deregulated markets

CustomerManage-ment

Informationflow

Integrated and process oriented information flowIT integration, workflow management, data management

Processorientation Analysis and optimization of business processes

Reengi-neering ProcessesStrategy Technology Employee

Segmen-tation

RetailTrading

NetworkManage-ment

WholesaleTrading

GenerationManage-ment

Integrated IT Solutions for Energy Companies

Integrated IT Solutions forEnergy Companies

Competition due to the deregulation of theenergy markets and the privatization of theenergy sector in a number of countriesforce the energy companies worldwide toincrease productivity and profitability. Tobecome faster, flexible and more produc-tive, energy companies have to reengineerand improve their business processes.Support of the business processes by inte-grated IT solutions improves the competi-tive position of the energy companies.Siemens is in a unique position in theenergy company IT market by coveringsolutions for all IT needs of our customerswithin one company: network manage-ment, generation management, energytrading and the meter related part of cus-tomer management, business operationsystems (e.g. SAP, Baan), customer infor-mation & billing solutions and call center aswell as general IT solutions.Combination, parameterization and inter-facing of newly implemented and existingproducts and systems is our goal.Within the whole area of energy and infor-mation management, Siemens provides aunique framework of services and IT solu-tions for energy companies.Seminars and workshops in all areas, fromgeneration scheduling, energy planningover GIS integration up to risk manage-ment for energy trading help our custom-ers to empower their employees and tostreamline their business. In the area ofconsulting we help to engineer and justifythe business processes as well as designand implement customer-specific energytrading solutions. Our implementation ofproducts and systems fills the gap betweenfinancial enterprise resource planning(ERP) systems, customer relation manage-ment systems and technical control or in-formation systems.We offer a whole suit of consulting andIT services together with products and sys-tems as complete IT solutions to enable theenergy companies to serve their customersbest.


Fax: ++49-911-433-8122and visit our homepage under:www.ev.siemens.de

CustomerManagement

Billing

Meter Ma-nagement

Meter

CustomerInformation

CallCenter

Energy Trading

Communi-cation

EnergyTrading

SalesForecast

Generation Management

SchedulingApplications

PowerApplications

PlantControl

PlantOperations

NetworkManagement

Sales &Marketing

Archive(EDM)

Mainten-ance

Crew Ma-nagementOutage Ma-nagement

RemoteTerminalUnit

SCADA/EMS/DMS

Geographical In-formation System

Facilities Ma-nagement

NetworkPlanning

BusinessPlanning

Purchasing& Supply

Finance &Control

HumanResources

Contract& Risk Ma-nagement

Business Operations

Data Ware-houseWorkflow

Manage-ment

Fig. 4: IT systems in a utility


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

AKEPLCCCCVTSWT F6FWTESBHicomSWT 2 DMUXLFHO.F.

Coupling unitPower line carrier communicationCoupling capacitorCapacitive voltage transformerTeleprotection signaling system for analog transmission linksTelecontrol – and data transmission systemPower line carrier systemISDN telephone systemTeleprotection signaling system for digital transmission linksMultiplex systemFiber optic transmission systemOptical fiber cable

AKE

Distance protection

50 ... 2400 Bd

64 kbit/s

Hicom

Line trap

CC or CVT

SWT F6

FWT

ESB

SWT D

LFH

MUX

Dig. currentcomparison anddistance protection

Data50 Bd ... n x 64 kbit/s

Speech

up to 500 km

O.F.

PLC


Introduction

Safe, reliable and economical energysupply is also a matter of fast, efficientand reliable transmission of informationand data.International operation, automation andcomputer-controlled optimization of net-work operations, as well as changing com-munications requirements and the rapidprogress in technology have considerablyincreased the demands placed on systemsand components of communications net-works.The same careful planning and organizingof communications networks are as neces-sary in the power industry as for the gener-ation and distribution of energy itself.Siemens offers a wide range of systemsand network elements specifically de-signed to solve communications problemsin this area.All systems and network elements areadapted to one another in such a way thatthe power industry’s future communica-tions requirements can be satisfied opti-mally both technically and economically.Siemens is offering advice, planning,production, delivery, installation, operationand training – one source for the customer.Siemens provides expertise and commit-ment as the complexity of the problemrequires.Put your trust in the extensive know-howof our specialists and in the solidity of theinternationally proven Siemens communi-cations systems.

Flexible network configurationwith communications systems andnetwork elements

The gradual transition from analog to digitalinformation networks in the power industryand other privately operated networks re-quires a great variety of systems and net-work elements for widely differing uses.Prior to a decision as to which systemcould be used for the best technical andeconomical solution, it is first necessary toclarify such requirements as quantity ofspeech, data and teleprotection channelsto be transmitted, length of transmissionlink, existing transmission media, infra-structure, reliability, etc.Depending on those clarifications the mostcost-efficient and best technical solutioncan be chosen.

As shown in the block diagram below,we are offering systems and networkelements for analog transmission as wellas systems for digital transmission.The systems and network elementsshown in this survey of products havebeen specially developed for power in-dustry applications and therefore fulfillthe requirements with regard to qualityand workmanship as well as reliabilityand security.

Fig. 5: General overview

All systems and network elements de-scribed meet the relevant internationalrecommendations and are designed, devel-oped and manufactured in accordance withthe requirements of the quality systemsof DIN EN ISO 9001.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


A: Phase-to-groundcoupling

B: Phase-to-phasecoupling

C: Intersystemcoupling

PLC SystemAKE 100

CC or CVTLine trap

PLC SystemAKE 100

CC or CVTLine trap

PLC System

AKE 100

CC or CVTLine trap Line trap

CC orCVT

AKE 100HF hybrid

Coupling mode Costs

Minimum

Twice than A

Twice than A

A: Phase-to-ground coupling

B: Phase-to-phase coupling

C: Intersystem coupling

Attenuation Reliability

Greater than B&C

Minimum

Greater than B

Minimum

Greater than A

Maximum

1 Conduit with weather-resistantPLC cable screw connectionTerminal for coupling capacitorGrounding switch withswitch-rod eyeMain ground connectionExternal shock hazard protection1 or 2-pole coarse voltage arresterDrain and tuning coilIsolating capacitorIsolating transformerResistor for phase-to-phase coupling(balancing resistor)Gas-type surge arrester(optional extra)PLC cable terminalsHF hybrid transformer

23

456789

10

11

1213

Fig. 7: Coupling modes

Fig. 8: Comparison of the coupling modes

Fig. 6: AKE 100 coupling unit with built-in HF hybrid transformer

Power Line Carrier (PLC)Communication

AKE 100 coupling unit

For carrier frequency communication viapower lines or via communication circuitssubject to interference from power lines,the high-frequency currents from and tothe PLC terminals must be fed into ortapped from the lines at chosen pointswithout the operating personnel or PLCterminals being exposed to a high-voltagehazard.The PLC terminals are connected to thepower line via coupling capacitors or viacapacitive voltage transformers and thecoupling unit. In order to prevent the PLCcurrents from flowing to the power switch-gear or in other undesired directions (e. g.spur lines), traps (coils) are used, which arerated for the operating and short-circuitcurrents of the power installation andwhich involve no significant loss for thepower distribution system.The AKE 100 coupling unit describedhere, together with a high-voltage couplingcapacitor, forms a high-pass filter for therequired carrier frequencies, whose lowercut-off frequency is determined by the rat-ing of coupling capacitor and the chosenmatching ratio.The AKE 100 coupling unit is supplied infour versions and is used for: Phase-to-ground

coupling to overhead power lines Phase-to-phase

coupling to overhead power lines Phase-to-ground

coupling to power cables Phase-to-phase coupling to power cables Intersystem coupling with two

phase-to-ground coupling unitsThe coupling units for phase-to-phasecoupling are adaptable for use as phase-to-ground coupling units. The versions forphase-to-ground coupling can be retrofittedfor phase-to-phase coupling or can be usedfor intersystem coupling.

13

1112

9

110

87

6

2

4 35


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


ESB 2000i power line carrier system

PAX/PABX

Communi-cationsysteme. g. Hicom

PAX/PABX

2/4-wireE&M

Protectionrelay

Data

Powersystemcontrol

DATA

SPEECH

MUX

PMX

DEE

So

Distance protection

Data V.28 up to2400 Bd or via MODEM

SDHPDH

Data V.28up to 2400 Bd

SWT 2000 F6

Modem, ≤ 19,2 kbits/s

FWT 2000i

Line trap

Couplingcapacitor

Couplingunit

ESB 2000i

Service PC

64 kbit/s

64 kbit/s

Remotesubscriber

Servicetelephone

Fig. 9: ESB 2000i power line carrier system


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


---

---Digitalsignalprocessing

Interface-modules

Modulation

Demodulation

Poweramplifier

Receiveselection

Central control

Fig. 10: ESB 2000i functional units

Fig. 11: ESB 2000i PLC System with 40 W amplifier

ESB 2000i power line carrier system

Modern PLC systems must not only takeinto account the specific characteristics ofthe high-voltage line but must guaranteefirst and foremost that they will be eco-nomically and technically usable in futuredigital networks.The ESB 2000i digital PLC system meetsthese requirements through State-of-the-art digital signal processor

technology (DSP) User-oriented service features, e. g.

– automatic line equalization– automatic frequency control (AFC)– remote supervision/maintenance– programming of parameters by PC

Integration of data transmission systems(channel circuits KS 2000 and KS 2000i)

Digital interfaces for transmission upto 64 kbit/s

Integration of Teleprotection SignallingSystem SWT2000F6

Use of the ESB 2000i PLC system alsoenables the full advantages of digital trans-mission to be exploited when employingthe high-voltage line as a transmission me-dium. The ESB 2000i PLC system also sat-isfies economic requirements such as lowinvestment costs, reduction of expenditurefor maintenance and service and technicalrequirements with respect to security,availability and reliability.

Application

The ESB 2000i PLC system permits carriertransmission of speech, fax, data, tele-control and teleprotection signals in thefrequency range from 24 kHz to 500 kHzvia: Overhead power lines and Cablesin high- and medium-voltage systems.The information is transmitted using thesingle-sideband (SSB) method with sup-pressed carrier. This method permits: Large ranges due to maximum utiliza-

tion of the transmitter energy for signaltransmission

The smallest possible bandwidth andtherefore optimum utilization of thespectrum space of the frequency rangepermitted for the transmission

Improved privacy due to carriersuppression


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 13: Transmission rates of the digital interface of the PLC system according to the available bandwidth

Fig. 12: Basic diagram of the ESB 2000i PLC System for digital transmission

ESB 2000i

DigitalinterfaceX.21/V.11

SSB-modulator/demodula-tor

PLC lineunit

Service channel

Servicetelephone

Service PCnetwork management

Digitaltrans-missionfrom 9.6to 64 kbit/s

HF-bandwidth2.5 to8 kHz

Central processor

19.2 kbit/s

32 kbit/s

40 kbit/s

64 kbit/s

Bandwidth 2.5 kHz

Bandwidth 4 (3.75) kHz

Bandwidth 5 kHz

Bandwidth 8 (7.5) kHz

Note:A service channel forremote maintenance andfor service telephone isprovided in addition to theabove nominal bit rates.

Digital PLC-System ESB 2000ifor information transmissionup to 64 kbit/s

Increased transmission capacity

In comparison to a PLC System withanalog interfaces, the digital PLC Systemcombined with an external multiplexsystem can transmit a multiple of voiceand data channels.Using the Multiplex System PMX 2000with voice compression at 4.8 kbit/s, up to12 voice channels can be transmitted at anaggregate bitstream of 64 kbit/s.Compared with analog PLC Systems amaximum of 2 voice channels can betransmitted.

Digital PLC System ESB 2000Interlink between digital networks in PDHand SDH design and PLC Networks

With the international standardized inter-face X.21 acc. to ITU-T, the PLC Systemcan be connected to a primary multiplexer,e.g. FMX (Flexible Multiplex System).On the transmission side the information isconnected via optical or electrical 2 Mbits/sinterfaces to the PDH or SDH network.

PLC links as integrated part of digitalcommunication networks

Transmission capacity, available interfacesand data rate are significant factors for theselection of systems to be used in moderncommunication networks.The PLC System ESB 2000i with digitalinterface together with the Muliplex Sys-tem PMX 2000, meets the requirements interms of transmission capacity, interfacesand fast data transmission for a wide rangeof applications.

Digital PLC System ESB 2000i withadd/drop facility

The digital PLC System ESB 2000i incombination with the Multiplex SystemPMX 2000 provides the add/drop functionfor insertion and drop-out of voice and datachannels in intermediate stations.

Networking of digital voice communicationsystems (e.g. Hicom) with ISDN basicaccess So

Networking of voice communication sys-tems via So-interface, e.g. 2 voice chan-nels with 64 kbits/s and 1 service channelwith 64 kbits/s (2B+D), can be utilized withthe PLC System ESB 2000i equipped withdigital interface together with a multiplexsystem that provides the So-interface andsuitable voice compression method.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 14: SWT 2000 F6 teleprotection signal transmission system (stand-alone version)

IF 4

IF 4M

CLE

OMA

Distanceprotection

Electrical lineconnection

Annunciations

PU

Optical lineconnection

PS

Alarms24 ... 60 V dc110/220 V dc/acService PC

SWT 2000 F6 protection signalingsystem for analog transmission links

The task of power system protectionequipment in the event of faults in high-voltage installations is to selectively dis-connect the defective part of the systemwithin the shortest possible time. In viewof constantly increasing power plant capac-ities and the ever closer meshing of high-voltage networks, superlative demands areplaced on power network protection sys-tems in terms of reliability and availability.Network protection systems featuring ab-solute selectivity therefore need secureand high-speed transmission systems forthe exchange of information between theindividual substations.The SWT 2000 system for transmission ofprotection commands provides optimumsecurity and reliability while simultaneouslyoffering the shortest possible transmissiontime.

Application

The SWT 2000 F6 system is for fast andreliable transmission of one or more pro-tection commands and / or special switch-ing functions in power networks. Protection

– Protection commands can be trans-mitted for the protection of twothree-phase systems or one three-phase system with individual-phaseprotection.

– High-voltage circuit-breakers can beactuated either in conjunction withselective protection relays or directly.

Special switching functions– When the system is used for special

switching functions, it is possible totransmit four signals. Each signal isassigned a priority.

Transmission paths

Depending on the type of supply network,the following transmission paths can beutilized: High and medium-voltage overhead lines High and medium-voltage cables Aerial and buried cables Radio relay links

Fig. 15: Block diagram of the SWT 2000 F6


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 16: FWT 2000i telecontrol and data transmission system

FWT 2000i telecontrol and data trans-mission system for analog/digital trans-mission links

In all areas related to the telemonitoring ofsystems, automation technology and thecontrol of decentralized equipment, it mustbe possible to transmit signals and meas-ured values economically and reliably.The new FWT 2000i System for telecontroland data transmission can be flexibly usedto perform the various transmission tasksinvolved in system management not onlyin public utilities, railway companies andrefineries, but also in the areas of environ-mental protection and civil defense, aswell as in hydrographic and meteorologicalservices.The following characteristics of theFWT 2000i system make it suitable formeeting users’ special requirements: Safe operating method around

high-voltage systems High degree of reliability and safety Short process cycle times Easy handling Economical useThe FWT 2000i system offers a variety ofmodules for the widest possible range oftransmission tasks. Thanks to the unlimit-ed equipping options of the frame, virtuallyall system variants necessary for operationcan be implemented on a customer-spe-cific basis.

Universal for all frequenciesand transmission rates up to 2400 Bd

The KS 2000i channel unit accommodatesa transmitter and receiver assembly. Alltransmission rates from 50 to 2400 Bd canbe set in all frequencies within the 30 Hzraster, including in the frequency raster toITU-T.

Transmission in the superimposedfrequency band

The FWT 2000i System permits transmis-sion in the frequency range from 300 to7200 Hz.

Modularity

The modularity of the KS 2000i channelunit is typified by its integration in variousother systems, i.e. its use is not limited tothe FWT 2000i system.For instance, the channel unit can beintegrated in: The ESB 2000i PLC system The SWT 2000 F6 protection signaling

system Telecontrol systems.

Transmitter and receiveras separate modules

Separate modules that function only asa receiver or only as a transmitter are avail-able for this operating method.

Flexibility

By using additional modules the systemcan be extended for alternative pathswitching or transmission of the controlfrequencies of a multistation controlsystem.

Fast and easy fault localization

A variety of supervisory facilities andautomatic fault signaling systems ensureoptimum operation and fault-free trans-mission of data.

Transmission media

Suitable transmission media are under-ground cables, grounding conductor aerialcables, aerial cables on crossarms ofpower line towers, PLC/carrier frequencychannels via power lines, carrier links,PCM links and Telecom-owned currentpaths.The overall concept of the FWT 2000i sys-tem meets the stringent demands placedon power supply and distribution networks.The FWT 2000i meets the special require-ments with regard to reliable operation andelectromagnetic compatibility.

Additional benefits

In addition to the system features, theFWT 2000i system provides all users withthe cost-effective and technical benefitsexpected and required when this systemis used. Economical stocking of spare parts

is possible since, from now on, onlyone module is needed for all rates andfrequencies.

The system can be placed in servicequickly and easily thanks to automaticlevel adjustment and automatic com-pensation of distortion.

The use of state-of-the-art digital proces-sors and components ensures that thesystem will have a long service life anda high rate of availability.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 17: KS 2000i channel unit

KS 2000i channel unit

The new KS 2000i channel unit is suitablefor transmission of asynchronous or trans-parent data channels on analog media andas such forms a complete and versatileVFT modem.Both transmitter and receiver are acco-modated on only one plug-in card eitherto be used as a stand-alone unit (separateframe) or to be integrated in an ESB 2000iPLC terminal or in a remote terminal unit(RTU).Frequency shift as well as transmissionspeed are independently adjustable.With a maximum transmission speed ofup to 2400 Bd the VFT channel approachesapplications traditionally realized with high-speed modems only.Beside others the KS 2000i channel unitprovides the following features: High reliability High flexibility Easy detection of faults Excellent transmission characteristics


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fiber optic communication

4 x 2 Mbit/s

The LFH 2000 systemTelecommunication requirements in power utilities

34 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

34 Mbit/s

4 x 2 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

OLE 2

SWT

MUX

ODF

MDF

PABX LSA

4 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s 4 x 2 Mbit/s34 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

34Mbit/s

OLE 34

OLE 34

MUX/CC

DSMX

OLE 8

MUX/CC

SWT

ODF

ODF

MDF

PABX PABX

Energymanagement

system

Communi-cations networkmanagement center

LWL

Office

Communications room

LAN

Protection

Electrical link (CU)Fiber-optic link

Fig. 18: The LFH 2000 fiber optic transmission system – Telecommunication requirements in power utilities


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

DPU IF 4orOM

IF 4orOM

PS

Alarmandeventre-corder

OFC(Fiber-opticcables)

Distanceprotectionordigital currentcomparison

ServicetelephoneST-A orST-B

AUX orAUX 1+1 orAUX BUS

Tele-controlsystem

PABX

TRCV 2 orTRCV 8 orTRCV 34

O.F.

TRCV 2 orTRCV 8 orTRCV 34

O.F.

DPU

IF4

OM

PS

ST-A

ST-B

AUX

AUX 1+1

AUXBUS

TRCV

O.F.

Digital processor unit

Interface module fordistance protection relays

Optomodule for connectionof digital current comparisonprotection system

Power supply

Module for service tele-phone with DTMF signaling

Module for nondialingservice telephone

Service channel unit

Service channel unit withprotection switching

Bus channel unit

Optical transceiver

Optical fiber


Fig. 19: LFH 2000 fiber optic transmission system

LFH 2000 fiber optictransmission system

Flexible network configuration and futurecommunications requirements of privatenetwork users, such as power companies,call for universal network elements fortransmission in digital communications net-works.LFH 2000 has been designed and devel-oped on the basis of extensive experiencegained with fiber optic transmission sys-tems in public networks and transmissionelements specially developed for such sys-tems. It was tailored to the needs of pow-er companies and other private networkusers.In its basic version LFH 2000 consists ofa 19-inch subrack equipped with an opticalline terminating unit TRCV2 and a servicechannel module. Even in its simplest con-figuration, LFH 2000 offers various typesof interfaces for the transmission ofspeech and data channels such as: Line interfaces up to 34 Mbit/s So-interface for networking digital

telephone systems (e.g. Hicom) QD 2-interface for network manage-

ment

The incorporation of the SWT 2000 D digit-al protection data system provides addi-tional functions required for most applica-tions in power companies.The basic version can be optionallyequipped with service telephone units,optical line terminating units with highertransmission speeds or with other servicechannel modules so that the system canbe conveniently adapted to the individualtransmission requirements.Further network elements may be con-nected to LFH 2000 via internationallystandardized interfaces if the number ofrequired channels and the types of inter-faces, i.e. the capacity of the system,have to be extended.Depending on the number and type of thetransmission interfaces required, LFH 2000can be expanded by connecting flexiblemultiplex systems.

LFH 2000 is provided with internationallystandardized interfaces so that transmis-sion systems of other manufacturerswhich are also equipped with internation-ally standardized interfaces can communi-cate with LFH 2000. This also makes itpossible to combine LFH 2000 with digitaltransmission system of other manufactur-ers.The incorporation of LFH 2000 with theexpansion element (e.g. flexible multiplexsystem) into a network hierarchy withdiffering transmission rates as currentlyplanned and implemented by private net-work operator can be easily achievedusing the compatible network elementsavailable today.The call for a user-friendly network man-agement can be fulfilled by adding therequired hardware and software.LFH 2000 meets the requirements of thepower companies and private networkoperators due to its flexibility, availabilityof internationally standardized interfacesand compatibility with regard to its incor-poration into existing private networks.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 21: Block diagram SWT 2000 D

1300 nm1500 nm

IF 4

Alarms24 ... 60 V dc110/220 V dc/acService PC

Digitallongitudinaldifferentialprotection(7SD51)

Distanceprotection

O.F.820 nm

n x 64 kbit/s

X.21/V.11G.703

TRCV

OM

O.F.

O.F.

Alter-nativeroute

PCM 2 Mbit/s 40/60 V dc

IF 4

PS

DPU

SWT 2000 D protection signalingsystem for digital communication links

In comparison with analog protectionsignaling, the use of digital transmissionlinks provides noise-free communication.Switching operations, atmospheric condi-tions and other sources of interferenceon power lines do not impair secure andreliable transmission of protection signals.The SWT 2000 D system for the transmis-sion of protection signals on digital trans-mission links, mainly fiber optics, providesoptimum security and reliability whilesimultaneously offering the quickest possi-ble transmission speed.

Uses

The SWT 2000 D system is used for fastand secure transmission of one or severalindependent binary signals for protectionand special switching functions in powernetworks and/or the transmission of serialprotection data.The system is avaliable in versions for thetransmission of protection data on sepa-rate fibers and on 64 kbit/s PCM channels.As an optimized solution between thesetwo possibilities, the system offers trans-mission of the protection data in the serv-ice channel of an optical line terminationsystem (e. g. OLTS, OLTE 8) which en-sures maximum independence of the pro-tection data from voice and data transmis-sion despite the common use of fibers infiber optic cables.

Applications

All types of distance protection(permissive tripping, blocking, etc.)

Direct transfer tripping Special switching functions Digital current comparison protection

(differential protection) with optical serialinterface ≤ 19.2 kBd (e. g. with 7SD511).

Features

Up to 8 parallel (binary) commands,bi-directional

Up to 2 serial protection data,bi-directional

Simultaneous transmission of serialprotection data and up to 4 binary pro-tection commands

High-performance microcontroller Permanent self-supervision Automatic loop testing Event recorder with real-time clock

(readable via hand-held terminal or PC).

Fig. 20: SWT 2000 D for flush panel mounting with integrated TRCV2 optical line equipment


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 22: FMX interfaces

ISDN Basic access unit I4SO 4 x

I4UK4 NTPI4UK4 LTP 4 x

DSC6-nx64G 6 x

DSC2-nx64 2 x

DSC8x21 8 x

DSC4V35 or DSC4V36 4 x

CUA or CUD

DSC8V24 8 x

DSC104CO 10 x

SLB62 6 x

SLX102 10 x

SUB102 10 x

SEM106 or SEM108 10 x

CUA or CUD

S0 interface

UK0 interface, 2B1Q or4B3T, NT-mode or LT-mode

n x 64 kbit /s G.703 codirectional orn x 64 kbit /s G.703 contradirectionalor centralized clock

X.21or V.24/V.28 bis(switchable)

X.21/V.11 ≤ 64 kbit/s

V.35 ≤ 64 kbit/s orV.36 ≤ 64 kbit/s

Central unit, standard,or central unit for add/drop operation

V.24/V.28 < 64 kbit/s

64 kbit /s G.703 co-directional

2-wire LB subscriber

Exchange, 2-wire

Subscriber, 2-wire

2-wire NF and 2 E&M or4-wire NF and 2 E&M

Central unit, standard,or central unit for add/drop operation

Flexible Multiplexer (FMX)

Depending on the number and type ofthe transmission interfaces required, theLFH 2000 optical fiber transmission systemcan be extended by connecting the flexiblemultiplex system (FMX).The FMX multiplexer is based on a flexibledesign which is considerably different fromnormal PCM systems. For terminal oper-ation, it contains a central unit CUA or fordrop/insert function the central unit CUDas well as the withdrawable channels.Thanks to the software-controlled configu-ration and parametrization of the multiplex-ers they can be integrated quickly andeasily into the network.The 19'' inset has sockets for two centralunits (CU, CUA, CUD), twelve channelunits, a supervision unit and two powersupply units.

User Interfaces(see Fig. 22)

The LFH 2000 System – Overview(see Fig. 23 on page 7/17)

Conclusion

The described digital and analog networkelements are, of course, only a small se-lection from the multitude of network ele-ments which Siemens has on hand for theimplementation of transmission networks.We have focused on those products whichhave been specifically developed for thetransmission of information in power utili-ties and which are indispensable for theoperation of such companies.It has also been our intention to show theuses for our products and how they can beintegrated in transmission networks withvarying network elements and networkconfigurations.The great variety of products in the fieldof digital transmission systems and thedifferent requirements of our customerswith regard to the implementation of digit-al transmission networks make customer-specific planning, advice and selection ofnetwork elements an absolute necessity.Detailed descriptions of all products canbe sent to you upon request.


Fax: ++49-89-7 22-2 44 53 or++49-89-7 22-4 19 82


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


TRCV SMUQ Service channel MUX Cross connect

V.11

Speechfour-wire+ E&M

V.28

ServicetelephoneSpeech,two-wire

V.11

Protection

Speechfour-wire+ E&M

Data RTUV.28

PABX

PLCn x 64 kbit/s

The LFH 2000 System – Overview

EMOS QD2 Networkmanagement system

EMS Energymanagement system

SDH 155/622Mbit/s

Remotesubscriber

External and/orinternal exchange

Substationcontrol andprotectionsystem

Data interfacese.g. X.21,V.24, LAN

Data and voiceof PLC links

Distance protectionor digital currentcomparisonprotection

34Mbit/s

SDH155 Mbit/s2,5 Gbit/s

4 x 2 Mbit/s

Protection

PABX

RTU

Data

4 x 2 Mbit/s

34Mbit/s

4 x 2 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

34 Mbit/s

34 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

4 x 2Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s

4 x 2Mbit/s

Fig. 23: The LFH 2000 System – Overview


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MeteringMetering

8

Contents PageGeneral ............................................... 8/2

Overview ............................................ 8/3

Electricity Meters ............................ 8/4

Gas and Heat Meters ...................... 8/6

Demand Side Management ........... 8/7

Energy Data Acquisition ................. 8/8

Payment Systems .......................... 8/10

Business & Consulting Services 8/11


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

General

The Metering Division provides support forenergy supply utilities, with particular em-phasis on network and account manage-ment.Energy meters are used for measuring theconsumption of electricity, gas, heat andwater for purposes of billing. In this regard,modern energy meters should be able tohandle differing regional tariff structures aswell as complex tariffs in industrial applica-tions.Siemens makes a decisive contributionto the increased competitiveness of theircustomers, leading to tangible improve-ments in the control of energy flows, in theacquisition and processing of meter data,in meter management and in customercommunications. Siemens Metering sup-plies integrated solutions, from energymetering to billing. From a single meterto a complete billing system.We supply tailored solutions for marketsectors as diverse as production, transport,industry, services, retail and residential.

Examples:

Making energy pay

After metering, the data is collected, the billis sent, and finally, the receipt of paymentis recorded. Siemens Metering Division im-proves efficiency by optimizing businessprocesses.

Protecting investment

The compatibility of the products and sys-tems provides for subsequent functionalenhancements. Their functionality can beadapted to emerging requirements at anytime. Take DLMS (DLMS Device LanguageMessage Specification), for example:Siemens co-developed this new commonstandard which will be the meter readingprotocol of the future.

Environmental certification

Siemens supplemented the quality man-agement system with an environmentalmanagement system. Siemens Meteringhas ISO 14001 certification.


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

Page 8/11

Page 8/10

Page 8/7 Page 8/8 Page 8/6

Page 8/4

Have a look at our Internet Home Page:www.siemet.com

Billin

g

Revenue Assurance

Energy GenerationTransport

Distribution

Retailer

Payment-System

sDemand Side Management

Energy Data AcquisitionGas- & Heat-M

eters

Elect

ricity

Met

ers

…and

we

bring the money back

Power to the Point…

CustomerNeeds

Fig. 1: Portfolio Siemens Metering

Portfolio


Metering

Technical data

Production and transmission

Commerce and light industry

Industry

Households

Payment Systems

DIN/IEC BS ANSI

Electricity meters

Introduction

For the last hundred years Siemens andLandis & Gyr have been producing high-quality electricity meters. In 1971 we werethe first manufacturer in the world to pro-duce solid-state meters, securing our posi-tion as market leader in this field as well.The latest generation of meters sets newstandards in economy and efficiency.E.g. the Dialog range is already equippedto communicate with the equipment andsystems of other manufacturers.

Area of Applications

The meters supports all applicable stand-ards worldwide and practically all applica-tions in the field of energy measurement.Fig. 7 provides an general overview aboutelectricity meters and their applications.They are used for residential, commercial,industrial, transmission and generation(grid metering) applications.

Requirements

Accurate measuring on its own is notenough. A forward-looking meter mustbe equipped for future modifications andenhancements. Meter reading is anothermajor area where energy supply processescan be considerably simplified. Here, too,Siemens offer specific solutions for reduc-ing operating costs.

Fig. 2: Landis & Gyr Dialog meter Fig. 3: Ferraris poly-phase meter 7CA54

Fig. 4: Meter for ANSI standards Fig. 5: High precision meter Z.U

Fig. 6: Siemens Meters satisfy the various standards around the world.

8_4 08.12.1999, 18:32 Uhr4


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

Siemens offers a wide range of energymeters for all fields of application. Thesetables show the main product range of theSiemens electricity meters.For further information, please refer to thecorresponding Siemens address in yourcountry. There you will be informed whetherthe required meter type is approved inyour country.

Fig. 7: OverviewElectricity meters – functions and applications

Functions

= Options

Application fields

Additionalfunctions

Interfaces

House-holds

Commer-cial, LightIndustry

Gridmetering

Technology

Measurement

Tariff

Communication

Accuracy

Ferraris

Electronic

Single-phase

Poly-phase

Direct connection

Transformer connection

Active energy

Active+reactive energy

Import

Import+export

1 or 2 rate tariff

Multi tariff

IEC 61107

DLMS

IEC 60870

Class 0.2S

Class 0.5S

Class 1.0

Class 2.0

Prepayment

RC Receiver

Optical

CS

RS232

RS485

Int. Modem

Industry


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

Gas and heat meters

Gas meters for gas suppliers

Adaptive gas meters measure with a highdegree of accuracy, their sturdy, modulardesign makes them expandable and pro-tects them against external interferenceand manipulation. They can be fitted any-where and without any wear parts.Each meter is built to provide a servicelife of around 20 years. Whatever happens,adaptive gas meters will be able to copewith even the most drastic changes. Theintegrated EN 61107 interface provides fortrouble-free data exchange, and the LCDdisplay provides for quick reading.The meters are fully compatible with pre-payment systems.

Adaptive Domestic Gas Meters

High accuracy Future proof With integral valve

Heat meters

The type ULTRAHEAT 2WR4 will providemany years of accurate and reliable service.Even small quantities can be metered andbilled with precision. Flow rates are meas-ured via a wear-free ultrasonic technologywith no moving parts. This patented systemmeans that the meter will operate reliably,regardless of flow profile, installation con-ditions and water temperature(Fig. 10 and 11).The meters are approved for use through-out Europe and fulfill the forthcoming CENrequirements by complying with EN 1434.They are system-integration ready thanksto communication units. The meters canbe upgraded at any time during service.The complete meter range offers the rightsolution for any application (Fig. 10).

Fig. 10: The complete range of heat meters

Fig. 9: Adaptive 2000 Domestic gas meter

Fig. 11: Availability of standard flow tube lengths and flow ratesFig. 8: Ultrasonic Heat Meter Ultraheat 2WR4

Nominal flow rateQN [m3/h]

T = ThreadF = Flange

Nominal PressureLength [mm]

0.75 110 T to PN25

1.50 110 T to PN25

0.75 190 T, F to PN25

1.50 190 T, F to PN25

3 190 T, F to PN25

6 260 T, F to PN40 (F)

10 300 T, F to PN40 (F)

15 270 F to PN40

25 300 F to PN40


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

Demand Side Mangement withRipple Control Systems

Applications

Ripple control allows a electricity supplyutility from control center to remotely con-trol certain consumers on the supply net-work. Consumers with energy storing ca-pabilities, such as room heating systems,hot water storage systems, air conditioningsystems or pumping stations, are particu-larly suitable for load control purposes.

Operation and background

Audio frequency pulses, which can be en-coded for all necessary switching commands,are transmitted via radio or the available lowand high voltage lines. More than 3700 ripplecontrol systems and 6 billions receiversare daily in use for several decades, at thefacilities of more than 1000 customers inapprox. 20 countries.

Components

The components of a ripple control systeminclude (Fig. 12): command units in the control center,

which issues the switching commandsand provides for operating parameterselection and control.

transmitters, which generate the audiofrequency pulses and coupling deviceswhich feed the signals into the network.

receivers to decode the ripple controlsignals in the distribution network.

Customer value

The installation of a ripple control systempays off especially quickly in the area ofload management by minimizing the costsof generation, import and distribution ofthe energy that is supplied to customers.It allows investments in energy supplyfacilities to be drastically reduced. Around7–30% of the investment required to gen-erate one megawatt of energy will producean equivalent energy saving if invested inripple control.Ripple control provides a major help fornetwork operators in observing their con-tracts with energy producers in the dereg-ulated market (optimization of load curves,observation of energy import schedules,improved utilization of supply networks).

Radio frequency ripple control

A joint venture between four major utilitiesin Germany was founded to provide radiofrequency ripple control as a service, mak-ing the advantages of ripple control availa-ble to utilities without their own transmit-ters. A central computer system and twolong-wave transmitters broadcasts custom-er signals and, at regular intervals, the exacttime and date. The transmitters and centralcomputer system operate redundantly andare controlled by the utilities via DATEX-P.

Fig. 12: Ripple Control Overview

Ripple Control Center

Radio frequency ripple control

Ripple control receiver

Ripple control Transmitter


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

Energy Data Acquisition (EDA)

Managing the energy data

To improve logistics and accounts in a de-regulate environment energy data acquisi-tion and processing is used in energy datamanagement system.The careful utilization of energy requiresmeticulous acquisition of all relevant data –and then proper interpretation. Siemenstelemetering systems help people in allsectors of energy supply and industry toutilize the available energy sparingly andselectively.

High demands on technology

Metering points form the interface betweenthe individual market players. Measuringaccuracy and long-term durability are takenfor granted. Logging of load profiles createsthe necessary clarity. Depending on thefield of application, whether in the high ormedium voltage range or in industry, differ-ent technologies are required and qualityfeatures are becoming increasingly signifi-cant.The use of cheap communication channelsplaces high demands on communicationsystems. High transfer rates, multiple pro-tocol capability and compatibility with a va-riety of media are a must. The data simplyhas to be made available for billing and eval-uation as quickly as possible.

Keeping one step ahead

Energy Data Acquisition Systems performcomplex tasks, and central stations calcu-late a wide range of values. Whether forbilling, statistics, network planning or tariffanalysis, Siemens EDA systems are availa-ble as single-user or client-server solutions.They are compatible with the equipment ofall leading manufacturers and are ready tomeet the challenges of the future.

EDA Product Overview Components

Measuring, Metering

Electronic Polyphase Meters Polyphase Ferraris Meters Electronic High-Precision Polyphase

Meters

Local Data Processing and Control

Encoders Universal Telemetering Devices Metcom Modems

Communication

Communication sets with VFT Channels

Central Stations and Software

Landis & Gyr® DG C300/ C2000

Measuring metering

Local data processing/control

Communication

Central station

Data post – processing

Fig. 13: Siemens EDA systems for billing statistics,network planning, tariff analysis etc.

Fig. 14: Overview Energy Data Acquisition

Multi-functional, electronic polyphasemeters (series ZMB)

Electromechanical polyphase meters(type MM 2000)

Electronic combimeters with housings for sur-face (type Z.U/Z.W) mounting or chassis for19" rack mounting

Hand-held terminal for meter reading andripple-control receiver programming

Encoder (type FBC) Universal telemetering device (type FAG) Tariff device (type EKM640) Ripple-Control Receiver METCOM modems

Communication sets with VFT channelsand modems

DG C300/C500/C2000

EDP – Electronic Data Processing


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

Production and transmission Manufacturing industry Light industry and service

FAG

System platform

FBC Datacard EKM

Metcom

Communication

Z.U/Z.W

EDP

Fig. 15: High-Precision Polyphase Meters and Univer-sal Telemetering device Landis & Gyr FAG

Fig. 16: ZMB Polyphase Meterswith Metcom Modem

Fig. 17: Central station analyses and displays the col-lected data in graphic or numeric form


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

Our solutions for different applications

Keypad Solution Smart Card Solution

Simple vending of energy withminimal infrastructure

Secure currency and tariff transfer

Capable of vending energy over theinternet or from call centre

Control of cash flow and bad debt

Comprehensive management of the amountof customers who are disproportionatelyexpensive to manage

Reduces cost of meter operation concerningreading and tenancy changes

Control of cash flow and bad debt

Fig. 20: Our Payment System Solution

Payment Systems

Payment Systems increase efficiencyand simplify account management.

Secure Revenue Stream

With increasing deregulation, this subjectis fast becoming an important issue. Thecustomer pays for energy as he uses whenconvenient for him. The utility achievescashflow and secures increased liquidity,and eliminates problem payers. Willingnessto pay is no longer an issue.

Optimization made simple

No costly customer visits. Fewer time-consuming customer support issues. Theaccounting process is considerably simpli-fied. There is no longer any need to cutoff and restore supplies to late payers, orto visit customer premise for a change ofoccupancy.

Intelligent communications

Tariff changes can be applied immediately byremote communication. Impending changescan be entered in advance for action at a fu-ture date for all customers, or just a select-ed group. Meter readings at specifiedtimes can be recorded and transmitted tothe control center by centralized command.

Complete system solutions

The two-way systems provide the ability totailor customer service, initiated by routinepayments using the customer card. Our key-pad systems simply vend energy to end cus-tomers. Siemens Metering Division provideseverything for a customized solution – fromthe in-house installation to comprehensivesystem solutions and services.

Fig. 18: Buying energy as much as required at thepoint of sales

Fig. 19: Easy Pay-a simple payment module

Fig. 21: Cash Power 2000 Fig. 22: Smart Card System


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

Business and ConsultingServices

General

Customer optimized processes and reducecosts the tasks of Business and ConsultingServices.In the rapidly changing energy market, con-centrating on core business must not meanneglecting business processes.With Siemens Metering Division as yourpartner, outsourcing means a decisive steptowards a cost-effective and customer-friendly future. We provide innovative solu-tions for existing activities and for the crea-tion of new business opportunities withnew technologies and processes whilemaintaining strict confidentiality.

Customer-oriented modules

Energy metering: from inventorymanagement, through to recycling

Payment systems: from the point of saleto accounting

Data management: meter reading andtransmission of data

Billing: from invoice preparation to datamanagement

Customer data management: from theadministration to the call centre.

Depending on the task, Siemens MeteringDivision provides assistance in specificareas, or offers complete system solutionsand flexible financing – whatever the cus-tomer needs. (Fig. 23)

Siemens Metering Division applies thethree-step DBO concept (Design, Build,Operate) for customer-oriented imple-mentation:

Design

Improvements begin with a careful analysisof the present situation from the variousviewpoints. The goal is to help the custom-ers achieve greater success and to reducetheir costs. Depending on requirements,Siemens create a comprehensive solutionfor a complete or partial concept – what-ever the customer needs.

Build

Having identified the concept, it then hasto be deployed. Siemens provide compe-tent support for the incorporation of servic-es and outsourced business processes intoexisting business operations.

Operate

The goal for this on-going partnership isto run the new business processes to thehighest standards of quality, guaranteeingmaximum profitability. Have a look at our Internet Home Page:

www.siemet.com

Consulting Services: Process Analysis, Process Reengineering

CustomizedServices

IntegratedServices

Lifetime ProductSupport

Warranty

Training

Parameterisation

On-call Repair & Maintenance

Contract Repair &Maintenance

Hot Line Support

Upgrade & Migration

Meter ManagementServices

Data Management Services

Meter & DataManagement Services

Customer ManagementServices

Integrated CustomerManagement Services

Procurement

Warehouse/Logistic

Project Management

Planning/Installation

Exchange

Refurbishing

Recycling

Complementary Services

Financing Services: Leasing, Rental, Project Financing

Fig. 23: Portfolio Services


1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Metering

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Contents PageIntroduction ....................................... 9/2

From Initial Planningto Integrated Solutions ................... 9/3

Financial Solutions .......................... 9/3

Service and Training ....................... 9/4

9

Services for Power Transmission and Distribution

Services for Power Transmission and Distribution

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Fig. 1

Services

Introduction

The energy market is changing, and so arethe “rules of the game”. The focus of at-tention is gradually moving away from theold individual power suppliers and comingto rest more and more on what we nowcall “energy service providers” who canmaster every aspect of power generation,transmission and distribution.Anyone who wants to make the most of theopportunities offered by a deregulated andliberalized market needs a business partnerwho can advise and support, who offersan individual service and a high standard oftraining and who is always available whenyou need him – twenty-four hours a day.

Your partner

As a true partner in everything to do withpower supplies we offer it all. SiemensServices attend to all the tasks that helpyou to achieve not only the best possibleeconomy in a competitive world but alsoreliability of supply, optimum technical per-formance and safety.Our range of services extends across theboard into every area of power transmissionand distribution, from analysis, planningand project design throughout the wholelifetime of an installation to its eventualdisposal.

What we have to offer

This chapter is intended to high-light ourtruly comprehensive range of services forthe energy market.Take a look and see the enormous breadthof what we have to offer – for your prod-ucts, your systems, your plant and equip-ment – everything to do with power trans-mission and distribution.


Fax: ++ 49 - 91 31- 73 44 49e-mail: [email protected]

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Services

From Initial Planningto Integrated Solutions

Power System Planning – The first steptowards economical solutions

The first step towards a new, extended ormodified network always is a reliable initialplanning. No matter if this step involvesnetwork analysis, equipment, plant or sys-tem design, or the integration of variousnetwork components – we have the rightknow-how to perform any of these tasks.Our services include counselling, powersystem calculation, planning and design aswell as the analysis of networks of all volt-age levels.Our innovative approach and experienceof many years allow us to meet all the de-mands of our customers. To assist us inthis task, we developed several high-levelsimulation programs such as NETOMAC®,the world’s most powerful tool for calcu-lating electromagnetic and electromechani-cal transient response, and SINCAL® forthe study of interconnected networks. Wealso perform on-site measurements andadvise our customers about viable optionsto improve and optimize their power sys-tem. With our AC/DC real-time simulatorwe determine control and protection set-tings for HVDC systems, FACTS and pow-er quality equipment. A team of experts willalways assist you with the installation andcommissioning of these devices on site.

Decentralized supplies can beplanned-in too

There is no doubt that in the future someexisting large concentrations of generatingcapacity will be replaced by a larger num-ber of smaller decentralized units. Suchunits can be powered by wind, biomass orsolar light and will soon be generating be-tween 10 and 15% of all the electricity thatis needed. Intelligent systems will providethe control and ensure an optimum energymix.This will make great demands on the plan-ning and implementation of integrated en-ergy management systems that cover thewhole distributed network right up to finalconsumption.Our partnership with you also means pro-viding generation management, load man-agement, delivery management and com-munications, with consumers too, integrat-ed into the network itself. For this purposewe employ intelligent supply systems, in-cluding subsystems such as the NEXUS

meter management system, the DEMS de-centralized energy management system, theSINAUT® Spectrum open network controlsystem and the SICAM® system for substa-tion automation.

Project development andconstruction of large-scale systems

Infrastructural and industrial projects call fora broad range of products and services. Thedemands frequently go beyond the scopeof just power transmission and distribution.In such cases, your competent Siemenscontact can open up the door to everythingwe have to offer in terms of power engi-neering.In international project business, there isnowadays an increasing trend towards in-volving consulting engineers, general con-tractors and project developers.Because of the global interconnection ofthis business it is essential to have an ef-fective communication in place. With ourexperience over decades we contribute toan efficient project execution of such inter-national projects including external and in-ternal Siemens partners.

Fit for the energy market –with integrated IT solutions

With the ongoing development in informa-tion technology IT over the last decade, it ispossible to build up integrated IT solutions,designed to solve your problems and helpyou to optimize your business processes.However, the world of IT is still character-ized by so-called island solutions, whichshould be integrated into an overall system.Our IT solutions cover all your tasks: NetworkManagement, Energy Trading, CustomerManagement and Business Operations.One good example of our integrated solu-tions is meter management, where the busi-ness process flow from meter reading toconsumption billing is efficiently supported.

A partner in system administration

Whether it be extending a system or simplylooking after it properly, as your partner wecan also undertake all your system and datamanagement. That could be of great inter-est for large-scale system administration inconnection with power system management,for example. Typical tasks of this kind arethe editing of system parameters, regularchecking of system security and the addi-tion and editing of mimic diagrams, listingsand records. In this area we can providebackup either through on-site service or bymeans of teleservice.

Financial Solutions

So that none of your projects fall at thehurdle of finance, we can advise you onhow to finance them in the most suitableway for you.

The international trend: Operator models

Project finance is in world-wide demandthese days, for major schemes sponsoredby both governments and the private sec-tor. It is this that provides the necessaryfreedom of action for investment. We helpyou to explore many new avenues of ap-proach – total customized solutions, capitalfinance from the world‘s money markets –to fit your needs at attractive rates.

Fig. 4

Fig. 3

Fig. 2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Services

Fig. 5: Condition-based maintenance:The right time for action is when costs can be cut and availability can be enhanced.

Service and Training forSubstations, Switchgear andSystem Components –Customized Concepts

Every plant, every installation, every systemand every product associated with electrici-ty supplies can gain in value from skilledexpert service, whether it be through opti-mum availability, long service life, economi-cal operation or fast help in the event of aproblem.Whatever the task – we have the expertsto deal with it. They are on the spot almostimmediately after you call and you can relyon them to get the job done properly.

From a single service to total care

You can choose from a truly comprehensiverange of services. Whether you want a sin-gle-contract relationship with us or a long-term maintenance concept offering optimumavailability, we have the right one for you.

Customized maintenance contracts

One way of ensuring that you get the bestpossible service is to arrange a mainte-nance contract. Such documents lay downwhat individual maintenance services willbe provided by us – for example, 24-houron-call availability, coordination of serviceactivities, specific maintenance tasks, faultanalysis, etc., etc., etc. The advantage ofthis for you is that you can tailor the scopeof the services to your own individualrequirements and so do what is best foryou in terms of economy.

World-wide service –solving problems on-site

It makes no difference where you are: Wehave a service network and a spares deliv-ery service that span the globe, allowingus to solve your problems quickly, fully andreliably.

Modernize with RETROFIT –at the right price

Modernization instead of new investment –this is where RETROFIT comes in.RETROFIT is our economical total conceptfor looking after the technical side of yourinstallations and for adapting everythingto comply with the latest standards. Thatmeans greater safety for your employees,and greater reliability for the supplies youprovide.

Expert surveys for economical answers

Whether it be task planning, status evalua-tion or damage analysis, we will be happyto arrange expert surveys for you at anytime. Such results are an important prereq-uisite for economical future planning andfor skilled repairs or maintenance.

Arranging for waste disposal

When installations, plants or parts of themhave come to the end of their useful life,you will have to dispose of them properlyand in an environmentally compatible man-ner. We will be happy to give you full back-up and take care for arrangements by dis-posal experts.

On-call service and failure analysis

Our hotline gives you access to immediatehelp. One call is enough to get you all thesupport and backup you need – over thetelephone or by specialist staff on-site.

Training for any task

Just as important as good service are goodoperating staff. Only someone who hasbeen properly trained can recognize earlyon the need for service attention, plan itproperly when it is needed and respondcorrectly to any operational disturbancesthat might occur.In order to cover this aspect of demand weoffer an extensive range of training programsthat have been tailored specifically to theneeds of our customers. Various courses,based on theory but practical in nature, areheld for small groups of participants.

Overall training program

As well as the actual training itself, we canalso take care of all your training manage-ment needs. This means the organizationand implementation of individual trainingactivities as a package including all the as-sociated tasks of booking hotels, designingprograms and looking after participants fromthe time they arrive to the time they leave.

Damage limit

Inspection t3 Inspection t1 Inspection t2Repairtime

Failure

Residual wear margin

Lifetime

100%

Reference conditioning(at initial commissioning)

Referenceconditioning(after repair)

Actual conditioningdeviation Z0 – Z1

Actual conditioning Z1

Contents PageOverall Solutions forElectrical Power Supply ............. 10/2

10

System PlanningSystem Planning

Ohne Namen-1 27.09.1999, 18:04 Uhr1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


System Planning

Operation performanceVoltage qualitySystem perturbationsNeutral groundingFault clearingOverloadOvervoltageSelective Tripping SchemesAsymmetryTransient phenomenaReactive power balancePower-station reserve

Load developmentCable restructuringUpgrading installationsSelecting voltage levelsSystem takeoverDefining new transfomersubstationsSystem interconnectionConnecting power stationsUsing new protection schemes

System design

GeneratorTransformerCircuit-breakerOverhead lineCableCompensation equipmentEquipment forneutral groundingProtection equipmentControl equipmentHVDCFACTSGrounding

Component layout

Tasks Solutions Results

System analysis,system documentation

System calculations,load-flow and short-circuit

Planning and calculating AC andDC transmission

Determining economic alternatives

Specifying the configuration ofthe system

Design of electrical installations

Design of protection system,selecting equipment, selectivecoordination and real-time tests

Customer acceptance tests ofprotection equipment

Simulation of complete systemand secondary equipment

Switching operations, layout ofovervoltage protection system,insulation coordination

Analysis of harmonics, layout offilter circuits, closed-loopand open-loop control circuitsfor power converters

Simulation of system dynamics

Layout of power electronicequipment (FACTS)

Method of neutral grounding

Reliability analysis

Earthing arrangement andmeasurement

Investigation of interference

Propagation of ripple-control signals

Economical solutions for distributionand transmission systems

Uncomplicated and reliable operation

Minimization of losses

Reduction of the effects,extent and duration of faults

Optimized fault clearance forreduced system black-outs

Priorities in system extensionReplacement of old installations,reconstruction, extension ornew constructions

Extensively standardizedsystem components

Compliance with specifiedperformance values

Short tripping times for reductionof system stresses

Safety for persons

Economical alternatives

Overall Solutions forElectrical Power Supply

Integral power system solutions are farmore than just a combination of switch-gear, transformers, lines or cables, togeth-er with equipment for protection, supervi-sion, control, communication and whatevermore. Of crucial importance for the qualityof power transmission and distribution isthe integration of different components inan optimized overall solution in terms of:

System design and creative system lay-out, based on the load center require-ments and the geographical situation

Component layout, according to tech-nical and economic assumptions andstandards

Operation performance, analyzing andsimulation of system behavior undernormal and fault conditions

Protection design and coordination,matched to the power system.

Siemens System Planning

Whether a new system has to be plannedor an existing system extended or updat-ed, whether normal or abnormal system

behavior has to be analyzed or a postfaultclarification done, the System PlanningDivision, certified to DIN ISO 9001, is com-petent and has the know-how needed tofind the right answer. The investigationscover all voltage levels, from high voltageto low voltage, and comprise system stud-ies for long-distance transmission systemsand urban power networks, as well as forparticular distribution systems in industrialplants and large-scale installations for build-ing centers. In addition the protection de-sign must be optimized for all transmissionand distribution systems for highest andefficient power quality. In all these tasks,System Planning works in close coopera-tion with its customers and other SiemensGroups (Fig. 1).

Fig. 1: Tasks, Solutions and Results

Ohne Namen-1 27.09.1999, 18:04 Uhr2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


Powergeneration

Transmission systemup to 550 kV with HV/HV

bulk substations

Subtransmission system up to 145 kVwith HV/MV main substations

Medium-voltage distribution system up to 36 kVMV/LV transformer public substationsand consumer connection substations

Low-voltage distribution system up to 1 kV.Public supply system or internal installation system

Consumer power application industry, commerce, trade,public services, private sector

Distribution function

Transmission function

System Planning

Fig. 2: The Pyramid of Power Supply

Fig. 3: Aspects of system planning

Loaddevelopment

Systemarchitecture

Networkcalculation

Protectionanalysis

Protectioncoordination

Investmentplanning

Networkrepresentation

Systemanalysis

Energy Supply”reliable and economical“

The Power Supply System

The power supply system is like a pyramidbased on the requirements of consumersand the applications and topped by powergeneration (Fig. 2).The power system is basically tailored tothe needs of consumers. Main characteris-tics are the wide range of power require-ments for the individual consumers froma few kW to several MW, the high numberof similar network elements, and the wide-spread supply areas. These characteristicsare the reason for the comparatively highspecific costs of the distribution system.Thus, standardization of equipment, useof maintenance-free components, and sim-plified system configuration have to be con-sidered for an economical system layout.The load situation at the LV level deter-mines the most suitable location of publicMV/LV substations and consumer connec-tion stations and, to a high degree, theelectrical and geographical configuration ofthe superposed medium-voltage distribu-tion network as well.HV/MV main substations feeding themedium-voltage distribution system shouldbe located as close as possible to the loadcenters of the medium-voltage distributionareas. The subtransmission system feed-ing the main substations is configuredaccording to their location and the locationof the bulk power substations of the trans-mission system. The largely interconnect-ed transmission system, e.g. up to 550 kV,balances the daily and seasonal differencesbetween load requirements and differentavailable generation sources.

Basic conditions for system design

Industry, trade and commerce as well aspublic services (transportation and commu-nication systems), but not forgetting theprivate sector (households), depend highlyupon a reliable and adequate energy sup-ply of high quality on highly economicalterms. In order to achieve these aims,several aspects must be considered(Fig. 3). International and national stand-ards are the basic fundamentals for sys-tem design. The choice of system voltagelevels and steps is of decisive importancefor economical design and operation.Reliability requires adequate dimensioningof components with regard to current-carrying capacity, short-circuit stress andother relevant parameters. Although inter-ruptions in supply due to environmentalinfluence or faults in components can

never be avoided completely, it has to beassured that the time of interruption isminimized. This is a question of reserve inthe system. Different degrees of reservecan be provided depending on the require-ments.

Ohne Namen-1 27.09.1999, 18:04 Uhr3

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


System Planning

System Planning, a complex activity

System planning and configuration arecomparable with architectural work, findingthe best technical and economical solution.System planning has therefore to startwith a thorough task definition and systemanalysis of the present status, based onthe given quality requirements. Alternativesystem concepts (system architecture)in several expansion stages ensure thedynamic development of the system,adapted to structure and load requirementsof the subposed voltage level. Componentdesign and the infeed from the super-posed voltage level have to be consideredas well. Technical calculations and eco-nomic investigations complete the plan-ning work and are essential for the choiceof the solution (Fig. 4).

Load Development

The load analysis and estimation in thedistribution system are always a matterof distributed loads in a certain area.In urban and rural areas, natural borders –such as rivers, railway lines or major roadsand parks or woodlands – allow the wholesupply district to be subdivided into anumber of subareas.In large commercial complexes, such asairports or university and hospital centersas well as in industrial areas, the load esti-mation is based on the individual buildingsand workshops.Different methods are used for load esti-mation, such as annual growth rates forexisting public areas, load density for newdeveloping residential areas, installedcapacity and simultaneity factor for com-mercial and industrial supply.

Distribution

Network configuration for power distribu-tion is a matter of visualization and will notbe executed successfully without the geo-graphical information of load and sourcelocation for public supply and industrial orlarge building supply as well. Thus, eachdistribution system must be planned indi-vidually. But, for the basic design, a certainstandard configuration has proved optimalin terms of Uncomplicated configuration Ease of operation and Economical installationLow-voltage systems are usually operatedas open radial networks. Industrial systemsin particular contain facilities for transfer tostandby. Meshed operation is usually only

intended for special load situations, suchas single loads with great fluctuations orwelding systems.Medium-voltage systems are primarilygoverned in their configuration by the loca-tions of the system and consumer stationsto be supplied.The most suitable arrangements for publicsupplies are open-ring systems or line sys-tems to a remote substation.For industrial and building power supplysystems, the higher load densities resultin shorter distances between substations.This leads for reasons of economy to thespot system with radial-operated trans-formers.Industrial power supplies differ from publicnetworks inasmuch as they have a highproportion of motor loads and often inplantgeneration. Depending on the capacity,units will be connected to normal low-volt-age level, intermediate low-voltage level ormedium-voltage.The technically and economically optimalconfiguration of distribution systems callsfor wide-ranging practical experience froma large number of different projects andmust determine switchgear configurationas well.

Transmission

The design of transmission systems is toa great extent individually tailored to thelocation of generating plants and bulk sub-stations feeding the subtransmission sys-tem. Planning of high-voltage interconnectednetworks and transmission networks isa complex matter since they operate overseveral different voltage levels and mostlymeshed systems are used. This and theregional and seasonal difference of genera-tion input and consumer demand as wellas the many different sizes of lines, cablesand transformers, make load-flow distribu-tion complicated and require detailed calcu-lations of system behavior and the operat-ing conditions of power generation duringplanning work. As well as the actual plan-ning, the work includes numerous investi-gations, for instance, to determine the con-figuration of switchgear and various equip-ment. This also entails detailed studies ofthe reactive power, voltage stability, insu-lation coordination, and testing of the dy-namic and transient behavior in the net-work resul-ting from faults. Connection ofneighboring transmission systems via AC/DC coupling, the implementation of HVDCtransmission or superposing a new volt-age level need comprehensive planningand investigation work (Fig. 5).

Protection

The increasing demand from consumers inindustry and utility systems and in distribu-tion and transmission networks in terms ofpower quality imposes strong requirementson system protection. Short tripping times,high functionality, communication, fault re-cording etc. will be provided by state-of-the-art numerical relays. To come from pureequipment protection to selective and co-ordinated system protection, the responsiblestaff have to be well trained.

To get the fastest tripping schemes withthe highest selectivity, knowledge of theresearch and development is necessary. Forthe optimization of protection under diffi-cult system conditions, online simulationlike RTDS systems (Real-Time Digital Sys-tem Simulators) must be available.

Tools

Besides great experience and know-howSiemens System Planning applies powerfultools to assist the engineers in their highlyresponsible work.

SINCAL

(Siemens Network Calculation) for analysisand planning purposes. Any size of systemwith line and cable routing is simulated,displayed and evaluated with the SINCALprogram system. With the help of an inte-grated database and easy-to-use graphicssystem, schematic and topological equiva-lent systems can be digitized or convertedto other systems.

NETOMAC

(Network Torsion Machine Control) is aprogram for simulation and optimizationof electrical systems which consist of net-work, machines and closed-loop and open-loop control equipment. Two modes oftime simulation, instantaneous value modeand stability mode, can be used separatelyor in combination. The program serves for Simulation of electromechanical

and magnetic phenomena Special load-flow calculations Frequency-range analysis Analysis of eigenvalues Simulation of torsional systems Parameter identification Reduction of passive systems Optimization

Ohne Namen-1 27.09.1999, 18:04 Uhr4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


System Planning

Fig. 5: Planning tasks for interconnected transmission system

Fig. 4: Steps for network planning

Weak pointdeterminationImmediate action

Task definitions,System analysis ofpresent status

Technical standards,Reliability require-ments

Proposal forsystem layout

Technical/economicalcalculations andevaluations

System architectureAlternative systemconcepts for stages

Expansion projectLoad development

Superposedvoltage levelInfeed

Component designProtectivecoordinationMethod of neutralgrounding

Subposed voltage levelLoad structure

Existing systemPlanned

Tasks

Load development andpower plant schedulesVoltage steps andtransformer substationsizesInstallation typeand configurationVoltage-controland reactive-powercompensationLoad-flow controland stability criteriaDynamic andtransient behaviorSystem management(normal and faulted)

DISTAL

(Distance Protection Grading) calculatesthe setting values of the impedance forthe three steps and for the overreach zones(automatic reclosing and signal compari-son) of distance protection equipment inany kind of meshed network.

CUSS

(Computer-Aided Protective Grading) indi-cates grading paths and grading diagrams,checks the interaction of the current-timecharacteristics with regard to selectivityand generates setting tables for the pro-tection equipment.

DISCHU

Simulation and testing of numerical pro-tection relays.

CTDIM

is a program for protective current trans-former dimensioning. Main task is techni-cal and economical optimization.

PRIMUS

works out the most suitable voltage fora DC transmission project together withthe most important electrical data andthe costs.

SECOND

is used to calculate the electrical character-istics and costs of a given AC transmissionproject.

FELD

permits calculation of electrical and mag-netic fields which occur during operationand fault conditions in the environment ofone, two and three-phase systems (e.g.overhead lines and railway lines) in a two-dimensional way.

LEIKA

permits calculation of the electrical charac-teristics of overhead lines and cables.

TERRA

is for calculating the potential fields ofgrounding installations.

KABEIN

is used for calculating the inductive inter-ference to which telecommunication linesand pipelines are subjected by the operat-ing currents or fault currents of high-volt-age overhead lines or cables at any levelsof exposure.

SUNICO

calculates how to make optimum use ofpower stations. It indicates the best choicefrom among the available power units andthe best way of dividing up the system loadamong the individual units used.

HADICA

is used for calculating harmonic voltagesand currents in electrical systems.

ACFilt

(Filter-circuit design) is for dealing effi-ciently with harmonic compensation.

Ohne Namen-1 27.09.1999, 18:04 Uhr5

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10


System Planning


Fax: ++ 49 - 91 31-73 44 45e-mail: [email protected]

=1 =1

∆u, ∆f, ∆φGPower Generation

AC/DC Systems

8 Test Stations

Simulator Interfaces

Real-Time ComputerSimulation

Signal Generation andRecording

Measuring, Protectionand Control

Positive and ZeroSequence Components

Digital SequenceControllers

Playback ComputerSimulation

…

HVDC/FACTS

1 … 6

Custom Power

8

…

7

Protection

Signal Acquisition System

NETOMAC, EMTDC, EMTPRTDS

…

Since 1996

Fig. 6: Advanced AC/DC Real-Time Simulator facilities – Overview

Advanced AC/DC real-time simulation

The development and testing of measur-ing, protection and control equipment oflarge power supply installations need totake place under real system conditions.Siemens System Planning utilizes a realtimesimulator based on a modular principle sothat different layouts and structures of theprojects can be dealt with flexibly.In the simulator, there are 8 test stationswhich enable parallel work to be carriedout. Six of them are specially designed fortesting large power converters such asHVDC and FACTS units. Station 7 has spe-cial interfaces for testing system protec-tion schemes. Custom power station 8 isused for Advanced Power Electronic Appli-cations such as SIPCON (Siemens PowerConditioner). In addition to the classic typeof simulator with physical elements, real-time injection of transient signals from dig-ital simulations is also possible, e.g. withNETOMAC or RTDS, so that computer andanalog simulation complement each other.

Measurements

Sometimes only field measurements canprovide an accurate picture of the actualsituation and will be conducted for acquisi-tion of data, clarification of disturbancesand verification of functions.

Instruction and Training

Training matched to the particular needsof our customers, acquainting them withinstallations, methods of planning and useof software tools will be provided. Custom-ers need today also well trained protectionstaff who are able to handle modern numer-ical relays in parallel with older installedstatic and mechanical ones.Siemens System Planning provides theright training for protection design and co-ordination.All the training courses can be held world-wide and also in Siemens Trainings Centers.

Ohne Namen-1 27.09.1999, 18:05 Uhr6


Conversion Factors and Tables

320°

305°

290°

275°

260°

245°

160°

150°

140°

130°

120°

110°

100°

90°

230°

212°

200°

185°

170°

155°

80°

70°

60°140°

50°

40°

30°

20°

10°

125°

110°

95°

80°

65°

50°

32°

20°

5°

–10°

–25°

0°

–10°

–20°

–30°

–40°–40°

°C°F

0.6530.8321.040

1.310

1.650

2.080

2.620

19 AWG18

1716

1514

13

0.75

1.50

2.50

12

1110

98

7

4.00

6.00

10.00

16.00

3.310

4.1705.260

6.6308.370

10.550

13.30016.770

21.150

26.67033.630

6

5

4

32

1

25.00

35.00

50.00

70.00

42.410

53.48067.430

95.00

120.00

150.00

85.030

107.200126.640152.000

202.710

1/0

2/0

3/0

4/0250 MCM300

400500600700800

1000

253.350304.000354.710405.350506.710

185.00

240.00

300.00

400.00

500.00625.00

Cross-sectionalconductorarea

[mm2]

EquivalentMetric CSA

[mm2]

AWG or MCM

Metric cross-sectional areasacc. to IEC

American wire gauge

Non-metric system SI system

Length

1 mil

1 in

1 ft

1 yd

1 mile

0.0254 mm

2.54 cm = 25.4 mm

30.48 cm = 0.305 m

0.914 m

1.609 km = 1609 m

Non-metric systemSI system

1 mm

1 cm

1 m

1 km

39.37 mil

0.394 in

3.281 ft = 39.370 in = 1.094 yd

0.621 mile = 1.094 yd

Area

1 in2

1 ft2

1 yd2

1 acre

1 mile2

6.452 cm2 = 654.16 mm2

0.093 m2 = 929 cm2

0.836 m2

4046.9 m2

2.59 km2

1 mm2

1cm2

1 m2

1 km2

0.00155 in2

0.155 in2

10.76 ft2 = 1550 in2

= 1.196 yd2

0.366 mile2



Cross-sectional conductor areasto Metric and US Standards

Temperature



Volume rate of flow

1 gallon/s

1 gallon/min

1 ft3/s

1 ft3/min

3.785 l/s

0.227 m3/h = 227 l/h

101.941 m3/h

1.699 m3/h



1 l/s

1 l/h

1 m3/h

0.264 gallon/s

0.0044 gallon/min

4.405 gallon/min =0.589 ft3/min = 0.0098 ft3/s

Mass, weight

1 oz

1 lb

1 sh ton

28.35 g

0.454 kg = 453.6 g

0.907 t = 907.2 kg

1 g

1 kg

1 t

0.035 oz

2.205 lb = 35.27 oz

1.102 sh ton = 2205 lb



Velocity

1 ft/s

1 mile/h

0.305 m/s = 1.097 km/h

0.447 m/s = 1.609 km/h

1 m/s

1 km/h

3.281 ft/s = 2.237 mile/h

0.911 ft/s = 0.621 mile/h



Volume

1 in3

1 ft3

1 yd3

1 fl. oz.

1 quart

1 pint

1 gallon

1 barrel

16.387 cm3

28.317 dm3 = 0.028 m3

0.765 m3

29.574 cm3

0.946 dm3 = 0.946 l

0.473 dm3 = 0.473 l

3.785 dm3 = 3.785 l

158,987 dm3 = 1.589 m3

= 159 l

1 cm3

1 dm3

= 1 l

1 m3

0.061 in3 = 0.034 fl. oz.

61.024 in3 =0.035 ft3 = 1.057 quart =2.114 pint = 0.264 gallon

0.629 barrel



Force

1 lbf

1 kgf

1 tonf

4.448 N

9.807 N

9.964 kN

0.225 lbf = 0.102 kgf

0.100 tonf



1 N

1 kN

Torque, moment of force

1 lbf in

1 lbf ft

0.113 Nm = 0.012 kgf m

1.356 Nm = 0.138 kgf m

8.851 lbf in = 0.738 lbf ft(= 0.102 kgf m)



1 Nm

Moment of inertia J.

Numerical value equation: J = = Wr 2GD2

4

1 lbf ft2 0.04214 kg m2

23.73 lb ft2



1 kg m2

Pressure

1 in HG

1 psi

1 lbf/ft2

1 lbf/in2

1 tonf/ft2

1 tonf/in2

0.034 bar

0.069 bar

4.788 x 10-4 bar =4.882 x 10-4 kgf/cm2

0.069 bar = 0.070 kgf/cm2

1.072 bar = 1.093 kgf/cm2

154.443 bar =157.488 kgf/cm2

1 bar= 105 pa= 102 kpa

29.53 in Hg =14.504 psi =2088.54 lbf/ft2 =14.504 lbf/in2 =0.932 tonf/ft2 =6.457 x 10-3 tonf/in2

(= 1.02 kgf/cm2)



Energy, work, heat

1 hp h

1 ft lbf

1 Btu

0.746 kWh = 2.684 x 106 J= 2.737 x 105 kgf m

0.138 kgf m

1.055 kJ = 1055.06 J(= 0.252 kcal)

1 kWh

1 J

1 kgf m

1.341 hp h = 2.655 kgf m= 3.6 x 105 J

3.725 x 10-7 hp h =0.738 ft lbf =9.478 x 10-4 Btu(= 2.388 x 10-4 kcal)

3.653 x 10-6 hp h =7.233 ft lbf





1 km = 1000 m;1 m = 100 cm = 1000 mm

1 km2 = 1000 000 m2;1 m2 = 10 000 cm2;1 cm2 = 100 mm2

1 m3 = 1000 000 cm3;1 cm3 = 1000 mm3

1 t = 1000 kg; 1 kg = 1000 g

1 kW = 1000 W

Specific steam consumption

1 lb/hp h 0.608 kg/kWh

1 kg/kWh 1.644 lb/hp h



Power

1 hp

1 ft lbf/s

1 kcal/h

1 Btu/h

0.746 kW = 745.70 W =76.040 kgf m/s(= 1.014 PS)

1.356 W (= 0.138 kgf in/s)

1.163 W

0.293 W

1 kW

1 W

1.341 hp =101.972 kgf m/s(= 1.36 PS)

0.738 ft lbf/s = 0.86 kcal/h= 3.412 Btu(= 0.102 kgf m/s)



Temperature

°F °C°F K

(ϑF – 32) = ϑC

ϑF + 255.37 = T



5959

°C °FK °F

ϑC + 32 = ϑF

ϑ T – 459.67 = ϑF

9595

Note:Quantity Symbol Unit

Fahrenheittemperature

Celsius (Centigrade)temperature

Thermodynamictemperature

* The letter t may be used instead of ϑ

ϑF*

ϑC*

T

°F

°C

K(Kelvin)

Examples for decimal multiplesand submultiples of metric units

Gas-insulated Switchgearfor Substations (GIS)Fax: ++49 - 91 31 - 7 3 44 98e-mail: [email protected]/en/pages/gas-ins1.htm

Gas-insulated Transmission Lines (GIL)Fax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 44 98e-mail: [email protected]/en/pages/gas-insu.htm

Overhead Powerlines (OHL)Fax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 35 44e-mail: heinz-juergen.theymann@erls04.

siemens.de

High Voltage DirectCurrent Transmission (HVDC)Fax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 45 52e-mail: [email protected]/en/pages/hvdcinst.htm

Power CompensationFax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 45 54

e-mail: [email protected]

Medium Voltage

www.ev.siemens.de/en/mediumvoltage

Primary Distribution SwitchgearFax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 46 39www.ev.siemens.de/en/pages/primaryd.htm

Secondary Distribution Switchgear andTransformer SubstationsFax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 46 36www.ev.siemens.de/en/secondar.htm

Industrial Load CenterFax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 15 73

Medium Voltage DevicesFax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 46 54www.ev.siemens.de/en/componen.htm

Low Voltage Switchboards

SivaconFax: ++49 - 3 41 - 4 47 04 00www.ad.siemens.dewww.ad.siemens.de/cd/frameset/e_f_sicube.htm

5General:

Siemens AG

www.siemens.de

Power Transmission andDistribution (EV)

www.ev.siemens.de/en/

Sales Locations Worldwide (EV)

www.ev.siemens.de/en/pages/salesloc.htm

International BusinessDevelopment

www.ev.siemens.de/en/pages/internat.htm

Technical:

Power Engineering Guides

Transmission and Distributionwww.ev.siemens.de/en/pegtd

Industrial Applicationswww.ev.siemens.de/en/peg97

Decentralized EnergySupply Systems

www.ev.siemens.de/en/pages/decentra.htm

Power Transmission Systems

Fax: ++49 - 91 31-73 46 72e-mail: [email protected]/en/pages/powersys.htm

High Voltage

www.ev.siemens.de/en/highvoltage

Air Insulated Outdoor Substations (AIS)Fax: ++49 - 91 31-73 18 58e-mail: [email protected]/en/pages/air-ins0.htm

Circuit-BreakersFax: ++49 - 3 03 86 - 2 58 67www.ev.siemens.de/en//pages/high-vol.htm

Surge ArrestersFax: ++49 - 3 03 86 - 2 67 21e-mail: [email protected]/en/arrester

1

Contacts and Internet Addresses

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

2

Transformers

Distribution TransformersFax: ++49 - 70 21 - 50 85 48www.ev.siemens.de/en/distributiontransformers

Power TransformersFax: ++49 - 9 11 - 4 34 21 47www.ev.siemens.de/en/powertransformers

Protection and SubstationControl

www.ev.siemens.de/en/secondarysystemswww.powerquality.de

Energy Management

www.ev.siemens.de/en/powersystemscontrol

Integrated IT SolutionsFax: ++49 - 9 11 - 4 33 - 81 22

Power Network TelecommunicationFax: ++49 - 89 - 7 22 - 2 44 53 or

++49 - 89 - 7 22 - 4 19 82

Metering

www.siemet.com

Services

Fax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 44 49e-mail: udo.weber.erls04.siemens.dewww.ev.siemens.de/en/services

System Planning

Fax: ++49 - 91 31 - 73 44 45e-mail: [email protected]/en/systemplanning


Contacts and Internet Addresses

Subject to the “General Conditions of Sup-ply and Delivery for Products and Servicesof the Electrical and Electronics Industry”.

The technical data, dimensions andweights are subject to change unlessotherwise stated on the individual pagesof this catalog.The illustrations are for reference only.


Power Transmissionand Distribution GroupP. O. Box 32 20D-91050 Erlangen

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Subject to change without prior notice Order No. E50001-U700-A68-X-7600Printed in GermanyDispo-Stelle 11900TH 268-990061 200123 KG 89910.

Powerto the

Siemens Power Engineering Guide

Documents

distribution of power

siemens power transmission

distribution equipment

distribution group ev

priority transmission

siemens service

electrical power generation

quality of siemens products